^W»Sii| CAVALRY DRILL , REGULATIONS 1916 :r-r t- TUFTS UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES Webster Family Library of Veterinary Medicine Cummings School of Veterinary Medicine at Tufts University 200 Westboro Road 'iorth Grafton, MA 01536 ^AR DEPARTMENT : OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STAFF CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS UNITED STATES ARMY 1916 T CORRECTED TO DECEMBER 31, 1917 (CHANGES NOS. 1 AND 2) WASHINGTON GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1918 War Department, Document No. 561, Qifice of the Chief of Stai Wak Department, Office of the Chief of Staff, Washington, October 26, 1916. The following system of Cavalry Drill Regulations is pub' lished for the information and government of the Army and the National Guard of the United States. With a view to insure uniformity throughout the Army, all Cavalry drill formations and evolutions not embraced in this system are prohibited and those herein prescribed will be strictly observed. By order of the Secretary of War : H. L. Scott, Major General, Chief of Staff. I TABLE OF CONTENTS. Definitions Pages 13-16 Introduction Pars. 1-33 Part I. Individual Instruction. Paragraphs. General provisions 34-50 School of tlie trooper, dismounted 51-171 Object, cautions, physical training 54-55 Individual instruction without arms 56-89 Position of trooper at attention, rests, facings, etc 56-67 Steps and marchings 6S-S9 Individual instruction with arms 90-171 Manual of the rifle 90-120 Loadings and firings 121-140 Target designation 141 The use of cover 142-143 Observation 144 Manual of the pistol 145-156 Employment of the pistol 157-161 Manual of the saber 162-171 School of the trooper, mounted 172-320 Object, cautions, standard required 172-176 Schedule of instruction 176 First period : Preparatory instruction 177-223 Folding and putting on saddle blanket, etc 178-180 Saddling and unsaddling 181-183 Bridling and unbridling, etc 184-190 Mounting and dismounting _- 191-193 The reins, the aids, suppling, etc 194-223 5 6 CONTENTS. School of the trooper, mounted — Continued. Paragraphs. Second period : Worlv on tlie snaffle 224-268 Schedule of instruction 224 The walk, the halt, by the flank, and oblique_ 225-230 General provisions and marching on fixed points 231-232 Circling, trot, gallop, changes of gait and hand 233-240 Suppling, posting, care of horses and sad- dlery 241-243 Use of arms, mounted 244-255 Inspection of arms and equipment 256-268 Third period : Work on the double snaffle 209-300 Schedule of instruction 269 The about and other individual movements 270-289 Work on varied ground, applications 290-300 Fourth period : Work on the bit and bridoon 301-320 Schedule of instruction 301 Adjustment of and work with double bridle__ 302-318 Proof of training 319 The trained trooper 320 Pakt II. Elementaky Collective Instruction. General provisions and basic principles 321-339 School of the squad 340-445 Purpose 340-349 Forming, aligning, and leading the squad 350-367 Formations, close and extended order, guide 368-377 Commands and arm signals 378-381 Detailed description of movements 382-416 The mounted attack 417-420 Passing from mounted to dismounted action 421-437 Remounting, passing obstacles, instruction 438-445 Part III. General Principles of the Drill. General provisions 446-447 Leading 448-456 Conducting the march 454-455 Temporary leader 456 CONTENTS. 7 Paragraphs. Center 457-460 Commands 461-466 Movements in general 467-470 Changes of direction 471 Movements in column of tv\'OS and troopers 472 Extended order movements 473-474 Simultaneous movements by platoons, troops, and squadrons 475 Exceptional movements and changes of formation 476-479 Successive formations 480-481 Movements on foot, order 482-485 Miscellaneous 486-488 Paet IV. The Teoop and its Subdivisions. General provisions 489-507 Adjustments in platoons and sections 497 Designation of platoons and sections 498 Formation and verification 499-505 Reporting absentees and inspecting 506-507 School of the platoon 508-581 Special provisions 508-511 Platoon formations ^ 512-514 Order 515-516 To form the platoon (mounted) 517-527 Positions of platoon leaders and file closers 528 To mount and dismount 529 To dismiss the platoon 530 Alignment 531 Leading the platoon, guide of the platoon 532-535 Movements executed by the platoon 536-539 Commands and corresponding signals 540 Detailed description of movements, close order 541-548 Double rank 549-555 Extended order 556-560 The rally 561 The charge 562-565 The pistol attack .566-568 Ground scouts and combat patrols ^ 569-571 8 CONTENTS. School of the platoon — Continued. Paragraphs Movements for passing from mounted to dis- mounted action 572-576 Obstacles 577 Combat 578-581 The troop 582-670 Special provisions 582-583 Troop formations 584 Order 585-586 Echeloning of platoons 587 To form the troop (mounted) 588-597 To form the troop (dismounted) 598 Positions of officers, noncommissioned officers, and others out of ranks 599-604 Movements by fours, twos, and troopers 605-607 To mount and dismount 608 Rests, at ease, and route order 609 To dismiss the troop and alignments 610-611 Leading the troop 612 Changes of direction 613 The oblique 614 Obstacles 615 Commands and corresponding arm signals 616 Movements executed by the troop (close order) 617-629 Line or single rank 617-618 Double rank 619-620 Line of double columns 621 Line of platoon columns 622 Column of platoons 623-624 Double column 625-626 Column of fours 627-628 Column of twos or troopers 629 Movements executed by the troop (extended order) 630-634 Line of platoons 632 Foragers 633-634 The assembly 635-637 The rally 638 The mounted attack 639-646 The troop acting alone 639-645 The troop in the squadron 646 CONTENTS. 9 The troor>— Continued. Paragraphs. • Passing from mounted to dismounted action 647-649 Dismounted combat 650-670 General considerations 650-653 Tlie fire attack 654-656 Fire 657-661 Fire direction 662 Fire control 663 Fire discipline 664-668 Ranges 669 Reconnaissance before combat 670 Paft y. The Squadron and Higher Units. The squadron 671-735 Special provisions 671-673 To form and dismiss the squadron 674-675 Posts of officers, etc 676-678 Squadron formations 679 Commands and signals 680 Evolutions of the squadron (close order) 681-705 Line 682-683 Line of troop columns 684—685 Line of platoon columns 686 Mass 687-688 Platoon mass ^ 689-690 To change direction 691 Double rank 692-694 Column of fours 695-^96 Column of platoons 697-698 Double column 699-700 Echelon 701-705 Route marches, assembly, rally 706-708 Extended order 709 Mounted attack 710-715 Dismounted fire action 71&-735 General considerations 716-721 Deployment 722 Designation of objective 723 Distribution of fire 724 10 CONTENTS. 'The squadron — Continued. Dismounted fire action — Continued. Paragraphs. Fire direction and control 725 Firing line, supports, reserves 728 Flanlis of line 727 Led horses 728 Orders 729 Reconnaissance 730 Scouts and patrols 731 The lire attack 732-733 The defense 734-735 The regiment 736-762 Special provisions 736 To form and dismiss the regiment 737-738 Posts of officers, etc 739-746 General provisions as to evolutions 747-751 Regimental formations, commands, signals 752-753 Route marches 754 The charge, assembly, and rally 755-757 Extended order 758-759 Dismounted action 760-761 The regiment in brigade 762 The brigade 763-767 Brigade formations 764 Field exercises 765-767 The division 768-771 Part VI. Ceeemonies, Inspections, and Mustek. Ceremonies 772-876 Prescribed ceremonies 772 General rules for reviews 773-796 To form squadron for ceremonies 797-800 Squadron review 801-809 To form regiment for ceremonies 810-811 Regimental review 812-815 Brigade review 816 Garrison review 817 Parades 818-830 Squadron parade 819-829 Regimental parade 830 CONTENTS. li Ceremonies — Continued. Paragraphs. Escorts 831-855 Escort of honor 831 Funeral escort ^ 832-846 Escort to tlie standard 847-855 Guard mounting 856-876 Formal guard mounting, mounted 857-865 Relieving the old guard 866-875 Formal guard mounting, dismounted 876 Inspections 877-888 Troop, mounted 877-881 Troop, dismounted 882 Squadron, mounted 883 Regimental, mounted 884 Machine-gun troop 885 Headouarters troop 886-887 Supply troop 888 Muster 889-891 Regimental, squadron, troop 889-891 PaKT VII. MiSCELLANEOrS. Manuals 892-906 Of the guidon 892-898 Of the standard ^___ 899-906 Honors and salutes 907-927 Training remounts ._ 928-964 General provisions '- 928-935 First period, preliminary, dismounted 936-940 Leading, longe, mounting 936-939 Training to bear saber 940 Second period, conditioning and training 941-944 Mounted work, obedience to aids 941-942 Conditioning, hygiene 943-944 Third period, continuation of second 945-950 Outdoor work, obedience to aids 945-946 Jumping, use of arms 947-950 Fourth period, final conditioning 951-964 Duty in ranks, work with the bit 951-952 Suppleness and mobility „ 953-958 Conditioning, special training . 959-964 12 CONTENTS. Paragraphs. Care of horses 965-974 General provisions and rules 965-966 Stable management 967-968 Grooming and watering 969-970 Feeding and exercising 971-972 Sick horses 973 Shoeing 974 Care of saddlery 975 Fitting the saddle 976 Marches, camps 977-987 General provisions 977 Preparation 978 The march, its length and rate 979 Formations 980 Halts 981 Watering 982 Feeding 983 Camps, location of 984-985 Herding 986 Forced and night marches 987 Signals, arm, whistle, bugle, semaphore 988-997 General provisions 988-989 Arm signals 990 Whistle signals 991 Bugle signals 992-996 Alarm calls 993 Service calls 994 Drill and field calls 995 List of bugle calls 996 Semaphore code 997 Bugle calls, music for Appendix. CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. DEFINITIONS. Alig-nmeat. — The placing of several troopers or units on the same straight line; also the line on which such adjustment is made. Assemhly. — ^The grouping in order, and in a close-order formation, of the elements of a command. The special ar- rangement and condition that constitute order for each unit are explained in the corresponding part of the text. The purpose of the assembly is to bring about a close-order forma- tion in order. Base. — The element on which a formation or movement is regulated. The base may be a trooper, two, four, section, platoon, or larger unit. When the base is a single trooper in ranks, he may also be termed the guide. Center. — The middle point or element of a command. If the number of elements considered be eveu, the right center ele- ment will be meant when the center element is referred to. Column. — ^A formation in which the elements of a command are placed one behind the other. The elements here referred to may be troopers, twos, fours, sections, platoons, or larger units. When used in these regulations as a word of com- mand, without qualifying words indicating the kind of column (as of twos, of platoons, etc.), column signifies a column of fours. In all other cases the word is to be understood in its general sense unless the context indicates the contrary. Deployment. — An evolution in which the command extends its front, as in forming line from column or in passing from close order to extended order. Depth. — The space from front to rear of any formation, in- cluding the front and rear elements. Directing leader. — The leader of a subordinate unit who temporarily conducts the march when the commander is not leading in person. A trooper in the rank of a platoon or 13 14 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. smaller unit who similarly conducts the march is termed a directing" guide. Direction of march.— ^The direction in which the base of the command in question, whether actually in march or halted, is facing at the instant considered. Disposition. — The distribution of the elements of a command, and the formations and duties assigned to each for the accom- plishment of a common purpose. Distance. — The space between men or bodies of troops measured in the direction of depth. Distance is measured — mounted, from the croup of the horse in front to the head of the horse in rear ; dismounted, from the back of the trooper in front to the breast of the trooper in rear. Dress. — The act of taking a correct alignment. Drill. — The exercises ^nd evolutions taught on the drill ground and executed in accordance with definitely prescribed methods. Echelon. — A body of troops is in echelon with reference to another when it is more advanced or less advanced and un- masks or uncovers the other body, wholly or in part; units thus placed are called echelons. Element. — One of the component subdivisions of a command. As used in these regulations the term element is a general one and may mean a single trooper, a set of twos, a four, section, platoon, or larger unit according to the command and forma- tion that are being considered. The expression elements of the column refers to the several troopers, fours, platoons, or other units that are placed successively, one behind another, in any column formation. Evolutions. — Movements by which a command changes its position or passes from one formation to another. File closers. — Officers or noncommissioned oflficers placed out of ranks, whose duty it is to supervise the men in ranks and see that the orders of the commander are carried out. For convenience, this term is applied to any man posted as a file closer. Flank. — The right or left of a command in line or column. In speaking of the enemy the term right flank or left flank is used to designate the flank that would be so designated by him. DEFINITIONS. 15 Flank guard. — An element of a command disposed with a view to protecting a flank. Foragers. — Mounted troopers distributed in line in extended order ; also the formation in which the troopers are so dis- tributed. Formation. — The arrangement of the elements of a command in line, column, or echelon. Gait. — One of the special movements of the horse, as the walk, the trot, or the gallop. Gait of march. — The gait at which the base of the command in question is moving at the instant considered. Horse length. — A term of measurement. For convenience in estimating space, a horse length is considered as 3 yards ; by actual measure it is about 8 feet. Interval. — The lateral space between the elements or frac- tions of a command. Interval is measured : Mounted, from the left knee of the man at the right of the open space to the right knee of the man at the left of the open space; dis- mounted, interval is measured on similar principles, but from elbow to elbow. Line. — A formation in which the different elements are abreast of each other. When the elements are in column the formation is called a line of columns. Maneuvers. — Operations against an outlined or actual force under a separate commander, who, within the limits of the assumed situation, is free to adopt any formations and make any movements he chooses. Order. — An indication of the will of the commander in what- evGi* form conveyed. An order may be given orally, by signal, or in any manner that is intelligible to those for whom it is intended. The expression, in order, has no reference to this definition, but is used to indicate a special arrangement and condition of the elements of a command. Order, close. — This includes formations in which the intervals anji distances between elements are habitually based upon th6se required for forming the normal line formation V)f each unit of the formation. Order, extended. — The formation in which the troopers, or the subdivisions, or both, are separated by intervals or dis- tances greater than in close order. 16 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Pace. — Used with reference to gait, pace signifies the rate of speed of tlie gait. Used as a unit of measure, pace signifies a step of 30 inches. Patrol. — A group detached from a command and operating with specific mission, usually related to security or informa- tion. The term is ordinarily applied to groups varying in size from two men to a platoon. They are frequently designated by special names connected with their principal mission or their composition ; as, reconnoitering patrols, combat patrols, visiting patrols, officer's patrols. Ployment. — An evolution in which the command diminishes- its front, as in passing from line to column, or from extended order to close order. Rally. — The rapid grouping behind the leader of the ele- ments of a command, without reference to their previous situation or formation. The object of the rally is to reestablish cohesion with a view to immediate action, or to form line in a new direction wiien the regular method of forming line would be slow or complicated. It is executed in the order of arrival of the elements of the command without regard to their normal order. The formation in which each unit is rallied is fixed in the drill instructions of that unit. Rank. — Two or more troopers placed side by side. Scouts. — Individual troopers detached from their commands and operating with a definite mission related to security or information. Skirmishers. — Dismounted troopers in line in extended order ; also the formation in which tlie troopers are so placed. Successive formation. — A formation in which the elements take their places successively. Tactical exercise. — An operation against an outlined or repre- sented enemy wliose movements are restricted with a view to illustrating some particular tactical principle. INTRODUCTION. Duties and Responsibilities of Regimental Officers. 1. The colonel is charged with the application of these regulations in so far as they pertain to his regiment. He is responsible for the instruction, efficiency, and har- monious cooperation of his officers, and must vigilantly pre- serve for each the initiative pertaining to his sphere of responsibility. Unity of purpose and coordination of effort can be secured only through the impulse of the will of the chief transmitted through his agents. To this end the colonel will personally direct the instruction of his field officers and captains in all that pertains to their role and their duties in peace and war, and will assure himself that all his officers maintain them- selves in fit physical condition for active campaign. 2. The lieutenant colonel aids the colonel in the execution of his task in such manner as the colonel may direct, super- vises the execution of his orders, and in his absence takes his place and assumes his duties. 3. The majors are responsible for the instruction and prep- aration for war of their respective squadrons. They see that the general methods prescribed by the colonel are followed and that the results sought by the colonel are attained. They leave to the captains a wide initiative in the choice of means. 4. The captains are responsible for the instruction and prep- aration for war of their respective troops. They should have a large liberty as to the means employed. The end to be attained having been indicated, superior author- ity should interfere in the instruction of the troop only when necessary to insure diligence, rectify mistakes, or to prevent omissions. Within the limits set by superior commanders the captain will vary the nature of his exercises and instruction in order to maintain interest. 38218 °— 18 2 17 18 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. He will personally direct the education of his lieutenants and noncommissioned officers and the training of his cooks, horseshoers, saddler, and buglers in so far as this is conducted M'ithin the troop, and will exercise a constant personal super- vision over all the instruction imparted to his troop. The troop being the true unit of instruction, the captain's duties are of the greatest importance and require his constant attention and undivided interest. 5. The lieutenants share with their captain the responsibility for the moral and military training of their men as well as for their appearance, and for the condition of the horses, arms, and equipments of their platoons. They are responsible to the captain for the collective train- ing of their platoons and for the individual instruction of their men and horses in so far as this has not been otherwise pro- vided for. They should know the antecedents, character, ability, and special fitness of every man under their command and the temper, endurance, and capability of every horse committed to their charge, and be able to judge accurately what can be expected of each man and horse. 6. The adjutant and the supply officer, in addition to their duties in connection, respectively, with the headquarters troop and supply troop, perform the functions imposed upon them by Army Regulations and assist the colonel in the dis- charge of his duties. INSTRUCTION. , Geneeal Provisions. ■>. 7. The instruction of his command in all that pertains to its duties in war is, next to effective leadership, the most im- portant duty devolving upon a commander. AH other service functions must be subordinate to it. Officers and noncommissioned officers are charged with a responsibility commensurate with their grade or rank for the performance of this most important duty. They must devote to it their best efforts and their unremitting care and atten- tion. INSTRUCTION. 19 Instruction must not be limited to mere professional train- ing, but must be extended to include the moral education and physical development essential to success in war. it must not only develop the memory and intelligence of the trooper, but must awaken in him a sense of pride in his profession, a confidence in his ability to overcome his enemy, a feeling of devotion to his leaders, and that pride in his country's institutions and past achievements which increases patriotism. Such instruction tends more surely to the inculcation and enforcement of discipline than do the most exacting orders and regulations. 8. The instruction in the regiment must be conducted during the entire year so as to fulfill the following conditions : (a) The regiment must at all times be prepared to take the field. (b) Recruits must be brought as rapidly as is consistent with thorough training to a state of preparation for field service. (c) The system must be such as to bring the regiment to a proper state of preparation for participation in the annual maneuvers or field exercises. 9. Taking into consideration the local conditions, the brigade commanders will regulate the employment of time and the rate of progress. They will assure themselves of results obtained by suitable personal inspections. 10. Instruction in maneuvers and in marching and camping should be carried out at the same time, and in the manner and season best suited to the climate and other conditions. 11. Tactical exercises should be held frequently; always with an indicated enemy and under conditions approaching as nearly as possible those of war. The units participating must be under their permanent leaders and at as nearly full strength as conditions will permit. 12. It must be the effort of every leader to awaken in his subordinates the spirit of initiative and mutual helpfulness and to develop to the greatest extent that aggressive desire to close with the enemy, which, in war, is the first condition of success. 20 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 13. The course of instruction will comprise : (a) The instruction of officers, noncommissioned officers, and special grades. (&) The instruction of the trooper individually and in the squad and platoon. The first has for its object the preparation of officers and noncommissioned officers for the performance of their duty as instructors and leaders of units and of the men of special grades (cooks, buglers, horseshoers, and saddler) for the performance of their functions. It must include every detail of service and all the operations in which cavalry iuay be called upon to participate in war. 14. To impart instruction efficiently, officers and noncommis- sioned officers must be able to execute, with the greatest degree of skill, all that they are called upon to teach others, and must understand and use to practical advantage the methods of instruction recognized as the best. To be able to lead their units without hesitation and with success they should be practiced in assuming situations in which they will find themselves in war and in indicating the most rapid and simple measures to meet the conditions. They will be tested from time to time in their knowledge of that portion of these regulations and of the service manuals bear- ing upon their duties, and will be required to solve map and terrain problems based upon situations which they would probably meet in war. 15. The colonel is charged with the instruction of the field officers and captains and the regimental noncommissioned staff; the captains with the instruction of the lieutenants, noncommissioned officers, and special grades of their troops. 16. Drills at attention, close-order drills, and field exercises all have their part in the training of troops, but each has distinct functions. Their respective uses should be regulated accordingly. 17. Drills at attention are designed to teach the mechanism of close order movements ; to train troops to move rapidly, quietly, and easily in any formation desired by the commander, and as preparation for the mounted charge. They have as a further object of special importance the development in the soldier of those habits of alertness, precision, and discipline that are essential to success in war. These drills should be INSTRUCTION. 21 frequent but short. Accuracy and precision must be insisted upon iu their execution. 18. Extended-order drills have as their special purpose the teaching of the mechanism of deployment and, in general, the handling of troops in all combat other than the close order charge. They are habitually executed at ease. The increased freedom of movement thus given the trooper is not only desirable to avoid unnecessary fatigue, but is essential to the purposes of the drill which include, among other things, the proper use of individual cover by skirmishers. This neces- sary freedom must be made no excuse for laxness in the exe- cution of the exercises. One of the most important objects of the latter is to develop leaders able to control men in the extended formations necessary in dismounted fire action and to accustom the troopers to the control of their leaders under similar conditions. Extended-order drills should be frequent and thorough, and, within their proper scope, executed as accurately as drills at attention. 19. Field exercises are designed to afford practice in ap- plying to conditions such as are incident to campaign the instruction given at. drill. Assumed situations are employed and operations are ordinarily directed against an enemy who may be imaginary, outlined, or represented. Field ex- ercises may take various forms involving any of the phases of field service. When simulated combat is one of the features involved, they are frequently termed comfeat exercises. Tactical exercises and maneuvers are forms of field exercises. In all such exercises the benefit derived is apt to be in direct proportion to the extent to which the actual and assumed con- ditions approximate war conditions. With a view tc provid- ing war strength organizations, thus giving officers and non- commissioned officers the required experience in handling such units; platoons, troops, and squadrons should frequently be consolidated. Officers and noncommissioned officers not re- quired to complete the full quota of the units may be assigned as observers or umpires. Every exercise should conclude with a discussion, on the field, of the exercise and principles involved. 20. Extended-order drills and field exercises must not he delayed until close-order instruction is completed. They must, on the CQfUrary, be taken up as early as possible in the scheme 22 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. of instruction and given a constantly increasing proportion of the time devoted to instruction as tlie training progresses. 21. In field exercises the enemy is said to be imaginaiy when his position and force are merely assumed ; outlined when his position and force are indicated by a few men; represented when a body of troops acts as such. INSTRUCTION OF OFFICERS. 22. The worth of a command to the Government depends largely upon the training and knowledge of its officers. Nothing should be neglected which will tend to increase their professional knowledge or to elevate their moral and intellectual level. Apart from the instruction imparted by their commanders, all officers should regard it as their duty to labor ceaselessly to perfect their military training, to keep themselves abreast of all progress in their arm, and to study the conditions and necessities of modern war. They must possess, as a founda- tion for all training, a thorough theoretical and practical knowledge of horsemanship, of the regulations concerning their arm, and of the duties they will be called upon to as- sume in peace or war. In addition, they should have a thorough knowledge of the organization, formation, and tactics of' the other arms, of topography, fortification, and other military subjects that bear upon the great variety of missions with which they may be charged. For this purpose full use should be made of the presence of troops of other arms in the garrison or in ma- neuvers. Map and terrain exercises should be devised to enable the officers to make practical application of what they have learned. These exercises must be simple and entirely practical and suited to the grade of the officer under instruction. Their principal aim should be to train the officer to grasp quickly situations in war, to form correct decisions, and to formulate from them clear and precise orders and reports. Officers of all grades must acquire skill in the use of every arm carried by their men, and must keep up bold and vigorous riding. INSTRUCTION. 23 An officer, preferably not below the grade of captain, will be designated to giAe instruction in efluitation to officers re- quiring it. 23. Officers should bear in mind that their manner of im- parting instruction and their personal bearing and aptitude have a great influence upon the men under their charge. A sound soldierly spirit can not be developed by rules, but much can be accomplished by force of example in teaching high ideals of personal conduct and in training men to meet priva- tions cheerfully and never to grumble at work or hardship. INSTEUCTION OF NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS. 24. Noncommissioned officers must be able to instruct in the school of the trooper and of the platoon, to assist their officers in the details of service, and to replace them in case of necessity. Their theoretical instruction will embrace such of these regulations as pertain to their duties, to include the school of the trooper, the platoon, and the troop ; the interior economy of the troop ; the service manuals applicable to troop duties ; elementary lessons in hygiene and liippology ; and related subjects. Their practical instruction will embrace all that is neces- sary to prepare them for their duties as instructors, for their functions in the school of the platoon and troop, and for any missions with which they may be charged in war. They must be trained to comprehend the formations and movements of troops of all arms, to read a map readily, and to write a succinct report accompanied, when necessary, by a sketch shovN^ing the location and disposition of troops. The colonel may designate an officer to perfect and develop the training in equitation of the noncommissioned officers of his command. , • INSTRUCTION OF THE SPECIAL GRADES. 25. To replace casualties in the grades of stable sergeant, cook, horseshoer, and saddler the captain will cause instruc- tion to be given to selected privates who show aptitude for these duties. The buglers will be trained and instructed by the sergeant bugler under the supervision of the adjutant. 24 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The wagoner will be instructed under the supervision of the supply officer in the principles of draft, the care of wagons, and the care and fitting of harness. INSTEUCTION OF THE TROOPEE. 26. The instruction of the trooper is conducted in each troop under direction of the captain, who is assisted by his officers and noncommissioned officers according to their several apti- tudes and grades. The course of instruction should be so ar- ranged as to bring the trooper to the highest degree of well- balanced efficiency in the briefest practicable period. While the captain should carry on this instruction accord- ing to a systematic, prearranged plan, he must be left free to alter his plan to meet unforeseen conditions. The interference of superiors will be limited to the correction of errors and the indication of omissions. All instruction must be conducted with a view to fitting the trooper to play his part in war. Discipline, equitation, the use of arms, and the cultivation of morale are the essential elements. 27. In the daily tasks constant effort should be made to develop in the trooper a taste for physical exercise, to perfect his knov/ledge of the horse and of his capacity and limitations and of the care that should be given him, and to assure the proper care, fit, and adjustment of the equipment and the habitual care of , arms. 28. The instruction in small-arms practice and swordsman- ship must be conducted with the view of giving to the trooper complete confidence in his ability to OTercome his enemy with whatever weapon he may be called upon to meet him. 29. Instruction in field service should be so arranged as to prepare the trooper for the duties that will fall to him in campaign, to develop and guide his initiative, and to instill in him the spirit of the offensive. 30. Instructors must endeavor from the first to acquire a knowledge of the character and aptitude of each trooper under their charge. They should exercise patience and avoid familiarity. The work should be so regulated that all troopers', will have at least one mounted exercise daily except Sunday. 31. Recnat instruction will receive the special attention of the captain and will be so conducted as to prepare the recruit, INSTRUCTION. 25 as quickly as is consistent with thorough work, to take hig phice in ranks. This will he accomplished when the recruit : (a) Is able to ride his horse on the bit with one hand at all gaits. (b) Has learned to care for his horse, pack his saddle, and take proper care of his arms and equipments. (c) Has mastered the use of his arms mounted and dis- mounted. ( (J ) Has acquired an elementary knowledge of field service. The captain is the judge as to when this proficiency has been attained. Undue haste in placing the recruits in ranks must be avoided, since it leads to loss of time in the school of the platoon and squadron. COLLECTm: INSTRirCTIOX. 32. The colonel designates the period to be devoted to each of the several schools of the troop, squadron, and regiment. The time which should be apportioned to each item of col- lective instruction must vary with the circumstances. Ample time must be allotted to the school of the troop. Within the period allotted to the troop, the captain will decide when the instruction in the school of the troop shall be begun. He will assure himself before undertaking this instruction that each lieutenant Las brought his platoon to a proper state of prep- aration. In order to prevent the undue lengthening of the period devoted to elementary collective work, instruction in the school of the squad must be begun soon after the commencement of the individual instruction. During the time devoted to the instruction of the larger units, commanders of the smaller units must take advantage of all opportunities to continue the instruction of their com- mands. A reasonable portion of the period allotted to the regiment should be devoted to such drill as will render the force supple and handy. 38. The training of regiments in brigades, and of brigades in divisions, with the proper complement of horse artillery and auxiliary troops, is important, both to insure cooperation and to give practice to the higher leaders and their staffs. PART L— INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION. General Peovisions, 34. Tliorough training in the school of the trooper is the basis of efhciency. 35. Sliort and frequent drills are preferable to long ones, which exhaust the attention of both instructor and recruit. 36. As the instruction progresses, the recruits will be grouped according to proficiency, in order that all may ad- vance as rapidly as their abilities permit. Those who lack aptitude and quickness will be separated from the others and placed under experienced drillmasters. 37. The individual dismounted instruction of the recruit is habitually given by experienced noncommissioned officers, espe- cially selected for that purpose. All such instruction is under the careful personal supervision of a commissioned officer, and in the corresponding mounted instruction it is desirable that the actual instructor be a commissioned officer when this is practicable. All lieutenants will be required to instruct re- cruits in person sufficiently to acquire skill in such work. When recruits, upon their arrival at a station, are assigned to their respective troops for training, the captains prescribe and supervise the instruction. 38. The instructor will always maintain a military bearing and by a quiet, firm demeanor, set a proper example to his men. A calm and even temper is indispensable. Unnecessarily loud commands and prolonged explanations are to be avoided. As the recruits become somewhat proficient in the school of the trooper, the officer superintending the instruction may call upon them in turn to drill the squad in his presence and to correct any errors that may be observed. This will Increase their interest, hasten their instruction, and facilitate judg- ment upon their fitness for the duties of noncommissioned officers. 39. A carefully thought out program of instruction, prepared in advance and based upon the probable time and facilities for 26 INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION. 27 instruction that the case in question may present, is essential to economy of time and effort and to systematic, thorough instruction. 40. The preliminary individual instruction, dismounted and mounted, should be carried on during different drill hours of the same days. This preliminary phase should include, in addition to regular drill, instruction in : The elements of dis- cipline ; the names of the various parts of the arms and equipment ; the proper care of arms, equipment, and clothing ; elementary instruction as to the names of those parts of the horse that are frequently referred to at drill and stable duty ; grooming ; a few simple rules regarding the care of the horse ; personal hygiene : and other related subjects. 41. As soon as the instruction shall have advanced so far as to include the few necessary preliminary drills, collective in- struction in the school of the squad will be taken up. This instruction may, like the individual instruction, properly be carried on during different hours of the same drill days, in both mounted and dismounted phases. The recruits meanwhile continue their progress in the individual instruction. 42. The progress in mounted collective instruction must be carefully regufated in accordance with the recruit's confidence and skill in the management of his mount, and must progress no faster than tbe recruit's horsemanship justifies; but this restriction need not affect the dismounted collective instruc- tion, and the latter may properly be carried forward as rap- idly as the state of the dismounted individual instruction will permit. By the time the recruit's instruction in equitation has progressed so as to prepare him for mounted drills at the faster gaits, he should have learned the mechanism of all the movements by executing them at a walk. His course of dis- mounted training should meanwhile have included not only the close-order movements of the squad but the mechanism of ex- tended order, practice in the use of the saber, a little prepara- tory range practice with the rifle and pistol, and work in the nature of minor field exercises involving dismounted fire action. He should, during the same period, have learned the mechanism of passing from mounted action to dismounted action and should have acquired familiarity with all com- mands and signals used in the squad. The recruit will thus ordinarily be ready to enter with reasonable efficiency upon 28 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. certain phases of the work in the platoon and troop before his individual mounted instruction is completed. 43. There are two kinds of commands : The preparatory command, such as forward, indicates the movement that is to be executed. The command of execution, such as MARCH, HALT, or ARMS, causes the execution. Preparatory commands are distinguished by boldface type, those of execution by CAPITALS. The preparatory command should be given at such an in- terval of time before the command of execution as to admit of being properly understood ; the command of execution should be given at the instant the movement is to commence. The preparatory command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising inflection at the end, and in such manner that the com- mand of execution may be more energetic. On foot, the command of execution is firm in tone and brief. In mounted movements the preparatory command is usually somewhat prolonged to insure its being heard, and the com- mand of execution is always prolonged. Commands tvill he given no louder than is necessary. Laxness or indiiference suggested in the manner of giving a command is certain to result in corresponding carelessness of execution. 44. To revoke a preparatory command, or being at the halt, to begin anew a movement improperly begun : AS YOU WERE. Any movement ceases and the former position is resumed. 45. To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the correction of errors, the commands may be given: 1. In place, 2. HALT. All halt and stand fast. If executed dis- mounted, the position of the rifle is not changed. To resume the movement, the commands are: 1. Resume; or, 1. Resume, trot; or, 1. Resume, gallop. 2. MARCH. The movement is then completed as if it had not been interrupted. 46. Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained as toward but one flank, it being necessary to sub- stitute the word " left " for " right," and the reverse, to have the explanation of the corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are given for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The substitute word of the command is placed within parentheses^ INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION. 29 47. Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when marching unless otherwise prescribed. Any movement on foot not specially excepted may be executed in double time. If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command double time precedes the command of execution. 48. As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever their presence is necessary. 49. Before beginning work, the instructor always assures himself that those under his charge are neatly dressed and in proper uniform. At mounted formations he Mall also re- quire that horses be properly groomed and that equipments be in good condition and adjusted as prescribed. 50. The value of recruit drill as an exercise in teaching dis- cipline must be kept constantly in view by the instructor. No phase of the instruction is of such great ultimate importance. SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, DISMOUNTED. 51. The object of this school is to develop the strength and agility of the trooper, to give him a military bearing, to fix in him the habit of sustained attention and instant obedience, to prepare him for instruction in mounted combat with the saber and pistol, and to train him in dismounted combat with the rifle. In order to make rapid progress in those exercises which form the basis of instruction of the trooper, it is necessary that the lessons should, as far as practicable, be given indi- vidually. 52. Cautions to instructors. — The instructor explains briefly each movement, first executing it himself if practicable. He requires the recruits to take the proper positions unassisted and does not touch them for the purpose of correcting them, except when they are unable to correct themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the same movement, although each should be understood before passing to another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity. Recruits should be allowed to stand at ease frequently. During these pauses the instructor will not be idle, but opportunity will be taken to talk to the men, to encourage them to ask questions, and so to develop their confidence and common sense. 53. During the period devoted to preliminary instruction, without arms, the recruit will be prepared for subsequent in- struction with arms by being taught the names of the prin- cipal parts of the different weapons and the proper methods of cleaning, disassembling, assembling, and operating the latter. Physical Teaining. 54. The physical training of the soldier must receive due attention. Its direct results are to increase the soldier's strength, agility, and endurance, and it has indirect results of far-reaching Value in connection with discipline and morale. It should begin with his first instruction as a recruit and be continued throughout his entire enlistment. The methods pre- 30 INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS. 31 scribed in the authorized Manual of Physical Training will be followed with a view to malting the soldier's development thorough and well balanced, and to prevent the instruction from becoming unnecessarily tedious and monotonous. 55. In the earlier phases of the recruit instruction, and under temporary conditions that do not favor the carrying out of a more comprehensive scheme of training, special attention will be given to the setting-up exercises. Running, jumping, and swimming are phases of training of special importance to the soldier. Individual Insteuction Without Arms. 56. For this instruction a few recruits, usually not exceed- ing 3 or 4, are placed (as a squad) in single rank, facing to the front. 57. To teach the recruits how to form in ranks the instructor will first place them in single rank, arranged according to height, the tallest man on the right, with intervals of about 4 inches between men, and will explain that the object of these intervals is to give freedom of movement in marching and in the use of the rifle in ranks. He will then direct each man singly to place the palm of the left hand on the hip, fingers pointing downward, and draw attention to the fact that the indicated interval of about 4 inches may be verified by each man so placing himself that his right arm, when hanging naturally at his side, touches the elbow of the man on his right. When this is understood, he will cause the recruits to fall out and successively to place themselves as before, each man verifying his interval by causing his right arm to touch the left elbow of the man on his right, the latter's hand being on his hip, as already explained. He will then explain that at the command FALL IN the men will, beginning with the right trooper, successively and quickly take their places in rank, each man placing the left hand at the hip as above and dropping his hand to his side as soon as the man on his left has the proper interval. 58. The recruits having had sufficient instruction to under- stand how to form by command, the instructor commands: PALL IN. The men assemble as prescribed in par. 57, each taking the position of attention as described below." 32 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. As soon as the recruits have had sufficient preliminary instruction they M^lll habitually be formed as regularly pre- scribed for a squad. POSITION OF THE TROOPER, OR ATTENTION (DISMOUNTED). 59. Heels on the same line and as near each other as the conformation of the man permits. Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45°. Knees straight without stiffness. Hips level and drawn back slightly ; body erect and resting equally on hips ; chest lifted and arched ; shoulders square and falling equally. Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the breeches. Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis of the head and neck is vertical ; eyes to the front. Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the feet. THE RESTS. 60. Being at a halt, the commands are: FALL OUT; REST; AT EASE; and 1. Parade, 2. REST. At the command fall out, the men may leave the ranks, but are required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former places, at attenton, at the command fall in. At the command rest, each man keeps one foot in place, but is not required to preserve silence or immobility. At the command at ease, each man keeps one foot in place and is required to preserve silence but not immobility. 1. Parade, 2. REST. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the right hand ; preserve silence and steadiness of position. 61. Being in march, at the command: 1. Route order, 2. MARCH; or 1. At ease, 2. MARCH, the men keep their places in ranks but are not required to keep the step ; at route order, they are not required to preserve silence. If halted from route order, the men stand at rest; if halted from at ease, they remain at ease. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS. Marching at route order or at ease, rifles are carried at will, the muzzles elevated. 62. To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION. If at a halt, the men take the position of the trooper, dis- mounted (par. 59). If marching:, the cadenced step in quick time is resumed and rifles, if carried, are brought to the right shoulder. 63. To dismiss the squad: DISMISSED. EYES BIGHT OE LEFT. 64. 1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT, 3. FRONT. At the command right, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed on the line of eyes of the man in, or supposed to be in, the same rank. At the command front, turn the head and eyes to the front. FACINGS. 65. To the flank: 1. Right, 2. FACE. Raise slightly the left heel and right toe ; face to the right, turning on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the left foot ; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner. 66. To the rear : 1. About, 2. FACE. Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot length to the rear and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on the left heel and right toe ; place the right heel by the side of the left. 67. 1. Hand, 2. SALUTE. Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches the lower part of tlie headdress above the right eye, thumb and fingers _ extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm -^^q 2, par. 67. inclined at about 45°, hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward the person saluted. (TWO), Drop the arm smartly by the side. The salute for officers is the same (Fig. 1). For rules governing salutes see Honors and Salutes. 3821S -18- 34 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. STEPS AND MARCHINGS. 68. All steps and m.irchings executed from a halt, except right step, begin with the left foot. 69. The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per minute. The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches ; the cadence is at the rate of ISO steps per minute. The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by calling one, two, three, four, or left, right, the instant the left and right foot, respectively, should be planted. 70. All steps and marchings and movements involving march are executed in quick time unless the squad be marching in double time, or double time be added to the command ; in the latter case double time is added to the preparatory command. Example : 1. Forward, double time, 2. MARCH. 71. It should l)e explained to the recruits that in collective drills and exercises one of the troopers, termed the guide, habitually has to follow a leader or direct himself upon some designated objective, the other troopers regulating their march so as, in line, to march abreast of the guide, maintaining their approximate intervals. The necessity, in this connection, for learning to march steadily in a given direction without waver- ing from side to side should further be pointed out. Each recruit should then be practiced individually in marching upon a designated objective, selecting for that purpose two points of direction on the straight line that passes through the trooper and the objective and keeping constantly in the prolongation of that line. When the objective is sufficiently distinct it should be taken as one of the points of direction and another point in line with the trooper and the objective, and either nearer or more distant than the latter be selected as a second point to fix the direction of march. QUICK TIME AND DOUBLE TIME. 72. Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. At the command forward, shift the weight of the body to the right leg, left knee straight. INSTRrCTION" WITHOUT ARMS. 35 At the command march, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30 inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without shock ; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. 73. Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march forward in double time : 1. Forward, double time, 2. MARCH. If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the right leg. At the command march, raise the forearms, fingers closed, to a horizontal position along the waist line, take up an easy run with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging motion to the arms. If marching in quick time, at the command MARCH, given as either foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time and then step off in double time. 74. To resume the quick time: 1. Quick time, 2. MARCH. At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick time, dropping the hands by the sides. TO MARK TIME. 75. Being in march: 1. Mark time, 2. MARCH. At the command march, given as either foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the other foot ; bring up the foot in rear and continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches and planting it on line w^ith the other. Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the feet as described above. THE HALF STEP. 76. 1. Half step, 2. MARCH. Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time. 77. Forward, half step, halt, and mark time may be executed one from the other in quick or double time. To resume the full step from half step or mark time : 1. For- ward, 2. MARCH. 36 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. SIDE STEP. 78. Being at a halt or mark time: 1. Right (left) step, 2. MARCH. Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right ; bring the left foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time. The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in double time. If at order arms, the side step is executed at trail without other command. BACK STEP. 79. Being at a halt or mark time : 1. Backward, 2. MARCH. Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear. The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in double time. If at order arms, the back step is executed at trail without other command. TO HALT. 80. To stop the march in quick or double time: 1. Squad, 2. HALT. At the command halt, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant the other foot as in marching ; raise and place the rear foot by the side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides. TO MARCH BY THE FLANK. 81. Being in march : 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH. At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching, and step off in the new direction with the right foot. This movement is not executed by signal except in foragers. TO MAKCH TO THE REAR. 82. Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH. At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the left foot, turn to the right-about INSTEUCTION WITHOUT ASMS. 37 on the balls of both feet, and immediately step off with the left foot. If marching in double time, turn to the right-about, taking four steps in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot. This movement is not executed by signal except in foragers. CHANGE STEP. 83. Being in march : 1. Change step, 2. MARCH. At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the left foot, plant the toe of the right foot near the heel of the left, and step off with the left foot. The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the com- mand MARCH being given as the left foot strikes the ground. TO COUNT FOURS. 84. Being in line, at the command, COUNT FOURS, all the troopers in the rank except the right trooper execute eyes right and, beginning on -the right, count successively 1, 2, 3, 4. Each turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts. Fours may be counted at the halt or marching, mounted or dismounted, in line or in column of twos or troopers. In counting fours in column of twos or troopers the elements count off successively from front to rear in the column and from right to left in each two. Eyes right is not executed when counting fours from column of twos or troopers. TO TAKE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES. 85. Being in line at a halt: 1. Take interval, to the right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT. At the command march, all face to the right and the leading trooper steps off; the other men step off in succession, each following the preceding trooper at four paces. At the command halt, given when all have their intervals, all halt and face to the front. 88. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad : 1. Assemble to the right (left), 2. MARCH. The trooper on the right stands fast. The other troopers face to the right, close by the shortest line and face to the front. 38 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 87. Being in line at a halt and fours having been counted: 1. Take distance, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT. At the command march, No. 1 moves straight to the front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 in the order named, move straight to the front, each stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command halt is given when all have their distances. If there be more than one No. 1, all the Nos. 1 move for- ward together, guiding on the right trooper. The same prin- ciple applies to the other numbers. 88. The normal interval and distance of 4 paces indicated, respectively, in pars. 34 and 36, may be increased or diminished by adding to the corresponding preparatory command the in- dication of the interval or distance desired ; thus : 1. Take interval to the right at 1 pace, 2. MARCH, etc. ; 1. Take dis- tance, at 2 paces, 2. MARCH, etc. 89. Being at distances, to assemble the squad : 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH. No. 1 of the front rank stands fast ; the other numbers move forward to their proper places in line. Individual Insteuction With Aems. manual of the eifle. 90. When the recruit has made fair progress in the instruc- tion witliout arms, including that required by par. 53, he is taught the manual of arms. Instruction without arms and that with arms alternate. 91. The following rules govern the carrying of the rifle : First. The rifle is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so loaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked ; that is, with the safety lock turned to the " safe." At all other times it is carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled. Second. AVhenever troops are formed under arms, rifles are immediately inspected at the commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS; 3. Order (right shoulder, port), 4. ARMS. A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal. If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed and placed in the belt. Third. The cut-off is kept turned " off " except when cart- ridges are actually used. MANUAL OF THE RIFLE. 39 Fourth. Fall In is executed with the rifle at the order arms. Fall out, rest, and at ease are executed as witliout arras. On resuming attention the position of order arms is taken. Fifth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the rifle is brought to the riglit shoulder at the command march, the three motions corresponding with the first three steps. Move- ments may be executed at the trail by prefacing the pre- paratory command with the words at trail, as, 1. At trail, for- ward, 2.' MARCH; the trail is taken at the command march. When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval, and assemblings are executed from the owler, raise the rifle to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting. Sixth. The rifle is brought to the order on halting. The execution of the order begins when the halt is completed. Seventh. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without arms. 92. The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms: First. In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of gravity) the thumb clasps the rifle; the sling is included in the grasp of the hand. (Figs. 6, 12.) Second. In all positions of the rifle " diagon- ally across the body " the position of the rifle, left arm, and hand are the same as in port arms. (Fig. 6.) Third. In resuming the order from any posi- tion in the manual, the motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the rifle about 3 inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and near the right, steadying the rifle, fingers extended and joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers of the right hand grasping the rifle. To complete the order, lower the rifle gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the side, and take the position of order arms. (Fig. 2.) Allowing the rifle to drop through the right hand to the ground, or other similar abuse of the arm to produce effect in executing the manual, is prohibited. Fig. 2, par. 92. 40 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Fourth. The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the details of the motions, the cadence being gradually ac- quired as they become accustomed to handling their rifles. Fifth. The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are for the purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail ; in this case the command of execution determines the prompt execution of the first motion, and the commands, two, three, four, that of the other motions. To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: By the numbers; all movement divided into motions are then executed as above explained until he cautions : Without the numbers; or commands movements other than those in the manual of arms. Sixth. Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the previous position of the rifle. Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be carried in any manner directed. 93. Position of order arms, standing : The butt rests evenly on the ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand holding the rifle between the t h u m b and fingers. (Figs. 3, 4.) 1. Present, 2. ARMS. With the right hand carry the rifle in front of the center of the body, barrel to the rear and ver-FiG.5,par.94. tical, grasp it with the left hand at the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (TWO) Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. (Fig, 5.) R Fig. 3, par. 93. Fig. 4, par. 93. 94. Being at order arms: MANUAL OF THE RIFLE. 41 95. Being at order arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. With tiie right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the body, grasp it smartly with both hands ; the right, palm down, at the small of the stock ; the left, palm up, at the balance ; barrel up, sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck with the left shoulder ; right forearm horizontal ; left forearm resting against the body ; the rifle in a vertical plane parallel to the front. (Fig. 6.) 96. Being at present arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. Carry the rifle diagonally across the body and take the position of port arms. 97. Being at port arms: 1. Present, 2. ARMS. Carry the rifle to a vertical position in front of the center of the body and take the position of present arms. 98. Being at present or port arms: 1. Order, pj(,Qp^j.y^5^ 2. ARMS. Let go with the right hand ; lower and carry the rifle to the right Vvith the left hand ; regrasp it with the right hand just above the lower band ; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last position in coming to the order. (TWO) Complete the order. 99. Being at order arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS. With the right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the body ; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel be- tween the first two fingers. (TWO) Without changing the grasp of the right hand, place the rifle on the right shoulder, barrel up and inclined at an angle of about 45° from the horizontal, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the rifle in a vertical plane perpendicular to the front ; carry the left hand, thumb, and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow down. (THREE) Drop the left hand by the side. (JFig. 7.) 42 CAVALRY BIIILL REGULATIONS. 100. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (TWO), (THREE) Execute order arms as described from port arms. 101. Being at port arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS. Change the right hand to the butt. (TWO), (THREE) As in right shoulder arms from order arms. 102. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (TWO) Change the right hand to the small of the stock. 103. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Present, 2. ARMS. I Execute port arms. (THREE) Execute present arms. 104. Being at present arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS. Execute port arms. (TWO), (THREE), (FOUR). Execute right shoulder arms as from port arms. 105. Being at port arms: 1. Left shoulder, 2. ARMS. Carry the rifle with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder, barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoul- der ; at the same time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. ( TWO ) Drop the right hand by the side. Left shoulder arms may be ordered directly from the order, right shoulder, or present, or the reverse. At the command Arms execute port arms and con- tinue in cadence to the position ordered. 106. Being at left shoulder arms: 1. Port, 2. ARMS. Grasp the rifle with the right hand at the small of the stock. (TWO) Carry the rifle to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the left and take the position of port arms. 107. Being at order arms: 1. Parade, 2. REST. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to the left; grasp the rifle with the left hand just Fig. 8, par. 107. below the stacking swivel and with the right hand below and against the left. (Fig. 8.) MANTJAI OF THE RIFLE. 43 Being at parade rest: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTIOIT. Resume the order, the left hand quitting the rifle opposite the right hip. 108. Being at order arms: 1. Trail, 2. ARMS. Raise the rifle, right arm slightly bent, and ■ incline the muzzle forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30° with the vertical. (Fig. 9.) When it can be done without danger or in- . convenience to others, the rifle may be grasped at the balance and muzzle lowered until the rifle is horizontal ; a similar position in the left hand may be used. 109. Being at trail arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. Lower the rifle with the right hand and re- sume the order. EIFLE SALUTE. 110. Being at right shoulder fig. 9, par. 108. arms: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE. Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fin- gers extended and joined, forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the person saluted. (TWO) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the front. (Fig. 10.) With the rifle on the left shoulder, the salute is rendered in a corre- sponding manner with the right hand. 111. Being at order or trail arms: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE. Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fin- gers extended and joined, forefinger against the rifle near the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (TWO) Drop the left hand by the side ; turn the head and eyes to the front. (Fig. 11.) For rules governing salutes, see Honors and Salutes. Fig. 10, par. 110. Fig. 11, par. 111. 44 CAVALRY DKILL REGULATIONS. THE INSPECTION. 112. Being at order arms: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS. At tlie second command, take the position of port arms. (TWO) Seize tlie bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn the handle up, draw the bolt back and glance at the chamber. Having found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes to the front. (Fig. 12.) 113. Being at inspection arms: 1. Order (right shoulder, port), 2. AE,MS. At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle down, pull the trig- ger, and resume port arms. At the command arms complete the movement ordered. TO DISMISS. Fig. 12, par. 112. ^^^ Being at halt: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Port, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED. TO STACK AND TAKE AEMS. 115. Three rifles only are used to make a stack; rifles not SO used are, in this connection, termed loose rifles. Being in line at a halt: STACK ARMS. At the command stack. No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2, No. 2 raises his rifle with the right hand, grasps it with the left at the upper band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the f^ont, muzzle inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center of the interval on his right, the thumb and fore- finger raising the stacking swivel ; No. 3 then passes his rifle, barrel to the rear, to No. 2, who grasps it between the bands with his right hand and throws the butt about 2 feet in advance of that of his own rifle and opposite the right of the interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages with that of his own rifle ; No 1 raises his rifle with the right hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front, the left hand guid- ing the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel KNEELING AND LYING DOWN. 45 of his own rifle with the free hook of that of No. 3 ; he then turns the barrel outward into the angle formed by the other two rifles and lowers the butt to the ground to the right of and against the toe of his right shoe. No. 2 lays loose rifles on the stack; No. 3 resumes his place in line. When each man has finished handling rifles, he takes the position of attention. The instructor may then rest or dismiss the squad, leaving the arms stacked. On re-forming, the men take their places in rear of the stacks. 116. Being in line, behind the stacks: TAKE AEMS. No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2 ; No. 2 returns the loose rifles, then grasps his own rifle with the left hand, the rifle of No 3 with his right hand, grasping both between the bands ; No. 1 grasps his rifle in the same way with the right hand. No. 1 disengages his rifle by raising the butt from the ground and then turning the rifle to the right, detaches it from the stack ; No. 2 disengages and detaches his rifle by turning it to the left, and then passes the rifle of No. 3 to him ; No. 3 resumes his place in line ; all resume the order. KNEELING AND LYING DOWN. 117. If Standing: KNEEL. Half face to the right ; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left rear of the left heel; kneel on the right knee, sitting as nearly as possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh ; rifle remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the lower Fig. 13, par. 117. band. This is the position of order arms, kneeling. (Fig. 13.) 118. If standing or kneeling: LIE DOWN. Kneel, but with right knee against left heel ; carry back the left foot and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35° to the right ; rifle Fig. 14, par. 118. horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the front ; elbows on the ground ; left hand at the balance, right hand grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the position of order arms, lying down. (Fig. 14.) 46 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 119. If kneeling or lying down: RISE. If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the left heel. If lying down, raise the body on both knees ; stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the knees. 120. If lying down : KNEEL. Raise the body on both knees, take the position of kneel. When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken instead of the position kneeling. LOADINGS AND FIKINGS, 121. The commands for loading and firing are the same whether standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at a halt. The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading. Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. 122. Rifles having been ordered loaded are kept loaded with- out command until the command unload or inspection arms, fresh clips being inserted when the magazine is exhausted. 123. The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may be done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are indicated before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted when the target appears suddenly and is un- mistakable; in such cases the battle sight is used if no sight setting is announced. The troopers must be practiced repeat- edly in locating targets, making the appropriate sight settings, and simulating fire on the target indicated. 124. The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight setting announced, such designation or announce- ment need not be repeated until a change of either or both is necessary. Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or target designated and at the sight setting announced until a change is ordered. 125. If the men are not already in the position of load, that position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the first command for firing. 126. When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurute firing is discretionary with each man. LOADINGS AND FIRINGS. 47 127. The correct estimation of distances is of great impor- tance in connection with all rifle firing except that at short ranges. Instruction of the recruit in this phase of training must not be delayed until range firing is taken up, but should be begun in the early instruction and carried forward pro- gressively, thus gradually developing the faculties involved. In the same way, the occasional firing of a few shots, first with blank cartridges and later with ball cartridges at short range and under conditions permitting very careful detailed super- vision of each man's position, will be found of exceptional value as a preliminary exercise to the course of range firing prescribed for recruits. Detailed directions for conducting the instruction of the recruit in estimating dis- tances and in rifle firing are prescribed in the Small Arms Firing Manual. Fig. 15, par. 128. 12S. Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. With dummy (blank or ball) car- tridges, 2. LOAD. At the command load each trooper faces half right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such position as will insure the gi*eatest firmness and steadi- ness of the body, raises or lowers the rifle and drops it into the left hand at the bal- ance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height of the breast, and. turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, places the thumb on the pov/der space of the top cartridge, the fingers extending around the rifle and tips resting on the magazine floor plate ; forces the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down with the thumb : without removing the clip thrusts |p .„„ the bolt home, turning down the handle; ' ^^''' ^* turns the safety lock to the " safe " ; and carries the hand to the small of the stock. A skirmish line may load while moving, the rifles being held as nearly as practicable in the position of load. Fig. 48 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if Ivneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh ; if sitting, the elbows are supported by the knees ; if lying down, the left hand steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down) are designated as that of load. (Figs. 15, 16.) 129. For instruction in loading: 1. Simulate, 2. LOAD. Executed as above described, except that the cut-off remains " off " and the handling of cartridges Is simulated. The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and firing after a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges may be used. 130. The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine " off," The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while " off " or " on " by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to be regarded as exceptional. TO UNLOAD. 131. UNLOAD. Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follow^er down and back to engage it under the bolt, and then thrusting the bolt home ; the trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the belt, and the rifle is brought to the order. TO SET THE SIGHT. 132. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIETY, ETC.), or BATTLE SIGHT. The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains and verifies sight settings. LOADINGS AND FIRINGS. 49 TO FIRE BY VOLLEY. 133. 1. READY, 2. AIM, 3. Squad, 4. FIRE. At the command ready, turn the safety lock to the " ready " ; at the command aim, raise the rifle with both hands and sup- port the butt firmly against the hollo\y of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the rifle, right elbow as high as the shoulder; in- cline the head slightly forward and a little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to per- ceive the object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight. In aiming kneeling the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting the elbows FIG. 18, par. 133. are supported by the knees. ^ In aiming lying down raise the rifle with both hands, rest on both elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder. At the command fire, press ,,^^s^r7-~~^^r-->^^^^"' the finger against the trigger ; fire without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the rifle; lower the rifle to the position of load and load. (Figs. 17, 18, 19.) 134. To continue the firing: 1. AIM, 2. Squad, 3. FIRE. Each command is executed as previously explained. Load (from magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready." 3821S ^—18— — 4 Fig. 17, par. 133. Fig. 19, par. 133. 50 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. TO FIRE AT WILL. 135. FIRE AT WILL. Each man, independently of the others, comes to the ready, anns carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, fires, loads, and continues the firing until ordered to suspend or cease firing. 136. To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the instructor shouts: FASTER (SLOWER). Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate the necessity for deliber- ation, and to habituate men to battle conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are designated. TO FIKE BY CLIP. 137. CLIP FIRE. Executed in the same manner as fire at will, except that each man, after having exhausted the cartridges then in the rifle, suspends firing. TO SUSPEND FIEING. 138. The instructor blows a long blast of the whistle and repeats same, if necessary, or commands : SUSPEND FIRING. Firing stops ; rifles are held, loaded and locked, in a position of readiness for instant resumption of firing, sights unchanged. The men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear. This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to cease firing. TO CEASE FIEING. 139. CEASE FIRING. Firing stops; rifles not already there are brought to the position of load, the cut-off turned down if firing from maga- zine, the cartridge is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights are laid down, and the rifle is brought to the order. TARGET DESIGNATION. 61 Cease firing is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of position or to steady the men. 140. Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time after tlie preparatory command for firing whether the firing has actually commenced or not. TARGET DESIGNATION. 141. In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming point designations and in qiflckly locating and pointing out a designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone position, distant objects, par- ticularly troops, both with the naked eye and with field glasses. Owing to the invariable custom of attempting to conceal fire trenches, it is necessary to have some ready method of indi- cating the exact location of an indistinct pit or trench occupied or supposed to be occupied by an enemy in order that effective fire may be opened. The so-called clock system furnishes one of the simplest devices for so doing. Two methods of apply- ing this system are indicated below. First method: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to be horizontal, its center at the firing point and the center-XII line of the dial perpendicular to the front of the firing line. To designate a target the commander announces, for ex- ample : Target at 11 o'clock, range 800 yards, a trench. Each man looks along the center-11 o'clock line of his imaginary dial, estimates the distance (800 yards) along that line, and thereby locates the trench. In this method it is necessary that the target be visible to the naked eye and that each man be able to estimate distances with fair accuracy. Second method: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to be vertical, its center being at a prominent, distant point selected by the commander and called the reference point. To designate a target the commander announces, for ex- ample : Reference point, that clump of trees on hill crest. When the men have located the reference point he announces : Target at 4 o'clock, 2 finger widths, range 1,000 yards, a gun 52 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. pit. By a finger width is meant the distance on the face of the assumed vertical clock (actually on the landscape) inter- cepted by the breadth of a man's finger held perpendicularly to his hand and arm, the latter being fully extended in the direction of the reference point. Each man looks along the center-4 o'clock line of the imagi- nary (vertical) dial, measures, on this line, a point distant 2 finger-widths from the reference point (the center of the dial ) , and thus locates the gun pit. A combination of the two methods may be necessary when, in using the second method, the reference point is not readily identified. Thus, in the case mentioned, it may, for example, be necessary to say: Reference point at 1 o'clock, clump of trees on hill crest. In both methods the sequence of commands laid down should be observed. Various devices for pointing out indistinct targets may be improvised and used. THE USE OF COVEB. 142. The recruit should be given careful instruction in the individual use of cover. It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively upon the enemy ; if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as practicable, taking advantage of any available cover while setting the sights, firing, or advancing. To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is prac- ticed in simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to fire around the right side of his concealment whenever practicable, or, when this is not practi- cable, to rise enough to fire over the top of his concealment. When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with reference to an assumed enemy and to place him- self behind it in proper position for firing. USE OF COVER. 63 143. Tlie disadvantage of remaining too long in one ,/iace, however good tlie concealment, sliould be explained. He should be taught to advance from cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving his concealment. It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidlj'' toward an enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing from cover to cover by crawling, or by 'lying on the left side, rifle grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right leg- He should be taught that when fired on while acting inde- pendently, he should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then endeavor to locate his enemy ; also that in the sun he is visible to a much greater degree than when in the shade. The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued in the combat exercises of the squad and platoon, but he must then be taught that the proper advance of the platoon or troop and the effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question of cover for individuals should the Hvo considera- tions conflict. He should also be taught that he may not move about or shift his position in the firing line except to get a better view of the target. OBSEEVATION. 144. In order to develop the faculty of rapid and accurate observation, vrhich is of great importance in campaign, the recruit should be trained in taking notice of his surroundings, at first from selected positions and later at the various gaits. He should be practiced under various conditions of weather in recognizing colors and forms ; in pointing out and naming military features of the ground ; in observing the effect of the direction of light on distinctness of objects; in recognizing at gradually increasing distances the animate and inanimate objects ordinarily met with in the field ; in counting distant objects ; and in estimating the size of groups, such as herds of animals and bodies of troops. 54 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. MANUAL OF THE PISTOL. 145. Instruction under this head is first given on foot, the recruit having previously been made familiar with the mecha-. nism of the pistol, the names of the principal parts, and the method of cleaning, assembling, and operating it. When a lanyard is used the snaps are attached to the butt of the pistol and the magazine, the lanyard is passed over the head, and the sliding loop drawn snug against the right arm- pit. The lanyard should then be of just such length that the arm can be extended without constraint. For dismounted instruction with the pistol the troopers may be formed with or without intervals. During instruction in the manual of the pistol given w^hen dismounted with intervals each trooper terminates the first execution of raise pistol by carrying his right foot 24 inches to the right and placing his left hand in the position of his bridle hand. This position is then retained until return pistol is executed, when the position of attention is resumed. At all other times when movements in the manual of the pistol are executed dismounted the left hand is raised to the position of the bridle hand whenever used to manipulate the mechanism and is then dropped again to the side. 146. Except in the act of firing, the automatic pistol, when actually on the person, whether loaded or unloaded, will be carried cocked and locked. At all other times the hammer will be lowered fully dotvn. 147. The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol : 1. Raise, 2. PISTOL. Raise: Unbutton the flap of the holster with the right hand and grasp the stock, back of the hand outward. PISTOL: Draw the pistol from the holster; reverse it, muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three fingers, forefinger outside the guard, barrel to the 1 iG. 20, par. 147. j,g^j, ^j-,^ inclined to the front at an angle of 30°, hand as high as the neck and 6 inches in front of the point of the right shoulder. This is the position of raise plstoL (Fig. 20.) MANUAL OF THE PISTOL. 55 Fig. 21, par. 148 (a). Stock pointing np- 148. Being at raise pistol, to inspect pistol: 1. Inspection, 2. PISTOL. (a) When a magazine is in the pistol: Push down the safety- lock and lower the right hand to within easy reach of the left, pistol pointed up- ward and to the right front at an angle of about 30° ; grasp the corrugations of the slide with the left thumb and forefinger, thumb to the right ; thrust upward with the right hand, thus drawing back the slide until the slide stop is engaged (fig. 23) ; resume raise pistol (fig. 21). (h) When no magazine is in the pistol: Push down the safety lock and lower the pistol to the left hand, rotating the pistol so that the sights move to the left, barrel pointing downward and to the left front ward and to the right front; with the left thumb and fore- finger grasp the corrugations of the slide, back of the left hand down (fig. 22) ; change the grasp of the right hand slightly until the thumb presses against tbe rounded surface of the slide stop ; thrust downward and to the left front with the right hand, thus draw- ing back the slide, and at the same time press the slide stop with the right thumb against the slide until it engages ; resume raise pistol. Inspection pistol is never executed with a loaded pistol or with a loaded magazine in the pistol. 149. 1. Heturn, 2. PISTOL. (a) Being at raise pistol; lock the pistol, if not locked ; lower the pistol to Fig. 22, par. 148 (6). ^i^q holster, reversing it, muzzle down, back of the hand to the right; raise the flap of the holster with the right thumb ; insert the pistol in the holster and thrust it home; button the flap of the holster with the right hand. (&) Being at inspection pistol; (with a magazine in the pistol) lower the pistol to the left hand and grasp the slide as prescribed for inspection pistol without magazine (par. 148-&, fig. 22) ; thrust downward and to the left front with the right 5^8 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. hand, thus relieving the pressure on the slide stop, and at the same time disengage the slide stop with the right thumb; release the slide ; reverse and lock the pistol ; place it in holster as prescribed in (a). If there is no magazine in the pistol, lower it to the bridle hand as in load (par. 151) ; draw back the slide and release it ; lock the pistol and place it in the holster. When the last shot is fired the slide stop engages auto- matically. Return pistol is then executed as from inspection pistol (5). 150. Being at raise pistol, to insert a magazine in the pistol : 1. Insert, 2. MAGAZINE, or 2. LOADED MAGAZINE. («) When a magazine is in the pistol: Lower the pistol into the left hand, rotating it so that the sights move to the left ; grasp the slide with the left hand, back of the hand down, barrel pointing downward to the left front, stock pointing upward to the right front ; release the magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand; withdraw the magazine with the right hand ; insert the designated magazine and resume raise pistol. If there be no empty space in the maga- zine pocket when the magazine is withdrawn from the pistol, the magazine may be held between the left thumb and the stock of the pistol until the magazine has been taken from the pocket and inserted ; the magazine withdrawn from the pistol is then inserted in the magazine pocket. Whenever the magazine catch is released, the right, hand should be so placed as to limit the motion of the magazine and prevent its falling out. {b) When no magazine is in the pistol: Lower the pistol into the left hand and grasp it as before ; insert the designated magazine and relume raise pistol. A loaded magazine will never be inserted without specific command. 151. Being at raise pistol with a loaded maga- zine in the pistol, to load: LOAD: Push down Fig. 23, par. 151. the safety lock and lower the pistol to the bridle hand as prescribed for inspection pistol when a magazine is in the pistol (par. 148 (a)) ; operate the slide ; engage the safety lock with the right thumb and raise pistol. (Fig. 23.) MANUAL OF THE PISTOL. 57 To simulate loading for instruction, first withdraw the empty magazine. The command load may be given in connection with the insertion of the magazine, for example : 1. Insert, 2. LOADED MAGAZINE; 3. LOAD. After inserting magazine, reverse the pistol and load as above prescribed. 152. Being in any position, to eject the cartridge from the receiver : UNLOAD. Pass the pistol iTito the left hand as in insert magazine; release the magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand, slightly disengaging the magazine ; push down the safety lock with tiie right thumb ; operate the slide to eject the cartridge; engage the magazine; raise and lock the pistol. 153. Being in anv position, to withdraw the magazine from the pistol : WITHDRAW MAGAZINE. Handle the pistol as in insert magazine; release the maga- zine catch ; withdraw tiie magazine and execute raise pistol. Recruits are taught the motions of loading and firing Avith- out cartridges, and preferably without a magazine in the pistol, to avoid wear on the magazine lips. Loading and pointing practice should be had at all gaits. 154. The hammer is always lowered preparatory to placing the pistol in the arm rack or other place of deposit. 155. Being at raise pistol, to lower the hammer : (a) Using' "both hands: Push down the safety lock; assume the position of load; seat the right thumb firmly on the ham- mer and hold it there; raise the left hand to the right and press the grip safety with the left thumb; insert the fore- finger inside the trigger guard ; press the trigger and carefully let the hammer down with the right thumb. Resume raise pistol. (h) Using but one hand: Raise the right hand until the muzzle of the pistol is well above the head ; disengage the safety lock; seat the ball of the right thumb firmly on the hammer ; bear down the grip safety by pressure on the ham- mer ; press the trigger and carefully let down the hammer with the right thumb. 156. To charge the magazine: Hold the magazine in the left hand, open end up, rounded side to the riglit. Take the car- tridge in the right hand, thumb on the rim, bullet end pointing 68 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. to the right ; place the rim on the end of the magazine fol- lower ; force down the magazine spring and slip the cartridge to the left of the magazine. The next cartridge is similarly- slipped in by placing it on the cartridge just inserted and forcing down the spring. The magazine may be charged with any number of car- tridges from one to seven. Before dismissing the squad, pistols will be inspected, and if found loaded, will be unloaded and magazines withdrawn to prevent loaded or partially loaded magazines being left in the pistol. Except at target practice, on guard duty, or active service, the pistol is habitually carried unloaded with empty magazine. EMPLOYMENT OF THE PISTOL. 157. The pistol is primarily a weapon for use at very close range. Its characteristic employment by cavalry is in mounted firing from a horse moving at a rapid gait. Under such con- ditions its effectiveness is almost negligible at ranges over 25 yards against individuals or over 50 yards against a line in close order except in the hands of exceptionally skilled shots, and the effectiveness rapidly decreases at ranges over 5 to 10 yards. These limitations on the use of the pistol are due not to its short range as a weapon but to the difficulties of direct- ing it accurately under the conditions of use. While the pistol is a weapon employing fire action, its tactical employment is more nearly analogous to that of either the saber or bayonet than to that of the rifle. 158. From the preceding paragraph it results that there is no need, in connection with the employment of the pistol as a weapon of mounted combat, for commands that purport to designate a target or to indicate range or other details for the direction of fire. The only commands ordinarily needed are those required for instruction purposes. (See Small- Arms Firing Manual. ) 159. The effectiveness of the individual trooper in mounted pistol combat depends upon : (a) Thorough familiarity with the weapon and facility in manipulating its mechanism under all conditions. This is acquired by training in the Manual of the Pistol. Constant practice is necessary in rapidly drawing the pistol from its MANUAL OF THE SABER, DISMOUNTED. 59 holster, loading it, withdrawing magazine, and inserting mag- azine, at tirst at a halt, later in motion, and finally at rapid gaits. (b) Skill in firing the pistol. This is acquired by actual practice in the preliminary exercises and range firing as pre- scribed in the Small-Arms Firing Manual. (c) Control of the horse. This is acquired in the School of the Trooper. (d) The thorough inculcation in the trooper of the habit of withholding his fire until tcithin close range. This can well be accomplished in individual training by exercises in firing or simulating fire at one or more silhouette targets. The trooper approaches at a gait graduated in accordance with his state of training and is required to withhold his fire until he passes a certain line. 160. The other elements that enter into effective use of the pistol as a mounted weapon relate to the formations and tac- tics employed rather than to individual training. They per- tain, therefore, to collective rather than individual instruction. 161. If any command be required in connection with the characteristic use of the pistol in mounted combat, it consists simply of an indication of the moment at which fire may begin. For this purpose the command COMMENCE FIRING may be employed in any case for which a command may be desirable. MANUAL OF THE SABER, DISMOUNTED. 162. For this instruction, dismounted, the saber in the scab- bard is carried in the left hand. In the position of attention the saber will be held upright by the side, guard to the front, the shoe of the scabbard resting on the ground close to the left foot and just in front of the heel. The left arm will be extended, the fingers and thumb grasping the scabbard, back of the hand outward. In the necessary movements on foot with the saber in hand the saber is carried Mith the hilt to the front and higher than the shoe of the scabbard. Officers, dismounted, may carry the saber in the hollow of the left arm, elbow bent, forearm horizontal, guard of the saber to the front, blade vertical. An officer or noncommis- sioned officer habitually draws saber before giving any com- 60 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. maiicls involving the use of that weapon by those under him. Officers and noncommissioned officers out of ranks draw saber only on occasions when the men draw saber unless otherwise prescribed. The saber may be drawn for signaling. 163. The saber is intended for mounted combat. The in- structor will impress upon the recruit from the first that the use of the saber in war is ordinarily limited to occasions of mounted combat, and that instruction on foot in its use is merely preliminary to the mounted training which the recruit will receive later. 164. For dismounted instruction, if the squad is in ranks, the instructor causes intervals or distances (pars. 85-88) to be taken before drawing saber. 165. 1. Draw, 2. SABER. At the command draw, grasp the scabbard with the left hand about 4 inches from the mouth, place the left hand against the thigh, and carry the hilt to the front; turn the head slightly to the left without deranging the position and glance at the saber knot ; engage the right wrist in the saber knot and give it two turns inward to secure it ; grasp the hilt with the right hand and draw the saber about 6 inches from the scabbard and look to the front. At the command saber, draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to the front and upward to its full length, saber in pro- longation of the arm. Make a short pause with the saber raised, then bring it down with the blade against the hollow of the right shoulder, guard to the front, right hand at the hip, the third and fourth fingers on the back of the gTip and the elbow back. The left hand holds the scabbard as at attention. This is the position of carry saber dismounted. 166. 1. Return, 2. SABER. At the command return, grasp the scabbard as in draw saber and carry the opening to the front. Carry the saber to the front with arm half extended until the thumb is about 6 inches in front of the chin, the blade vertical, guard to the left, the thumb extended along the side of the grip, the little finger joined with the others. At the command saber, move the wrist to opposite the left shoulder, lower the blade and pass it across and along the left arm, point to the rear. Turn the head to the left, fixing MANUAL OF THE SABER, DISMOUNTED. 61 the eyes upon the opening of the scabbard ; raise the right hand and insert the blade in the scabbard and push it home. Disengage the wrist from the saber knot and resume the position of attention. 167. Being at carry saber: 1. Present, 2. SABER. Without changing the position of tlie left hand, execute at the command saber what is prescribed in par. 166 at the com- mand return, except that the grip is held in the full grasp. The saber is said to be held in the full grasp when all four fingers grasp the grip, the thumb extending along the back in the groove, the fingers pressing the back of the grip against the heel of the hand. Officers at the command : 1. Present, execute present saber as described above ; at the command : 2. SABER, they lower the saber until the point is 12 inches from the ground and directed to the front, guard to the left, right arm straight, hand beside the thigh. Mounted, the point is lowered to the level of the stirrup. 168. Being at carry saber: 1. Port, 2. SABER. Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right, bring the left hand to the position of the bridle hand and raise the saber to a vertical position, guard to the front, grip held in the full grasp, right hand about 12 inches in front of the shoulder. To resume the carry: 1. Carry, 2. SABER. 169. Being at carry saber, or in any position Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right and bend knees to simulate the posi- tion mounted. In- cline the body to the front from the waist ( not the hips). Let the blade fall to the front to a position nearly horizontal, elbow well away from the body, forearm and saber forming one straight line, guard to the right, point at the height of the ad- GUARD. Ou^rdL to the, # I?ive the stirrups, the strap uppermost. The blanket having been placed as previ- ously explained, the instructor commands : SADDLE. Seize the pommel of the saddle wath the left hand and the cantle with the right, approach the horse on the near side from the direction of the croup and place the center of the saddle on the middle of the horse's back, the end of the side bar about three-finger widths behind the point of the shoulder blade; let down the cincha strap and cincha, pass to the off side, adjust the cincha and straps, and see that the blanket is smooth ; return to the near side, raise the blanket slightly under the pommel arch so that the withers may not be com- pressed ; take the cincha strap in the right hand, reach under the horse and seize the cincha ring with the left hand, pass the end of the strap through the ring from underneath (from inside to outside), then up and through the upper ring from the outside; if necessary, make another fold in the same manner. 68 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The strap is fastened as follows : Pass the end through the upper ring to the front ; seize it with the left hand, place the fingers of the right between the outside folds of the strap, pull from the horse with the right hand and take up the slack with the left; cross the strap over the folds, pass the end of it with the right hand underneath and through the upper ring back of the folds, then down and under the loop that crosses the folds and draw it tightly ; weave the ends of the strap into the strands of the cincha. Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as follows: Pass the end through the upper ring to the rear ; seize it with the right hand ; place the fingers of the left hand between the outer folds of the strap ; pull from the horse with the left hand and take up slack with the right; pass the end of the strap underneath and draw it through the upper ring until a loop is formed ; double the loose end of the strap and push it through the loop and draw the loop taut. The free end should be long enough to be seized conveniently with the hand. Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right stirrup and then the left. The surcingle is then buckled over the saddle, and should be a little looser than the cincha. The cincha when first tied should admit a finger between it and the belly. After exercising for a while the cincha will be found too loose and should be tightened. (Jj) (S^vice saddle, model of 1912.) Troops equipped with this model will saddle as prescribed for the McClellan saddle with the following modifications : Place the saddle on the blanket so that the front edge of the side bar approaches the shoulder blade without pressing upon it. After the saddle has been so placed, let down the girth ; pass to the off side, adjust the girth and saddle skirt, and see that the blanket is smooth, return to the near side and push the blanket well up into the pommel arch ; reach under the horse, seize the girth with the left hand and bring up its free end to the near side of the saddle ; with the right hand raise the saddle skirt and buckle the girth straps to the corresponding buckles of the girth, beginning with the forward strap, lower the saddle skirt and let down the stirrups begin- SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 69 ning with the right stirrup. The girth should ordinarily be about 4 inches in rear of the point of the elbow. 182. To approximate the length of the stirrup straps before mounting, they are adjusted so tliat the length of the stirrup strap, including the stirrup, is about 1 inch less than the length of the arm, fingers extended. TO UNSADDLE. 183. The instructor commands: UNSADDLE. (a) (INIcClellan saddle.) Stand on the near side of the horse ; unbuckle and remove the surcingle ; cross the left stir- rup over the saddle ; loosen the cincha strap and let down the cincha ; pass to the oif side, cross the right stirrup, then the cincha ; pass to the near side, cross the cincha strap over the saddle ; grasp the pommel with the left hand, the cantle with the right, and remove the saddle over the croup and place it in front or rear of the horse as may be directed, pommel to the front ; grasp the blanket at the withers with the left hand and at the loin with the right, remove it in the direction of the croup, the edges falling together, wet side in, and place it on the saddle, folded edge on the pommel. If in the stable, place the saddle on its peg when taken off the horse. (6) (Service saddle, model of 1912.) Stand on the near side of the horse ; cross the left stirrup over the saddle ; raise the saddle skirt with the left hand, and with the right unbuckle the girth straps, beginning with the rear strap; let down the girth; pass to the off side; cross the right stirrup and then the girth over the saddle; pass to the neai' side, grasp the pommel with the left hand, the cantle with the right, and remove and dispose of the saddle as prescribed in (a). The service saddle, model 1912, should be hung on a bracket sufficiently wide for the saddle to rest on its side bars. If a narrower support is used, the saddle will rest on the low point in the leather seat and become misshapen. TO PUT ON AND TAKE OFF THE BIT AND BKIDOON BKIDLE (MODEL 1909). 184. Before bridling the curb chain is unhooked on the near side. The instructor commands: SRIDLE. ^ 70 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Take the reins in the right, the crownpiece in the left hand ; approach the horse on the near side, passing the right hand along his neck; slip both reins over his head and let them rest on his neck; take the crownpiece in the right hand and the lower left branch of the curb bit in the left hand, the forefinger against the mouthpiece, the snaffle bit above and resting on the mouthpiece of the curb bit; bring the crown- piece in front of and slightly below its proper position ; insert the thumb into the side of the mouth above the tush; press open the lower jaw and insert the bits by raising the crown- piece; with the left hand draw the ears gently under the crownpiece, beginning with the left ear ; arrange the forelock, secure the throatlatch, and hook up the curlb chain on the near side below the snaffle bit. The bridle is adjusted as prescribed in par. 302. The throatlatch should admit four fingers between it and the throat. 185. At the discretion of the instructor, the halter may be taken off before bridling, the reins being first passed over the neck ; the hitching strap, if not left at the manger or picket line, is tied around the horse's neck ; if the horse be saddled, in the near pommel ring. 186. The instructor commands: TTNBRIDLE. Stand on the near side of the horse; pass the reins over the horse's head, placing them on the bend of the left arm ; unhook the curb chain on the near side ; unbuckle the throat- latch, grasp the crownpiece with the right hand and, assisting with the left hand, gently disengage the ears; gently dis- engage the bits from the horse's mouth with the left hand by lowering the crownpiece ; place the crownpiece in the palm of the left hand, take the reins in the right hand, pass them together over the crownpiece, make two or three turns around the bridle, then pass the bight between the brow band and crownpiece and draw it snug. The bridle is hung up by the reins or placed across the sad- dle on the blanket. If the horse has no halter on, unbridle and push the bridle back so that the crownpiece will rest on the neck behind the poll until the halter is replaced. 187. Stand to horse: At this command each trooper places himself, facing to the front, on the near side of the horse, oppo- SCHOOI OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 71 site his head, and takes the position of attention, except that the right hand, nails down, grasps the reins, the forefinger separating tliem, about 6 inches from the bit. The bights of the reins rest on the neck near the pommel of the saddle. 188. To lead out: The troopers being at stand to horse, to leave the stable or picket line, the instructor commands • LEAD OUT. Each trooper, holding his right hand well up and firm leads his horse, without looking at him, to the place desio-- nated by the instructor. 189. Upon entering the riding hall or inclosure the instructor disposes the troopers upon a line at intervals of 3 vards the troopers at stand to horse, the horses correctly disposed' and perpendicular to the line of troopers. A horse is correctly disposed when he stands squarelv on all four feet, having his head, neck, and body in line. 190. Stirrups: The stirrups are properly adjusted when, the trooper being properly seated with the feet removed from the stirrups and the legs falling naturally, the tread of the stir- rups IS about 1 inch above the top of the heel of the shoe The stirrups should bear only the weight of the lower leg- about one-third of the foot should be inserted in the stirrup so that the ball of the foot rests on the tread, the heel lower than the toe. The flat of the stirrup strap should rest against the leg of the mounted trooper. To accomplish this the trooper's toe should be so inserted in the stirrup as to place the front branch of the latter on the outside. By the front branch of the stirrup is meant the forward branch as the stirrup hangs before the trooper mounts. Placing too much weight on the stirrup disturbs the seat and contracts the leg, hindering its freedom of action. If the toe is not inserted far enough the trooper risks losing his stirrup ; if inserted too far suppleness is diminished The heel is carried naturally lower than the toe if the ankle joint is not rigid. For the extended gallop, in the charge, for the use of weapons, and for leaping obstacles the foot is inserted fully in the stirrup. ^ 72 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 191. To tnount: Being at stand to horse, MOUNT. (a) Face to the right, drop the right rein, grasp the left rein in the right hand, talce two steps to the right, sliding the hand along the left rein, make a half face to the left when opposite the girth ; with the aid of the left hand take both reins in the right, forefinger between the reins, the right hand on the pommel, the reins coming into the hand on the side of the forefinger, and held so as to feel lightly the horse's mouth, the bight falling on the off side. Place the left foot in the stirrup, assisted by the left hand if neces- sary, and bring the left knee against the saddle ; grasp a lock of the mane with the left hand, lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger. (&) Spring from the right foot, keeping the hands firmly in place, the left knee bent and pressed against the saddle, bring the right foot by the side of the left, body inclining slightly forward ; pass the right leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching it, sit down lightly in the saddle ; let go of the mane ; insert the right foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary ; take a rein in each hand, the rein coming into the hand under the little finger and passing out over the second joint of the forefinger, the thumbs closed on the reins, the bight of the reins falling to the right. The reins should be so held that the trooper feels lightly the horse's mouth, the fingers closed until the nails lightly touch the palms of the hands ; the reins well up in the crotch of the fingers ; the backs of the hands vertical and in pro- longation of the forearm ; the wrists flexible ; the elbows near the body and low, so that the forearms will be in pro- longation of the reins; the hands about 9 inches apart. The instructor takes care that the recruit in adjusting the reins provokes no movement of the horse and deranges in no manner the position of the horse's head. The instructor cautions the trooper to avoid touching the horse with the left toe in mounting; tbis fault begets nearly all the resistance of horses to standing quietly while being mounted. The modifications incident to mounting and dismounting a horse equipped with the double snaffle or bit and bridoon are indicated in pars. 271, 303, and 307. The troopers are also trained to mount on the right side. SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 78 192. To dismount: Being halted, DISMOUNT. (a) Seize the reins with the right hand in front of and near the left, forefinger between the reins, the reins entering the hand from the side of the forefinger ; drop the reins with the left hand ; place the right hand on the pommel ; grasp a lock of. the mane with the left hand, the lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger; take the right foot out of the stirrup. ( h ) Rise upon the left stirrup, pass the right leg, knee bent over the croup without touching the horse, and bring the right foot by the side of the left, the left knee against the saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward ; descend lightly to the ground and take the position of stand to horse. The troopers are also trained to dismount on the right side. 193. Commanding officers may authorize the following alter- native method of mounting and dismounting by officers and enlisted men on all occasions except those when it is required that mounting and dismounting be executed in unison at the corresponding command (par. 354). Instruction in the methods authorized in this paragraph is optional. Being at stand to horse, at the command MOUNT, face to the right, drop the right rein, take a step to the right to be oppo- site the shoulder of the horse ; at the same time seize the bights of the reins in the right hand and pull them taut enough to give a gentle, even bearing on the horse's mouth ; grasp the reins with the left hand, with the little finger between them, and the bight coming out between the thumb and forefinger, which also hold a lock of the mane. Place the left foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary, and bring the left knee against the saddle. Place the right hand upon the cantle, rise by an effort of the right leg, aided by the arms, the left knee bent and pressed against the saddle, the upper part of the body in- clined slightly forward to keep the saddle from turning; bring the right foot by the side of the left; change the right hand to the pommel, pass the right leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching it, and sit down lightly in the saddle. Put the right foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary. At the command DISMOUNT, pass the right rein into the left hand and grasp with this hand a lock? of the mane, place T4 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. the right hand on the pommel, and remove the right foot from the stirrup ; pass the right leg, knee bent, over the croup with- out touching the horse and bring the right foot by the side of the left, the left knee against the saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward, right hand on the cantle. Descend lightly to the ground and take the position of stand to horse. 194. To take the reins in one hand and to separate them: At the command IN LEFT HAND TAKE REINS, place the left hand opposite the middle of the body, pass the right rein into the left hand, separating it from the left rein by the little finger ; let the right hand fall by the side. 195. At the command IN BOTH HANDS TAKE REINS, grasp the right rein with the right hand and replace the hands 9 inches apart. The reins are taken in the right hand and again separated in a similar manner. 196. To adjust the reins the trooper brings the wrists to- gether and grasps with one hand, above and near the opposite thumb, the rein that he desires to shorten. 197. The instructor causes the reins to be dropped and re- taken by the commands DROP REINS and REINS. At the first command, the trooper drops tiie reins behind the pommel and lets the hands fall by the side. The reins are dropped as an exceptional measure, and always with precaution against accident. 198. Position of the trooper, or attention (mounted) : The position described below should be considered a standard toward which all troopers should gradually approximate. The buttocks bearing equally upon and well forward in the middle of the saddle. The thighs turned without constraint upon their flat side, clasping the horse evenly and stretched only by their own weight and that of the lower legs. The knees bent and flexible. The lower legs falling naturally, the calves in contact with the horse without pressure, the toes dropping naturally when the trooper is without stirrups. The back supple and never hollowed. The upper part of the body easy, free, and erect. The shoulders thrown back evenly. SCHOOL OF THE TEOOPER, MOUNTED. 75 The arms free, the elbows falling naturally. The head - erect and turned to the front, but without stiffness. Eyes alert, well up, and directed to the trooper's front. The reins held as heretofore prescribed. This position may be modified by the instructor to suit varying conditions and unusual conformations. When not at attention, the head and eyes are directed so as best to favor alertness and observation. In other respects the position should be practically unchanged. 199. The body and lower legs are movable and should be under the control of the trooper, either acting intermittently as aids for guiding the horse or as a means of binding the rider to the horse while following his movements. The thighs, on the other hand, should remain fixed im- movably to the saddle, except while posting at the trot. This fixity should be obtained not by the pressure of the knees but by the clinging of the buttocks, which is secured by the suppleness of the loins and the relaxation of the thighs. It is acquired very rapidly by daily *' rotation of the thighs," which gradully presses the large thigh muscles to the rear and permits the femur to rest solidly against the saddle. The trooper should sit with his buttocks well under the upper part of his body, and especially avoid bowing the back by thrusting the buttocks to the rear and the lower part of the spine to the front. Sitting well forward in the middle of the saddle will tend to assist the trooper in avoiding the defect just referred to. If the buttocks are thrust back too much, the trooper can not conform to the movements of the horse and carries forward the upper part of his body. If the thigh is too nearly horizontal, the trooper is doubled up and his power of action diminished ; if the thigh is too nearly vertical, the trooper is on the crotch and lacks ease. To sum up : The trooper should take a relaxed sitting posi- tion, squarely on his buttocks, with the thighs inclined down- ward. The various defects of position are overcome by suitable suppling exercises (pars. 209-220). 200. The aids. — The legs, the reins, and the weight are the means of controlling the horse in riding. They are called the aids. 76 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 201. The legs: The legs serve to urge the horse forward, to increase his pace or gait, and to engage the hinci quarters or move them laterally. The legs act by the pressure of the calves. If pressure alone is insufficient the trooper increases the action by blows with his calves. It is essential to obtain from the horse perfect obedience to the action of the legs. He should respond to the simultaneous and equal action of both legs by engaging his hindquarters and moving forward ; to the predominant action of one leg by moving his haunches to the opposite side. 202. The reins: The reins serve to prepare the horse to move, to decrease or increase his pace, to change the gait, or to change direction. Contact is a light bearing of the mouth of the horse on the hand of the rider. It should be constantly maintained. The reins are held in the full hand, the thumb pressing them lightly upon the second joint of the forefinger. By means of closing and relaxing the fingers and flexing the wrist, arm, and shoulder, the trooper, while maintaining con- tact and keeping the reins taut, follows easily the movements of the head of the horse without anticipating or interfering with these movements. The hand is then said to be passive. It is kept so as long as the trooper is not required to change the pace, gait, or direction. 203. The direct rein: When the trooper, with the hands sep- arated and the reins adjusted, closes his fingers upon the reins without raising the hands he exercises an action from front to rear, called the effect of the direct reins. This effect, when on one rein only, is called that of the right (or left) direct rein. 204. The leading rein: When the trooper carries the right hand to the right and forward in a manner to preserve contact but not to increase pressure on the bit the effect is called that of the right leading rein. The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation of the forearm, the elbow remaining near the body. The horse's head and neck are drawn to the right, the shoul- ders follow, and he turns to the right. 205. The bearing rein; When the trooper carries the right hand forward, upward, and to the left in a manner to pre- SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 77 serve contact, but not to increase pressure on the bit, the effect is said to be that of the right bearing rein. The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation of the forearm. The horse's head is turned slightly to the right, but the effect is to the left ; the neck bends and is convex to the left and is followed by the shoulders. The horse turns to the left. The action of the bearing rein is much more powerful than that of the leading rein, and is used to the exclusion of the latter to turn the horse when riding with the reins in one hand. 206. The indirect rein of opposition: When the trooper car* ries the right hand to the left in a manner to press the shoul- ders to the left and to produce a diagonal traction on the rein in the direction of the left shoulder or haunch the effect is called that of the right indirect rein of opposition. Its effect may be produced in front of the withers if the hand be slightly raised ; in rear of the withers if the hand be slightly lowered. It is frequently used by the trooper when riding with one hand (as he must do in order to use his weapons), and its effect should be studied and practiced from the beginning. 207. Manner of applying the aids: The action of the reins and legs and weight should not be continuous. The trooper alternately closes and relaxes the fingers, the hands preserv- ing contact in the intervals between the actions. In the same manner he uses the legs, neither gripping nor releasing alto- gether, but preserving light contact in the intervals between the blows with the calves. The weight likewise is used in a similar manner, being quickly applied to the front, to the rear, or to a side, alternating with returns to the normal position. If an action of the aids is prolonged the horse has oppor- tunity to establish the corresponding resistance, but if pro- duced by repeated applications the effect is very marked. All action of the aids should diminish in intensity when obedience begins and cease entirely as soon as the desired result is secured. Troopers must be thoroughly trained in riding with the reins in one hand. 78 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 208. The instructor, in teaching troopers to avail themselves of their legs and reins, is governed by the preceding consid- erations, and from the first watches vigilantly the action of the aids. The hand should always be kept low. The most thought- ful care should be exercised in the combined application of the aids, so that they may not be opposed to each other in their action ; that is, one favoring the intended movement, the other opposing it. The instructor impresses upon the troopers that their hands must be kept still ; that is, free from bobbing up and down, and pulling, and from giving and taking when there is no reason therefor. Likewise their legs should remain in light contact with the horse's sides and the heels not be used to kick the horse constantly in a nervous manner. Moreover, that the effects of the aids may be perfectly clear, and that there may be no contradiction between them, there should never he simultaneous action of the direct reins demanding slowing up or halting and of the legs provoking a forward movement. This condition is essential for preserving the composure indispensable to the horses of the troop. 209. Suppling exercises. — Before the suppling exercises are given at the various gaits they should be thoroughly ex- plained and practiced at the halt. These exercises, if understood and intelligently applied, produce rapid results. They are given daily throughout the entire course of instruc- tion of the trooper with a view to — (a) Strengthening the muscles used in riding. (&) Assuring the correct seat. (c) Giving the trooper balance and inspiring him with confi- dence in his ability to maintain his seat, while inducing gen- eral suppleness and relaxation of the body. {d) Accustoming him to keep the thighs constantly pressed against the horse. (e) Leading him to acquire independence in the use of the aids. The exercises herein indicated are recommended as the most useful, but they are not the only ones in which the troopers may be exercised. SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 79 Instructors may add other suitable exercises for the pur- pose of varying the work and adding to its interest. 210. To execute the suppling exercises a movement is an- nounced and begun without further command. The movement is then continued and repeated until the command : AS YOTJ WERE. The troopers take the reins in one or both hands, drop and retake them, as necessary, without command. 211. Flexion of the loins: At the command BEND TO THE RIGHT AND LEFT, the trooper, without deranging the position of the hands or of the part- of the body lielow the waist, slowly inclines the upper part of the body to the right ; then, return- ing slowly through the initial position, makes a corresponding movement to the left. At the command STROKE YOTJR HORSE ON THE RIGHT FLANK, sit down in the saddle by pushing th© buttocks for- ward, turn the body at the hips without deranging the posi- tion of the legs and, leaning backward but not to the side, place the right hand as low as possible on the horse's flank. 212. Rotation of the loins: At the command STROKE YOTJR HORSE ON THE LEFT HAUNCH WITH THE RIGHT HAND, turn in the saddle without deranging the seat or the posi- tion of the thighs and stroke the horse on the left haunch with the right hand, taking care to avoid opening out the left elbow or pulling on the reins. 213. Rotation of the arm: At the command ROTATE THE RIGHT ARM VERTICALLY, extend the arm upward, palm to the front ; then drop the arm to the rear and describe slowly and with uniform movement a vertical circle, keeping the head erect and high while the arm is descending. 214. Rotation of the thigh: At the command ROTATE THE RIGHT THIGH, remove the knee from the saddle and carry it back, straightening the leg ; turn the knee in as much as pos- sible and then, replacing the thigh flat upon the saddle, draw it forward to its normal position w^ith much friction in order to press the thick muscles to the rear and to permit the femur to rest solidly against the saddle. 215. Raising the thighs: At the command RAISE THIGHS, raise the knees only so much as is necessary to detach the thighs and lower legs from the saddle, and incline the upper part of the body slightly backward. If the trooper is sitting 80 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. too far back in the saddle, the instructor directs him to draw himself forward by grasping the pommel. This position compels the trooper to supple his body in order to keep his seat. When his equilibrium is well established the trooper gently replaces his thighs upon the saddle, being careful to keep his loins in the same position as during the movement. This exercise fixes the loins in place and puts them in proper position to maintain the balanced seat. It is executed only at a walk, slow trot, or canter. 216. Flexion of the leg: At the command FLEX THE RIGHT LEG, bend the leg slowly without deranging the position of the knee or that of the body. 217. Flexion of the ankle: At the command CIRCLE THE RIGHT FOOT, trace with the toe of the designated foot, by a slow and uniform movement, a vertical circle from outward inwardly, and from below upward, without disturbing the posi- tion of the leg. The circle with the right foot is made clock- wise, with the left foot contraclockwise. 218. To vault into the saddle and to the ground: At the com- mand VAULT INTO THE SADDLE, take position as prescribed in (a) of paragraph 191, except that the left foot is not in- serted in the stirrup ; spring upward and forward, bearing the weight upon the extended arms ; remain a moment in this posi- tion, then throw the right leg, knee bent, over the croup with out touching it and sit down lightly in the saddle. Take a rein in each hand. 219. To vault to the ground: At the command VAULT TO THE GROUND, take position as prescribed in (a) of par. 192. Rise upon the extended arms; pass the right leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching it; carry it to the side of the left; remain a moment in this position and come lightly to the ground, the heels joined, the knees bent. Take the position of stand to horse. 220. To vault to the ground and into the saddle without pause the instructor commands: VAULT TO THE GROUND AND INTO THE SADDLE. The troopers are frequently exercised in vaulting into the saddle and to the ground, and to the ground and into the saddle from both sides. SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 81 Diiringr the early lessons these movements are to be executed only at the halt. When the instruction is well advanced the recruits will be trained to vault into the saddle and to the ground while the horse is in motion, worked on the longe by the instructor. During the exercises at the trot and gallop the trooper when dismounted keeps pace with the horse at the shoulder by means of the galloping step, which he executes (keeping one hand on the withers) by a succession of leaps, rising and alighting with the rise and fall of the forehand of the horse, keeping the left or right foot in advance, according as he is on the left or right side of the horse, and supporting his weight on the balls of the feet. Frequent short rests should be given in order not to strain or unduly fatigue men who are not accustomed to the exercises. The vault into the saddle while the horse is in motion is executed as prescribed from the halt, except that the trooper is at the galloping step ; that he springs forward faced to the front, and that as he drops into his seat he catches against the side with his leg to avoid passing over the horse. Vaulting to the ground is exec\ited as prescribed from the halt, except that when the legs are joined the trooper presses the leg against the side of the horse to push his body clear and alights on the ground faced to the front and takes the galloping step. 221. To rest: Being at stand to horse, the command rest is executed as in the school of the trooper dismounted, except that the troopers hold the reins and keep their horses in place. Being mounted, at the halt, at the command REST, or being in march, at the command ROUTE ORDER, the men are per- mitted to turn their heads, to talk, and to make slight changes of position, but not to lounge on their horses or to lose their relative places. Being at stand to horse, the command AT EASE is executed as in the school of the trooper dismounted. Being mounted, at the command AT EASE the men are per- mitted to turn their heads or to make slight changes of posi- tion, but preserve silence. 38218 °— 18 6 82 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. To resume the attention : 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION. Each trooper if dismounted takes the position of stand to horse; if mounted, he takes the position of the trooper mounted (par. 198). 222. To dismiss: Tlie troopers being dismounted, in column of troopers, at the command FALL OUT the leading trooper leads his horse directly to tlie stable or picket line. Tlie other troopers follow in their existing order at 4 feet distance until near their places in the stable or on the line, when they leave the column and move directly to their respective places. The troopers being dismounted, in line with intervals (par. 189), at the commands: 1. By the right (left), 2. FALL OUT, the right trooper leads directly to the stable or picket line. The other troopers follow and complete the execution of the command as indicated above. If the troopers are facing their respective positions on the picket line, the command FALL OUT may be given. Each trooper then moves directly to his place. Under the direction of the instructor each trooper removes his equipment, cares for and secures his horse, cleans his equipment, and places the latter as prescribed. The instructor satisfies himself by inspection that the horses and equipments are properly cared for and that the precautions required on the return from exercise have been observed. ' The men are then ordered to fall in, marched to the troop parade, and are there dismissed as prescribed in the school of the trooper dismounted. 223. Stand to heel: At this command each man stands at attention 1 yard in rear of and facing his horse. Second Period, or Work on the Snaffle. General provisions (par. 224). The walk (par. 225). To gather the horse (par. 226). To move forward (par. 227). To halt (par. 228). By the right or left flank (par. 229). The oblique by trooper (par. 230). General provisions regarding work on the track (par. 231). Marching on fixed points and upon a designated objective (par. 232). SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 83 Circling (par. 233). The trot (par. 234). The gallop (pars. 235-237). The gallop depart (par. 238). Changes of gait (par. 239). To change hands (par. 240). Suppling exercises with the horse in motion (par. 241). Posting (par. 242). Care of horses and saddlery (par. 243). The use of arms, mounted (pars. 244-255). Inspection of arms and equipment, mounted (pars, 256-268). 224. General provisions: These exercises, in connection with the suppling exercises, embrace all that is necessary to give the recruit confidence, to make him supple, to give him steadi- ness in the saddle, and to prepare him to benefit by instruction in the first principles of equitation. The recruits are disposed on the track behind a leader, or mounted upon well-broken horses held on the longe, or each recruit is accompanied by an old trooper, who holds the horse of the recruit by a strap buckled to the snaffle. The instructor determines the order in which the various exercises are to be employed, according to the aptitudes and defects of the recruits under his charge. He must keep in mind that these various exercises are for the purpose of teaching the trooper his correct position on horseback at the different gaits and of preparing him to acquire independence in the use of the aids, instruction in which will be given in subse- quent lessons. In order to inspire confidence in the troopers and to enable them as soon as possible to remain long on horseback without weariness they should be permitted to use the stirrups in the first lessons. They are taught to ride without them (first at a walk and then at the faster gaits) only after they have become accustomed to the movement of the horse. The instructor mounts the recruits outside the riding hall or inclosure as soon as their progress warrants it. Each of the horses may at first be held in check by an old trooper, as previously indicated. 225. The walk: The walk is a gait in which the feet are raised successively and planted in the order in which raised; for example, right front, left hind; left front, right hind. «4 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The walk should be free. Its speed is about 117 yards per minute, or 4 miles per hour. 226. To gather the horse : Having a light pressure of the bit against the horse's mouth and a light feel of the lower legs against his sides, increase the pressure of the lower legs, heels well down, and slightly increase the pressure of the bit against the bars by squeezing the fingers on the reins. This is called gathering the horse. It serves as a signal to attract the attention of the horse and to prepare him to re- spond promptly to the subsequent application of the aids. The gather should be employed at the preparatory command whenever the corresponding command of execution is to involve response on the part of the horse to the application of the aids. This preparatory signal to the horse should always be the same whatever may be the movement that is to be executed and whatever the gait at which the horse may be moving. 227. To move forward: Being at a halt, at the command: 1. Forward, gather the horse. At the command : 2. MARCH, close the legs (already in contact with the horse) with a quick, sharp pressure, the hand remaining passive (par. 202). If the horse does not respond at once by moving forward continue until the horse moves forward at a walk (par. 239) a succession of similar leg pressures, each quick, distinct, and given with a degree of force graduated to the sensitiveness of the horse. A long continued squeezing effect with the legs is particularly to be avoided. 228. To halt: Being at the walk, at the command: 1. Squad, gather the horse. At the command: 2. HALT, sit well dowa in the saddle and carry the weight of the body upward and backward and act by the direct reins until the horse stops (pars. 203, 207). 229. By the right flank: 1. By the right flank, 2. MARCH. At the first command gather the horse. At the second com- mand carry both hands to the right until the horse has turned through an arc of 90°, and then replace the hands and move straight in the new direction. During the movement the legs maintain impulsion and hold the horse's body so that it fol- lows the curve on which he is turning; that is, if the horse tends to carry his haunches to the inside of the curve, the action of the inside leg should predominate; if he tends to SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 85 carry his haunches to the outside of the curve, then the action of the outside leg should predominate. When the trooper holds the reins in both hands he makes use simultaneously of the leading rein and the bearing rein. With the reins in one hand he makes use of the hearing rein only. The action of the reins in turning- is governed by the prin- ciples explained in paragraphs 204 and 205. The trooper carries the hands in the direction toward which he wishes to turn and displaces them only to the extent necessary. Event- ually the turn should be made on the arc of a circle whose radius is 2 yards at the* walk, 4 yards at the trot, and 6 yards at the gallop . 230. The oblique by trooper involves a change of direction of 45° to the right or left, executed by each trooper. The com- mands are : 1. Troopers, right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH. The movement is executed as in par. 229, except that each trooper turns his horse through an arc of only 45°. To resume the original direction of march by similar means : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. 231. Provisions regarding work on the track. — The trooper is said to march to the right hand or to the left hand according as he has his right or left side toward the inner side of the track. At the command TAKE THE TRACK TO THE RIGHT HAND, each trooper directs his horse straight toward the track, and arriving there turns toward the right. The troopers are distributed over the whole circumference of the track. They endeavor to keep their horses collected and moving straight to the front, and to preserve a free and even gait. The instructor observes that the troopers maintain the gait ordered while turning at the corners and that they approach the corners closely at the walk and trot ; he permits a larger radius at the gallop. To give oral instruction to all the troopers at the same time the instructor may command : RIDE IN. The troopers, mov- ing at the gait at which they were riding, or at the designated gait, and by the shortest line, group themselves about the instructor. To resume the ride, the instructor commands : CLOSE ON (SUCH TROOPER). The trooper designated (by name) takes the track and gait as indicated ^by the instructor. 86 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The other troopers move by the shortest line and place them~ selves on the track, one behind the other, with 4 feet distance from head to croup. As soon as the collective instruction is sufficiently advanced the commands and methods indicated in the school of the squad may be employed to group the troopers near the in- structor and to cause them to take the track again. As soon as the troopers understand the principles of con- trolling their horses, the instructor frequently commands : RIDE AT WILL. The troopers scatter out in the interior of the riding hall or rectangle or over ft larger designated area out of doors, and riding at the gait ordered execute the exer- cises on their own initiative. When troopers meet each keeps to the right. There should be much M-ork on the track without regard to distance between troopers in which the troopers are absolutely independent of each other, the only obligation being to main- tain the gait and to march to the hand directed when on the track. If the column becomes crowded, individual troopers are permitted to turn out at will and take the track at a con- venient place on the opposite side. They should move straight across the hall, maintaining the gait. The commands do not involve immediate compliance. Each trooper conforms to them when his place on the track and the state of preparation of his horse puts him in proper position to execute steadily the movement directed. Each should choose his ground so as to avoid interfering with his neigh- bors. 232. Marching upon fixed points and upon a designated ob- jective: The instructor also exercises the troopers in riding the horses at a designated gait upon a distant object. This exercise is begun as soon as possible and is continued during the whole course of instruction and combined progressively with the jumping of obstacles and the use of arras. To assist in the earlier phases of this instruction distinctive marks are placed on the walls of the riding hall or outside the rectangle to serve as points of direction. Proficiency in this exercise is essential to the satisfactory execution of collective movements, and instruction in it must be correspondingly thorough. SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 87 233. Circling: The troopers being on the track, at the coin- mand IN CIRCLE, the leader, followed by the other troopers rides on a circle between the two tracks. At the command TAKE THE TRACK, the leader take's the track to the hand toward which he is marching, and is fol- lowed by the other troopers. 234. The trot: The trot is a gait in which the horse springs from one diagonally disposed pair of feet to the other ; between the beats all the feet are in the air. The rate of the maneuver- ing trot is 8 miles per hour or 235 yards per minute. For the purposes of individual instruction the rate may be reduced to 6 miles per hour by the command: 1. Slow trot, 2. MARCH. At the command : 1. Trot, 2. MARCH, the rate of 8 miles per hour is resumed. The trot alternating with the walk is the gait best adapted for long road marches. When trotting without stirrups the trooper endeavors to reduce the shock by suppling his back ; ^^'hen with stirrups, by posting. 235. The gallop. — The gallop is the most rapid of the gaits. It must not be used unnecessarily over long distances, particu- larly on hard roads and when the saddle is packed. How- ever, when the rapidity of the regulation trot is not sufficient the trooper out of ranks should take the gallop in preference to increasing the speed of the trot. 236. The varieties of the gallop are: The maneuvering gallop, which is at the rate of 12 miles per hour, or 352 yards per minute. The extended gallop 'which is at the rate of 16 miles per hour, or 469 yards per minute. The school gallop, which is at the rate of about 8 miles per hour. The horse is said to gallop with the right lead when the right fore is planted in front of the left fore and the right hind in front of the left hind. When the feet are planted in the inverse order the horse is said to gallop with the left lead. The gallop is marked by three beats and a period of sus- pension. If the horse be galloping with the right lead, the first beat is marked by the left hind foot, the second by the nearly 88 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. simultaneous placing of the right hind the left fore feet, and the third by the placing of the right fore foot. In. galloping with the left lead the beats are right hind, left hind and right fore, left fore. A horse gallops true when he gallops with the right lead in turning to the right and with the left lead in turning to the left. He gallops false when he gallops with the left lead in turn- ing to the right, or conversely. A horse is disunited when he gallops with the right lead with his fore feet and with the left lead with his hind feet, or conversely. 237. The gallop should be begun on the circle because the horse thus starts off more calmly and the trooper is enabled to regulate the pace by describing a circle of greater or less radius. As soon as the horse breaks into the gallop the trooper moves in cadence with his horse. The back and legs unite in the rhythm of the gait, the hands accompany gently and without exaggeration the movements of the head and the neck. During the gallop the command at ease is frequently given. The troopers execute the suppling exercises which have been indicated as necessary in each case; they abandon themselves completely to the motion of the horse and thus acquire ease and flexibility. Prolonged periods at the gallop on calm and free-moving horses are most favorable for easily obtaining this result. 238. The gallop depart: The aids used to cause thef horse to take the gallop with the right lead (par. 236) are: Left direct rein, to restrain the left shoulder ; left leg a little in rear of the girth, to push the haunches a little to the right ; weight slightly on the left buttock ; right leg on the girth ; right rein taut to prevent bending the neck too much to the left ; both legs thus placed used vigorously to push the horse into the gallop. Corresponding aids are used to obtain the gallop depart with the left lead. With some old horses that have been habitually galloped with one lead it will be very difficult to get the other lead. SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 89 In these cases, or when time is too limited to practice proper methods, the following rough method will serve the purpose: If the horse habitually gallops with lead left and a lead right is desired, take a good extended trot on the right hand, approach the knee guard of the riding hall at an angle of about 45°, with the horse well up against the bit, and just as the horse reaches the guard kick hard with the left heel and let him move along the track to the right at the gallop. In all probability the lead right will be had ; if so, maintain it for some time, using the correct aids. A few of these lessons will be sufficient. 239. Changes of gait: To pass from the halt or the walk to the trot or the gallop, the means prescribed for passing from the halt to the w^alk are employed and continued until the desired gait is taken (par. 227). To pass from the gallop to the trot, the trot to the walk, or to halt, the means prescribed for passing from the walk to the halt are employed and continued until the desired gait is taken or the horse has stopped (par. 228). The commands are: 1. Trot, 2. MARCH; 1. Gallop, 2. MARCH; 1. Walk, 2. MARCH; and 1. Squad, 2. HALT. Changes of gait are habitually made progressively, the walk being taken from the halt, the trot from the walk, the gallop from the trot, and vice versa. For instruction purposes and when necessary in service an increase or decrease of gait may be made more abruptly. A change from the halt to the walk, from the walk to the trot, from the trot to the gallop, or vice versa, is to be under- stood when reference is made in these regulations to a change of gait of one degree. 240. To change hands: At the command CHANGE HANDS, each trooper after having passed the corner and marched a horse length on the long side directs himself toward the diagonal corner so as to take the track to the opposite hand and at about two horse lengths from the corner. Troopers pass those going in an opposite direction by keeping to the right. 241. Suppling exercises with the horse in motion: The exer- cises which have been taught at the halt are repeated at the different gaits, except as indicated. 90 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. To pat the squad in march the instructor designates a trooper to act as leader and causes him to take the track; he then causes tlie recruits to take their places in column of troopers behind the leader. The instructor limits his explanations to the essential princi- ples for putting the horse in motion and stopping him. The troopers are restricted to letting their horses follow those in front. The instructor is especially careful that the movement of one part of the body does not react on any other part; for example, that an exercise of the right arm does not disturb the left arm nor the position of loins or legs. Any movement is proper Mdiich engages the trooper's atten- tion and leads him to forget that he is on horseback and thereby brings about relaxation. The end desired is attained by the frequency and variety of the exercises; the instructor must carefully avoid prolonging a movement to weariness, which inevitably brings on rigidity. He must likewise avoid any movement that would result in lifting the buttocks from the saddle or in sinking the loins and hollowing the back. At first the gait should be the walk or the slow trot. The 8-mile trot should not be used. The gallop should be employed very early in the instruction ; it is the most favorable gait for suppling the loins. As soon as the troopers have acquired a fair security of seat at the trot and have grown accustomed to a fast gait the instructor begins to train them at the gallop. The first les- sons are given on a large circle so that the horses will have less tendency to pull. The troopers retain their stirrups until they have gained confidence. The instructor causes them to abandon the stirrups when he believes that sufficient progress has been made. As soon as the instructor causes the trooper to take the reins he teaches him to keep touch with the mouth of the horse, while leaving the horse the free use of his neck. To do this it is necessary for the trooper to follow with his hands the movements of the horse's neck. The cadence at the increased gaits is easy to follow with the reins lightly held. In a short time the hand follows in- stinctively the movement of the neck. SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER, MOUNTED. 91 Constant effort should be made to overcome stiffness of the arms and shoulders, which is the usual cause of a heavy hand. 242. Posting: Posting is habitually employed when the troop- ers have stirrups and understand their use. It is executed as follows: The horse moving at a trot, the trooper inclines the upper part of his body forward, then supporting himself on the stirrups Vv'hile maintaining the clinging of his knees he rises under the impulsion of the horse, maintains his position detached from the saddle while the. succeeding impulse is produced, again sits down in the saddle, and continues in this way, avoiding alternate impulses. At the beginning the mechanism of posting is made easier to the trooper by causing him to stroke the horse's neck or to grasp a lock of the mane with either hand, thus determining the forward inclination of the body. Its proper execution requires that the seat be raised moder- ately, that contact with the saddle be resumed gently and without shock, that the full support of the stirrup be obtained wiiile keeping the lower leg steady, that the ankle joint be supple, and that the heel be kept lower than the toe, 243. Care of horses and saddlery: The recruits will be given talks and practical illustrations in every phase of the care of horses and the care of saddlery. This in addition to their daily attention to those subjects as a matter of routine. 244. The use of arms, mounted. — During the period in ^yhich the instruction in the school of the trooper is held, there must be thorough instruction in the use of arms mounted. After the first few drills there should be daily instruction in some phase of this important part of the trooper's training. Progress in the more advanced steps of this instruction must necessarily depend upon the trooper's progress in horsemanship; but by making the dismounted instruction thorough and keeping it well in advance of the corresponding parts of the mounted program, many difficulties will be obviated and much time saved. Success with the pistol and saber will be dependent upon that familiarity with their use that can be gained only by daily practice extending over a considerable period. The dismounted instruction already prescribed in connection with the use of the weapons must be supplemented by thorough mounted work at all gaits, when passing obstacles, etc. The trooper must learn to control his horse thoroughly with one 92 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. hand wliile carrying and using his weapon in the other; he must learn to handle his weapon mounted with a minimum of danger to himself, his comrades, or his horse. The principal drill on at least one day of each week during the entire period devoted to the school of the trooper should ordinarily be de- voted to the above instruction, thus supplementing and testing the results accomplished in the shorter daily drills. At this v»^eekly drill the troopers should habitually appear fully armed and equipped, the saddles being packed as for field service. The employment of the saber mounted is taught as pre- scribed in the Saber Exercise; the use of the pistol in firing mounted, as prescribed in the Small- Arms Firing Manual. 245. Manual of the Saber, Mounted: The saber suspended from the left side of the saddle — 1. Draw, 2. SABER. Pass the right hand over the reins and execute with it rapidly what is prescribed for drawing the saber on foot; place the pommel near the hip and resting on top of the thigh, flat of the blade against the point of the shoul- der. This is the position of carry saber, mounted. 246. The saber suspended from the right side of the saddle — 1. Draw. Turn the head to the right without deranging the position of the body and glance toward the hilt ; engage the right wrist in the saber knot ; pull the hilt forward ; seize the grip in the full hand, nails to the right ; draw the blade 6 inches from the scabbard, and look to the front. 2. SABER. Draw the saber as prescribed on foot and take the position of carry saber. 247. The troopers are also exercised in drawing the saber as quickly as possible at the single command : DRAW SABER. 248. To return saber: The scabbard suspended from the left side of the saddle — 1. Return. Execute as prescribed on foot. 2. SABER. Execute as prescribed on foot, supporting the back of the blade against the left forearm until the point is engaged in the scabbard. This command is given only at a halt or when marching at a walk. 249. The scabbard suspended on the right — 1. Return. Execute as prescribed on foot. 2. SABER. Carry the wrist opposite the right shoulder; lower the blade to the right of the horse's neck; let the grip MANUAL OF THE SABER, MOUNTED. 93 turn in the hand so that the hand grasps the guard at the pommel, back of the hand up ; turn the head to the right and fix the eyes on the opening of the scabbard ; raise the hand ; insert the blade and push it home; disengage the wrist from the saber knot ; and turn the head to the front. When the saber is carried on the right the return saber is executed, so far as possible, at the halt. 250. Inspection saber and present saber are executed as when dismounted. 251. Guard. — ^Thrust the feet home in the stirrups and crouch slightly in the saddle, bending forward from the waist. Other- wise as explained dismounted. In the charge in close order the trooper (in single rank) assumes the position indicated in par. 297, the body almost in a horizontal line over the horse's neck, the arm fully extendeo to the front, the saber, in the full grasp, in prolongation of the arm, guard up, finger nails to the right, point at the height of the eye. When difficult ground is encountered the trooper takes the position of guard while passing it. If charging in double rank, the front-rank troopers conform to the positions indicated for single rank. Those troopers who are in the rear rank or who are directly in rear of others, take the position of port saber. In the melee the troopers take the position of guard toward the nearest enemy, crouching slightly in the saddle and alive to all possible attacks. Manual of the Pistol, Mounted. 252. The modifications of the dismounted manual, incident to the employment of the pistol mounted are explained in the cor- responding paragraphs of the Manual of the Pistol, Dismounted (pars. 145-156). THE KIFLE. (For troops armed with the Cavalry Equipment, Model of 1912.) 253. Before standing to horse the trooper attaches his rifle to his belt by passing the muzzle up through the belt ring and engaging the snap hook of the belt ring into the trigger guard. 94 CAVALEY DRILL REGULATIONS. Beins^ at stand to horse, upon any preparatory command, except for mounting or securing horses, unsling the rifle from the belt ring and take the position of order arms, removing the snaffle reins from the horse's neck and passing the right arm through them if necessary. If a command to secure horses is given, link or couple first and then unsling the rifle. To mount, proceed as without the rifle. When seated in the saddle, grasp the rifle at the bolt with the left hand, barrel to the front, place the butt of the rifle in the bucket, steady- ing the latter with the left foot if necessary and take the position of the trooper mounted. To dismount: At the preparatory command, seize the rifle at the bolt with the left hand, give it a quick, forcible pull, lifting the butt from the bucket, and let the rifle hang from the belt. (For troops armed with equipment corresponding to the MeClellan saddle.) 254. At stand to horse, the rifle is held on the left side of the trooper in a position corresponding to order arms (par. 93), as modified by substituting the word left for right wherever the latter occurs. In leading out, and on all occasions when the trooper leads his horse for short distances, the rifle is carried at the left trail (par. 108) unless otherwise prescribed. 255. In mounting, the rifle is inserted in the scabbard after the trooper steps back opposite the girth and before he takes the reins in his right hand (par. 191). On dismounting, each trooper, after placing the bights of the reins on the horse's neck, and before stepping forward to take the position of stand to horse (par. 192), takes the rifle from the scabbard and assumes the left trail. A modification of this provision applies when the trooper dismounts for inspection. The rifle is never carried on the saddle when the trooper is dismounted, except as specially authorized at inspections, with the equipment corresponding to the MeClellan saddle (par. 262). 256. Inspection of arms and equipment, mounted. — It is as- sumed that the troopers before being formally inspected mounted and under arms, Mill have advanced in elementary collective instruction to a point when they can be formed and INSPECTION OF ARMS, MOUNTED. 95 aligned as a mounted squad (par. 350). Should this not be the case, the instructor will place the troopers in line with inter- vals in advance of the inspection. References to the guide and to alignment will then be disregarded and the command front will be omitted. The inspection is described below upon the assumption that all arms are inspected. The inspection of pistols is explained for both the mounted and dismounted execution. The neces- sary modification in case the inspection of any weapon be omitted is indicated in par. 266. 257. When arms are inspected mounted they are always in- spected in the order : Saber, pistol. AVhen inspected dis- mounted they are always inspected in the order : Rifle, pistol. Sabers are not inspected dismounted, nor are rifles inspected mounted. Pistols may be inspected either mounted or dis- mounted. 258. The troopers being mounted and fully armed and in line: 1. Prepare for inspection, 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT. At the second command all align themselves on the guide. The inspector, having verified the alignment, takes position 3 yards to the right and front of the right trooper, facing to the left, and commands: FRONT, followed by: 1. Draw, 2. SABER (par. 165). 259. If it is not intended to inspect the pistols mounted, the inspector cautions PISTOLS WILL NOT BE INSPECTED MOUNTED, and approaches the right of the rank. 260. As the inspector approaches, the first two troopers exe- cute the first motion of inspection saber (par. 170), the first trooper, as the inspector comes in front of him, executes the second and third motions of inspection saber ; the second trooper, as the inspector comes in front of him, executes the second and third motions of inspection saber, the first trooper at this instant resuming the carry and the third trooper executing the first motion of inspection saber. The first trooper then returns saber. As the inspector comes in front of the other troopers the movements are executed successively as just explained. 261. The inspector, having completed the inspection of sabers, passes in rear from the left to the right of the rank. As he approaches the right of the rank the first two troopers (in the absence of indication to the contrary) (par. 259) exe- 96 CAVALHY DRILL REGULATIONS, cute inspection pistol (par. 148). Each of the other troopers, in order from right to left, successively executes inspection pistol in time to complete the execution just before the in- spector arrives in front of him. Each trooper executes return pistol as the inspector passes to the trooper next on his left. 262. To inspect the rifles, to inspect the pistols dismounted, or to inspect the dress and equipment of the squad more mi- nutely, the inspector dismounts the squad without forming rank. Troopers when dismounted following the command prepare for inspection take a special position ; and a special exception is made in this case to the rule requiring the rifle (if not slung) to be taken from the scabbard upon dismounting (par. 255). Upon dismounting while at prepare for inspection each trooper takes the snaffle reins off the horse's neck, passes the right arm through the reins (the bight of the reins resting on the shoulder) and takes a position similar to stand to horse. The rifle is not unslung (or removed from the scabbard) unless it has been specially designated for inspection; it is then reslung or returned to the scabbard as soon as its in- spection is completed. A trooper dismounted at prepare for inspection, if his right hand be free, grasps the reins as in stand to horse. The" snaffle reins once talven from the neck as above are not replaced until the first command for mounting. The above position is habitually terminated by the first com- mand for mounting or by stand to horse. 263. If the inspector wishes to inspect the arms after dis- mounting, he cautions, immediatelii follotving the commands for dismounting: RIFLES AND PISTOLS {or RIFLES, or PIS- TOLS) WILL BE INSPECTED. Each trooper at once unslings his rifle (or takes it from the scabbard) and resumes his position similar to stand to horse, his rifle at the order, the reins as described in par. 262. 264. As the inspector approaches the right of the rank the trooper on the right executes inspection arms (par. 112), The inspector takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The inspector inspects the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in receiving it, hands it back to the man, INSPECTION OF ARMS AND EQUIPMENT. 97 who takes it with the left hand at the balance, executes port arms, and slings the rifle or places it in the scabbard, according to his equipment. As the inspector returns the piece the next man executes inspection arms, and so on through the troop. Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man proceeds as above as soon as the captain passes to the next man. 265. As the inspector approaches the right of the rank of odd numbers, after completing the inspection of the rifles of the even numbers, the first two troopers of the rank execute inspection pistol. To inspect the pistol closely the inspector grasps it with his left hand above the trooper's hand, makes such examination as is desired, and hands the pistol back to the trooper in the same position as that in which the inspector took the weapon. The trooper takes the pistol with the right hand as in inspec- tion pistol and executes return pistol. Should the pistols be inspected without handling, each man executes return pistol as the inspector passes to the next trooper. 266. If no indication be given for the inspection of rifles they remain slung or in the scabbard, according to the equipment carried. If only rifles are ordered inspected, pistols are not presented for inspection and rifles are slung or returned to the scabbard as soon as inspected. If only pistols are ordered inspected, they are presented by the two troopers on the right when the inspector approaches the rank the first time after dismounting. 267. During the inspection of arms the inspector observes the appearance of the men, horses, equipment, and clothing. After the inspection of arms is completed he makes such further inspection of equipment, clothing, etc., as he may con- sider desirable. During this part of the inspection the troopers may be permitted to stand at ease. 268. If an inspection of arms of a detailed character be made in connection with a dismounted formation it is con- ducted by the above commands and in accordance with the above methods in so far as applicable. Rifles are presented for inspection as described without special indication when the 38218 °— 18 7 98 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. inspector approaches the rank after commanding FRONT (par. 258). Except when rifles are slung as provided in the next sentence, each trooper executes order arms as soon as his rifle is returned to him. Should the troopers be armed with both rifle and pistol, each trooper slings his rifle as soon as inspected if the equipment in use so permits ; otherwise the rifles are stacked (par. 115) by command after being inspected. The pistols are then inspected, after which take arms (par. 116) is executed before Mie troopers are dismissed. Third Period, or Work on the Double Snaffle. General provisions (par. 269). To adjust the double snaffle (par. 271). The about (par. 272). Broken lines (par. 273). Serpentines (par. 274). The figure of eight (par. 275). Circling individually (par. 276). The half turn (par. 277). The half turn in reverse (par. 278). Increasing and decreasing the pace (par. 279). To back and halt (par. 280). Use of the aids (par. 281). To leave the ranks (par. 282). The false gallop (par. 283). Jumping obstacles (par. 284-289). Exercises on varied ground (par. 290, 291). Employment of the spur (par. 292). Work at fixed distances (par. 293). Changing the diagonal in posting (par. 294). Work on long lines (par. 295-298). Bit and bridoon (par. 299). Duty in the ranks of the troop (par. 300). • 269. General provisions: When the troopers have become familiar with the movements of the horse at each gait and have begun to find and keep a seat in the saddle, the in- structor advances then to work on the double snaffle for the X)urpose of teaching them the use of the aids, increasing their confidence and suppleness, and confirming them in their seats. WORK ON THE DOUBLE SNAFFLE. 99 The exercises indicated for the work on the double snaffle depend for their effect upon very simple actions, the only ones the recruits need be taught. It is important that in these exercises the recruits ride only docile and well-trained horses. The instructor returns frequently to the suppling exercises and causes each trooper to execute during rests the move- ments that he has indicated to him as especially adapted to correct his faults of position. The horses are equipped with the double snaffle bit and bare saddles and, at first, the troopers are without spurs. The exercises are conducted in the riding hall or outside in a rectangle, the corners of which are marked by elevated and conspicuous objects. These rectangles are of sufficient dimensions to enable the troopers to exercise with freedom while remaining under the eye of the instructor and within reach of his voice. The instructor changes the ground as soon as the tracks are worn to the extent that the horses follow them mechanically. He avoids placing the rectangle parallel to adjacent rectangles, roads, paths, or fences so that from the first the trooper is compelled to direct his horse. 270. The troopers are usually marched to and from the riding hall in column of twos or fours. The instructor avails him- self of the opportunity to instruct them in the movements indicated in the school of the squad. 271. To adjust the double snaflle: The bits should be ad- justed and the reins held, etc., as explained for the bit and bridoon (see par. 302), the snaffle corresponding to the curb being attached to the outside cheek pieces of the bridle. The instructor will show the recruits how to hold the reins with both hands, to change into the left hand and the right hand, and how to use the two bits for relaxing the jaw by vibrations and divisions of support (par. 958). 272. The about: At the command: 1. Troopers right (left) about, 2. MARCH, each trooper turns his horse until he finds himself facing in the opposite direction and then moves to his new front. Eventually the turn should be made on the arc of k circle whose radius is 2 yards at a walk, 4 yards at a trot, and 6 yards at a gallop. 100 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. r Fig. 25, par. 273. 273. Broken lines: The broken line consists of departures from and returns to the long side of the track by obliques. The command is : BROKEN" LINE, ONCE (TWICE, or THREE TIMES). As the trooper enters the long side he leaves the track by an oblique and, having marched the indicated distance, returns to the track by an oblique in the opposite direction. This is repeated the number of times specified ; at the other end of the long side the trooper retakes the track. This exercise has for its object teaching the rider to make rapid changes out of doors, at the walk, trot, or gallop, especially at the latter gait. It leads to work on ser- pentines, and eventually to figures of eight at the gallop without chang- ing the lead. (Fig. 25.) 274. Serpentines: The serpentine consists of successive abouts executed perpendicularly to the track and tangent to each other, as indicated in the figure. The rider causes the horse to make the turns slightly on the haunches, or slightly on the forehand, or with the body naturally following the curvature of the line, at the walk and slow trot, and eventually, when well advanced in the use of the aids, at the gallop without changing the lead. (Fig. 26.) 275. The figure of eight: This exercise con- sists in describing the figure eight, at first per- pendicular to the long sides of the track and tangent to them. Later, with dimensions pro- gressively reduced, as the riders become more skillful in the use of the aids. (Fig. 27.) r;- •^. ^' ^■^ *" ~N l i ^- -' 1 ^ r "y;' ~^'\ r-A. ^' v_ _x i^- ^ -» 1/ 1, X ^■4 N^- ._-' ^<» 1 1 *- v"' x^ '^\ i J Fig. 27, par. 275. __\ J Fig. 26, par. 274. INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS. 101 276. Circling individually: At the command: 1. Troopers circle to the right (left), 2. MARCH, each ^. __^ trooper describes, in accordance with the prin- | (" ^\ ^y ciples explained in par. 229, a complete circle ' \ ) /^--^ tangent to the track, with a radius less than \,^""'\'^ { ^\ half the length of the short side, and retakes ( the track at the point where he left it. V ~~j^ I The trooper moves his horse true on the \^—^^ [ J circle, to the right hand, for example, by the |,' ^ \^ ,\ means prescribed for moving by the right \\^y ^ p The first is the usual means of turning ; the second, as the radius of the circle is reduced, leads eventually to the about on the forehand ; the third, to the about on the haunches. The second must not be used at the gallop. (Fig. 28.) 277. The half turn: The half turn consists of an about followed by an oblique. Being on the track to the left hand, at the command: 1. Half turn, 2. MARCH, the rider describes an about and then by an oblique re- gains the track. At the moment the horse starts the about the rider accentuates the pressure of the right leg and right indirect rein of opposition in front of the withers, which should have the effect of swinging the shoulders about the haunches. The horse then turns slightly on ^ the haunches. The limit, eventually gained as ^^^' ^"' P^^' ^'^^• the radius is decreased, is the about on the haunches. (Fig. 29. ) . 278. The half turn in reverse : The half turn in reverse con- sists of an oblique, followed by an about. 1 \~ V ! i ^ 1 ^ 1 \ 1 • \ \ ,'->! 1 \ \ 1 , 1 1 / \ 1 Fig. 29, par. 277. rr—' »> 1 1 ^ M i\ \ \ 1 1 '^ \ 1 \ 1 L,X' /y 102 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Being on the track to the left hand, at the command : 1. Half turn in reverse, 2. MARCH, the rider places his horse on the oblique and then, after moving in that direction 5 or 6 yards, by an about to the right regains the track. At the moment the horse starts the about the rider accentu- ates the effect of the right leg and right direct rein, which should have the effect of pushing the haunches to the left. The horse then turns slightly on the forehand. The limit, eventually gained as the radius is decreased, is the about on the forehand. (Fig. 30.) 279. Increasing and decreasing the pace: To increase or de- crease the pace or speed of the gait the trooper employs the means prescribed for passing from the halt to the walk or from the walk to the halt to the extent necessary to obtain the desired result. The horse in extending the walk increases the amplitude of the movement of his head and neck to the same degree as he increases the length of his step ; he accelerates the movement of the head and neck as he increases the cadence of his step. The trooper aids these movements by yielding the hand and giving the horse greater freedom of movement. He maintains contact with the bit so that he can exercise a gradual restrain- ing influence with the direct reins when he feels the horse is about to spring into the trot. To decrease the pace at a walk the trooper makes use of the same aids as in coming to the halt. The step is shortened and the cadence decreased. To increase or decrease the pace at the trot the same means are used. The exercises in increasing and decreasing the pace afford excellent practice for the trooper in the use of the aids and good training for the horse in obeying them ; but the trooper out of ranks should use only the regulation gaits. The instructor may cause the speed of the gallop to be in- creased or decreased in the riding hall, but the maneuvering gallop and the extended gallop only should be used in work on long lines. To increase or decrease the pace at any time the caution may be given: FASTER PACE or SLOWER PACE. The com- mands: 1. Walk, 1. Slow trot, 1. Trot, 1. Gallop, 2. MARCH, indicate, respectively, the walk as described in par. 225, the slow trot as described in par. 234, the maneuvering trot as INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS. 103 described in par. 234, and tlie maneuvering gallop as described in par. 236. The extended gallop and the school gallop (par. 236) are taken at the respective cautions: EXTENDED GAL- lOP and SCHOOL GALLOP. 280. To back and halt: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH. At the first command gather the horse as usual (par. 226) ; at the second command use the direct reins until the horse com- mences to back, then relax the fingers and continue to use the direct reins intermittently to cause the horse to continue to back. At the command : 1. Squad, 2. HALT, cease the action of the hands. The trooper carefully avoids raising the horse's head. An elevated position of the head, by constraining the muscles of the loins, renders the backward movement much more difficult for the horse. 281. Use of the aids: The training of the trooper in the use of the aids is effected partly by changes of gait, partly by increase and decrease of pace, and partly by the exercises herein described. AVhen the troopers have learned to use the aids correctly, the instructor causes them to execute changes of direction combined with changes of gait. 282. To leave the ranks r The instructor forms the troopers in line near one end of the riding hall. To do this he may caution: FORM LINE (par. 350). The troopers move by the shortest line at the walk, or at the gait ordered, and form in line 3 yards in rear of the instructor. • The instructor then causes them to leave the rank individ- ually by calling them by name. The designated trooper, gathering his horse and avoiding abrupt means, rides quietly to the front and moves forward on a line perpendicular to the front of the squad. He takes the track on reaching it, to the hand designated, or halts at a designated spot. This movement can be executed while the squad is marching at any gait. When the squad is halted, the trooper always leaves the rank at the walk, the faster gait, if one is taken, not being begun until the horse has completely left the rank. The troopers are also practiced in going through the rank both in the direction of its march and in "the opposite direc- tion. 104 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The instructor avoids forming the squad parallel to the sides of the riding hall or on well-marked lines. He thus inculcates in the trooper the habit of placing himself in the direction of his leader and then directing his horse inde- pendently. 283. The false gallop: This exercise, of so much value in training remounts and so constantly used in drill and service, should be practiced from the beginning — on wide turns at first, and at last on serpentines, large circles, and figures of eight of small dimensions. The false gallop is maintained by the same aids as produce the gallop with that lead. If the gallop becomes disunited, the trooper must return to the trot and then again to the gallop trtce. 284. Jumping obstacles. — The object of this instruction is to train the trooper to clear obstacles of every nature, so that he may when riding alone or with other men over a route pre- senting difficulties be able to continue an uninterrupted ad- vance at any gait upon the objective in view. Jumping is also an excellent means of confirming the seat, increasing the pliancy of the hand and arm, strengthening the legs, and developing boldness and steadiness. The work over obstacles should be begun early and con- tinued during the whole course of instruction. Progress must be regulated prudently and methodically; undue haste is liable to destroy the confidence of the trooper and the willingness of the horse. This instruction comprises two distinct parts: (a) The gym- nastics of the jump; (&) conducting the horse to, over, and beyond the obstacle. 285. The gymnastics of the jump : The troopers are familiar- ized with the gymnastics of jumping by first placing bars on the ground across the track and later low obstacles about 10 feet apart and causing the troopers to ride their horses over them without concerning themselves with the conduct of the horse. The instructor endeavors in this exercise to cause the troopers to maintain their seats and remain in their saddles by the suppleness of their backs, and above all to keep their hands low and passive, thus permitting the horse to use his head and neck in keeping balance. The horse that in going over an obstacle has the free use of his head and neck jumps willingly, calmly, and without INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS. 106 fatigue. The trooper endeavors to keep in unison with his horse whatever changes in rhythm or speed tlie latter may- make. The jump is made as follows : On arriving near the obstacle grasp the horse with the legs, keeping the body upright, the hands low and passive; at the moment the horse rises bend the upper part of the body forward at the waist, the buttocks remaining in the saddle ; as the horse alights sit well down in the saddle without displacing the hands. During this work the suppling exercises may be practiced with excellent results. 286. Conducting the horse to the obstacle, etc.: When the troopers are sufficiently familiar with the gymnastics of jumping and with the use of the aids the instructor teaches them to conduct their horses over obstacles by causing them to jump, individually, obstacles placed off the track. In general, the horse should jump at the gait at which he approaches the obstacle. On approaching the obstacle the trooper selects the point at which he wishes to jump and conducts his horse straight toward it, the reins separated, the legs close to maintain the forward movement. If the horse hesitates on approaching the obstacle, antici- pate his resistance by stimulating him vigorously with the legs. If the horse avoids the obstacle, stop him, quiet him, then place him directly in front of the obstacle, and at a suitable distance from the latter, and urge him with the legs to make him jump. If the horse stops short in front of the obstacle, ride back and put him at it again. If the horse halts or gets out of hand, pull him up without, however, hampering him when he takes the leap. All horses lacking in calmness or willingness should be put back in training over small obstacles. The reins must be long but taut before, during, and after the jump — long in order that the horse may have free use of his head and forehand ; taut that he may have constant support and guidance without jerks on the mouth. If necessary, but only when necessary, £he trooper must let the reins slide through the fingers. 106 CAVALRY DRILL REGULAliOlSrS. 287. Jumping is first practiced with stirrups. When the troopers liave become accustomed to it, have confidence in themselves, and are sufficiently sure of their hands, they are made to jump frequently without stirrups in order that they may acquire a secure seat and avoid being thrown wlien deprived of the liabitual means of support. 288. Obstacles for jumping are of two classes :. (a) Broad jumps — tliose which require a leap of breadth only, such as ditches, water jumps, etc. ( & ) High jumps — those which require a leap of height, such as hedges, fences, walls, etc. The dimensions of the obstacles are increased in proportion to the progress of the troopers. They should be limited to 8 feet for broad jumps and 3 feet for high jumps. Artificial obstacles should have a sufficient width of front to prevent the horses avoiding them easily. High jumps are as a rule taken at a gallop of moderate speed and broad jumps at an extended gallop. For broad jumps it is important that the speed should be increased as the obstacle is approached. 289. The troopers are prepared for jumping in formed bodies by jumping first in pairs, then in fours, separated by con- siderable distances. The preservation in this exercise of the distances separating the groups, while not habitually enforced in service, is a means of verifying the individual training of men and horses. 290. Exercises on varied ground. — The exercises on varied ground have for their object the training of the troopers in riding their horses across country, in making them familiar wath obstacles which they will 'encounter in campaign, and in regulating their gait so as to husband the strength of their horses in covering great distances. This work is begun at an early period of the training; its difficult features, such as jumping obstacles, are graduated to fit the progress of the trooper, the end being to increase his confidence and skill. The instructor conducts his class across fields, through woods, and in general over the most varied terrain at his disposal. WOEK ON VARIED GROUND. 107 He may divide the squad into small groups, each under a corporal, who conducts the group and regulates the gait over a route designated by the instructor. The instructor inculcates in the troopers the p^rinciples which should govern them when left to their own devices. They are as follows : On leaving the stable, move at a walk for a short time in order to obtain a good circulation in the feet and legs. Vary the gaits, but do not depart from the regulation pace prescribed for each. Choose for the rapid gaits nearly level ground. Going up- hill rapidly necessitates great effort on the part of the horse, and going downhill at a rapid gait exposes him to injuries from the saddle and equipment and is hard on his forelegs. Extend progressively the period at the faster gaits. Regulate the periods spent at the intermediate gaits by the degree of rapidity with which the total distance must be covered. Seek under all circumstances soft footing to save the horse's legs and keep him, therefore, on the edge of metaled roads rather than in the middle. Choose hard ground when smooth and level in preference to ground that is heavy or uneven. Finish at a walk, more or less prolonged in accordance with the length and conditions of the ride or march, so that the horse shall always come in with a dry skin and normal respiration. 291. To these general principles, w^hich must be practically demonstrated, the instructor adds such counsel as his expe- rience dictates and such remarks as the nature and state of the terrain may render advisable. The following rules cover the majority of circumstances that will arise : To ascend a steep slope, yield the hand as soon as the horse has been given his direction; carry forward the upper part of the body and seize a lock of the mane near the middle of the neck over the reins. To descend a steep slope, let the reins slip through the hand and give the horse complete liberty of action ; lean back, and if necessary grasp the cantle with the^right hand. 108 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Troopers should be practiced in crossing a V-shaped ditch, about 18 feet wide and 10 feet deep, so that they go down one side and up the other. This is a valuable exercise, as no horse will face the opposite bank unless the head is left free. Long, steep slopes should be ascended slowly and quietly. All slopes should be descended directly ; short, steep slopes should be ascended obliquely if the surface is not slippery. In difficult ground the horse should be allowed to talie the initiative ; his instincts are a more reliable guide than the aids of the trooper. If marshy ground must be crossed go slowly and avoid following in trace. If the horse goes down and becomes nervous and begins to plunge, dismount and lead. The trooper must seek every means to spare his horse, above all when carrying the full pack. Where possible to pass natural obstacles without jumping, this should be done; the heavily loaded horse crosses many obstacles ; for example, wide ditches, with greater security and less effort by climbing than by jumping. AVhen the bottom of the ditch is boggy it will generally be preferable to jump from bank to bank. In particularly difficult places the trooper should dismount and lead, the horse following. All horses should be trained in this method of passing obstacles. A little of this training makes it easy to cross considerable obstructions on foot. 292. Emplo3anent of the spur: The spur is an aid which aug- ments the effect produced by the leg. The trooper employs it in rear of Mnd near the girth by touching the horse with it, once or oftener, according to his sensitiveness and degree of submission. The spur is used only when necessary to add to the effect of the action of the leg, and its use ceases as soon as obedi- ence is obtained. Its application should not be continuous but quick, and re- peated if necessary. 293. Work at fixed distances: The work in the riding hall at fixed distances comprises the movements executed in the indi- vidual instruction, but the movements are executed in unison at command and the troopers follow and conform to move- ments of the leader. WORK ON VARIED GROUND. 109 The work therefore requires of the troopers more precision and exactness in the use of the aid and serves to prepare them for work in ranks. For the instructor it is a check on the results accomplished. The instructor forms the troopers in one or two squads; when there are two squads he designates that one of the two leaders upon whom the other will regulate. The troopers follow in the trace of their respective leaders, maintaining distances of 4 feet from head to croup. 294. Changing the diagonal in posting: The right fore foot and the left hind foot constitute the right diagonal; the left fore and the right hind feet the left diagonal. In posting, the trooper is said to post on the right diagonal when after rising he sits down in the saddle at the instant the right fore foot comes to the ground. It is important to instruct the trooper to post for a time on one diagonal and then change to the other, so that the diagonal pairs will each perform the same amount of work and the chance of injury from the equipment be reduced. To automatically insure that the posting is done as much on one diagonal as on the other, the troopers should be required to post on the right diagonal when riding to the left hand on the track and on the left diagonal when to the right hand. The instructor occasionally requires each trooper to inform him on which diagonal he is posting. To change the diagonal the trooper diminishes the weight borne on the stirrups and retains his seat in the saddle for two successive beats of the horse's feet instead of one ; .he then rises as before. The trooper will then find himself posting on the diagonal opposite to the one on which he was posting before. 295. Work on long lines. — This work is carried out in a rec- tangle of large dimensions. The troopers are there exercised at all gaits, but with the movements restricted to changes of direction, pace, or gait. The end sought is complex : To confirm the horse in moving on a straight line; to increase his willingness to leave the other horses ; to regulate his gaits ; to familiarize the trooper with the regulation and extended gallop ; to exercise the troop- ers in moving two and four abreast and accustom them to fol- lowing a leader so as to prepare them for work in the squad i'lu CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. and platoon ; finally, to cause the troopers to acquire the calm- ness that is indispensable in the faster gaits. The troopers are dispersed at large distances over the whole of the track. When two or more troopers march abreast one of them (habitually the center or right center trooper) is des- ignated to act as guide. The other troopers regulate on the guide. The instructor limits his commands to indicating the gait or the movement to the trooper or squad which is passing in front of him. The others observe and conform. 296. The angles of the rectangle are marked bj^ elevated objects easily distinguished. To permit the instructor to control the gaits the dimensions of the rectangle should be 236 by 118 yards. These two dis- tances represent approximately the distances covered by the horse in one minute at the trot and at the walk, respectively. The sum of a side and end, taking into consideration the short- ening of the distance traveled due to rounding the corner, rep- resents approximately the distance covered by a horse in one minute at the regulation gallop. To represent the approximate distance which a horse is re- quired to cover in one minute at the extended gallop one side and two ends are used. In the Vi'ork at the gallop the instructor must devote his ef- forts to securing that calmness and regularity of speed re- quired in prolonged drills or exercises. When the horses move calmly at the regulation gallop they are exercised in the extended gallop. 297. The troopers are next prepared to participate in the charge by exercising them in galloping at full speed over a distance of 60 to 75 yards. The movement is executed suc- cessively by the troopers. Each trooper when his name is called gradually yields the hand sufficiently to give the horse the necessary liberty in extending his neck while maintaining support, and increases the gallop to full speed. In charging the trooper bends the body forward, pushes his feet fully into the stirrups and supporting his weight upon the latter. He gives his horse, if necessary, a touch of the spur, and holds him in the direction indicated. The exercises are facilitated at first by grouping the troopers by twos. WORK ON VARIED GROUND. Ill To pass from the charge to the gallop employ the means pre- scribed for decreasing the gait. In order not to fatigue the horse by repeated charges or by charges executed on hard ground, the individual charge should be made a part of each of several instruction hours and should alv^^ays be executed on a track or piece of ground specially adapted to this work. As soon as the trooper is sufficiently advanced in the instruc- tion without arms he must be practiced in the use of arms (par. 298) in connection with the exercises with the saddles packed as for the field. 298. The work in the large rectangles should be completed by work in open order. In this work the troopers are formed in successive lines of four troopers each, with distances and intervals of 3 or 4 yards. The instructor causes the troopers thus formed to move in all directions and at all gaits and causes them to execute the movements prescribed in the work on the snaffle and bit with and without arms, with saddles both stripped and packed as for field service. Satisfactory execution of this work requires that each trooper shall keep his place exactly with reference to the others and that the movements shall be executed with pre- cision and in unison. * 299. Bit and bridoon : At convenient opportunities the horses should be equipped for a few days only with the curb bit and snaffle in order that the recruits may in case of war or other emergency be not unfamiliar with their use. {See pars. 302- 330, inclusive.) 300. Duty in the ranks of the troop: In time of peace the recruits may now habitually at the expiration of about three months be returned to duty with the troops to which they are assigned and participate in the drills, marches, and maneuvers incident thereto. Their individual instruction and training in horsemanship will be continued to completion as indicated in the succeeding period at such time as conditions may permit. It will be resumed not later in any case than the date of the beginning of the next period of garrison training. In case of war or other emergency, before their training can be so completed, the recruits should be able to render 112 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. good service. In such a case commanders must neglect no opportunity that conditions of service present to carry for- ward to completion the instruction and training of the recruits. Fourth Period, or Work on the Bit and Bridoon. Adjustment of the double bridle (par. 302). Holding and handling the reins (pars. 303-307). TJse and effect of the bit and snaffle (pars. 308-310). Repetition with the bit of the work on the snaffle (par. 311). Changes of direction (par. 312). The turn in place (pars. 313-317). The gallop departs with the horse straight (par. 318). Proof of training (par. 319). The trained trooper (par. 320). 301. Work on the bit is the most important element of the instruction in equitation. The instructor causes this work to be taken up as soon as the troopers have acquired a fair seat and a sufficient knowledge of the use of the aids. 302. Adjustment of the double bridle : The bits should be of sufficient width to fit the horse's mouth, the branches of the curb touching lightly the outer surfaces of the lips. The snaffle should touch lightly the upper corners of the lips. The curb should rest just below the snaffle. The curb chain should lie flat in the chin groove and be of such length as to cause the reins when stretched from the pommel of the saddle, to form a right angle with the branches of the curb. If the bit is placed high, it is less severe ; if placed low, it becomes very powerful. It should not be placed so low as to strike the teeth. When horses are restive it is generally due to faulty adjust- ment of the bits and curb chain. 303. Holding and handling the reins. — ^The normal method of holding the reins for military riders is to take both reins in the left hand. The bit reins are separated by the third (ring) finger, the right snaffle rein between the first and second fingers, the left snaflle rein under the little finger, all of the reins passing out of the hand over the second joint ADJUSTMENT OF DOUBLE BRIDXE. 113 of the first finger, upon which the thumb presses them with sufficient force to hold them in place ; the bight falls to the right of the horse's neck. The elbow falls naturally, the wrist and hand in line with the forearm, the finger nails toward the body. Since the trooper in mounted combat needs the right hand for his weapon (sword or pistol) he must be thoroughly trained in riding with the reins in one hand and in riding on the curb bit. 304. The instructor explains to the troopers that they can — (a) Ride the horse on the bit, relaxing the snaffle reins, which is the normal method in combat. (&) Ride the horse on the snaffle, releasing the bit reins, an exceptional method used with horses that carry the neck arched or that have especially sensitive mouths. (c) Ride the horse on both reins, supporting the horse with both snaffle and bit. This is the normal method used at drill and on the march, at rest and in jumping. 305. When the trooper is not called upon to make immediate use of his weapons it is usually advantageous to hold the reins in both hands. In this case he can use the right hand for holding either the right snaffle rein or both right reins. To take the right snaffle rein in the right hand, the trooper seizes that rein in front of the left hand with right hand, the little finger next to the rein, and holds it as when riding with one rein. He places his right hand on a level with the left hand, the bight of the rein coming out under the thumb. When the trooper wishes to take both right reins in the right hand he holds them in the full grasp, the reins sepa- rated by the little finger, snaffle rein underneath. This method is preferably employed in riding across country, in jumping over obstacles, in galloping a horse, etc. During the rests and at route order the troopers alternate in taking the reins in the right hand, the left hand, and both hands. They thus avoid becoming fatigued, advancing the shoulder, or by carrying the reins to one side, giving to the horse a false carriage of the head and neck. The method for holding the reins in the right hand is similar to that for reins in the left hand. 38218 °— 18 8 114 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. To allow Ins horse to ease his head and neck at the walk or at the halt, the trooper opens his fingers without changing the position of his hand so as to permit complete relaxation. When the trooper has the saber or pistol in hand he may use the right hand to adjust his reins or to separate them momentarily, but he must exercise great care to keep the point of his sword or the muzzle of his pistol elevated to avoid wounding his neighbors. 306. To adjust the reins seize them with the thumb and first finger of the right hand above the left thumb ; slightly open the fingers of the left hand, raise the right hand, feel lightly and evenly the horse's mouth with both reins, and close the fingers of the left hand on the reins. The troopers are exercised frequently in changing from both reins to the snaffle reins and the reverse. To shorten the reins seize the rein or reins to be shortened between the thumb and first finger of the right hand above the left thumb. To lengthen the reins seize the rein or reins to be lengthened between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand below the left hand. In executing these movements the hands should be displaced as little as possible. 307. The trooper at stand to horse (par. 187) and in leading out (par. 188) holds both reins with the right hand as pre- scribed for the snaffle rein. The reins are in neither case removed from the horse's neck. In mounting (par. 191) and dismounting (par. 192) the trooper manipulates both reins as has been prescribed for the snaffle. After dismounting, before leading to the stable or picket line, he unhooks the curb chain. 308. Use and effect of the bit and snaffle: The effect of the snaffle is very mild, because it is received more on the lips than on the bars of the mouth. Its action is upward, and it tends to raise the head and neck. It gives a comfortable sup- port, is the bit most efficacious for relaxing the jaw by means of vibrations, and if the horse carries the head too low tends to correct it. 309. The effect of the curb is much more Severe than that of the sn{¥ffle because it is received almost entirely on the bars of the mouth ; the lips and the tongue ameliorate its pressure but little. Its action is downv/ard and it tends to lower the WORK WITH DOUBLE BRIDLE. 116 head and neck. It gives an uncomfortable support if main- tained continuously, because the bars of the mouth become deadened to sensation and tlie curb chain stops circulation. If the horse carries the head too high the curb tends to correct that fault. 310. To demonstrate these effects to the troopers the in- structor causes them to take the bit reins alone and execute the same movements. He points out the difference between the two means of control. The instructor then causes the trooper to take the bit reins alone in the left hand and terminates this instruction by the employment of the four reins in one hand. 311. Repetition with the bit of the work on the snaflle: All the exercises of the work on the snaffle are repeated in the work on the bit. This repetition is for the purpose of perfect- ing the troopers in the use of the aids and confirming the cor- lectness and regularity of the various gaits. The movements are executed as prescribed in the work on the snaffle, always keeping in mind the greater power of the bit as compared to the snaffle. This repetition and review should not be hastened. It should have for its purpose a better understanding of instruction already given, more accurate riding of the gymnastic figures, better control at all gaits out of doors, great skill and bold- ness over obstacles and varied terrain, and delicacy of coor- dination in the use of the bit and spur. 312. Changes of direction — The wide turn: This is a change of direction executed on the arc of a rather large circle. It is executed by means of the leading rein and both legs, or of the bearing rein and both legs. Of the two the first is more ele- mentary ; the second is more efficacious and is used out of doors and when riding with the reins in one hand. The short turn : This is a change of direction on the arc of a very small circle. It is executed, in turning to the right, for example, by means of the right direct rein of opposition and the right leg, or by the left indirect rein of opposition in front of the withers and the right leg. Of the two the first is the more elementary ; the second more rapid and regular. 313. The turn in place. — The turn in place consists in mak- ing the horse turn on his own ground, either on the forehand, on tlie haunches, or on his center. 116 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. These exercises should not habitually be practiced as regular gymnastics, because they tend to get the horse behind the bit : to prevent which it is essential to move him forward promptly as soon as the movement is completed. 314. The about on the forehand: Half turns in reverse are executed with radii which are reduced more and more, pre- paratory to the about on the forehand, when eventually, if the haunches turn from, the right to the left, the right front foojt becomes the pivot around which the mass turns. The aids to use are: Both legs to bring the weight on the shoulders ; right direct rein and left indirect rein of opposition in front of the withers, to weight the right shoulder and to keep the neck straight ; right leg in rear of the girth, to push the haunches to the left ; weight of the rider slightly to the left. 315. The about on the haunches: Half turns are executed with radii which are reduced more and more, preparatory to the about on the haunches, when eventually, if the forehand turn from the right to the left, the left hind foot becomes the pivot around which the mass turns. The aids to use are: Both legs to gather the horse and to prevent his backing ; left direct rein and right indirect rein of opposition in front of the withers, to turn the forehand to the left ; right leg, if necessary, to prevent the haunches swinging to the right. This is a very difficult exercise and should not be attempted until the rider has acquired considerable skill in the use of the aids. The horse must under no circumstances be allowed to back. 316. The about on the center: This is of very easy execution and of frequent application. The left indirect rein of opposi- tion in front of the withers carries the shoulders to the right vvhile the right leg behind the girth pushes the haunches rap- idly to the left. 317. In order to enable the trooper to grasp the mechanism of the wide turns, short turns, and turns in place, these exer- cises are executed slowly at first, but the rapidity indispensable for the employment of these movements in individual mounted combat must be obtained by gradual progression. 318. The gallop departs with the horse straight. — To be able to demand either lead desired with the horse practically THE TRAINED TROOPER. 117 Straight, and to return to the trot and immediately take the gallop again with the opposite lead, marks the limit of train- ing for the trooper in ranks. He will now be able to manage his horse in all the difficult and varying situations in which he may find himself, at drill, at maneuvers, on the march, and in combat. Every effort should be made to render him proficient in all the exercises indicated up to this point. 319. Proof of training. — The trooper should now demonstrate practically that he measures up satisfactorily to the standard required (see par. 175). If so he may be utilized thereafter in the training of remounts and may devote a greater proportion of his time than before to the other kindred subjects that go to make up the total of the education of the trooper in ranks. 320. The trained trooper. — The individual instruction on horseback begun with the recruit must be kept up during the trooper's entire service. For the older troopers prolonged work at the slow trot and gallop without stirrups is of great value. With trained and hardened troopers, capable of withstanding fatigue, it con- firms the seat and renders easy the correction of faults of position. Troop and platoon commanders must exercise the trained troopers in riding across country or on varied terrain at rapid gaits, and thus train them in husbanding the strength of their mounts while using them fully for the end in view ; they should perfect them in the use of arms by constant prac- tice on dummies and in combat exercises and endeavor, above all, to make of them fearless horsemen confident in their ability to defeat the enemy in mounted combat. The individual worth of each trooper, together with his feeling of invincibility, gives to the organization the confi- dence and audacity which enables the leader to undertake the most daring enterprises. PART II.— ELEMENTARY COLLECTIVE INSTRUCTION. GENERAL PROVISIONS. 321. The elementary collective instruction of the trooper in- cludes the instruction in the School of the Squad and in the mechanism of the movements prescribed in the School of the Platoon. This latter instruction is given as prescribed in par. 444. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 322. The following provisions apply generally to the School of the Squad and to all subsequent drill. Previous provisions of a similar general character are to be found in pars. 43-49. 323. Leading: A commander leading his unit marches in the direction and at the gait desired. He is followed at a specified distance by the base (Def.), wiiich conforms to his gait and direction. The commander thus controls the move- ments of the base, and may at any time by his indication conveyed in the most convenient way (as by his own move- ments, his commands, or signals) cause the base to change its direction or to increase or decrease the pace or gait or to halt, according to the object in view. Elements of the same kind as the base regulate upon the latter conforming to its gait and direction. 324. Directing leader, directing guide: A commander who desires to become temporarily free in his movements may leave his position as leader, first indicating: DISREGARD {see Sig- nals) for the information of the leader of the base unit, who then becomes the directing leader (Del). The latter then ceases to follow in the trace of the commander and tem- porarily conducts the march. In the absence of other indi- cation from the leader he maintains the existing direction and gait. 118 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 119 When necessary the conduct of the march of a group (e. g., a platoon) having no subordinate leader may similarly be intrusted to the guide. The latter then becomes the directing guide (Def.), 325. Whenever a change of formation involves a break in the continuity of the leading the leader habitually moves at once to his new position, so as to resume leadership with the least practicable delay. He usually starts at the command of execution for the movement. Should he start for his new position before the command of execution he first cautions or signals : DISREGARD for the information of the base. 326. Change of directing unit (base) : Whenever a change of formation results in a change of the base, the base of the formation from which the movement is executed continues, in the absence of specific indication to the contrary, to be the base until the new base is indicated. In movements from line by which column is formed directly to a flank, the element of the column on the flank toward which the column is formed is the base upon which other similar elements regulate during the formation of the column as well as after the column is formed. 327. Changes of direction: Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when marching, unless otherwise pre- scribed. If executed from the halt the command forward need not be prefixed to any other preparatory command that indi- cates a direction of march ; thus, being at a halt, 1. Column right, 2. MARCH; but, 1. Forward, trot, 2. MARCH. 328. To insure certainty of prompt execution, commands (and signals) must be so given that their meaning is unmis- takable. The preparatory command must be given at such an interval of time before the command of execution as will admit of the former being properly understood, and should be followed by a distinct pause that properly varies in length with the size of the body of troops that is to execute the movement. The command of execution should be given the instant the movement is to begin. 329. All changes of direction are simply applications of the principle of leading as explained in pars. 323 and 367. (a) The turn (par. 386) and half turn (par. 388) are special cases of the change of direction in line in that tliey involve a change of direction of 90° and -^5°, respectively; as executed 120 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. hy the platoon and squad, they differ further from the general case of the change of direction in tliat the leader follows a specially prescribed arc during the turn (par. 387) ; in the troop and larger units, the leader in each case regulates the arc upon which he moves during the turn in accordance with the length of the front and the requirements of the special case. ( b ) For a change of direction in any column formation, the elements of the column successively change direction on the same ground, the change in each successive element being made in accordance with the principles that regulate the change of direction in line (a). In each successive element the leader (if any) and the guide move over the same path that is follotved by the leader at the head of the column. 330. The principles and methods laid down in the School of the Trooper (dismounted and mounted) are, except as may otherwise be indicated, or where clearly applicable only to in- dividual instruction, to be followed in corresponding instruc- tion in the School of the Squad and in all subsequent training. The same commands apply unless otherwise stated. Certain modifications in the execution of some of the move- ments, incident to their use in collective instruction, are noted in appropriate places in the School of the Squad. 331. Column of twos and of troopers: Movements involving the use of column of twos or troopers, although simple in prin- ciple, are not adapted to execution as movements of ijrecision, and the details of their execution will be regulated accord- ingly (pars. 393-400). Familiarity with the practical use of these formations must be insisted upon, but they will be taken in the simplest manner consistent with efficiency in their use. 332. To avoid repetition the detailed descriptions and ex- planations of collective movements are, as a rule, based only upon the execution of the mounted movements. 333. Gaits for mounted movements. — All mounted movements not specially excepted may be executed at the trot or gallop (par. 239). For the execution of a movement at the trot or gallop the command trot or gallop precedes the command march unless marching at the gait desired or unless it be otherwise pre- BASIC PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 121 scribed. When the indication for the trot or gallop is included in the command for the movement it precedes the command inarch; thus, 1. Forward, trot; 2. MARCH. 334. When tlie troopers of any element (Def.) move at differ- ent gaits, if the gait of such element be referred to, the gait of its base is to be understood. 335. A gait is said to be correspondingly faster or corre- spondingly slower than another gait when there is a difference of one degree between the two (par. 239). 336. In the rules included in pars. 333 to 337 the expression "other elements" (Def.) means in each case elements of the same kind as the base. 337. (a) In movements from the halt the base moves at the walk unless another gait be stated in the command or indi- cated by the leader's movements. (b) In forming line to the front from column the other ele- ments (par. 336) take, without command, a correspondingly faster gait than the base. If gallop be commanded at any time, it applies only to the other elements (/). The ba^e (leading element) habitually preserves the gait of march (a). The leader controls the movements of the base according to the object in view. He may diminish its pace or gait or halt it to hasten the formation. A command to decrease the gait or to halt, given during the execution of the movement, ap- plies only to those elements that have already completed the movement. The leader habitually so controls the base that elements in rear need not move faster than a maneuver gallop in order to execute the movement. (c) Column to the front is formed from line on the base at the gait of march (a) or at the gait ordered (e). The other elements (par. 336) take or maintain a correspondingly slower gait (or, if halted, remain so) until they can move at the gait of the base to take their places in the column. If an increased gait be commanded at any time, it is taken at first only by the leader and base or by the leader and those elements that have already moved to enter the column (/). (d) In cases not covered by (&) pr (c), if the base and other elements have equal distances to go they move at the gait of march or at that indicated in the command (e. g., 1, Platoons right turn, trot; 2. MARCH). 122 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. (e) In cases not covered hy (h), (c), or (d) (e. g., assemble from foragers, par. 414), or by some special provision in tlie description of the corresponding movement (e. g., echelon, par. 702) the base maintains the gait of march (a) or takes that of the leader ; the other elements move at a correspondingly- faster or slower gait as may be necessary for the execution of the movement and on arriving at their places take the gait of the base (par. 338). If a special gait be commanded, it is taken by the base or by the other elements, in accord- ance with the principle stated in (/). (/) When the commander indicates a special gait, whether in the preparatory command or during the execution of the movement, the effect is always to liaMen the completion of the movement. This principle will assist in applying the rules in (6), (c), and (e). {g) Changes of gait made by elements, without command, in accordance with the above rules, are, except as specially indi- cated in the commands, changes of one degree. 338. Any exceptions to the above rules are noted where they occur. 339. Gaits for movements on foot. — (a) The general princi- ples of gaits for mounted movements apply to movements on foot with the modifications noted in {h) to (g), below, and such others as are to be readily inferred from the application of the principles of the School of the Trooper, Dismounted. (?>) No element moves in double time unless the movement be executed when marching in double time or double time be commanded (par. 47) or otherwise indicated by the leader. No trooper increases the length of the step or the cadence unless specially so prescri])ed. (c) The leader so controls the movements of the base as to facilitate the execution of the movement in accordance with (6), above. This will involve halting the base whenever cer- tain movements (e. g., those from column into line) are executed in quick time. id) If double time be included in the preparatory command for a movement, the indication is obeyed in accordance with the principles of par. 337. (c) In movements from line into column, and in other simi- lar movements, if executed at attention, the troopers while waiting to take their places in the column do not halt unless THE SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD. 123 halt be commanded by a platoon (or troop) commander. They mark time instead if necessary for the execution of the move- ment. (/) In applying the rules for mounted movements to move- ments on foot quick time will be understood where walk is referred to and double time where any faster gait is referred to. (g) Any exceptions to the above rules are stated where they occur. THE SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD. 340. As soon as the troopers are sufficiently advanced in their instruction in the School of the Trooper they will be grouped into temporary squads for elementary collective in- struction. This* instruction will be conducted in accordance with the general principles indicated in par. 42 ; progress therein should be so regulated that no collective movement will be taken up until the trooper, by previous individual in- struction, has been properly prepared for its execution. 341. Instruction in the School of the Squad is intended pri- marily to teach recruits the elementary movements upon which the entire drill is based. It may be recurred to whenever nec- essary in cases where troopers evidence the need of further elementary work. 342. For elementary collective instruction groups of not to exceed six or eight men can be used to best advantage. The actual instruction of each group should l)e conducted by a noncommissioned officer, but the instruction must be closely supervised by a commissioned officer (par. 37). 343. The system of drill contained in these regulations is basetl largely upon the actual leading of units by their re- spective chiefs or commanders. During the elementary in- struction of recruits, both mounted and dismounted, leading will be emphasized as indicated in par. 344. Thereafter the application of leading will conform to pars. 448 to 456. 344. The first collective instruction will, therefore, be in conforming to the march of a leader, thus confirming and extending the instruction given in the School of the Trooper (pars. 295, 298) ; and reasonable proficiency in this instrvc- tion must be secured before any attempt is made to utilize either ccymtnands or signals in the execution of collective movements, except as prescribed in par. 363. 124 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 345. It is difficult for a leader to lead the squad properly and at the same time to supervise the march and correct the errors of individual troopers. For this reason it is desirable, especially in the earlier collective drills, that the instructor have as an assistant another noncommissioned officer or a well-instructed trooper. The instructor then leads the squad and requires his assistant (who takes the positions best adapted for the purpose in view) to supervise closely the movements of the troopers and to correct errors by means of cautions addressed quietly by name to the individual man or men concerned. Later the instructor similarly supervises the execution of the march while requiring his assistant to lead the squad. As the troopers advance in the instruction the instructor should give each of them such practice in leading the squad as the progress of the individual frooper concerned may appear to justify. 346. When instruction in leading (par. 367) has advanced to the point where the guide can preserve his proper distance from the leader and conform promptly and smoothly to the latter 's movements, the other troopers meantime preserving their interval and alignment without undue constraint or unnecessarily abrupt changes of gait or pace, the instruction is extended progressively to include, in accordance with the methods prescribed in par. 347, the execution of the move- ments prescribed for the squad. 347. Throughout the instruction prescribed by par. 346 the squad will continue as before to be led. In teaching each new movement the example and movements of the instructor as leader will be supplemented at first, by oral commands only, then by oral commands accompanied by the correspond- ing arm signals for those movements for which such signals are provided {see Signals, pars. 988-996), then by signals alone. The commands and signals will he given hy the actual leader. When the instructor is not actually leading (par. 345) he may either indicate to the leader the movements to b(' executed or else leave to him the selection of such move- ments. 348. After the oral commands and arm signals are thor- oughly understood the instructor will practice the squad in passing from one formation to another, using oral commands for some movements, signals for some, and causing some (e. g., FORMING THE SQUAD. 125 changes of direction) to be executed by conforming to the movements of the leader without the additional indication of either oral commands or signals. 349. The troopers must be accustomed to conforming, ivith- out the assistance of any command or signal given to the squad as a ivhole, to simple movements (e. g., movements front into line) Initiated at the head of a column formation by a com- mand so given as to be heard by only the leading troopers. With reasonable practice the more essential changes of for- mation that are executed toward the direction of march can readily be taken by the squad by conforming, without other indication, to the movements of the troopers nearest the leader. As many movements in service must be executed under condi- tions of noise, dust, etc., that will render it difficult for the commands or signals of the leader to be understood except by those near him, practice in conforming promptly and intelli- gently to the movements of the elements nearest the leader is important and must he given careful attention. The object ultimately to be sought In the instruction is the quiet, rapid, and effective handling of the squad with a mini- mum of either oral commands or signals. The squad is re- quired to pass rapidly from one formation to another, a new movement being occasionally initiated before the execution of the one preceding it has been completed. To Form the Squad, Mounted. 350. To form the squad in line (par. 36S-a), the leader (instructor) designates a trooper to act as the base of the formation, indicates to such trooper the point where the right of the squad is to rest and the direction in which the line is to face, takes position at a convenient distance in front of and facing the point where the center of the squad is to rest, and commands: LEAD INTO LINE. The base trooper leads out (par. 188) and takes position as indicated; the other troopers lead out so as to approach the line successively directly from the rear and in single rank form on the line established by the base trooper, in order from right to left. The troopers form at stand to horse (par. 1.87) with intervals of 18 inches between horses. 126 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The line having thus formed, the leader calls the roll and commands, COUNT FOURS (par. 84). Where there is an incomplete four the troopers in it are cautioned as to the numbers finally assigned them (par.368-&). When but a single trooper is available for an incomplete four the four is habitually broken up and a trooper is placed as an extra file closer. This rule may, however, be modified in connection with the instruction of recruits. The squad having counted fours, the leader causes the squad to mount (par. 358). 351. The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers (par. 368-&, c, d) is similar! v executed. The leader com- mands: LEAD INTO COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS). The trooper upon whom the formation is based (par. 350) becomes No. 1 of the leading four. The elements of the column form, in order from front to rear, with dis- tances of 4 feet between successive fours, twos, or troopers. Ill column of fours or twos each four or two forms on its right trooper as in line. When the formation is in column of fours the command COUNT FOURS is omitted. The leader cautions : NOTE YOUR NUMBERS. 352. The squad may also form in similar manner after the troopers mount. In this case the leader causes the troopers to mount individually after saddling and commands : RIDE INTO LINE (COLUMN, COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS). The interval between the mounted troopers is 6 inches from knee to knee. To Form the Squad, Dismounted. 353. For the dismounted formation of the squad, in line, when not armed with the rifle, the leader designates the trooper to act as the base, indicates the latter's position, and takes his own position as described in par. 350, above. He then commands : FALL IN. The troopers form as in pars. 57 and 58. The leader then calls the roll and causes the squad to count fours. If armed with the rifle, the troopers fall in with rifles at the order. As soon as the line or column is formed the leader com- mands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Right shoulder, 4. ARMS FORMING THE SQUAD. 127 (par. 01-2d), and calls the roll. Each man, as Ms name is called, answers here and executes order arms. The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers is con- ducted in accordance with the modifications indicated. The comm.ands of the leader are: FALL IN, IN COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS). The distance between successive fours is 92 inches ; between successive twos, 40 inches ; between successive troopers, 14 inches. To Mount and Dismount. 354. The squad being in line, at stand to horse, the habitual commands for mounting are: 1. Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT; 8. Form, 4. RANK. At the first command the odd numbers lead out 4 yards directly to the front, and all execute the movements and take the final positions prescribed in par. 191-a. At the second command all the troopers complete, simultaneously, the movements of mounting as prescribed in par. 191-&. At the fourth command the even numbers move up into their intervals in the line. If the squad has dis- mounted from line and has formed rank (par. 356), the odd numbers stand fast at the command Prepare to mount and all mount in place. If the squad be mounted in column of fours, the third and fourth commands are omitted. At the first command the troopers of each four open out fanwise, Nos. 1 and 2 to the right, Nos. 3 and 4 to the left. Nos. 1 and 4 open out a little more than Nos. 2 and 8, all opening only enough to permit the troopers to mount without interfering with each other. The troopers habitually straighten their horses in the column as soon as they have mounted, but this requirement may be relaxed whenever mounting in unison is not required (par. 358). The squad in column of twos is mounted by commands and methods conforming to those used for mounting from column of fours. 355. The preparatory oral command for mounting may be omitted. The squad then executes at the command MOUNT all the movements prescribed in par. 354 for the commands, 1. Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT. The troopers mount promptly, but not in unison. 128 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The preparatory signal for mounting, when followed imme- diately by the signal of execution, will be understood as equiv- alent to the oral command MOUNT, and will be executed accordingly. 356. The squad being in line, the habitual commands for dismounting are: 1. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT; 3. Form, 4. RANK. At the first command the odd numbers ride 4 yards directly to the front, regulating on the right, and all the troopers execute the movements and take the final position prescribed in par. 192-a. At the second command the troopers execute, simultaneously, the movements prescribed in par. 192-&, At the fourth command the even numbers lead into their intervals in the rank. The third and fourth commands are given only in case it is desired to form rank. The squad may be dismounted and, without forming rank, execute rest or at ease (par. 359), or be inspected, mounted, or dismissed. The modifications indicated for dismounting in column of fours and column of twos correspond to those prescribed in par. 354 for mounting from the corresponding formation, except that the horses are not habitually straightened in the column after dismounting unless the dismounted squad moves forward (the troopers leading their horses). 357. The preparatory oral command for dismounting may be omitted. The squad then executes at the command DISMOUNT all the movements prescribed in par. 356 for the commands : 1. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT. The troopers dismount promptly but not in unison. The preparatory signal for dismounting, when followed immediately by the signal of execution will be understood as equivalent to the oral command DISMOUNT, and will be executed accordingly. 358. Until the individual instruction of recruits has ad- vanced to a point where they have acquired reasonable pro- ficiency in mounting and dismounting, these movements will be executed at collective as well as at individual instruction by the commands and methods indicated in pars. 355 and 357. After such proficiency has been acquired, mounting and dis- mounting at close-order drills, at ceremonies, and at all occa- sions of a ceremonial nature will habitually be executed in FORMING THE SQUAD. 129 unison by the commands and methods prescribed in pars. 354 and 356, respectively. The commands and methods pre- scribed in pars. 355 and 357, respectively, may, in the dis- cretion of the commander, continue to be employed on all other duty. The Rests and Route Ordee. 359. The mounted squad executes the rests and route order as prescribed in par. 221. After dismounting from line, rest or at ease may be given either before or after forming rank. The dismounted squad executes the rests and route order as prescribed in pars. 60 and 61. To Dismiss the Squad. 360. The squad, in column of troopers, is dismissed as pre- scribed for that formation in par. 222. The squad in column of fours is dismissed at the same command. The trooper on the right of the leading four leads out as indicated in par. 222 and is followed, in turn, by the other troopers of that four, then by the troopers of the next four, and so on successively to the rear of the column. In each four the troopers lead out in order from right to left. The dismissal from column of twos is similarly executed. The squad being in line is dis- missed by the commands and methods prescribed in par. 222 for a line with intervals, except that the troopers, in order to have their proper distance, move out successively from right to left instead of simultaneously. At the commands:' 1. By the right and left, 2. FALL OUT, the movement is executed in a similar manner from both flanks of the line. After having dismounted from line the squad may be dismissed w^ithout forming rank. Dismounted, without horses and not under arms, the com- mand is DISMISSED. Dismounted, without horses but armed with the rifle, the squad is dismissed as in par. 114. 38218 °— IS 9 130 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIOJS-S. . Alignments. 361. At the preliminary instruction (conducted without for- mal command) the instructor has two troopers on the right of the rank move forward a convenient distance and halt. He then aligns these two troopers carefully, with the proper inter- val as in line (par. 368-a), and causes the other troopers to note the details of the alignment. The other troopers are then required to move up one at a time and align themselves, with the correct interval, on the line thus established. The troopers move forward, in order from right to left, at successive repeti- tions by the instructor of the caution NEXT. Each trooper, when on or near the line, executes eyes right (par. 64), aligns himself accurately on the line established by the trooper or troopers on his right, and looks to the front as soon as he thinks himself correctly aligned. The instructor explains and corrects any errors. Similar instruction is given the troopers in aligning themselves to the left. As soon as reasonable proficiency is attained but a single trooper is moved forward and the alignment is made in the same manner upon the single trooper established as the base. The instruction is similarly given with the center trooper moved to the front as a base. Two troopers, one on the right, the other on the left of the base, then move forw^ard at each repetition of the caution, NEXT. The instructor observes in the mounted instruction : That each trooper moves his horse promptly and halts with his horse correctly disposed ; that he sits squarely on his horse without advancing either shoulder or leaning his body to the front or rear; that he dresses promptly as he arrives on the line; and that he makes proper use of the aids (pars. 200 to 208). In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established parallel to the front of the section; afterwards in oblique directions. 362. When the troopers have acquired reasonable proficiency in aligning themselves, as above, the alignment is executed at the command DRESS, given by the instructor from his position as leader. The trooper designated as the guide (par. 371) is always the base trooper of the alignment and places himself accurately 3 yards in rear of the leader. All the other troopers AilGlTING THE SftTJAD. 131 align themselves promptly on the base trooper, continuing to look toward him until the command, FRONT. At this last command, given when the alignment is completed, all turn the head and eyes quickly to the front and take the position of attention (pars. 59, 198). Movements in the rank then cease. The instructor then habitually faces the squad or goes to either flank to verify the accuracy of the dressing, first cau- tioning the guide to remain in place. 363. The troopers and their mounts must be so trained as to enable alignment and interval to be kept with sufficient accuracy to maintain cohesion in the mounted charge and to present a creditable appearance at ceremonies and at other occasions of a formal or ceremonial character. ' A dispropor- tionate amount of time and energy will not be devoted to this detail. 364. The use of dressing by command is ordinarily confined to elementary instruction (as preparation for tlue march in line) and to formations of a distinctly ceremonial character. At all other times the troopers are required habitually to align themselves on the base trooper without special command and to look to the front as soon as aligned. Formal dressing is employed only when the squad is at a halt. 365. The caution: DRESS, may, if necessary, be given to the squad when marching (par. 367) ; but it will not be employed when it is practicable to use instead cautions ad- dressed by name to the individual trooper or troopers who are at fault. 366. Alignments, dismounted, are executed by the same gen- eral methods as when mounted. At the command : DRESS, the hand is placed upon the hip to verify the interval (par. 57). Each trooper in dressing so places himself that his right arm rests lightly against the arm of the man on his right and that his eyes and shoulders are in line w^ith those of the man on hiis right. The left hand is dropped to the side at the command FRONT. 133 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Leading the Squad. (See also pars, 322-332.) 367. The squad being in line at a halt, the instructor directs the guide (par. 371) to maintain a position at a distance of 3 yards (about one horse length) in rear of him and to LEADING THE SQUAD WHEN DEPLOYED AS FORAGERS.. ^ COMMAKUT LfOfiAGERS. 2. MARCH. a / I ' LEJIDING THE SQUAD. I ' Fig. 31, par. 367. follow accurately in his path, whether such path be a straight line or a curve. He explains to the other troopers that iji marching they are so to regulate on the guide as to pre- LEADING THE SaUAD. 133 serve as nearly as practicable their alignment and interval in the rank, individually increasing and decreasing the gait or pace (Def.) as may be necessary to do this. All are cau- tioned that they must learn to keep their proper positions in the rank without unnecessary rigidity without making sudden changes in gait or pace and without keeping their eyes con- stantly fixed on the guide. They are instructed that while riding with the head and eyes habitually directed as in par. 198 they will keep an alert lookout over the ground in front, cast frequent glances toward the leader so as to observe the latter's movements, and glance occasionally toward the guide to assure that the alignment is being correctly maintained. Having given these instructions, the leader places himself, facing to the front, 3 yards in front of the guide, commands ; FOLLOW ME, and moves forward. The leader must be care- ful to march steadily, so regulating his direction and gait at first as to enable the guide to conform without difficulty. Each trooper keeps his horse straight in the rank, maintain- ing his alignment with the guide and his proper interval ipar. 368-a) from the man next him on the side of the guide. The troopers yield to pressure from the side of the guide and resist pressure from the opposite direction. All adjustments are made gradually without crowding or confusion. In the beginning the leader moves at a walk and makes only slight changes of direction. As the instructor completes each change of direction he indicates the neic direction of march by extending his arm as in signal forward (par. 990), dropping the hand to the side when the guide's horse is straightened in the neio direction. When the troopers have become suffi- ciently practiced in adjusting themselves to the movements of the instructor, the latter makes the changes of direction more marked, and moves, during such changes, on the arcs of smaller circles. Finally, he requires the squad to apply the principles of leading in the manner indicated in pars. 346-349. As each movement is taken up the principles of leading that apply are explained in detail, so that all may understand clearly the identity and position of the base. The base trooper (guide) must clearly understand his duties. (Fig. 31.) 1S4 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Squad Formations. The formations of the squad for drill, march, or combat are as follows : CLOSE ORDER. 368. (a) Line: The troopers are abreast of each other with intervals (Def.) of 6 inches (mounted) or 4 inches (dis- mounted) between troopers. (&) Column of fours: The troopers of each four are ar- ranged as in line. The fours follow successively one behind another with distances (Def.) between successive fours of 4 feet, mounted, or 92 inches, dismounted. When a four in- cludes less than four troopers it is an incomplete four. Places in an incomplete four are habitually filled in the following order: No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, No. 1 (par. 374). (c) Column of twos: The troopers of each two are arranged as in line, the twos following successively, one behind another, with distances between successive twos of 4 feet, mounted, or 40 inches, dismounted. If any two have but a single troopev the latter takes the position corresponding to the right trooper of the incomplete two (par. 374). (d) Column of troopers: The troopers of each four follow successively, one behind another, with distances between con- secutive troopers of 4 feet when mounted, or 14 inches when dismounted. EXTENDED ORDER. (e) Foragers: The troopers are abreast of each other, with intervals of 3 yards between troopers, unless some other interval be specially designated. The dismounted formation corresponding to foragers is skir- mishers. The interval between troopers in line of skirmishers is one-half pace unless some other interval be designated. In the employment of a squad or other small detachment the designation of a greater interval than one-half pace is habitual rather than exceptional (par. 408). ORDER IN THE SQUAD. 135 In a line of skirmishers at one-half pace interval each man may be considered as occupying, including his interval, about 1 yard of front. The squad may also be extended in depth as prescribed in par. 413. Order in the Squad. 369. When it is said that a unit is in order in any formation it is meant that the arrangement and condition of the compo- nent elements is such that the unit is ready to execute, in the accustomed manner, any movement that is intended to be exe- cuted from the formation in question. The conditions essen- tial to order in each formation of the squad are stated in par. 370. The squad, fn line, for example, would not be in order if the troopers did not know their numbers, for it could then execute no movement based upon the division into fours, twos, or troopers. 370. The squad in line, column of fours, or foragers is in order when the troopers of each four are arranged, from right to left in the four, in the order of their respective numbers, and each knows his number. The squad in column of twos is in order when the twos of each four are next to each other in the column, odd numbers on the right, and each trooper knows his number. When the two composed of 1 and 2 is in front, the column is said to be right in front; when the two composed of 3 and 4 is in front, the column is said to be left in front. The squad in column of troopers is in order when the troop- ers of each four are next to one another in the column, are ar- ranged from front to rear in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, or 4, 3, 2, 1, and each trooper knows his number. When the order is 1, 2, 3, 4, the column is said to be right in front ; when the order is 4, 3, 2, 1, left in front. It is not necessary to order in the squad, in any of the ahove formations, that a particular trooper or troopers be in any designated four, nor that the fours have any special relative order from right to left or front to rear. 136 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Guide of the Squad. (See also Def. Base, and par, 326.) 371. At the original formation of the squad in, line, the leader designates a trooper by name as guide of the squad. The guide of the squad in line and foragers is habitually a trooper at or near the center of the squad ; any trooper may, however, be designated as guide. 372. A trooper having once been designated as guide of the squad in line continues to act as such, in line or foragers, until another trooper be specifically designated as guide. With a view, however, to avoiding possible doubt as to the identity of the guide the leader at each change of formation that ter- minates in line or foragers habitually indicates the guide of the new formation. 373. To designate the guide the leader cautions : (So-and-so) THE GUIDE, and habitually places himself 3 yards in front of the trooper named if not already in that position. A trooper designated as guide will, at the time of the designation, raise his hand or weapon to a position vertically above his head, hold the position for a moment, and then lower his arm to his side without further command. The leader or his assistant may at any time cause the guide thus to indicate his identity to the other troopers by cautioning : GUIDE. The leader may change the guide of the squad in line at any time by indicating disregard (par. 990), placing himself in front of another trooper and designating the latter as guide in the manner pre- scribed above. 374. The base of the squad in each of the column forma- tions is the leading element (four, two, or trooper, respec- tively). The guide of the leading (base) element is also the guide of the squad. In each four No. 2 is the guide ; in each two the right trooper (No. 1 or No. 3). In an incomplete four or two the position of the guide is always filled. The guide of each element in rear of the base follows in the trace of the guide of the base (leading) element at the prescribed distance. 375. Whenever in the execution of any movement a four or two moves to its new position by an oblique (or movement approximating an oblique) the trooper on the side toward COMMANDS AND ARM SIGNALS, SaUAD. 137 which the oblique is made acts as guide of the element during the oblique. At all other times the guide in a four or two is as indicated in par. 374 unless specially otherwise stated. 376. The guide of the squad habitually follows the leader at 8 yards distance, but the leader may designate a greater dis- tance, in which case the guide marches accordingly. 377. When a guide temporarily is directing; guide (par. 324), it is necessary that he continue accurately in the direc- tion of march or in the direction indicated for him by the leader. This is an application of the marching upon fixed points prescribed in the School of the Trooper (par. 232). Mo\^MENTS Executed by the Squad. 378. Any formation (close or extended order) prescribed for the squad may be taken directly from any other close-order formation. Being in extended order the squad, to pass di- rectly to close order, must execute the assembly or rally. 379. Subject to such modifications as are indicated under the respective paragraphs describing the movements, the dis- mounted squad executes, at the same commands as prescribed for the mounted squad, such movements as are not obviously inapplicable to dismounted duty. The execution of the dis- mounted movements will, where differences in the mounted and dismounted methods necessarily exist, be in accord with the principles explained in the School of the Trooper, Dismounted, corresponding changes in the details of execution being made. 380. The general principles regulating gait and pace for both mounted and dismounted movements are stated in pars. 333- 339. Modifications of those principles, if any, are stated under the corresponding paragraphs in the School of the Squad. Commands and Corresponding Arm Signals. 381. Following is a list of the principal commands employed in the School of the Squad, together with the corresponding arm signals, if any. The list includes only a few of the com- mands also found in the School of the Trooper (mounted or dismounted). The commands are arranged alphabetically for convenient reference. The description of the signals will be found in par. 990. 138 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Commands. Pars. 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH 1. Backward, 2. MARCH 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.. CIRCLE HORSES 1. Column, 2. MARCH 1. Column half right (left), 2. MARCH. . 1. Column of twos, 2. MARCH 1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH COUPLE HEAD AND TAIL DISMOUNT 1. Foragers, 2. MARCH 1. Forward, 2. MARCH 1, Fours right (left), 2. MARCH 1. Fours right (left) about, 2. MARCH. . I. Fours right (left), column left (right); 2. MARCH. 1. Fours (twos or troopers) at so many yards distance, 2. MARCH. 1. Gallop, 2. MARCH 414 384 411 428 399 396 396 427 357 408 410 382 412 391 400 401 402 403-c 413 382 Arm Signals. Assemble.* None. March to the flank.* None. Column.* Change direction.* (See par. 3S6.) Column— twos, t Change direction.* {See par. 386.) None. Prepare to dismount.* (Given as explained in par. 357., 'Foragers.* Forward.* March to the flank.* To the rear* (left about only). None. None. From the trot only: Increase the gait.*a * Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the signal of execution in each case is made as prescribed in par. 990. t In signals marked thus (combination signals) the preparatory signal consists of more than one element; the signal of execution follows the last element of the preparatory signal. a See pars. 239, 333. When a gait signal is added to the preparatory command, the resulting signal is given as a ci^mbination signal. COMMAinJS AND ARM SIGNALS. 139 Commands. Pars. Arm Signals. HORSES BACK INCLINE TO THE RIGHT 1. Nos. 1, 2, and 4; 2. FORM ON FOOT. MOUNT 1. Prepare to dismount, 2. DISMOUNT 1. Prepare to mount, 2. MOUNT RALLY 1. Right (left) by fours, 2. MARCH 1, Right (left) by troopers, 2. MARCH. 1. Right (left) by twos, 2. MARCH 1. Right (left) forward, fours right (left); 2. MARCH. 1. Right (left) half turn, 2. MARCH; 3. Forward, 4. MARCH; or 3. Squad, 4. HALT. 1. Right (left) front into foragers (or skirmishers), 2. MARCH. 1. Right (left) front into line, 2. MARCH.. 1. Right (left) turn, 2. MARCH; 3. For- ward, 4. MARCH; cr 3. Squad, 4. HALT. None. None. None. Prepare to moimt. (Given as explained in par. 355.) Prepare to dismount.* [Prepare to mount.* Rally (no preparatory sig- nal). Oral command habit- ually accompanies signal. None. None. None. None. Change direction.* The sig- nal of execution for the change of direction is fol- lowed by forward or halt* (par. 386). None. None. Change direction.* The sig- nal of execution for the change of direction is fol- lowed by forward * or halt.* * Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the signal of execution in each •ase is made as prescribed in par. 990. 432 390 396 436 355 356 358 354 358 416 403-c 393-& 403-& 393-a 403-& 403-d 388 409 397 386 140 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Commands. Pars. Arm Signals. 1, Skirmishers, 2. MARGE 1 408 1 410 383 jskirmishers.* Halt.* 1. Squad, 2. HALT TO FIGHT ON FOOT. When given or- 430 To fight on foot. (No pre- ally the indication ACTION RIGHT paratory signal.) (L.EFT, FRONT) is habitually added to the above command. FIRE AT WILL may also immediately follow the above command (par. 430). 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH 412 402 To the rear.* 1. Troopers right (left) about, To the rear * (left about 2. MARCH. (Given only from column only). of troopers.) 1. Troopers right (left) oblique, 385 None. 2. MARCH. 1. Trot, 2. MARCH 239 From' the walk: Increase the gait.*a From the gallop: Decrease the gait.*a 1. Twos right (left), 2. MARCH. (Given 400 March to the flank.* only from column of twos and as an ex- ceptional movement.) 1. Twos right (left) about 2. MARCH. 402 To the rear * (left about (Given only from column of twos.) only). 1. Walk, 2. MARCH 239 From the trot only: De- crease the gait.* a * Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the signal of execution in each ease is made as prescribed in par. 9U0. a See pars. 239, 333. When a gait signal is added to the preparatory command, the resulting signal is given as a combination signal. MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQUAD. 141 Detailed Description of Movements, Close Order. 382. Being in line at a halt, to march to the front: 1. For- ward, 2. MARCH. The leader moves forward, followed at a distance of 3 yards by the guide (par. 371), The other troopers conform to the march of the guide as explained in par. 367. Being at a halt, to move forward at a trot or gallop, the commands are (par. 333) : 1. Forward, trot, or 1. Forward, gallop: 2. MARCH. Increases of gait are habitually made progressively (par. 239).. The march of the squad in line, dismounted, is conducted in accordance with the provisions of pars. 68-74. 383. Marching in line, to halt: 1. Squad, 2. HALT. All halt at the second command. The troopers, if not already aligned, align themselves with- out command on the guide as they halt (par. 364). Move- ment in the rank then ceases. If marching at the trot or gallop, the gait is ordinarily decreased progressively, the halt being executed from the walk (par. 239). 384. Being in line at a halt, to march backward: 1, Back- ward, 2. MARCH, All the troopers rein back (par. 280), regulating on the guide, who maintains his distance from the leader. The execution of the march backward as a collective movement is habitually limited to cases w^here the movement may be necessary ; it is then executed for short distances only. It is not executed at an increased gait. 3S5. Being in line, to oblique and resume the original direc- tion: 1. Troopers right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH. Executed by each trooper as in par. 230. During the oblique march the right knee of each trooper should be just in rear of the left knee of the trooper on his right ; the trooper on the flank toward which the oblique fe made acts tempo- rarily without special indication as directing guide (Def.) of the squad. The line during the oblique march should be parallel to its original direction. The leader does not take position in front of the flank trooper during the oblique. 142 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Halting the mounted squad while at the oblique should be avoided. If the squad has to be halted thus, the troopers upon halting turn their horses to the original front in so far as practicable. To resume the original direction by similar means, the com- mands are: 1. /] Forward, 2. (J MARCH. ,' In executing the oblique by- trooper, dis- mounted, each '/// COMMAND: t r o o p e r pre- , ^ . , , y/ 1F0RWARD,2.MARCH. serves his rela- ^/'' / ' / /'//' tive position, ^^^;^^^$^ keeping his 8'//f^''^^7^ shoulders paral- '/'/'////' lei to those of '////// COMMAND: the directing ////'/ 2. TROOPERS guide and so RIGHT OBLIQUE, regulating h i s Z.MARCH. Step that the Fig. 32, par. 385. ^'^"^ ^^^^ ^^- main parallel to its original front. In resuming the original direction, the troopers half face to the left in marching, then move straight to the front. If at half step or mark time while obliquing, the oblique march is resumed by the commands : 1. Oblique, 2. MARCH. Should the halt be commanded while the squad is obliquing, the troopers halt faced to the front (fig. 32). 386. Being in line, to turn to the right or left: 1. Right (left) turn, 2. MARCH; 3. Forward, 4. MARCH; or 3. Squad, 4. HALT. The principle v)f the movement is explained in par. 329-a. The form of the third and fourth commands is determined by whether the turn is to terminate with the advance in line or with the halt. In the turn the squad is led by its leader (par. 367) through a change of direction of 90°. The leader (and, therefore, the guide) are restricted not only to this particular change of MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQUAD. 143 direction but also to a particular arc or path during the turn (par. 387). There is no special arm signal for the turn as such ; but, as the turn is a change of direction, the signal for the latter movement is applicable. The signal for the change of direc- tion does not in itself indicate the degree of the turn, but the leader's subsequent signal forward or halt indicates when the change of direction is to cease. In the turn, as in any case of the march in line, the leader, subject to the restrictions just indicated, regulates the direction and gait of march, the guide conforms to the move- ments of the leader, and all the other troopers regulate their alignment and interval on the guide. The rate of march of the leader and the guide should not be so rapid as to make it impracticable for the troopers on the marching flank of the squad to preserve their alignment on the guide during the turn. The guide moves in the U'ace of the leader during the turn, as well as before and after the turn. When the turn is executed by the marehing squad the leader gives the command after he has begun to change direction and at the moment when the guide arrives at the point where the leader straightened his horse in the neio direction (par, 471). When executed from a halt the second command can not be given aa above indicated. The leader in that case begins to turn at the command of exe- cution while the guide, instead of beginning the actual turn at once, moves forward so as to move, during the turn, in the trace of the leader (par. 367). In executing the turn dismounted the leader so regulates the length of step of the guide that the trooper on the marclL- ing flank can keep the regular step corresponding to the gait at which the turn is made. The other troopers lengthen or shorten the step accordingly, maintaining the cadence and their alignment and interval with respect to the guide. If the turn be terminated by the commands : 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, all the troopers resume the regular step at the fourth com- mand. 387. In executing the turn in a squad or platoon, the leader, followed by the guide, so turns on the arc of a circle that the pivot trooper, in conforming to the guide's movements, marches on the arc of a circle whose radius varies with the gait of the guide, this radius being 2 yards at a walk, 4 yards at a trot, 144 CAVALHY DRILL REGULATIONS. 01^ and 6 yards at a gallop. When the turn is executed dis- mounted the corresponding radius, in either quick or double time, is 1 yard. 388. At the command: 1. Right (left) half turn, 2. MARCH; 3, Forward, 4. MARCH; or 3. Squad, 4. HALT, a change of di- rection of 45° may be made in accordance with the principles explained in pars. 386 and 387. The arm signal for the half turn follows the rule indicated for the full turn (par 386). 389. In all movements in these regulations in the course of which fours, twos, or troopers execute a turn or half turn this last movement is made by each element in accordance with the principles explained in pars. 386 and 387, except that the com- mands 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, are omitted and each element continues the march in the new direction, upon completion of the turn, unless the commands : 3. Squad, 4. HALT, are given. The guide of a four in the turn is always No. 2 ; the guide of a two the right trooper. 390. Where only a slight change in the direction of march is desired, it is habitually accomplished by leading without any special command or signal therefor. The leader may caution : INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT). The execution of this movement^ like that of the turn, is a special case of leading applied to the march in line. The leader slightly alters the direction of march, the guide conforms to the leader's move- ments, and the other troopers conform to the movements of the guide. 391. Being in line, to form column of fours to a flank: 1. Fours right (left), 2. /''""" "~~-^^ MARCH. - — ^^'~*^— ^"^— -^^ ^^^ fours move simul- /^^^'""^^^'-^^^"^^ \,^--__j taneously, each executing //'''Zc;:f^/-^^§.'I^§ right turn and taking up l^/i AQ'A A/1 a' A/irtA' ^^^^ march in the new di- I I Ml I I I rection (par. 389). No. 2 .UUUUUUUUUUUU of the four on the flank Fig. 33, par. 391. toward which the move- ment is executed is the guide upon whom the other Nos. 2 regulate during the move- ment (par. 326), as well as the guide of the resulting column (par. 374). The leader promptly takes position in front of the guide (par. 325). Gaits are regulated as in par. S37-d. MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SftUAD. 145 The movement dismounted is executed on the same prin- ciples except that No. 2 of each four regulates his step and path as indicated for the dismounted turn (pars. 386, 387). (Fig. 33.) 392. Column of twos is not formed directly to a flank from line. Column of twos may be formed to the front as explained in pars. 393 and 403, and the head of the column be at once marched in any desired direction. The same principle regu- lates the formation of column of troopers lo a flank. 393. Being: in column of fours, to form column of twos or troopers: (a) To form column of twos: 1. Right (left) by twos, 2. MARCH. The right two of the leading four is the base. The other twos enter the column successively, the right two of each four being followed immediately by the left two of the same four, the left two obliquing to enter the column (par. 331). All distances are 4 feet (par. 308). Gaits are regulated as in movements from line into column (par. 337-(i, c) . (b) Column of troopers is formed on the same principles at the commands: 1. Right (left) by trooper, 2. MARCH. The right trooper of the leading four is the base. Column of troopers from column of twos is formed by the same commands as from column of fours and in accordance with the same principles. 7'he movements described in this paragraph are among those referred to in par. 468-b. 394. In executing any movement by which a column of twos or troopers is formed, a four composed of less than three troopers (par. 368-?>) acts temporarily as a two — on the right of the four if the column of twos is formed right in front (par. 870) ; on the left of the four if the column of twos is formed left in front. When the column of fours is re-formed the troopers take their proper places in column as indicated in par. 368-&. 395. The squad in column of fours, twos, or troopers is marched to the front, halted, marched backward, marched in an oblique direction, and marched again to the original front by the same commands as the squad in line, each element of 38218 °— 18- 10 146 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. the column conforming to the principles indicated for the squad in line (pars. 329, 374). 396. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to change direction. The movement 's executed as explained in par. 329, the fours (twos, troopers) successively changing on the same ground, the guide of each element moving in the trace of the leader. In changing direction in column of fours, mounted, the guide of each rear four slightly diminishes the pace when 4 feet from the turning point, correspondingly increasing the pace during the actual change of direction so as to have the proper distance of 4 feet from the four next in front when the turn is completetl. This provision does not apply to the corresponding dismounted movement, nor to the colunm of twos, or troopers. To indicate, for any column a change of direction of 90" or 45°, the leader may command, respec- tively: 1. Column right (left), or 1. Col- umn half right (left) ; 2. MARCH. Tlie leader may indicate a slight change of direction bv the caution: IN- CLINE TO THE RIGHT. The dismounted execution '^of the 11,'/' I ) change of direction conforms in each ♦; ; / I 1 1 element of the column to the modifica- '•S'S''! 1 1 1 tions noted in pars. 386 and 387 for the )■ '"'.;/ ' I execution of the turn dismounted. The '//[/// leader regulates the length of his own \//:/}//// step accordingly during his actual change /y;-'i'ji/ of direction, and the guide of each suc- cessive element does the same when he (1 reaches the turning point. 897. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to the front: 1. Right (left) front into line, 2. MARCH. Fig. 34, par. 397. ^^^^ leading element (four, two, or trooper) of the column is the base of the movement and moves forward. MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQTTAD. 147 Each element in rear of the base leaves the column by a movement approximating a right oblique and proceeds (par. 375) to a place abreast of the leading element, the elements taking successively, from left to right in the new line, posi- tions in the same order as that in which they previously ap- peared from head to rear in the column. The guide of the leading element, when the movement be- gins, acts as directing guide (Def.) cf the squad from the moment the leader starts to his new position until he indi- cates the guide of the new line (pars. 326, 373) when all regulate on the latter guide. Gaits are regulated as in pars. 337-ff, &. (Fig. 34.) This is one of the movements referred to in par. Jj6S-h. In the dismounted execution of the movement at quick time the leader commands : 1. Squad, 2. HALT, as soon as the lead- ing element has advanced to the point w here it is desired that the line shall form (par. 339-a, h, c). Only the leading (base) element halts at the command, each rear element halting as it arrives on the line (par. 337-/). If executed while marching in double time, the leader similarly commands : 1. ftuick time, 2. MARCH, the reduced gait being taken successively by the elements as they reach their positions (par. 337-/). If march- ing in quick time, and double time be included in the command, the command for the increased gait applies only to the rear elements (par. 337-/). 398. To prevent the inversion of twos or troopers in their respective fours the squad in column of twos or column of troopers should form line to the left front when the squad is right in front (par. 370), and vice versa. 399. Being In column of twos or troopers, to form column of fours: 1. Column, 2. MARCH. {8ee Def. c3-v. . c¥:r. r;^.. Column.) '^----'' ^— --' cj:- The leading ele- "" ment is the base and . command: i. column 2. march follows the leader. P,^ 35 399 If in column of twos the rear two of the leading four obliques at a correspond- ingly faster gait (par. 335) and takes its proper place abreast of, and to the right or left of, the leading two of that four, so 148 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. that the troopers of the four shall appear, from right to left, in the order of their respective numbers. All the other twos take up a correspondingly faster gait than the leading two, and the fours forrft successively from head to rear in the column in the manner indicated above (par. 331). The lead- ing two of each four, other than the leading four,, takes the gait of the head of the column (or halts) when at 4 feet from the corresponding two of the four next in front. In each four the rear two begins to oblique as the leading two of that four approaches the position where it decreases the gait (or halts). The leader takes position in front of the guide of the column (No. 2). Gaits are further regulated as in movements from column into line (par. 337-a, &). Column of fours from column of troopers is formed by the same commands and in accordance with the same principles. Column of twos from column of troopers is formed in a simi- lar manner at the commands: 1. Column of twos, 2. MARCH. The column of twos will be right in front or left in front (par. 370), according as the column of troopers was right in front or left in front prior to the movement. In the dismounted execution of the above movements in quick time the leader habitually commands : 1. Squad, 2. HALT, im- mediately following the command of execution (par. 339-&, c). Only the leading element halts (par. 339-/), each of the rear elements halting when it reaches its prescribed position in the column. If executed in double time the leader similarly fol- lows the command of execution by the command for quick time (par. 339-6, c), which is successively taken by the elements, as above. If marching in quick time, and double time be com- manded, only the rear elements take the increased gait, each taking quick time on arriving in its place. (Fig. 35.) 400. Being: in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to a flank: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH. Each four turns to the right (par. 389). Each rear four regulates on the leading four until the fours unite in line (par. 326), when, unless the leader halts the squad, all take up the march in the new direction without further command, regu- lating on the new guide (pars. 325, 372). If the squad is to form line without advancing in the new direction, the leader MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SaUAD. 149 gives the preparatory indication for the halt immediately fol- lowing the second command, so as to add the command halt as the fours unite in line. COLUMN OF FOURS ATA WALK, \^ COMMAND: ; 1. FOURS LEFT, / 2.MARCH.3.SQUAD. ^^-'^^'^^-''' ' ^' i.HALT. Fig. 36, par. 400. In an emergency a similar movement may be executed from columns of twos at the commands: 1. Twos right (left), 2. MARCH. Loss of order may result. In the absence of other indication, intervals are closed toward the guide (par. 372). A similar movement executed from column of troopers results in a line of foragers, which may be assembled or rallied to form line (pars. 414, 416). Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-cf. (Fig. 36.) 401. Being in line, to face or march the line to the rear: 1. Fours right (left) about, 2. MARCH, When the movement is executed by signal the elements of the column always turn to the leit about. The oral command fouri right about is not accompanied by an arm signal. Each four turns ISO degrees in the direction indicated (par. 889). The leader, passing around a flank of the squad, promptly takes position in front of the guide so as to lead the squad in the new direction (pars. 325, 372). To face to the rear, the squad is halted as the fours unite in line. The modifications incident to the execution of the dis- mounted movement are indicated in par. 391, Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-fZ. A dismounted squad may also be marched a short distance to the rear by the oral command and metliods indicated in par. 82. 150 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. .9;:^^^^ Fig. 37, par. 402. 402. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to face or march the column to the rear: 1. Fours (twos, troopers), right (left) about, 2. MARCH. The provision in the preceding para- graph regarding the execution of the movement by signal applies equally to this paragraph. Each four (two, trooper) turns 180 degrees in the direction indi- cated (par. 389). The leader promptly takes position in front of the guide of the column (par. 325). (Fig. 37.) 403. Being in line to form column of fours, twos, or' troopers to the front: 1. Right (left) by fours (twos, troopers), 2. MARCH. The formation is a successive one. The right element (four, two, or trooper, according to the command) is the base; it moves forward and follows the leader, becoming the leading element of the column. (a) In forming column of fours each four to the left of the base successively obliques to the right (par. 385) at the gait of the A base as soon as it has sufficient (J space, and resumes the direct march ^''. so as to enter the column at 4 feet ' distance. To avoid losing distance the oblique must be begun in each four when the heads of its horses are opposite the croups of the horses of the four on its right. Gaits are regulated as in par. SS7-a, c. (Fig. 38.) (&) In forming column of twos or troopers only the elements of the right four move in the manner indicated above. Each of the other elements successively turns to the right (par. 389) and then, after advancing in the new direction, turns Fig. 38, par. 403 (a). to the left so as to MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQUAD. 151 /) IB COMMAND: 1. UFT BY mOS 2. MARCH. \f,\3\\zvj\ \M\\i:y/\ .yiyiHn Fig. 39, par. 403 (6). Gaits are regu- enter the column at 4 feet distance (par. 331). Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-a, c. The movements described in (a) and (&) are among those referred to in par. 468-6. (Fig. S9.) (c) Right (left) by fours is ordinarily unsuited to execution in groups of any size. Should it be necessary to break to the front from the flank of such a unit, column of fours to the front may be formed by execut- ing fours right (left) and then changing the direction of march of the head of the column. The oral commands : 1. Fours right (left), column left (right), 2. MARCH, and 1. Fours right (left), column half left (right), 2. MARCH, are authorized for this purpose, lated as in par. 337-fZ. A {d) For cases that are not suiv- \\ ably met by (a) or (c) of this r paragraph the commands : 1. Right ^/ (left) forward, fours right (left), 2. MARCH, are authorized. The right four is the base and moves forward following the leader, who promptly takes position in front of the guide of the column (pars. 325, 374). The second four from the right starts to move as in fours right (par. 391), its guide decreas- ing the pace until the right four has partly cleared the second four, when the latter four, by a movement approximating an oblique, enters the column so as to follow in the trace of the leading (original right) four at 4 feet distance. The other fours execute fours right (each slightly decreasing the pace during the turn), and then column left, so as to follow the sec- ond four at the proper distance. The fours move simultaneously and, except as noted above, all at the same gait (par. S37-d). Fig. 40, par. 403 (d). 152 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. In the execution of the movement dismounted the right four moves forward ; the remainder of the squad executes fours right, column left, and follows the right (leading) four at 92 inches distance. The right four takes four short steps just after it, clears the four next on its left, then resumes the full step. (Fig. 40.) Extended Ordee. 404. In extended-order drills the troopers habitually march at ease, but keep on the alert so as promptly to conform to the indications of the leader and the movements of the guide. The rifles of dismounted troopers in extended order are carried as in par. 61. 405. Foragers may be formed when the squad is in any au- thorized formation (par. 468) or in disorder, when it is mov- ing at any gait or is halted. The extension is effected toward the direction of march. When possible the deployment should be made upon ground protected from hostile view and fire. Whatever the method employed for the extension, the leader controls the movements of the base (par. 323). The other troopers, moving at a gallop, form foragers in accordance with the methods indicated. The squad, deployed as foragers, is marched to the front and halted, obliques, resumes the original direction, executes changes in gait and changes of direction, by the commands and methods prescribed for the squad in line. 406. The appropriate substitution of skirmishers for for- agers, is made in the commands for movements in extended order, dismounted (par. 368-e). The skirmishers move at a run to their positions on the line of foragers. 407. A greater or less interval than 3 yards between for- agers may be ordered, the words at (so many) yards being added to the preparatory command so as immediately to follow the word foragers or skirmishers. 408. Being in line, to form foragers: 1. Foragers, 2. MARCH. The guide continues to be the base and advances (par. 405) at the gait of march unless the leader indicates otherwise (pars. 337-/, 405). The troopers to the right of the guide move at a gallop obliquely to the right front; those to the left obliquely to the left front. The troopers take position MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQUAD. 153 i-/)' / abreast of the base in the same order as in line and at inter- vals of 3 yards measured from the side of the base. Should the ri2:ht trooper be the guide, all oblique to the left; should the left trooper be the guide, all oblique to the right. In the execution of the corresponding dismounted movement (commands: 1. Skirmishers, 2. MARCH — par. 406) the troop- ers move to their places at a run, taking intervals of one-half pjice, unless some other interval be indicated (pars. 36S-e, 407). (Fig. 31.) 409. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form foragers: 1. Right (left) front into foragers, 2. A MARCH. (J The le-ft trooper of the / leading element of the col- umn as the base of the de- ployment advances at the gait of march (par. 337-a) unless the leader indicates o t h e r wise (pars. 387-/, 405), the other troopers of the leading element deploy- ing as indicated in par. 408. The remaining troopers move obliquely to the right front at a gallop and ex- tend the line in similar manner, the order of the successive elements being the same, from left to right in line, as it formerly was from head to rear in the column. The possibility of the in- version of troopers in the fours as a result of forming foragers from column of tivos or troopers should be kept in mind. No such inversion can occur in movements executed from column of fours. The movement described in this paragraph is one of those referred to in par. 468-&. (Fig. 41.) / ' / [}' / / /■ y Fig. 41, par. 409. i54 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 410. Being in disorder, to form foragers: Foragers may be formed from any condition of diKspersion or disorder by methods similar to those indicated in pars. 408 and 409. At the command : 1. Foragers, 2. MARCH, the troop- ers nearest the leader ride toward him at a gallop. The leader indicates the guide (par. 373), who follows the leader; the other troopers, moving at a gallop, take position, with the proper interval, on the right and left of the guide, without re- gard to order. Line of foragers from a condition of disorder may also be formed by first rallying the squad (par. 416) and then forming foragers. Dismounted, skirmishers may similarly be formed. 411. Being deployed as foragers, to march to a flank: 1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH. Each trooper turns 90° to the right and marches in the new direction (par. 389). A column of troopers at 4 feet distance results. The line of foragers may be resumed by again march- ing to the flank by the use of corresponding commands and methods. Gaits are regulated as in par. SS7-(l. Dismounted, each trooper moves as in par. 81. If at a halt the movement of the foragers by the flank is executed by the same commands as when marching. 412. Being deployed as foragers, to march to the rear: 1. To the rear, 2. MARCH. Each trooper executes an about to the left (pars. 389, 486). To march again to the front the commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, are given. Each trooper executes another about to the left. If a line of foragers be halted while marching to the rear, each trooper turns to the left about and halts, faced to the front (par. 474). Gaits are regulated as in par. SS7-d. Dismounted, each trooper executes to the rear (par. 82). If at a halt, the movement of the foragers to the rear is exe- cuted by the same commands as when marching. 413. The squad may be extended in depth as well as in front. The commands are : 1. Fours (twos, or troopers) at so many yards distance, 2. MARCH. This movement may be used to cross a fire-swept area when such a course is necessary. The MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQTJAD. 155 leader indicates the point wliere the squad is to be reassem- bled. The fours (twos or troopers) move out successively from head to rear in column or right to left in line. Each element may extend laterally on its guide. The gait is the gallop. 414. Being deployed as foragers and in order (par. 470) to assemble: 1. Assemble, 2. A MARCH. The [J guide advances and follows the leader. The other troopers close in on the guide and form ___ "comwand- in line upon him ^^" ..-^ 1. ASSEMBLE.. 2. MARCH . ^ - in the same rela- t i ve which they were at the moment Fig. 42, par. 414. the assembly was commanded. The leader halts the guide at any time if it is desired to assemble w^ithout gaining further ground in the di- rection of march. The leader, by moving in any desired direc- tion, may regulate the direction toward which the assembly is executed. Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-e, the elements other than the base taking a correspondingly faster gait. The assembly in each unit is explained for that unit (par. 468-&). The leader may, by prior designation of any trooper (e. g., a flank trooper) as guide (par. 873), cause the assembly to be executed on that trooper by the commands and methods just indicated. The troopers always start to assemble in line, but when an assembly in column is desired it may virtually be accom- plished by the leader's designation of a flank trooper as the guide before ordering the assembly and cautioning: COLTTMN as soon as the assembly begins. The fours, as they succes- sively assemble toward the base, then take their places in column of fours instead of in line; the leader takes post in front of No. 2 (par. 325). same rela- f\ rC i( ^ ^ \ \ ^n r-.ei.':fl fl () fl 166 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. If there be not space to advance in column of fours, the assembly in column of twos or troopers may be accomplished by corresponding commands and methods. The squad executes assemble only when deployed as foragers and in order. Under other conditions the rally (par. 416), fol- lowed by count fours, more easily accomplishes the purposes of the assembly (Def.). In executing the assembly dismounted the troopers close in on the guide in double time tuithout special command if the guide and leader continue to advance (par. 339-fir) ; otherwise they close in at quick time unless double time be commanded (par. 339-&). (Fig. 42.) 415. If to the rear (par. 412) be executed by the squad, a temporary loss of order occurs. If it be desired to pass to close order without resuming the march to the front and assembling (par. 414), the squad may rally (par. 416) and count fours. 416. Being in any formation, or not formed, or in disorder, to _ COMMAND: FiG.^43, par. 416. rally: RALLY. When the rally is ordered the signal is habitu- ally accompanied hy the oral command, both the signal and the oral command being repeated until understood and obeyed. The signal is obeyed at once, there being no preparatory com- mand for this movement.. The leader takes position at any point or moves in any desired direction, and at any gait that will permit the move- ment to be executed. The troopers ride toward the leader at an extended gallop and, in the absence of other indication, form in rear of the leader in line. The leader promptly desig- nates the guide (pars. 371, 373), who follows the leader. The THE MOUNTED ATTACK. 157 other troopers form, as they come up, on the right and left of the guide extending the line. The leader may caution : COL- UMN, as the leading troopers approach. The troopers then form in column of fours instead of in line. The leading ele- ment forms first : the other troopers, as they arrive, succes- sively form fours, extending the column to the rear. The leader designates the guide (pars. 373, 374) and cautions: NOTE YOUR NUMBERS. The rally in column is exceptional and is intended for use only on occasions when a narrow road or other circumstances of the terrain prevent the rally in line. Should the route along which the leader is moving when the rally is ordered be too narrow to permit the formation of column of fours, the leader may caution: COLUMN OF TWOS (COLUMN OF TROOPERS) as the leading troopers approach. The movement is executed as explained for the rally in column of fours. Fours should be counted at once. The rally in column of twos or troopers is to be regarded as very excep- tional. The squad being rallied in line, though ordinarily not in order until fours are counted (par. 470), is available at once to charge or to execute any movement that does not involve a knowledge of their respective numbers on the part of the indi- vidual troopers. Unless the charge is to be executed at once, fours should be counted without delay after rallying, so that the squad may be in order and ready to execute any move- ments whatever that conditions may demand. The rally, dismounted, is always executed at a run. (Fig. 43.) The Mounted Attack. 417. The mounted attack is made with the pistol or saber in accordance with the principles indicated in par. 562-565. The typical saber charge is executed in line. Under some circumstances, as in the attack of a dispersed enemy, etc., a saber charge may be made by troopers deployed as foragers. The pistol attack is usually made in foragers. In exceptional circumstances (as in breaking out from an ambush, attacking in a narrow road, etc.) it may be made in line or in column of fours, twos, or troopers. 168 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 418. Cohesion in the line and vigor in the shock are essential to the success of the saher charge. High speed is necessary for tlie desired sliock; and in tlie saber cliarge, as executed in combat, tlie horses are, at the culmination of the charge, habitually " turned loose " and urged to the highest speed. This, except with men and horses that are highly trained, necessarily involves lo^s of control over the horse on the part of the trooper. The saber charge, executed with poorly trained horsemen, especially if on imperfectly trained or excitable horses, is apt to be futile as regards the instruction of the trooper and to result in more or less permanent loss of control over the horses. Control of the mount by the trooper is essential during the execution of the pistol attack (ordi- narily made in line of foragers), and is, of course, necessary during march and maneuver. For these reasons it is consid- ered advisable that the first instruction of the recruit in the actual saber charge be deferred until after platoon instruction and that it be given then only after the troop commander is satisfied that the recruit's progress in horsemanship and in the use of his weapon has advanced to a point when the exercise will be of value. 419. The work in the squad, with a view to preparing the recruit for the mounted attack tvith the saber and pistol, will therefore be limited to those exercises in which the horse Is controlled. It should consist, in substance, of an extension to collective work of the individual instruction described in par. 297, and should include occasional practice in advancing as rapidly as can be done while maintaining a close formation and control of the mount. The increase in speed should be made quietly and progressively, be continued but a short dis- tance, and invariably be 'terminated by the quiet resuming of a sloiv gait. As the recruit gets more skill and confidence the exercise will be conducted with sabers drawn, the troopers taking the charging position (par. 251) when the instructor does so and returning to the carry with him. Similar exercises will be conducted with the pistol, with especial attention to directing the horses through lines of silhouette targets and to drawing, returning, and manipulating the pistol. The exer- cises with the pistol will usually be conducted in foragers and may be extended to include the actual execution of the pistol attack as described in the School of the Platoon. DISMOUNTED ACTION. 159 In campaign any small group executes the mounted attack as explained for the platoon. 420. In combat of every kind skill on the part of the indi- vidual trooper in the use of the weapon or weapons employed is essential. So important is this part of the training that, where time for the training of the troopers is limited all but the most essential portions of close-order drill should be de- ferred or omitted in order that the training of the trooper in the use of his weapons may be thorough and efficient. Movements for Passing from Mounted Action to Dis- mounted Action. 421. A body of troops that resorts to dismounted action may leave with the horses a sufficient number of horse holders to permit a change of position of the horses to be made at any time by leading. The led horses are then said to be mobile. AVhen the horses of a body of troops that resorts to dis- mounted action are so linked, tied, or grouped that they can not change position without a change of formation, or the assistance of additional horse holders, or both, the horses are said to be immobile. Mobility of the led horses has the advantages incident to the possibility of quickly changing position, but it is open to the objection that it involves withdrawing a large percentage of the troopers from the dismounted firing line. 422. When the horses are mobile (par. 421) a trooper is designated to take immediate charge of the horses and of the men who remain with the horses (par. 431). Such designa- tion, if not made in advance (par. 434), is habitually made immediately preceding or following the commands for passing to dismounted action. When the horses are left immobile a trooper is similarly designated to take charge. 423. With a view to putting the squad into dismounted action, the horses of the squad may be coupled head and tail in pairs (par. 427) ; or grouped in a circle (par. 428) ; or the squad may be dismounted to fight on foot and the horses of each two or four left in charge of a mounted horse holder (par. 4.30). 424. Whenever the horses are coupled ..or circled, or the squad is dismounted to fight on foot, the leader dismounts 160 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. promptly and runs to^Yard the position where he desires the dismounted men to form. The dismounted troopers run at once toward the leader and form in rear of liim in line, or in such formation as he may indicate, without any attention to previous relative order in the squad. Should the leader com- mand : 1. Skirmishers, 2. MARCH, the troopers proceed di- rectly to places on the indicated line, taking advantage of the available cover. Movements of the dismounted squad are executed in accordance with the usual commands and methods ; they should be of the simplest possible character. Fours may be counted if necessary for any purpose. 425. The horses of a dismounted squad may be held without linking or fastened together by twos, by fours, or in a single group. The details of securing the horses, whether coupled, circled, or linked together for leading, vary with the par- ticular equipment in use. The bridoon (snaffle) reins, halter rope (or strap), or link may each be employed to fasten horses together. The reins of the curb bit should never be so employed, and when the link is used it should never be attached to the ring of the curb bit. In coupling head and tail with the 1912 equipment (which is provided with no link) the two horses of each pair may be kept together by tying the bridoon reins of each horse to the cantle of the saddle of the other. One method is to place the horses with their right sides together and tie the bridoon reins of each to the attaching strap of the saber carrier of the other. When the McClellan saddle is used with equip- ment of the type issued prior to 1912, coupling may be done by securing each horse's head to the cantle ring on the saddle of the other horse of the pair. When a horse is tied or linked to another for leading (par. 431), the bridoon reins, halter rope, or link of the first horse is secured to the halter ring of the second. When horses are grouped in a circle, each horse may be fastened to a small circle of rope or leather. A coiled lariat or extra stirrup strap may be used for this purpose. The number of horses in a full-strength section (16) is about the maximum number that should be so grouped. A horse that is tied or linked to another horse by any of the methods indicated above will be more easily controlled. DISMOUNTED ACTION. 161 if the fastening rein, rope, or link be short. When horses are tied together, a slip knot should be used. 426. Whenever horses are fastened together by any of the indicated methods or are held or led by horse holders, the curb reins of each dismounted trooper and the snaffle reins, except when used to hold or tie the horse, are placed behind the pommel and secured by crossing a stirrup in front of the pommel. Each trooper secures his own reins in this manner upon dismounting to couple or circle horses or to form on foot as in par. 436. When the squad dismounts to fight on foot (par. 430) the horse holders must make any necessary ad- justment of the reins and stirrups of the dismounted men. 427. The following provisions for coupling horses are based upon the assumption that the horses are coupled with their off {right) sides together. ^ (jK Should the equipment used make it prefer- able that the near (left) sides be together, the even numbers ride forward, turning to p^^ 44 par' 427 the rig/it about instead of as described below. Other necessary changes in the execution of the movement when the near sides are together will be evident. The horses of Nos. 1 and 2 of each four form one couple, the horses of Nos. 3 and 4 forming another pair. Being mounted, in column of fours, at the command, COITPLE HEAD AND TAIL, all nalt, if marching, and the fours open out as to dismount; each odd-numbered trooper rides forward about 2 yards and turns to the left about on the forehand, so as to face the trooper with whom he is to couple. All dis- mount and each odd-numbered trooper leads his horsei along- side the horse of the corresponding even-numbered trooper. The horses are then secured as indicated in pars. 425 and 426. A noncommissioned officer or trooper out of ranks, or a trooper of an incomplete two, fastens his horse to either horse of the nearest couple. A trooper is usually left in charge of the horses (pars. 422, 434). The dismounted squad forms as indicated in par. 424. Coupling may, with minor modifications that will be evident, be executed by the same commands and similar methods from line or from any other formation of the squad. 38218 °— 18 11 162 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. CIHCU; HOHSES. Fig. 45, par. 428. A dismounted squad may couple horses at the same com- mands and by similar methods. The squad remounts as indicated in pars. 438, 442. (Fig. 44.) 428. It may at times prove convenient to group the horses in a circle (par. 437) ; they may then be linked or tied together and left in care of a single horse holder (pars. 422, 434), Before circling the horses the squad usually forms line. At the command: CIRCLE HORSES, the center of the line halts, if not already at a halt ; the flanks of the line move forward and simultaneously close toward each other so as to make an approximate circle. All dismount, and the horses are then secured to the circle of rope (or other suit- able material) at the center of the group (pars. 425, 426). The leader and any other troopers out of ranks take position on the flanks of the squad before the latter meet. The horses may similarly be circled after the squad has dismounted. The dis- mounted squad forms as indicated inpar. 424. The squad remounts as indicated in pars. 438-442. (Fig. 45.) 429. The squad, before dismounting to fight on foot, is ordinarily formed in col- umn of fours, and the movement is ex- plained accordingly ; the movement may, however, be executed from any formation with such modifications of the methods ex- plained as are indicated or as may readily be inferred. 430. Being in column of fours, to dis- mount to fight on foot, the horses remain- ing mobile: TO FIGHT ON FOOT. When the movement is signaled (par. 990) the direction of the action is included in the signal. When given orally the indication ACTION RIGHT (LEFT, FRONT) is habitu- ally added to the command. At the first command all halt if marching. The leader and Nos. 1 and 4 dismount at once. No. 1 may dismount either / // '4 'Ik '! Fig, 4o, par. 430. DISMOUNTED ACTION. 163 to the right or left. The leader on dismounting passes his reins to the file closer, to the nearest horse holder, or to a trooper designated in advance to take his horse. When Nos. 1 and 4 dismount No. 2 seizes the snaffle reins of No. 1 and No. 3 seizes the snaffle reins of No. 4, making, if conditions permit, the adjustment required by par. 426. The horses can then be quickly led in any desired direction should it be necessary to move them (par. 431). If the movement be executed from column of troopers, or fi'om foragers, Nos. 1 and 4 dismount at once, but do not leave their horses until the reins are taken by the respective horse holders (Nos. 2 and 3). The horse holders move quickly to the side of the dismounted troopers and take the reins. If the movement be executed from line the odd numbers dismount in place without moving forward. Should the squad resort 'to dismounted action wiiile in foragers, without first assemblying or rallying, the leader may direct that the horses be assembled or coupled (par. 437). The dismounted squad forms as indicated in par. 424. The squad remounts as indicated in pars. 438^42. (Fig. 46.) 431. When the squad dismounts to fight on foot the leader, if conditions permit, habitually gives the trooper in charge of the led horses (pars. 422, 434) special instructions regarding the dispo- sition of the men still remaining mounted and the horses. In the absence of other instruc- tions the trooper in charge of the led horses immediately disposes the latter so as to facili- tate rapid remounting and to utilize the best cover available in the immediate vicinity of the dismounted men. If the position in which UOUD/'"' / the squad dismounts meets the requirements just stated the led horses are not moved. The horses will be taken beyond the immediate pro- tection of the dismounted line only by direc- tion of the leader. The horses being satisfac- torily disposed near the dismounted line, the trooper in charge, in the absence of other in- fig. 47, par. 431. structions, causes the horse holders to form column of fours, if not already in that formation, and com- mands : 1. Nos. 2, 2. DISMOUNT. Each No. 2 on dismounting 164 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. passes the bridoon reins of his horse to No. 3, secures his curb reins and both reins of No. I's horse (par. 426), fastens No. I's horse to his (par. 425), moves at a run to the position of the squad leader, falls in, in rear of the leader in line (or as di- rected ) , and awaits orders. Should the movement be executed under fire the Nos. 2 take cover iu the immediate vicinity of the leader, making their presence known to the latter. The leader places the additional men on the firing line or uses them as he sees fit. The led horses thus remain mobile, but with a single horse holder to each four. The trooper in ch-arge of the led horses supervises the execution of the above movements by the horse holders and inspects to see that the horses of each four are properly secured. The above habitual procedure may be varied in accordance with special instructions of the leader. For example, the leader may, w^here a special case requires it, order the horses back to more distant cover (par. 432), or he may direct the trooper in charge of the led horses to couple head and tail (par. 427) or to circle horses (par. 428). In such cases the horse holders assist each other as may be necessary. In all cases where contrary directions are not given all troopers not needed for duty in connection imth the horses under the indicated arrangement are required by the trooper in charge of the led horses to proceed promptly to the position of the leader so as to he available for the dismounted line. The leader's instructions may require that Nos. 2 remain mounted. The above procedure is then modified accordingly ; and if the horses are in column of twos, they may remain in that formation. Dismounting to fight on foot should be practiced from all formations with special attention to em.ergency action under- taken from column of twos and troopers. At drills and exer- cises the instructions of the leader to the trooper in charge of the led horses should be frequently varied and at times omitted altogether. (Fig. 47.) 432. Should the leader desire the horses taken to a more protected position than is available in the immediate vicinity of the dismounted line, his special instructions include the com- mand : HORSES BACK, and he points toward, or otherwise indicates, the desired cover. DISMOUNTED ACTION. 165 The trooper in charge then leads the horse holders and horses, ordinarily in column of fours or twos, to the indicated cover and carries out any additional special instructions that he may have received from the leader. The trooper in charge habitually moves at the trot, but takes the gallop if the occa- sion or his instructions so require. Should no special instruc- tions have been given to the trooper in charge, the latter, on arriving at the indicated cover, forms the column in such position and formation as will enable it to be moved quickly in any probable direction of movement, preserving as far as practicable the original order of the horses in the column. He then causes Nos. 2 to dismount as in par. 431. The horses having been formed in column of fours with Nos. 3 as horse holders, or having been otherwise arranged as required by the leader's additional instructions, the trooper in charge desig- nates one of the dismounted men to take charge of, and report promptly to the leader for duty, all dismounted men not required with the horses. The leader's special instructions may, as in par. 431, require that the horses be coupled or circled, thus increasing the number of men who may be sent forward dismounted, but this should not be done if there is any probability that occasion may arise to move the horses. Should the movement of the horses to cover be made under fire the trooper in charge may command : DISPERSE. Each horse holder then moves independently and rapidly toward the indicated cover. The trooper in charge of the led horses must take such steps as are practicable with the men at his disposal to guard the horses against surprise or attack (par. 434), must keep in touch with the leader, and must insure that the position of the led horses is known to the leader. 433. To provide for the exceptional occasions that may call for the material separation of the dismounted line and led horses (par. 432), the horses must be practiced in leading at all gaits in column of twos and fours, and in the dispersed formations best adapted to a movement under fire should such a movement be unavoidable. 434. A\ hen a squad or other small group resorts to dis- mounted action conditions usually require that one or more patrols provide for the security of the horses and of the dismounted line. The number and strength of such patrols 166 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. depend wholly upon the circumstances of the particular case and must be regulated accordingly. The general principle may well be kept in mind that in proportion as conditions seem to require a large percentage of troopers for use as patrols and horse holders the advisability of resorting to dis- mounted action becomes more and more open to question. The presence of other friendly groups operating in the same vicinity and any measures for security taken by a higher commander naturally tend to simplify the duties of group leaders as regards security and may even in exceptional cases render unnecessary any further measures. When mounted patrols are needed they should, if not previously sent out, be designated in advance of the commands for dismounting so that they will remain mounted. It will tend toward rapid and efficient action if the trooper or troopers designated for patrols or for other special duties connected with passing to dis- mounted action be given such advance instructions as to their duties as may be practicable and be placed in the file closers or in an incomplete four. In a squad a man may thus be designated in advance and instructed with a view to his taking general charge of the horse holders and led horses, if the horses are kept mobile, or to his remaining in charge of the horses if they are rendered immobile. 435. In emergencies the command FIRE AT "WILL may im- mediately follow the command to fight on foot. The dis- mounted troopers (Nos. 1 and 4) at once open fire on the enemy from the most advantageous positions in the immediate vicinity. 436. For purposes calling for dismounted duty, but not con- nected with the tactical employment of troops in serince, and not requiring special rapidity of execution, the oral com- mands: 1. Nos. 1, 2, and 4; 2. FORM ON FOOT, may be given to the squad in column of fours. The movement is executed in the general manner indicated for to fight on foot (par. 430), with the following modifications. No. 2 of each four dismounts with Nos. 1 and 4, at once passing over his own bridoon reins to No, 3, fastening No. l"s horse to his own as prescribed in par. 431. No. 2 then falls in with the other dismounted troopers (par. 424). The leader nnd dismounted troopers take their places promptly, but in quick time. The DISMOUNTED ACTION. 167 horses are not moved at all uuless the leader specially so directs. 437. Each of the three methods (par. 423) for passing to dismounted action possesses certain advantages and disad- vantages. All should be practiced until they can be executed rapidly and quietly. Coupling and circling place more men on the firing line than dismounting to fight on foot, but the latter enables half of the troopers to open fire immediately (par. 435). Coupling and circling render the horses immobile, while dismounting to fight on foot leaves them very mobile until No. 2 dismounts and reasonably mobile as long as No. 3 re- mains mounted ; this mobility, however, is obtained at the cost of an increased number of men withdrawn from the firing line. Coupling usually takes less time to effect than circling, the horses are less apt to give trouble, especially in case one or more be w^ounded or break loose, remounting can usually be more quickly effected, and the arrangement is well suited to opening dismounted fire promptly after dismounting from foragers, each pair of horses remaining under cover near the corresponding troopers. Horses in couples also present a poorer target to an enemy's fire than when in a larger group and are more easily concealed in certain kinds of cover. A horse that is left coupled for some time is apt to chew the equipment of the other horse of the pair. Circling has the advantage of requiring no knowledge of their numbers by the troopers. It can be executed, therefore, by a group that has just rallied or that, from any cause, is not in order. It may also, in small groups, be executed very quickly if one of the troopers take the reins of the others, the horses not being tied or linked. This last arrangement also favors rapid remounting. Circling is generally the least safe of the three methods in so far as regards the danger of the horses becoming unmanageable. It is frequently convenient for purposes not connected with combat (e. g., camping). Dismounting to fight on foot permits half the troopers to open fire at once if necessary ; makes it practicable quickly to lead the horses to such cover as may be available in the imme- diate vicinity or, in exceptional cases, to distant cover ; per- mits the location of the horses to be changed, if necessary, without withdrawing men from the firing line for that pur- 168 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. pose ; permits the horses to be subsequently coupled, circled, or linked in fours, thus freeing additional men for the firing line; and lends itself to the carrying out of such special in- structions as the leader may see fit to give as to the disposi- tion of the horses and horse holders. It will be seen, there- fore, that dismounting to fight on foot may frequently be so applied as largely to combine its own advantages with those of the other methods. The method prescribed in par. 436 involves merely a slight modification of pars. 430 and 431. It may be found convenient for use in connection with certain special dismounted duties not connected with combat. Remounting After Dismounted Action. 438. The squad having previously dismounted in accordance with pars. 427, 428, 430, or 436, the leader may lead the squad in the most convenient manner to the vicinity of the led horses ; or he may cause the led horses (if mobile) to be brought up to the dismounted troopers (par. 440) ; or he may cause the dismounted squad and the led horses to move toward each other. 439. The dismounted troopers being in the vicinity of the led horses, the squad may be mounted as prescribed in par. 355 ; each dismounted trooper, before mounting, uncrosses his stirrup and takes his reins from the horse holder or unlinks. The leader may command : STAND TO HORSE. Each trooper moves quickly but quietly to his horse, takes his reins or un- links and stands to horse. The squad may then be mounted in the usual manner (pars. 354, 355). 440. The signal prepare to mount, given when the dis- mounted troopers are not in the immediate vicinity of the horses, is an indication for the horses to be brought up. The trooper in charge habitually leads them toward the leader at a trot, but takes the gallop if an increased gait be ordered or if the occasion seems to require it. The command mount (par. 439) is given when the horses are near the dismounted troopers. 441. At TO HORSE the horses are brought up at a gallop. The dismounted troopers are led rapidly to meet the horses, and mount as quickly as possible. INSTRUCTION OF RECRUITS. 169 442. It is particularly important that the troopers be trained to remount from either side of the horse quickly, without noise or confusion and without unnecessarily exciting the horses. Upon mounting the troopers look at once toward the leader for his indication of the movement next to follow\ Obstacles in the Lixb of March. 443. When an obstacle which interferes with only a few troopers is encountered when marching in line or foragers, the troopers whose march is interfered with open out slightly, or fall back without command, so as to pass the obstacle and then resume their places. When an obstacle that can not well be avoided is encountered by the head of a column the ele- ments of the column open out so as to pass, the rear elements conforming to the movements of the leading element. If there appears to be any question as to an obstacle's being noted in time by the troopers the leader should indicate the obstacle, as by cautioning, " hole," " wire," etc., anJI pointing to the obstacle. The caution is similarly passed back through the column by the Nos. 2. When marching over ground where obstacles are liable to be met each trooper must be on the alert with a view to avoiding injury to himself or his mount. When a terrain covered with obstacles is encountered the squad opens out and alignment is no longer kept. Each trooper chooses his route, glancing frequently toward the leader, who continues to regulate the gait and direction. FURTHER ELEMENTARY INSTRUCTION OF RECRUITS. 444. The instruction of the recruit in the mechanism * of platoon drill properly pertains to and completes his elementary collective instruction in so far as the latter is conducted on the drill ground. For reasons connected with convenience of arrangement the School of the Platoon follows the general pro- visions relative to the troop (pars. 489-5CT). The corre- sponding instruction of the recruit should, however, be com- pleted immediately following the instruction in the School of the Squad end may be begun before the ^ completion of the 170 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. squad instruction. There is no special drill prescribed for the section (par. 491). 445. For the platoon instruction enough recruit squads may be united to make a provisional platoon, or the necessary additional instructed troopers may be utilized to till out a platoon, or if necessary the recruit's instruction may be given at the regular drills of the permanent platoons. This last method will be avoided where practicable. The instructor will be assisted by the noncommissioned officers or instructed troopers needed to act as section chiefs and substitute chiefs. Provisional sections will be organized in advance of the drill and the platoon formed and drilled as though such sections were permanent, in accordance with the provisions of the School of the Platoon (pars. 508-511). PART III.— GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. GENERAL PROVISIONS. 446. The following principles, taken in connection with pro- visions of a similar general character contained in pars. 43-49 and 322-339, constitute the basis of the system of drill under these regulations. The following paragraphs are particularly important : Pars. 323 and 329, with reference to leading : Pars. 333 to 339, with reference to gaits ; Pars. 458 to 460, regarding the base; Pars. 462 to 465, regarding commands ; Par. 470, as to the use of the methods of the squad ; Pars. 478 and 479, regarding movements to the front and flank; Pars. 480 and 481, regarding successive formations. Familiarity with the paragraphs above listed will be a sufficient guide for the execution of the more essential move- ments in the troop, squadron, and regiment once the names of the formations and positions of the officers are learned. In applying the general principles they should be read care- fully with a view to getting a good general idea of the system which they outline. As practice work in the drill progresses they should frequently be referred to and any doubtful points cleared up from time to time. The subheads will assist in this connection. References included in the description of the various movements appearing hereafter in the text should be read and familiarity thus be acquired with the application of the principles. 447. All bodiesi of troops are habitually formed in single rank, whether for mounted or dismounted duty. Provi- sion, however, is made whereby double rank may be formed from certain single rank formations of the platoon and larger units. 171 172 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. LEADING. {See pars. 323, 325, 471, 480.) 448. The commander of a squadron, or of any smaller unit, habitually leads his unit in person. The commander of a regiment habitually controls his unit through his subordinate commanders, but may lead in person. The commander of a unit may temporarily leave the guidance of his unit to a subordinate (pars. 454-456), thus acquiring the freedom of movement needed for any special purpose. The general principle of leading, as above stated, is sub- ject to modification in extended-order movements, in combat involving fire action, in dismounted movements in general (par. 484), and in certain column formations where there is not sufficient space in the column to permit the leaders to take their customary positions (par. 451). 449. When not actually leading, a commander for whom an- other special position is not prescribed moves as best suited to accomplish the purpose in view. He regulates the move- ments of his unit, indicating the objective to the leader of the base, w^ho causes the march to be directed accordingly. In a platoon or squad the leader indicates the objective to the guide. Should a leader take position at any time in the line he becomes the actual guide of his unit and continues so until he designates another guide. 450. The position of the leader in each of the several schools is indicated and is habitually stated as so many yards in front of the corresponding leader (or guide). The leader having once taken his position as such, the duty of main- taining the trace and distance rests upon the base. 451. When the post of the leader of any unit in a column formation is on a flank of the column (pars. 601-603) the base of the corresponding unit temporarily conducts the march of that unit in the column. The leader on the flank gives any necessary directions to the base (directing guide) at the head of his own unit, but does not act as guide of his unit. He resumes actual leadership as soon as a change in the forma- tion permits. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 173 452. When the leader of a unit marches the latter by fours to a flank for only a short distance he need not move to his position as leader. Others out of rank conform to the leader's example in this respect, retaining convenient relative positions pending the resumption of the direct march. 453. The commander of a squadron or higher unit may specifically direct the leader of the base unit (par. 324) or other subordinate to conduct the march, or he may instead designate a subordinate to assume temporary leadership. 454. Conducting: the march: A subordinate v^^ho, without being assigned as temporary leader (par. 456) is instructed by the commander to conduct the march exercises no other func- tion of command as a result of such assignment. In the absence of other directions from the commander the subordi- nate (directing leader) so designated maintains the existing direction and gait of march. The post of such subordinate remains unchanged provided (as in the normal case) he is already the leader of the base; if other than such leader he takes the commander's post in front of the leader of the base, notifies the latter, and conducts the march, the leader of the base conforming. In units smaller than a regiment the use of a subordinate to the commander to conduct the march is exceptional at drills at attention. 455. Should a change of formation be ordered by a com- mander while the march of his unit is being conducted by a subordinate not specifically assigned as a temporary leader, the subordinate who is conducting the march moves in the direction and at the gait indicated by the principles, of the drill and the movement is executed according to the usual methods. 456. Temporary leader : A subordinate who is directed by the commander to assume temporary leadership of a unit takes position as leader, and while acting as leader gives the neces- sary indication for any movements to be executed. A tem- porary leader must be senior to all whom he leads. The commander may indicate to such temporary leader the move- ments to be executed, or he may leave the selection of such movements to the temporary leader. For instruction the as- signment of a temporary leader may properly be utilized as a means of giving subordinates practice in th^ leading of a unit greater than that appropriate to their respective grades and 174 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. also as an occasional procedure to permit the commander to supervise more satisfactorily the execution of movements by his unit. In field exercises and in campaign the designation of a temporary leader may frequently become- advisable when the commander leaves his regular position for reconnaissance or other similar purpose. The designation of a temporary leader should, to avoid possible confusion, be communicated in any convenient man- ner to the leader of the base and similar units as well as to the designated leader. The temporary leader must keep in constant communication with the commander (by means of connecting files if neces- sary), unless the commander specifically directs otherwise. CENTER. 457. References in these regulations to the center unit of a command in any line formation will, in cases where the number of units comprised in the command is even, be under- stood as applying to the right center unit. Thus, in a troop comprised of but two platoons the center platoon in line is the right center (right) platoon. BASE. i8ee pars, 326, 477, 478.) 458. The base of a squad in each formation is explained in pars. 371-377. The base of a platoon in any line formation is the right section. The base of a troop is a platoon; of a squadron, a troop; of a regiment, a squadron. Reference to the base in connec- tion with any one of the units stated is to be understood accordingly, unless distinctly otherwise indicated. 459. In any line formation of a troop or larger unit the cen- ter unit (par. 457) is always the base unless some other unit be specially so designated. If the commander take position as leader in front of any unit other than the center unit he GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL 175 thereby indicates such other unit as the base. When not leading: the commander may designate any unit of a line formation as the base by cautioning: SUCH PLATOON (TROOP, SaTJADRON) THE BASE. In any column formation the leading unit is always the base. 460. In movements executed toward the direction of march the base does not change unless, in movements from line formations, another base be specifically stated in the com- mand. To so indicate another base the leader prefixes to the preparatory command the words: On (such platoon, troop, squadron). COMMANDS. (See pars. 327, 471, 474, 475, 478, 479.) 461. When not otherwise indicated, the commands prescribed in the portion of the drill regulations pertaining to each unit are those of the commander of the unit in question. When commands, duties, etc., are indicated as those of the colonel, major, or captain, etc., they are to be under- stood as those of the regimental, squadron, or troop com- mander, re.spectively. The units may actually be commanded by officers or noncommissioned officers junior or senior to the grades corresponding to the command thereof. Officers must be practiced frequently in commanding a unit greater than that pertaining to their grade. 462. In all movements leaders give the necessary commands or other indications to insure the execution by their- respec- tive units at the proper time of the movements necessary to carry out the will of the commander. Should any leader not receive or fully understand a command or signal of a higher commander, he conforms to the apparent intent of the com- mander. To avoid possible uncertainty as to their meaning, commanders endeavor to give their commands and signals exactly as prescribed, and in all exercises whose purpose is instruction they exact corresponding accuracy on the part of subordinate leaders. 463. Whenever it is statetl that the platoon or troop may execute, by corresponding commands, the movements pre- scribed for the squad, the commands as gi^^n in the School of 176 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. the Squad will be used, except that the appropriate substitu- tion of platoon or troop for squad will be made. 464. In giving commands a leader may, whenever necessary, prefix the same by the designation of the unit that is to exe- cute the movement, as 1. First Platoon, forward, 2. MARCH; 1. C Troop, fours right, 2. MARCH. 465. In the drill of the platoon and higher units the troopers execute the movements in compliance with the immediate commands or other indications of the respective platoon lead- ers, supplemented by such cautions as may be necessary on the part of the file closers and section chiefs. 466. Except when a specific method is temporarily pre- scribed for instruction purposes commanders are ordinarily al- lowed discretion as to the particular one of the authorized methods (pars. 988-990) or particular combination of those methods that may be employed to communicate the order for a movement. The test of efficiency in this connection is prompt compliance with the commander's will, accomplished with a minimum of noise. MOVEMENTS IN GENERAL. 467. The drill as prescribed in the School of the Platoon and School of the Troop is based upon the assumption that the platoon and troop are subdivided into their component units (par. 491). A platoon that is not divided into sections or a troop that is not divided into platoons can be maneuvered only bv the commands and methods prescribed for the squad (par. 470). The drill in the School of the Squad is that employed in the first collective instruction of recruits. Its movements and those in the School of the Platoon are described in detail, and are intended (with the exception of certain movements by twos and troopers — par. 331) to be executed with the pre- cision that is regarded as essential for the trooper's training. The drill as it progresses through the Schools of the Troop and Squadron becomes more and more an exercise in the prac- tical application of certain underlying i)rinciples with a gradu- ally increasing responsibility placed upon the leaders of com- ponent units. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 177 After proficiency has been acquired in executing the move- ments as prescribed, leaders may, in the discretion of the commander, be given, in the selection of methods, a latitude that increases with the size of their respective units. The methods indicated for the regiment involve merely the further application of principles with which the leaders should become thoroughly familiar in the course of troop and squadron drill. They constitute a general guide for such changes of formation as the regiment as a whole may execute ; but the majors should be permitted in the details of maneuver- ing their squadrons as wide a latitude as may be exercised without interference with other units. 468. The drill in the School of the Squad comprises move- ments of two general classes : (a) Those which, in addition to their use in the squad, are frequently employed as regular maneuver movements in the platoon and higher units. This class includes such movements as the ordinary marchings, fours right (left), right (left) turn, etc. Movements of this class are of general application throughout the several schools, subject to such modification as may be specially noted. (&) Those whose primary purpose is the instruction of the recruit in the mechanism of the movements upon which the habitual drill of the platoon and higher units is based. The corresponding movements in the higher units are habitually executed by different commands and differ in the details of execution. 469. The execution of movements of the class referred to in par. 468-6 is ordinarily restricted to detachments smaller than a platoon, though applicable to larger bodies for which no special drill is prescribed. It is practicable for a platoon or troop to execute, at the command corresponding to that pre- scribed in the School of the Squad, any movement referred to in par. 468-&; and, in emergencies, it may at times be neces- sary temporarily to employ such movements in maneuvering a platoon or troop that has not been subdivided in the usual manner or that, although originally so subdivided, has subse- quently suffered a loss of order. These movements may also properly be used in the platoon or troop for marchings con- nected with such routine duties of camp -or garrison as call for no observance of a division into subunits. 38218 °— 18 12 178 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 470. In all movements, however, connected with the tactical employment of a platoon or troop the commands and methods prescribed for the squad should be used only for those move- ments for which no corresponding provision is made in the platoon or troop drill. The corresponding platoon and troop movements are better adapted to the purposes of the larger units ; and if a platoon or troop, subdivided in the usual man- ner, executes by the methods prescribed for the squad, move- ments involving the use of twos or troopers, loss of order is apt to result. In the description, in the School of the Squad, of each movement of the class referred to in par. 468-?>, a refer- ence to that paragraph will be found. CHANGES OF DIRECTION. 471. When a change of direction of any unit in line or column is commanded by a higher commander, the latter gives his command of execution at the moment when the leader of the subordinate unit is to begin the turn (par. 386). When the higher commander is to continue to lead his command throughout the change of direction, the command of execution must be given at the instant the subordinate leader (or guide) reaches the point where the commander began his own change of direction (par. 329). MOVEMENTS IN COLUMN OF TWOS AND TROOPERS. 472. The drill of the squad could be much simplified were it practicable to confine its close order formations to line and column of fours, and, under favorable conditions, this may ba done. Special conditions, however, such as narrow roads or trails or difficult ground, frequently render impracticable the use of any march formation other than column of twos or column of troopers; and these last formations are also convenient in con- nection with various routine duties of garrison and field serv- ice. Cavalry will often have to march in column of twos or troopers and under conditions where promptness of action will be of vital importance. These formations should therefore frequently be employed during instruction, preferably at field exercises, rather than at formal drill (par. 331). GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 179 EXTENDED ORDER MOVEMENTS. 473. A body of troops in extended order must be assembled or rallied in order to pass to close order. The assembly of any unit is, in the absence of other indica- tions, executed in the same formation in which the unit habitu- ally forms; that is, for a squad (or a section acting alone), in line; for a platoon, in double column; for a troop, in line of double columns; for a squadron, in mass; for a regiment, in line of masses. Provision is made in these regulations for the execution of the assembly in other than the usual formation. In such cases the desired formation is specially indicated. 474. When the halt is ordered while marching to the rear in extended order all face to the front, the commander of each group then in close order giving the necessary commands. Foragers turn about individually. All turn to the left about. SIMULTANEOUS MOVEMENTS BY PLATOONS, TROOPS, AND SQUADRONS. 475. The captain may cause the platoons of the troop to execute simultaneously movements not otherwise provided for. In such cases the word platoons is prefixed to the usual prepar- atory command, thus : 1. Platoons, column right, 2. MARCH. A corresponding principle is applicable to troops in a squadron and to squadrons in a regiment. EXCEPTIONAL MOVEMENTS. 476. Whenever as the result of the execution of any move- ment in the troop, squadron, or regiment (e. g., fours right from mass) there results a formation not habitually used for drill or maneuver (e. g., close column of troops, resulting from the above example), an habitual formation is usually resumed by a corresponding movement (e. .g., in above case, by fours left ) . Any emergency movement that may be ordered while a command is in an unusual formation of such character will be executed in accordance with the general principles of tJie drill. 180 CAVALIvY DRILL REGULATIONS. CHA^^GES OF FORMATION. 477. Changes of formation are usually executed (par. 460) so as to involve no change in the base. The commander then maintains, through leading, complete and uninterrupted con- trol of the direction and gait. By leading the base toward any direction, the commander may execute a desired change of formation toward that direction as in par. 481-c. Should space and time not permit this, essential formations may be taken directly to a flank (par. 479). 478. With certain exceptions, noted where they occur in the text, any formation (close or extended order), prescribed for a platoon or higher unit, may be taken toward the direction of march directly from any other close-order formation pre- scribed for the same unit. The preparatory command for every such movement for which no special base is designated consists simply of the name of the formation to ivhich it is desired to pass; the corresponding command of execution is always: MARCH; for example, 1. Line, 2. MARCH; 1. Col- umn of platoons, 2. MARCH. When column of fours is the desired formation the preparatory command is abbreviated to column, thus: 1. Column, 2. MARCH. If the commander desires to designate a unit other than the base as the one upon which the movement is to be regulated, the preparatory command, as stated above, must be preceded by the corre- sponding designation of the special base, thus: 1. On fourth platoon, column; 2. MARCH. 479. Provision is made in these regulations for forming line directly to a flank from column formations, for forming column directly to a flank from line formations to meet conditions when the corresponding formation of line or column toward the di- rection of march would not be suited to the purpose in view. Changes of formation thus made directly to a flank are exe- cuted at special commands not based upon the principle stated in par. 477, as : 1. Fours right, 2. MARCH. SUCCESSIVE FORMATIONS (Def.). 480. In successive formations of the troop each platoon is habitually led to its place by the shortest route and simplest methods consistent with an orderly execution of the movement. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 181 The same principle regulates the movements of troops in the squadron, and of squadrons in the regiment. The principle is modified in the drill of the squad and of the platoon to the extent that the elements of those units are not actually led^ but conform to the movements of a guide in the ranks (par. 326). Certain general principles are prescribed for the guid- ance of leaders in conducting their units into positions in suc- cessive formations (par. 481). These provisions are supple- mented, where necessary, by more detailed provisions included in the paragraphs describing the various movements. When- ever specific routes or methods are indicated, it is vv^ith a vievv^ to that degree of uniformity which is considered neces- sary to insure that the units do not interfere with one an- other's movements. 481. (a) The rules stated below are of general application to the drill of troop, squadron, and regiment. For simplicity they are stated only for the troop. The corresponding rules may be obtained for the squadron by substituting squadron for troop and troop for platoon, and, for the regiment, by sub- stituting regiment for troop and squadron for platoon. (&) Successive formations are always executed toward the direction of march. The direction and gait of the base platoon are controlled by the commander (pars. 323, 477). The other platoons are habitually led to their new positions by changes of direction. When, however, restricted space or other special conditions make it necessary, other methods may also be employed (e. g., an oblique or movement to a flank by fours). In the regiment much latitude is allowed squadron commanders in maneuvering their squadrons. (c) If it is desired to have the new formation face wholly or partially to a flank a change of direction to the desired degree is made either before the movement is ordered, or shortly after, and during an early stage of its execution (par. 477). In the case of a deployment the head of the column is faced in the required direction before the movement is ordered. In the case of a ployment the head of the column is caused to face in required direction as soon as the base platoon has formed column. (d) In successive formations from line into column the base platoon is followed immediately by the "platoon next on its left, then by the one next on its right, and so on, the platoons 182 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. being taken alternately from the left and right of the base. If: there be no platoon on one side of the base, or if any platoon originally on that side has moved to enter the column, platoons that remain on the other side of the base enter the column in the order of their nearness to the latter. Thus, in a troop of four platoons, if the column be formed on the second platoon in line as the base — The third platoon in line becomes the second platoon in column ; The first platoon in line becomes the third platoon in column ; The fourth platoon in line becomes the fourth platoon in column. Or, if column be formed on the third platoon in line as the base — The fourth platoon in line becomes the second platoon in column ; The second platoon in line becomes the third platoon in column ; The first platoon in line becomes the fourth platoon in column. Par. 469 covers certain exceptional cases. (e) In formations from column into line the deployment is fan-wise. The platoon immediately in rear of the base platoon of the movement takes position on the left of the latter ; the platoon next in rear takes position on the right of the base; and so on alternately to the left and right. Should any reason (such as lack of space) prevent a unit in rear from taking its proper place on the line it is held by its leader in rear of the line in readiness to take its position as soon as conditions permit, or to act as special instructions or the circumstances of the case may require. Par. 469 covers certain exceptional cases. (/) The change of formation for the troop may also involve a change in the formation of each platoon as well as a change in the position of the latter. For example, if the troop in column of platoons (par. 584-(Z) forms line of platoon columns (par. 622-6) each platoon nuist not only be led to its new place but must change its formation from line to column of fours on the way. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 183 (g) In cases under (/) the base platoon, if it has tl^e necessary space when the movement is commanded, takes the new formation at the command of execution, otherwise it takes the new formation as soon as the necessary space is gained. The time at which each of the other platoons changes for- mation is determined by the nature of ihe change. As column formations are habitually preferable to line formations for purposes of evolutions, if the movement requires a reduction in the front of the platoon (as from line to column), the change is made when the platoon begins to execute the move- ment. If, on the other hand, an increase in the front of the platoon is involved (as from column to line), the change is delayed as long as practicable subject to the requirement that it must be completed before the platoon takes its place in the n^iv formation (par. 331). {h) Gaits are regulated as indicated in pars. 333-337. In movements involving a change of formation from column to line in the platoons, the rear elements of the latter will habitually have to make a second increase of gait while form- ing line. This same principle applies throughout. MOVEMENTS ON FOOT. 482. The platoon and troop dismounted may, when neces- sary, execute the close-order movements prescribed for the mounted drill, with the modifications incident to dismounted movements as indicated in the School of the Troopier, Dis- mounted; and School of the Squad. The habitual execution of such dismounted movements as features of precise and formal drill is not contemplated. 483. The platoon and troop, dismounted, execute extended- order movements by the commands and methods prescribed for the mounted troop subject to the modifications incident to dismounted movements. 484. In applying to dismounted movements the principles of leading it should be borne in mind that the use of a subordi- nate to conduct the march is properly more frequent in dis- mounted than in mounted movements. Dismounted combat usually involves fire action, made effective by a line of rifle- 184 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. men systematically fed from the rear with men and ammu- nition. Such conditions are necessarily inconsistent with the exercise of physical leadership by a commander posted in front ,of his unit, except during the advance prior to opening fire and during such advances as are made while fire is locally sus- pended. The slower speed of dismounted movements and the reduced importance of gaits as a factor in their execution also affect the extent to which physical leadership is essential in dismounted work. In marching dismounted, incident to the performance of ordinary routine duties of camp and garrison (e. g., in marching from the quarters to the stables), the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge may properly relinquish actual leadership, leaving to the directing leader or guide (Def.) the conduct of the march (par. 324). ORDER. 485. The conditions essential to order in the squad and platoon are explained in pars. 370 and 515, respectively. In the troop and larger units the general rule applies that a unit is in order when its component elements are united in any formation prescribed for the unit in question and each element is in order. Thus, a troop is in order when its platoons are united in any troop formation and each platoon is in order. Any body of troops that is temporarily being maneuvered by commands and methods corresponding to those prescribed for the squad is, for such movements, in order when it fulfills that requirement for order in the squad. Any movement that results in a loss of order should ordinarily be followed by the assembly at the earliest practicable moment. MISCELLANEOUS. 486. In turning about, unless otherwise indicated, officers and men turn to the left about when mounted and to the right about when dismounted. 487. Officers, and noncommissioned officers acting as platoon leaders, draw and return saber with the superior commander. In all formations and movements a noncommissioned officer commanding a platoon or troop carries his rifle as the men do. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF THE DRILL. 185 488. The guidon is not habitually carried at drill. The cap- tain will cause it to be carried sufficiently often to familiarize the guidon sergeant with his duties. At squadron or regi- mental drill the guidon is not carried unless directed, respec- tively, by the major or colonel. The guidon is always carried at ceremonies and is also carried on occasions of a cere- monial nature when the commander so directs. It is carried in campaign and on the march, but is cased or furled when- ever it might give information of value to an enemy. The guidon when carried is borne by a noncommissioned officer, usually a sergeant, selected with regard to his possible duties as in charge of the led horses of the troop (par. 648). PART IV.— THE TROOP AND ITS SUB- DIVISIONS. GENERAL PROVISIONS. * e ■489. The troop is divided by the captain into permanent platoons, eacli under a permanently assigned leader. The latter is a lieutenant when practicable; otherwise a sergeant. Each platoon is divided into two sections. 490. The first sergeant is not ordinarily assigned to the com- mand of a platoon. He performs the special duties incident to his position, acts as the general assistant to the captain in coordinating the duties of the other noncommissioned officers, and sees that platoon leaders who may be absent or disabled are promptly replaced by their proper successors. The supply sergeant, mess sergeant, and troopers o^ special grades perform, in addition to their special functions, such duties as the captain may direct. 491. The number of platoons is dependent upon the size of the troop and the capacity of the available leaders. Ordi- narily the troop is divided into three or four platoons, each having a leader, a file closer, and a rank composed of two sec- tions. The drill is equally applicable to any number of pla- toons. It is possible to conduct a complete troop drill with but two platoons, each having two sections, consisting of a single four each (par. 500). 492. The noncommissioned officer next in rank to the platoon leader is designated as the file closer of the platoon. He assists the platoon leader by supervising the execution of the movements, maintains discipline, endeavors to prevent mis- takes by anticipating them and cautioning those concerned, and holds himself in constant readiness to replace the leader without delay should the latter be absent or disabled. When taking position as leader in such a case, he designates the next senior noncommissioned officer as file closer, makes the corresponding designation of a section chief, and causes any necessary changes in position to be made. 186 THE TROOP AND ITS SUBDIVISIONS. 187 493. The section consists of a section chief, a substitute chief, and habitually not less than 6 nor more than 14 other troopers, depending upon the strength of the platoon. The chief is a sergeant where one is available ; otherwise a cor- poral. The substitute chief is a noncommissioned officer if one be available; otherwise a selected trooper. He is the assistant of the section chief when the^ latter is present and the substitute when absent. When acting as chief, he desig- nates a new substitute chief, unless one has previously been designated by higher authority. 494. The section is the smallest fixed unit of cavalry; that is, the smallest unit for which the effort is made to maintain, as far as conditions permit, a permanent personnel. When the platoon is at or near full strength, each section may be divided into two squads, each consisting of not to exceed two sets of fours. In any case that might require these squads to be employed under separate leaders the sec- tion chief would lead the squad in which posted and the sub- stitute chief would lead the other. Such a subdivision of the section, if made, does not affect the execution of any of the regular drill movements ; but it may be found useful for special purposes, particularly in a platoon that is operating separately from its troop. 495. The efficiency of troops in essential matters will be measured largely by the extent to w^hich platoon leaders and section chiefs are trained and developed. They must be made to realize that their responsibilities do not cease with the mere tactical handling of their respective units, but in- clude making themselves effective assistants to their superiors in matters of discipline, instruction, and the systematic carry- ing out of the details of interior troop administration. Sub- ordinate leaders should as a rule be intrusted with responsi- bility to the full extent of their capacity for efficient per- formance. Every effort must be made to maintain the permanency of the subdivision into platoons and sections, additional men being regularly assigned to such units vrhen necessary with a view to replacing absentees at drills and exercises. No attempt will be made to assign fixed places in the rank of the section to individual troopers. The important point in this connection is that the section as such shall be kept intact as 188 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. far as practicable, and that the responsibility of its chief shall be habitually exercised over the same men, thus tending to mutual confidence and understanding. 496. Should conditions render the maintenance of permanent sections impracticable, the platoons must be maintained as permanent units as long as possible, a temporary division of each platoon into sections being then effected at every forma- tion for duty that requires such a division (par. 500). In order to maintain permanent units within the troop, de- pleted sections and platoons will be combined and new assign- ments made when necessary. When at any formation a platoon or section is depleted below the usual minimum strength it is ordinarily broken up and its members tem- porarily assigned to places in other similar units. Adjustments in Platoons and Sections. 497. To avoid multiplying incomplete fours in the troop, sec- tions are habitually adjusted at platoon formations as indi- cated in par. 522. The question as to whether adjustments will be made at formations between platoons of the troop to equalize strength or to minimize the number of incomplete fours in the troop (otherwise than as indicated in par. 779 or regulated by order from higher authority) rests in the discretion of the troop commander. Except at ceremonies, there is no reason why the platoons should be of equal strength (par. 491). Incomplete fours in the troop tend to lengthen the march column and to reduce the proportion of men available for the dismounted firing line. On the other hand, where platoons are apt to be separated for some time, due to incidents of service, it may be desirable to keep the personnel of each wholly intact, even if incomplete fours or extra file closers in the troop result. Designation of Platoons and Sections. 498. The permanent platoons of the troop are given numeri- cal designations, as First Platoon, etc. These fix the relative positions of the permanent platoons in the original formation of the troop for any duty, but are not subsequently employed in drill or maneuver. FORMING THE TROOP. 189 The troop having been formed as prescribed, in whatever formation it may be at any particular moment thereafter, the platoons are given, for the purposes of drill and maneuver, numerical designations (First Platoon, Third Platoon, etc.), based upon the order, from right to left, of their respective temporary positions in line, or from head to rear in column. In exercises other than formal drill a platoon may be desig- nated by the name of its leader, as: Lieutenant So-and-so's Platoon. This latter method of designation is necessarily em- ployed when, due to any disposition of the platoons other than in a distinct line or column formation, possible doubt may exist as to their respective temporary numerical designations. Sections are given similar permanent numerical designa- tions in the troop, as First Section, Fifth Section, etc. These fix their relative positions at the original formations of their respective platoons. After the platoon is once formed no fur- ther attention is paid to such permanent designations, the sections being designated, if necessary, as right (leading) or left (rear) section, (such) platoon. FOEMATIOX. 499. The formation and drill of the platoon and troop are explained upon the assumption that the division into perma- nent subordinate units is maintained. A platoon that is not divided into sections, or a troop that is not divided into pla- toons, can be maneuvered only by commands and methods corresponding to those prescribed for the squad (par. 469). When no prior division into permanent subordinate units ex- ists a platoon or troop may originally be formed only by com- mands and methods corresponding to those prescribed for the squad. A temporary subdivision may then be made at the formation (pars. 501, 502). A section has no special formation or drill of its own. It may be formed and maneuvered as a separate unit by com- mands and methods corresponding to those employed in the squad (par. 463). 500. When less than 32 troopers are present and available for the rank of the troop at any duty the division into platoons may be omitted. 190 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Platoons are habitually limited to not more than 32 nor less than 16 men (in the rank). Smaller platoons may be em- ployed when the depleted condition of the troop or other spe- cial conditions render their use advisable. If a division into platoons be not made, the troop, at the duties listed in par. 501, is maneuvered as a single platoon under command of the captain, but regains its designation as a troop. Officers and noncommissioned officers are assigned to duties as the captain may direct. 501. At formations for field service, marches, drills, inspec- tions, and ceremonies the formation of a platoon or troop is based upon the corresponding subdivision into permanent units if such division exist (par. 489). If such division can not be maintained, the formation is conducted by commands and methods corresponding to those of the squad, a temporary subdivision being made at tiie formation. 502. For duties of a character not covered by par. 501 formations may be conducted in accordance with any of the authorized methods. If the method prescribed for the squad be used, the division into subordinate units may be made or omitted in the discretion of the commander. 503. The original dismounted assembly for mounted forma- tions is made at either the barracks or stables. The verifica- tion for mounted formation is habitually made at the stables. The dismounted troop being at the stables or picket line, the noncommissioned officer in charge commands : SADDLE AND PREPARE TO LEAD OUT. The saddling must be done quickly and quietly and the formation completed without unnecessary loss of time. 504. Whenever a platoon or troop is formed, in accordance with the methods prescribed for the squad for a duty of the kind listed In par. 501, noncommissioned officers should, if practicable, be assigned to duties in advance of the formation w itli a view to taking their proper positions on leading out as nearly as this can be done. Noncommissioned officers not so assigned take position, temporarily, in line 3 yards in rear of the right of the rank and in order of rnnk from right to left. In column they take position one behind another, 1 yard to the right of the column, in order of rank from front to rear, w^itli the leading noncommissioned officer abreast of the head FORMING THE TROOP. 191 of the column. Any such noncommissioned officer who may not be assigned to special duties during the formation takes position as an extra file closer as soon as the formation is completed. Verification. 505. Any unit or detachment of a troop formed for duty is, in the absence of instructions to the contrary, verified by the noncommissioned officer or trooper who conducts the forma- tion and a report of the result of such verification is made. When not otherwise prescribed the report is made to the first sergeant who reports all absentees frora any duty to the troop commander. All absentees reported to a commissioned officer in charge of a platoon will be reported by such oflicer to the troop commander. At formations of the troop, based upon a prior division into platoons, each platoon is habitually verified by the senior noncommissioned officer for duty with it (leader or file closer). The captain may direct that the verification be made by the first sergeant, but when the troop is formed without reference to a prior division into platoons, the verifi- cation is made by the first sergeant. When a unit armed with the rifle is verified at a dismounted formation, rifles are brought to the right shoulder immediately after inspection arms is executed (par. 91). The roll is then called. Each man as he answers his name comes to the order. When the first sergeant verifies the troop, the command : IN- SPECTION ARMS, is omitted at the formation of the platoons, which precedes the formation of the troop (par. 598), Reports. 506. Reports connected with formations, made by noncom- missioned officers forming platoons, follow the form : Corporal absent; or, All present. All such reports to a commis- sioned officer are preceded by Sir. The report of the first sergeant to the captain is in the form : Sir, Corporal • and Private absent; or, Sir, all present or accounted for. In each of the above cases the noncommissioned officer making the report salutes as he begins the report and the salute is returned. When no verification is required, the form of the report is : (Sir) the platoon (troop) is formed. 192 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. After reporting, a noncommissioned officer, unless otherwise prescribed, takes his post, habitually at a trot. Reports at formations are made from right to left in line and from head to rear in column. At formations in column noncommissioned officers may be directed to make their reports at the head of the column. Reports, when necessary, will be preceded by the designation of the unit referred to, thus: 1st Platoon, all present. Inspection at Formx^tion. 507. Whenever a unit or detachment is formed for any duty its commander makes, during the formation or immediately subsequent thereto, such an inspection as may be required by his instructions or by the nature of the duty in view. This inspection will always include a noting of the general appear- ance and condition of the troopers and their mounts, as required by par. 49, and the inspection of arms prescribed in par. 91. It will further include all that is necessary to assure the commander that his unit is in proper condition for the duty. When on field duty such inspection must be especially thorough, including arms, ammunition, equipment, clothing, shoeing of the horses, and similar essentials. SCHOOL OF THE PLATOON. Special Provisions. 508. When recruits have learned the mechanism of the phitoon drill they should participate in the regular drills of the platoon and troop in so far as their progress in horseman- ship permits. Individual troopers whose more elementary in- struction may be found to be below the required standard for satisfactory platoon drill will be given further instruction in the School of the Squad. As far as practicable, such instruc- tion will be in addition to, and at different hours from, the regular platoon drills, so that progress in the systematic course of training may not be delayed by a few poorly instructed troopers. Every effort should be made to avoid the monoto- nous repetition of elementary instruction by men who are ready to advance to other work. When there are not available a sufficient number of well-instructed men for a satisfactory platoon drill, two or more platoons should be combined and progressive instruction along some special line of training (e. g., patrolling) should be given those troopers who are ready to advance. Meanwhile the less efficient troopers may be brought to the necessary standard by further drill in the School of the Trooper or School of the Sqnad. 509. Section chiefs, unless otherwise indicated, remain in their places in the rank and give no commands or signals. They must, however, closely observe their sections and by cautions given in a low tone prevent or correct errors. At any time other than in drills at attention a platoon leader may cause each section chief to take position in front of his respective section and lead it. In certain cases — e. g., in dismounted fire action — the platoon commander may cause his section chiefs to take position in rear of the line with a view to giving more effective assistance in direction and control of fire and the maintenance of fire discipline. When each section is led by its chief the platoon leader indicates the base section and controls its movements by appropriate indi- 38218 "=—18 13 - 193 194 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. cation to the leader. The other section then regulates on the base section. 510. When the section as a whole changes position in the execution of a platoon movement the guide of the section acts as a directing guide and the other troopers of the section conform accordingly. 511. It is essential to the execution of the movements pre- scribed in the School of the Platoon that each trooper keep constantly in mind the section to which he belongs and its temporary position in the platoon (leading or rear, right or left). Section chiefs and substitute chiefs will give special attention to seeing that this requirement is observed. In line and foragers the file closer will, whenever necessary, caution the troopers near the center of the platoon as to the point of division between the sections. Platoon Formations. 612. The close-order formations of the platoon for march; maneuver, or combat are: (a) Line (single or double rank); (&) Double column; (c) Column of fours; (d) Column of twos; and (e) Column or troopers. The only formation involving the extension of the front of the platoon to a greater extent than corresponds to a de- ployment into line is foragers (corresponding dismounted formation skirmishers) ; but the platoon may also be extended in depth. (a) In line, single rank, each section of the platoon is in line as in par. 368-a, and the two sections are abreast of each other without interval other than that between adjacent indi- vidual troopers. In line, double rank, the platoon is in two ranks, each in line as in the squad, the rear rank being habitually at a dis- tance of 3 yards mounted and 40 inches dismounted from the front rank. The platoon leader or file closer may direct the guide of the rear rank to increase the distance when necessary. Each rank habitually consists of one section. PLATOON FORMATIONS. 195 Whenever line is commanded in the platoon, single-rank line is to be understood. Single-rank line is referred to in the text either as " line " or " single rank " ; double-rank line as "double rank." ( Z> ) lu double column, each section is in column of fours, the leading fours of the two sections being abreast of each other, with an habitual interval between sections of 2 yards mounted or 1 yard dismounted, (c) (d) (e) In column of fours, column of twos, and column of troopers each section is in the corresponding formation as exi^lained for the squad (par. 368), one section being in rear of the other at 4 feet distance. (/) In foragers, each section is deployed as foragers, the two sections being abreast of each other, without interval other than that between adjacent individual foragers. (g) The extension in depth is made on the principle ex- plained in the squad. This extension may be by successive sections, squads (par. 494), or smaller elements. 513. Column of fours, in addition to its general utility as a march formation, has, as compared to column of twos or col- umn of troopers, certain important advantages. Its use always tends to maintain tlie platoon in order (par. 369). A platoon, once properly formed, can not lose order as long as its move- ments are confined to any combinations of line (single rank), column of fours, and double column. Column of fours further permits line to be formed to a flank almost on the ground occupied by the column and without loss of order; and, by wheeling about by fours when in column of fours, a change of 180° in the direction of march of a column m.ay be made almost on the ground occupied by the column, with no appre- ciable loss of time and without loss of order. Column of fours is a formation that can be easily taken, even while in rapid motion following a previous condition of disorder ; it obviates the necessity for counting fours and it tends to prevent pos- sible delay or confusion due to the troopers forgetting their respective numbers. 514. Double column possesses all those advantages incident to the use of column of fours that relate to the maintenance of order. It is, in substance, a line of section columns and is useful in connection with the original formation of the platoon and for reforming or assembling (pars. 559, 560) following 196 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. any movement as a r&sult of which the troopers of the two sections become intermingled or a general loss of order results. Where conditions permit its use it decreases the depth of a column, lends itself to a rapid deployment to the front, per- mits the formation of double rank to a flank, and is well adapted to certain special uses. Order. 515. A platoon divided into sections is in order (in any formation except column of twos or troopers) when its two component sections are united in any one of the forma- tions prescribed for the platoon (par. 512) and each section is in order (par. 370). In column of twos or troopers a further essential to order is that the right (or leading) section shall be left in front and the left (or rear) section shall be right in front. TJds last condition automatically results if the column of tivos or troopers he formed and maneuvered as prescribed in the platoon drill. It is not essential to order in the platoon that the section chiefs and substitute chiefs have the positions indicated for them in par. 519. (Fig. 49.) 516. A platoon not divided into sections is in order when it fulfills the requirements prescribed for order in the squad (par. 370), but it can then execute only the movements pre- scribed for the squad. To Form the Platoon, Mounted. 517. When the platoon leader is a commissioned officer the platoon is habitually formed by the platoon file closer under the supervision and direction of the platoon leader. When the platoon leader is a noncommissioned officer he forms the platoon and the file closer assists in the formation. Unless otherwise prescribed, the order of the sections from right to left in line, or head to rear in column, is that of their re- spective permanent numerical designations (par. 498). 518. The platoon is habitually formed in double column. The platoon may be formed in column of fours, or in line, by similar methods. The platoon is also formed at times by commands and methods corresponding to those prescribed for the squad (pars. 501, 502). TO FORM THE PLATOON. 197 519. At the formation of the platoon, section chiefs and sub- stitute chiefs habitually take position as follows : {a) When the formation is in double column, the section chief of the right section, as No. 1 of the rear four of that section ; the section chief of the left section, as No. 4 of the rear four of that section; the substitute chief of the right section, as No. 4 of the leading four of that section; the substitute chief of the left section, as No. 1 of the leading four of that section. (&) Should the formation be in column of fours, the posi- tions may be obtained by substituting in (a) leading section for right section and rear section for left section. (c) Should the formation be in line, the section chiefs of the right and left sections are on the right and left of the platoon rank, respectively, and the substitute chiefs on the left of the right section and right of the left section, re- spectively. (d) In each of the above formations should the four to which a section chief or substitute chief belongs be incom- plete, par. 36S-& is modified to the extent that a section chief 01- substitute chief habitually takes in an incomplete four his regular position (No. 1 or No. 4) as indicated, respectively, in (a), (&), and (c) of this paragraph. (c) The arrangement of noncommissioned officers indicated in this paragraph, while desirable, is not essential to the em- ployment of the platoon at drill, on the march, or in combat. Should the positions indicated not be taken when the platoon forms (or assembles) they are habitually taken as soon as practicable. 520. To form the platoon in double column (its habitual formation) the senior noncommissioned officer of the platoon takes position, mounted, 3 yards in front of the line upon which the heads of the two section columns are to rest and facing the approximate center of the position the front of the platoon is to occupy when formed. He then commands: FORM PLATOON. The section chief of the right section takes position at stand to horse abreast of the noncommissioned officer forming the platoon, on the latter's left, with an inter- val of 2 yards between the horses. The section chief of the left section similarly takes position 2 yards from the non- 198 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. commissioned officer forming the platoon, on the latter's right, with the same interval between horses. The two section chiefs face in the same direction as the noncommis- sioned officer forming the platoon. The troopers of each section lead into column (par. 351) without further command. The trooper first to lead out in each section takes position, as No. 1 of its lead- ing four, 3 yards directly in front . v^w^v of his respective section chief and g j^. An' facing him. Each section chief ^ tj.-5!i AmAQ ^' supervises the formation of his •^ J^S . uUUb ^ section, leading into his own posi- § ^^^ ; ] ^ tion (par. 519-a) as soon as the ^u^^^ A AAA '=^ troopers of his section are in ^l^^^l OOOO I ranks. (Fig. 48.) Q.^5:«oS ; _ j § 521. The file closer (if not form- ^ ing the platoon) assists in the s formation and takes, at stand to horse, the position prescribed for ft I ,■' / ' /' him in double column (par. 528.) 522. As soon as the two section ^ , , -vy . , , , chiefs have taken position in their i ,_7^rv,^"^^=.^'. V respective section columns the non- . commissioned officer forming the ^ platoon calls the roll (unless pre- »^ viously instructed to omit the roll ll ii I- 1 1^ r-* O p. o ea o €55 1 3 call — par. 505) and makes any I^ necessary adjustment between sec- ;i tions (par. 497). Should the rear j5 four of either section (or of both r sections) be incomplete the non- [ commissioned officer habitually I makes such adjustment as will leave the rear four of one section complete, and the rear four of the other section as nearly complete Fig. 48, par. 520. as practicable. TO FORM THE PLATOON. 199 523. If the platoon leader be a commissioned officer, the noncommissioned officer forming the platoon reports (except in the case of a platoon-in-troop — par. .593) to the platoon leader, who takes position at a convenient point in front of and facing the platoon in time to receive the report (par. 506). The noncommissioned officer takes his post as file closer, habitually remaining mounted unless the platoon leader dismounts. The leader causes the platoon to mount (pars. .529, 507). If the platoon leader be a noncommissioned officer he (except in the case of a platoon-in-troop — par. .593) gives the commands for mounting as soon as the adjustment between sections has been made. 524. When the formation is in column of fours (par, 518), the chief of the rear section posts No. 1 of his leading four directly in rear of the corresponding trooper of the leading section at a distance equal to the depth of the leading section in column of fours. When the formation is in line, the first position of the section chief of the right section (par. 520) is at an interval equal to section front (instead of 2 yards) from the noncommissioned officer forming the platoon. The latter, as soon as the section chiefs have taken position in the ranks (par. 519-c), commands: 1. Section, 2. COLTNT FOTJHS. Any excess distance or interval remaining betvreen the sections when the adjustment completed is closed at once without command. 525. When the platoon is formed by the commands and methods prescribed for the squad (pars. 3.50-.352, 518), if the duty in view calls for a division into sections (pars. 501, 502), such division is made after the roll has been called and fours counted. The assignment and placing of noncommissioned officers (par. 504), if not complete, is then completed. Any troopers whose numbers are changed thereby are cautioned as to their new numbers. 526. The platoon may form, after the troopers have mounted, in accordance with any of the methods authorized above. The commands of the noncommissioned officer forming the platoon are the same as those already given. If the troopers are not mounted, the section chiefs are directed in advance of the formation to cause the trooi)ers to mount (par. 352). 527. The dismounted formation of the platoon is conducted on the same principles as the corresponding mounted forma- 200 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. tion with the necessary modifications as indicated in par. 853. When the platoon forms in double column, the commands are the same as in par. 520. Each section chief takes position with an interval of 4 feet from the platoon leader. This will place the left section at approximately 1 yard interval from the right section when the formation is completed, and will give it approximately its proper distance from the front rank when double rank is formed as in par. 552. If armed with the rifle, the platoon leader and the section chiefs, until they take their places in the rank, carry their rifles at the right shoulder (par. 487). If the verification is made by the noncommissioned ofticer forming the platoon (par. 507), the latter, as soon as all are in their places in ranks, commands (par. 91) : 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS; 3. Right shoulder, 4. ARMS, and calls the roll. If the verification is to be made by the first sergeant, the com- mands indicated above are omitted at the platoon formation. Positions of the Platoon Leader and File Closee. 528. (a) The habitual position of the platoon leader is 3 yards in front of the guide of the platoon (par. 450). He occupies other positions in special cases. For dismounted fire action the platoon leader takes post in rear of the line at such place as may best enable him to direct and control the fire of the platoon. Special positions are indicated for the leader in certain phases of mounted combat with the pistol (par. 567) and saber (par. 563). In certain column formations of the troop the leaders of platoons other than the base take position abreast of their respective leading elements and cease temporarily the direct leadership of the platoons, though retaining supervision and control of the latter (par. 451). (&) The habitual position of the file closer is, in line or foragers, 3 yards in rear of the guide of the platoon ; in double rank, 3 yards in rear of the guide of the rear rank (par. 533). In double column and in column of fours, twos, or troopers he is 3 yards in rear of the platoon and in the trace of the guide of the platoon. In certain column formations of the troop the file closers have positions differing from those indi- cated above (par. 599). (c) If there be any extra file closer with the platoon, he rides, in line and in double rank, abreast of the platoon file MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING PLATOON. 201 closer and in rear of such four as the file closer may designate ; in double column and in column of fours, twos, or troopers he rides abreast of a four (two or trooper) designated by the file closer on the flank opposite to that indicated for the chief of platoon in par. 602. (d) When the platoon is wheeled about by fours the move- ments of the leader and file closers conform to pars. 605, 606. To Mount and Dismount. 529. The platoon in any prescribed formations mounts and dismounts by the commands and methods corresponding to those indicated for the squad (pars. 354-35S). If the platoon be mounted or dismounted in double rank, the odd numbers of the rear rank lead forward only 3 yards. Immediately following the execution of the first command for mounting or dismounting, a platoon leader habitually takes position, mounted, in front of and facing the platoon and at a distance of 3 yards from the leading rank or element of the platoon. ^ As soon as the platoon forms rank after mounting (w^hen the platoon mounts from line), or as soon as it mounts (when the mounting is executed from a formation other than line-), the platoon leader habitually takes his pre- scribed position (par. 528) for the formation in question. To Dismiss thf Platoon. 530. The platoon is dismissed as prescribed for the squad (par. 360). If the platoon be in double column or in column of fours, twos, or troopers, the leader may command : 1. Sections, 2. FALL OUT. Each section executes the movement. Alignment. 531. The alig-nment of the platoon acting alone is conducted upon the same principles as that of the squad (pars. 362-366). Leading the Platoon. 532. The platoon is led by its leader in accordance with the principles stated in pars. 323-325, 367, and 448-452. Guide of the Platoon. 533. In line and in foragers the left trooper of the right section is the guide of the platoon. At- each change of forma- 202 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. tion in line or foragers the file closer cautions the guide as indicated in par. 373. In double rank, the platoon leader, on taking position in front of the front rank, designates a trooper near the center of that rank as guide of the platoon; the file closer designates the corresponding trooper of the rear rank as guide of the latter. The guide of the rear rank follows in the trace of the guide of the front rank at 3 yards distance unless other- wise indicated (par. 550). In column of fours, twos, or troopers, the guide is regulated as prescribed for the corresponding formations of the squad (par. 374). In double column the right section is the base and No. 2 of the leading four is the guide of the platoon. In each section of the double column the guide is as prescribed for the squad in column of fours (par. 374). The guide of the left section regulates on the guide of the right section. It is to be noted that the guide of the platoon may, as the platoon passes from one formation to another^ be a private, a substitute chief, or a section chief. 534. Whenever the platoon leader takes position in the rank he becomes the guide of the platoon. 535. The guide habitually follov/s the platoon leader at a distance of 3 yards ; the platoon leader may specially indicate a greater distance. Movements Executed by the Platoon. 538. The platoon in double column marches to the front, halts, marches backward, obliques by trooper, and resumes the original direction, executes changes of direction, including the turn and half turn, and marches to the rear by commands and methods corresponding to those prescribed for the squad in line. 537. In accordance with the principles stated in pars. 469 and 470, the platoon, toheu divided info sections, habitually forms column of fours, twos, or troopers lo the direction of march from line as prescribed in par. 545, instead of as pre- scribed in pa)\ 403-a, b; forms line to the direction of march from column of fours, twos, or troopers, as prescribed in par. 546, instead of as prescribed in par. 397; forms column of PLATOON MOVEMENTS AND COMMANDS. ftOZ twos, or troopers from column of fours as prescribed in par. 547 instead of as prescribed in par. 393. A platoon divided into sections habitually forms column of fours, twos, or troopers by breaking to the direction of march from its center in line ; and it habitually forms either line or foragers from column of fours, twos, or troopers by a fan^ioise deployment. 538. Movements on foot are executed in accordance with the principles stated in pars. 482-484. 539. The principles stated in pars. 446-488 are, with such modifications as are indicated in the platoon drill, generally applicable to that drill. Commands and Cokkesponding Aem Signals. (For list of commands and signals for these movements executed as prescribed for the squad, see par. 3S1.) 540. Commands. Pars. Arm Signals. 1. Charge 1. Column, 2. MARCH 1. Column of twos, 2. MAUCH 1. Column of troopers, 2. MARCH 1. Double column, 2. MARCH 1. Double rank, 2. MARCH 1. Foragers, 2. MARCH 1. Line, 2. MARCH 1. Pistol attack 1. Single rank, 2. MARCH 1. Skirmishers, 2. MARCH 563 r &11 l545-a, 548 \ 545-6 1 547,548 545-&, 547 542,544 551 557 5-13, 546 567 554 557 None except leader's ex- ample. (•Column.* Column— twos.f Column— troopers.f Double column.'* None. Foragers.* Line.* None except leader's ex- ample. None. Skirmishers.* * Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the signal of execution in each case is made as prescribed in par. 990. t In signals marked thus, the preparatory signal consists of more than one ele- ment; the signal of execution follows the last element of the preparatory signal. 204 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Detailed Description of Movements — Close Order. 541. Being in double column, to form column of fours, twos, or troopers. (a) To form column of fours: 1. Column, 2. MARCH. The right section is the base ; it advances and follows the leader. The left section takes or maintains a correspondingly slower gait (or if halted, remains so) until its leading four is about abreast of the rear four of the right section, when the left section inclines to the right (par. 510) at the gait of the right section and takes its place in column of fours in rear of the other section, (Fig. 48.) (b) Column of twos or troopers is formed at the commands: 1. Column of twos, or 1. Column of troopers, 2. MARCH. The right section executes left by twos (troopers) as in par. 393-a, b; the left section executes right by twos (troopers) in time to take its position in the column as explained in (a), above (par. 331). Gaits in both (a) and (&) are regulated as in par. 337-a, c. 542. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form double column: 1. Double column, 2. MARCH. Being in column of fours, the leading section, as the base (par. 459) advances and follows the leader. The rear section inclines to the left (par. 510) at a correspondingly faster gait, resumes the march to the front so as to have its interval of 2 yards, and, when its leading four is abreast of the guide of the base section, takes the gait of the latter. (PI. V.) Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-a, b. It is practicable to form double column from column of twos or troopers on similar principles, each section executing column (par. 399) during the movement (par. 331). Double column is ordinarily executed from either column of fours or line. 543. Being in double column, to form line: 1. Line, 2. MARCH. The right section as the base (par. 458) executes right front into line (par. 397). Its leading four advances and follows the platoon leader. The left section executes left front into line, except that the right trooper of its leading four closes in upon the left of the leading four of the right section and regulates upon the guide of the line (par. 326). PLATOON MOVEMENTS AND COMMANDS. 205 PLATE I.— THE PLATOON. (Jfar. 543.) I (column PABIIY FOHJflB.) '//J PLA TOON ,t/'>7// / /J/), (position of filecloser not shown) COMMAND: 1.C0LUMN.ZMARCH. PLATOON /N S \ \ ^ ^N \ / , . - / / / ' OAMMAMH DOUBLE COLUMN ^^'f[Mf\ ArtAH/// ' ^O'^^^^ND: I 206 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Any command for a gait applies only to the execution of front into line in the sections (par. 337-/). (PI. I.) 544. Being in line, to form double column: 1. Double column, 2. MARCH. The right section as the base (par. 458) executes left by fours (par. 403-a), its left four advancing and following the platoon, leader. The left section simultaneously executes right by fours, its guide regulating on the guide of tlie right section and gradually gaining the interval of 2 yards between sections. The two sections advance at the same gait (par. 334), the left section regulating on the right. 545. Being in line, to form column of fours, twos, or troopers. (a) To form column of fours: 1. Column, 2. MARCH. (PI. I.) The right section as the base (par. 459) executes left by fours (par. 403-a), its left four advancing and following the platoon leader. The left section executes right by fours (at the gait of the head of the column) in time to incline to the right and take its place in the column in rear of the right sec- tion at 4 feet distance. It is the duty of the file closer to see that the right four of the left section begins the execution of right by fours at the proper moment. Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-a, c. (h) To form column of twos or troopers: 1. Column of twos, or 1. Column of troopers, 2. MARCH. Executed on the same principles as in (a) above (par. 331). The right section exe- cutes left by twos (par. 403-6), the left section right by twos. 546. Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to the front: 1. Line, 2. MARCH, The leading section, as the base (par. 459), executes right front into line (par. 397), its leading element advancing and following the platoon leader (pars. 334, 337-a). The rear section executes left front into line with the modification that its leading element obliques to the left at the same time as the other elements of that section and forms abreast of and to the left of the left trooper of the other section, who becomes the guide of the platoon (par. 533) in the new line. All the elements of the colunm except the leading one in the platoon move as pre- scribed in par 337-&. DETAILS OF PLATOON MOVEMENTS. 207 Line to a flank or to any oblique direction may be formed on tlie same principles, the head of the column being directed toward the new front before the gh'^n (par. 481-0) ^''(Fig^ @U(JU UUUUUI 547. Being in column .... of fours, to form column of twos or troopers: 1. Column of twos, or 1. Column of troopers, 2, MARCH. Executed ac- \ \ \ ^'. \\^\\\\i >i'n ! /' / / / \ \\u ''/'/'////// cording to the principles \ \ \ \ ^ \\ \ of par. 393-a, h. The leading section always executes left by twos and the rear section right by twos (par. 331). 54S. Being in column \ \ of twos or troopers, to \ form column of fours: \ \ \ \\ 1. Column, 2. MAHCH. \ \V ' Executed as in the squad (par. 399), except that the rear two (or troop- er) of each four of the leading section oblique to the right, while the corresponding oblique in _ the rear section is to the "v \ ^ 'v^m) left (par. 331). Column \)l'^~^5 of twos from column of WV^>cr:ZD troopers is formed in a ^ .^ 't^T^f"^ similar manner (par. Fig. 49. par. 546. 331) at the command: 1. Column of twos, 2. MARCH. 208 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Double Rank, 549. Double rank in the platoon is formed in two ways — toward the direction of march from single rank (par. 551), and to the flank from double column (par. 552). Conversely, the platoon in double rank executes but three changes of formation — single rank (par. 554) and foragers (par. 557), executed toward the direction of march, and double column (par. 555), formed to a flank. 550. The platoon in double rank executes by the same com- mands and methods as the platoon in single rank all move- ments that do not involve a change of formation. (See also pars. 554, 555.) In executing the changes of direction (in- cluding the turn and half turn) the troopers of the rear rank incline outward during the turn so as to gain ground toward the marching flank ; and those nearest the pivot move their horses' haunches toward the marching flank, so as to clear the ground for any follovving unit. 551. Being in single rank, to form double rank to the front: 1. Double rank, 2. MARCH. The right section as the base (par. 458) advances and fol- lows the platoon leader. The left section takes or maintains a correspondingly slower gait (or, if halted remains so) .until it has gainecl a distance of 3 yards from the right section (par. 510). It then obliques to the right by trooper, the guide (par. 385) so regulating the gait and pace as to keep, during the oblique, 3 yards in rear of the other section. As the right trooper of the rear section approaches the right of the other section the rear section resumes the march to the front and follows the base section at 3 yards distance. The gaits of the two sections are regulated as in par. SST-a, e. (PI. II.) 552. Being in double column, to form double rank to a flank: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH (pars. 325, 400). If the purpose of the connnand is to gain a short distance to the flank, the leader and file closer need not move to their new positions, nor need a new guide be indicated (par. 326). 553. In executing double rank as prescribed in pars. 551 and 552 the right section of the line or double column becomes the front rank of the double rank; the left section, the rear PLATE II.— THE PLATOON. (Par. 551.) " mmmmmmmmMm. '^riP'.^,r'r'f';V'^, r, Pif' '^fe>y:vhXS?i^N^vsS-\v^iN 1' 1 :^, ' J I 1 1 . I ' PLATOON IN DOUBLE RANKj 1. SIBGLS RANK. 2. MARCH. PLATOON IN SINGLE HAKK; 1. DOUBLE RANK, 2. MARCH, .^'f> f^ 9 ''P, 'P. F\ p'-^.B n p P, r, ;■■; «'^, I < 1 ' 38218 ° — 18 14 200 210 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. rank. Should the rear rank, however, have more troopers in it than are in the front rank, the file closer directs enough troopers from the left of the rear rank to the left of the front rank, at the first indication for a charge, to give the front rank a strength not less than that of the rear rank. In all such cases, before ordering subsequent movements that require knowledge by the troopers of their respective numbers, the leader commands: 1. Sections, 2. COUNT FOURS, or else as- sembles the platoon (par. 560). 554. Being in double rank to form single rank to the front: 1. Single rank, 2. MARCH. The front rank, as the base sec- tion, advances and follows the platoon leader. The rear rank obliques to the left at a correspondingly faster gait as in par. 551, resuming the march to the front so as to take its position in single rank on the left of the other section. (PI. II.) Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-«, e. 555. Being in double rank, to form double column to a flank: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH (par. 325). Extended Order. 556. Pars. 404-407 are applicable to the platoon. 557. Being in any formation, to form foragers: 1. Foragers, 2. MARCH. If the platoon be in double column, column of fours, column of twos, or column of troopers, the right section forms right front into foragers (par. 409). The left section forms left front into foragers based upon the left trooper of the leading element of the right (or leading) section, who ad- vances (par. 337-a) and follows the leader (par. 325). The platoon deploys on foot as skirmishers by correspond- ing commands and methods. If the platoon be in line, the movement is executed as in par. 408. The right section deploys to the' right, the left sec- tion to the left. (Fig. 50.) If the platoon be in double rank, the front rank deploys on its left trooper (par. 408), who becomes the guide of the pla- toon and advances, following the leader (pars. 325, 337-a). The rear rank moves obliquely to the left as in par. 551, the troopers successively deploying at a gallop as they 'gain the necessary space. The right trooper of the rear rank takes position on the left of the left trooper of the front rank. EXTENDED ORDER- IN PLATOON. 211 558. The platoon may- be extended in depth by commands and methods corresponding to those indicated in par. 413. The elements of the ex- tension are usually sec- tions, but may be squads (par. 494), fours, twos, or troopers. 559. Being in foragers and in order, to assem- ble: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH. Each section assembles in column of fours on its inner flank (par. 414), the file closer cautioning the troopers if necessary. The guide of the right section advances and fol- lows the leader (par. 325). The left section regulates on the right section, closing to 2 yards interval. The gait of the leading fours of the two sections is regulated as indicated in pars 334, 337-a, e. Should it be desired to advance in column of fours instead of in dou- ble column, the leader -may, instead of waiting until the assembly is completed and then exe- cuting the correspond- ing movement, caution: M I I I I I MM I I I ! I I I I I I I I t \ \/ FpRAGERS. 2.MARCH. ^ ' - 1111/ / \ Willi/ N ^ nil ^ \II!I Mill l.ASSt'MBLEf2.MARCH. (Hatoon leader ,-''Z^'' -'/" /• ^cautions COLUIJN.) M I \\\ 1 \\\ M I M Tl M I I 1 \{ 'n '\ \ i i / / /' 'n^ '\/. FOR/{GERS. 2.MARCH. 'n Mill 1111/ ^ Ngjljj. (Normal assembly^ ^ Lj^S^EMBLEZ. MARCH. -'""/•'"'//' ;' \\ %""""-^ I'll Tl'll m' M i M M M I Til Tl ^. \ \ I / / / ^^\\ \ / i / ^s \ » / / / \ l.FORAGERS, 2.MARCR. , '' l.ASSEMBiE)2.MARCH.^\^^t,ri leadaP ,' / /' "' \ cautions LIHE.) I ; N^ \^ r M I M II M II I II I I M M M 'i I PLATOON /NUNE OF FORAGERS. ^ order.) Fig. 50, pars. 557, 559. 212 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. PLATOON IN COLUMN. COMMAND^ TO FIGHT ON foot: ACTION FRONT! COLUMN, immediately following the commands for the assem- bly. Each section assembles as before, but the head of the left section moves at a correspondingly slower gait (or halts) until that section can take its place in column in rear of the base section in accordance with the principles of par. 458. The leader may similarly caution: LINE. The platoon then as- sembles in line on its guide as in the squad. (Fig. 50.) 560. To assemble the platoon when the latter is not in order: , 1. Assemble, 2. •::••::•, march. The move- ment is, with minor modifi- cations, e X e - cuted upon the same princi- p 1 e s upon which the original for- mation of the platoon is based. Certain features of the original for- mation (e. g., the roll call, report, and in- spection) are omitted. The leader is the base of the assembly and moves in the direction toward which THE PLATOON ASSEMBLED, \ / PLATOON RALLIEOiiJfll^ COMMAND-. 2. COLUMN, 2. MARCH. COMMAND: 1.ASJEM8LE, 2.MARCH. /COMMAND!, RAayi^ MARCHING IN COLUMN OF TWOS. Fig. 51, pars. 560, 561. ho desires the platoon to face. The section chiefs move quickly to their respective positions abreast of the leader (par. 520) and move in the same dii-ection. The troopers move toward their respective section chiefs and the sections form, each in column of fours, 3 yards in rear of its chief. Each trooper takes a correspondingly faster gait than his chief, if neces- THE RALLY OF THE PLATOON. 213 sary, to gain his position. The first trooper to arrive in rear of the section chief becomes No. 1 of the leading four of that section (par. 351). Each trooper forms in his own section, but with no attention to liis former position. The platoon leader, as soon as the leading four of the right section forms, takes position in front of No. 2 of that four. The left sec- tion regulates on the right section. The section chiefs, as soon as their respective base troopers and the leader and guide of the platoon are in position, are free to move to where they can best supervise the formation of their sections. In separating the personnel of two sections whose troopers have become intermingled, the troopers of the base (right) section have the right of way and pass in front of the troopers of the left section. Each section leader takes his position (par. 519) as soon as his section is formed. The file closer assists as usual in the formation and takes his position (par. 528). If it is desired to assemble the platoon in column, the cau- tion COLUMN may be given following the command of execu- tion for the assembly. The leader of the section that would have formed on the left in double column causes the section to take a correspondingly slower gait until it can take its place in rear of the other section. The movement described in this paragraph may be executed w^hether the platoon be in any formation, or in partial or com- plete disorder, provided a prior division into sections has been made and each trooper knows to which section he belongs. The movement is important and should be practiced fre- quently. (Fig. 51.) The Rally. 561. Being in any formation, or not formed, or in disorder, to rally: The command, signal, and method of execution are the same as those indicated for the squad (par. 416). The file closer assists as usual in the formation. In campaign, the rally, unless executed with a view to mak- ing a charge, should habitually be follow^ed as soon as prac- ticable by the assembly (par. 560). In instruction, however, the rally should frequently be exe- cuted and the platoon practiced, following the rally, in charg- 214 CAVALEY DRILL REGULATIONS. ing without reforming, and also in assembling quickly while marching. These exercises are of exceptional importance. The rally differs from the assembly in that it is always executed at a very rapid gait and that it does not habitually result in a condition of order. It is an emergency movement, and its use, except for instruction purposes, should be confined to those occasions when the assembly will not meet the situa- tion. (Fig. 51.) The Charge. 562. The characteristic feature of the cavalry charge is utilizing the momentum of a group of horses at high speed in connection with the troopers' use of their weapons. The effect of tha impact increases with the speed of the horses and the compactness of the group. Hence the normal formation for the charge is line; and, as line is not a formation which favors the most effective use of the pistol, the usual weapon for the charge is the saber. The saber charge may also be executed in foragers, the troopers then ordinarily attacking in couples. Such a forma- tion would be ineifective against an opposing charge in close order, but it may be employed under special conditions ; as when tli« enemy is dismounted or is in an extended formation or v»'hen the ground does not permit a charge in line. Since there is then no cohesion in this charging group, the effect of the impact is greatly reduced. The purpose of attacking in couples is to afford mutual support. Under certain conditions the pistol may be advantageously used for the charge. A command, surprised in column forma- tion on a road or other place where obstacles prevent quick deployment, may then break through a hostile force. Column of twos would enable all the pistols to be used ; column of fours, while permitting only the men on the flanks of the fours to fire, would have greater momentum. The charge is described for the normal case — the attack in line. Speed and cohesion are the essential elements. The charge should begin at a short distance from the enemy. The gaits employed to reach the charging point will depend upon the terrain as known or as indicated by the ground scouts, the condition of the horses, and other circumstances. The charge must be pushed home. THE CHARGE AND PISTOL ATTACK. 215 In instruction exercises the enemy should always be out- lined or represented (par. 21) and the plan of the exercise should be carefully explained. 563. The platoon with sabers drawn, marching at the gallop or at the extended gallop, the leader, when at about 50 yards from the enemy, commands: CHARGE. Each trooper pushes his horse to full speed and takes the charging position (par. 297). The troopers close on the leader, but do not permit their horses to pass the leader's horse. The troopers habitually cheer at the command charge. 564. When the pistol is used the leader raises his pistol so that the troopers can see it and commands : 1. Raise, 2. PIS- TOL. When practicable, this is done before charge is com- manded. The leadier takes position on a flank of the leading element of the column. The troopers hold their fire until the leader at the head of the column opens fire. Circumstances may require that a charge of this character be made in line. The troopers then close on the leader, who takes position in the rank (par. 534). 565. The charge in general may be followed by the rally, with a Yiew^ to restoring control and cohesion and charging back. If the enemy break and scatter the pursuit may be pressed by the troopers riding individually or in small groups, thus approximating the charge as foragers. The troopers keep on the alert for the command or signal rally. The charge may terminate with the melee resolving itself into a series of individual combats. The platoon should be assembled as soon as practicable (par. 485). '' The Pistol Attack. 566. The pistol attack is the normal form of mounted attack in all cases in which it is not intended to use the momentum of the horses as one of the weapons of the attacking force. Ac- curacy in firing the pistol, rapidity in loading and in perform- ing the other operations connected Avith the handling of the weapon, the ability to direct and control the horses, and the habitual withholding of fire until within close range of -the enemy are essential features in the successful pistol attack. The particular use of the pistol referred to in par. 564 is ia reality a special case of the charge and is to be clearly dis- 216 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. tinguished from the normal pistol attack, which is habitually made in foragers and does not depend upon the momentum of the horse as an important feature in its execution. The speed of the horse is, however, employed that the trooper may place himself within close range of his enemy and in the rela- tive position that is most to his own advantage and his enemy's disadvantage. 567. The platoon being deployed as foragers, at raise pistol the leader commands : PISTOL ATTACK, and leads the platoon against the enemy. The guide moves up abreast of the leader and on his left, the other troopers conforming (par. 534). The troopers are trained in instruction exercises to withhold their fire habitually until within 10 yards of the enemy and to avoid firing in the direction of their own men. In action, the troopers habitually withhold their fire until the platoon leader opens fire. The distance from the enemy at which fire is opened varies with the rapidity with which the opposing forces are approaching each other and the nature of the target, but should in no case be more than 25 yards. Following the attack, pistols must be reloaded at once. The subsequent movements of the platoon depend on the situation that results from the attack. The attack may be repeated, the pursuit taken up or the platoon be rallied. 568. The pistol attack is usually executed when the platoon is deployed as foragers, but any formation (e. g., column of twos) that permits the effective use of the pistol may be em- ployed if conditions favor its use. Ground Scouts and Combat Patrols. 569. The special mission of ground scouts (Def. Scouts) is to ascertain if the ground in the immediate front is suitable for cavalry, and, if not, to indicate where points of passage may be found. Ground scouts should always be designated in advance and trained for their special duty. They should be equipped with wire cutters. The noncommissioned officer in each flank four (section chief or substitute chief) acts as a ground scout unless other- wise directed. The two scouts move forward at the gallop at DISMOUNTED ACTION. 217 the caution : GROUND SCOUTS FORWARD, or at the first indi- cation of a coming charge by the platoon. Ground scouts reconnoiter the ground to a considerable dis- tance in front of the command, generally from 200 to 500 yards, taking care to be able to communicate quickly and in- telUciihly the information ohtained. When the charge is sounded or ordered, the scouts clear the front of the advancing line and join on the nearest flank. 570. The following signals should be used by ground scouts : If the ground is unfavorable the signal halt will be given and the scout will ride for the point which appears practicable, pointing toward it with the hand or weapon. If the ground is wholly impracticable the scout will ride back to report, giving the signal halt. 571. In addition to sending out ground scouts to ascertain and communicate the suitability of ground for mounted action, cavalry units engaged, or about to engage, in mounted combat will usually require special patrols (Def.) to provide for im- mediate security against possible attacks from the flank or rear. Such patrols, usually designated " combat patrols," should be limited in number and strength to the minimum rea- sonably sufficient for the purposes indicated. The extent to which they may be required will obviously vary with the con- ditions attending the combat. The presence of friendly troops on the immediate flanks and rear of the attacking unit may, in rare cases, render them unnecessary. Whenever ground scouts or combat patrols are needed for the proper protection of any unit, the immediate commander of the attacking line is responsihle that necessary provision is made for them. M0\^MENTS FOR PASSING FROM MOUNTED ACTION TO DIS- MOUNTED Action. 572. The platoon may pass to dismounted action and re- mount by the .commands and methods corresponding to those prescribed for the squad (pars. 421, 442), with such modifica- tions as are noted below. 573. It is important that the platoon leader move quickly to the place where the dismounted platoon is to form (par. 575). He must, therefore, not be delayed in connection with the care of his horse. On dismounting he passes his reins to the file 218. CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. closer or to a near-by trooper or links his horse to a convenient trooper's mount, according to the circumstances of the case. The horse holder nearest the leader must endeavor to assist in quickly freeing the leader from the care of his horse. 574. In the absence of orders to the contrary, the file closer performs the duties prescribed for the trooper in charge of the horse holders and led horses of the squad (par. 431). Should the file closer's orders require him to leave the horses, after once assuming charge of them, he must, before doing so, see tlmt a responsible and properly instructed trooper is placed in charge. When the file closer dismounts he links his horse to the horse of the most convenient trooper. The platoon file closer notices particularly that the platoon leader's horse is promptly taken on dismounting to fight on foot and promptly brought up for remounting. When necessary he leads the pla- toon leader's horse. 575. Whenever the platoon passes to dismounted action the platoon leader (dismounted) hurries to the point where he desires the platoon to form. The section chiefs take position on his right and left and the dismounted platoon forms in double column as in the assembly (par. 560), each trooper moving at the ri«i to his own section. The platoon leader may command: 1. Skirmishers, 2. MARCH, as the troopers approach. The first trooper of the right section to arrive near the chief then takes position behind the latter as guide of the platoon, the other troopers of the right section deploy on his right, and the troopers of the left section deploy on his left. Each section chief supervises the deployment and, in the ab- sence of other instructions, takes position on the outer flank of his section. 576. The platoon, having dismounted, executes any neces- sary movements. Fire action is conducted by the usual com- mands and methods. If the platoon be not divided into sec- tions it forms, and is maneuvered, by commands and means corresponding to those employed for the squad. ( Fig. 51, par. 560.) Obstacles. 577. Obstacles are passed as in the squad (par. 443). The platoon file closer and the section chiefs and substitute chiefs see that cautions are passed back and other necessary steps taken to avoid accidents. COMBAT or THE PLATOON. 219 Combat. 578. The saber charge and pistol attack are the characteristic features of mounted combat. The rifle is the habitual weapon of dismounted combat. In exceptional cases the pistol, in addition to its use for individual protection, may be employed in the charge or in dismounted combat ; for example, in a dis- mounted rush at close quarters made by cavalry not armed with the bayonet. Rifle firing mounted may also be excep- tionally employed by small groups of specially trained men and horses. 579. The question as to which weapon shall he used is one of tactics. Each weapon has its own function for which it is best suited and for which it should be employed. Nothing except a knowledge of the general principles that govern the use of each, experience, and sound judgment can indicate the weapon to be selected in any particular case. For a mounted attack made against an equally well-trained and well-mounted enemy, under conditions that offer no special advantage to either side up to the moment of contact, and over ground favorable to its use, the close-order charge M'ith the saber may prove more effective than the pistol attack. For an attack made when exposed to an elfective fire of any kind the normal formation (foragers) for the pistol attack is much less vulnerable than the normal formation (line) for the saber charge. The pistol attack can also be delivered in many cases where the nature of the ground or the existence of obstacles will make an effective saber charge impossible. Where the terrain does not favor the advance at high speed of a close-order line, where the enemy is in a dispersed forma- tion fas foragers or skirmishers), and under any conditions in which actual contact can be avoided by the enemy if he so desire, the pistol is apt to prove more effective than the saber. Where so outnumbered as to render defensive tactics neces- sary, where the terrain does not permit of successful mounted action, where opportunities occur for suddenly surprising with fire an enemy in close order, and in other similar cases, dis- mounted action may be advisable. 580. Commanders of small isolated groups should be particu- larly careful not to resort to dismounted action unless the jidvantages of such a course are clear ; and, when such action 220 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. is called for, should be on the alert for the first favorable opportunity to resume mounted action. The commander of such a group will very rarely be justified in resorting to dis- mounted action if a reasonable prospect for successful mounted action is presented, or if dismounted action involves the material separation of the horses from the dismounted line, thus dividing the command. A separation of the dis- mounted line and horses not only sacrifices mobility and weakens the firing line to provide horse holders and guards, but, in the presence of an alert enemy, may easily lead to disaster. 581. The commands and formations for each type of action are those appearing in the corresponding portions of the drill regulations (pars. 562-576). Once facility in the use of weapons, familiarity ^vith the mechanism of the movements, and skill in horsemanship have been acquired, the best peace training for combat is constant practice in field exercises. THE TROOP. Special Provisions. 582. The captain is the commander and tactical leader of the troop (par. 461). 583. If platoons are properly instructed, troop drill will con- sist practically in the leading and handling of the platoons by their respective leaders in accordance with the captain's will, as indicated by his own example and movements, his com- mands and signals. Troop drill must not be made the means of giving individual instruction or elementary collective in- struction to the troopers in the ranks of the platoons, though it may properly be used to test the thoroughness of such instruction. Teoop Formations. (Plate III.) 584. The close-order formations of the troop for march, maneuver, and combat are: (a) Line (single or double rank). (&) Line of double columns. (c) Line of platoon columns. (d) Column of platoons (single rank only). (e) Double column. (/) Column of fours. (g) Column of twos. (h) Column of troopers. Route order (par. 604) is a modified form of (e), (/), (g), or (h). The formations in which the front of the troop is extended to a greater degree than corresponds to deploy- ment into line are (i) line of platoons and (j) foragers. The troop may also be extended in depth (k). (a) In line (single or double rank) each platoon is in line (par. 512-a). The platoons are abreast of each other or are echeloned as prescribed in par. 587. (&) In line of double columns the, platoons, each in double column, are abreast, with intervals sufficient for the troop to deploy into line toward the direction of march. 221 222 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. (c) In line of platoon columns the platoons, each in column of fours, are abreast of one another, with intervals sufficient for the troop to deploy into line toward the direction of niarcli. (d) In column of platoons the platoons, each in line, are one behind another, with distances equal to platoon front, less 3 yards. (e), (/), (g), ill). In double column and in column of fours, twos, or troopers each platoon is in the corresponding forma- tion (par. 512). The distance between ihe rear of any platoon and the head of the platoon next in rear is, in each formation, the same as the distance between other elements of the cor- responding column. (/) In line of platoons the platoons are deployed with inter- vals sufficient to permit the troop to deploy into foragers toward the direction of march. The interval is based upon foragers being placed at intervals of 3 yards unless another interval has previously been designated. The platoons are abreast of each other or echeloned as in par 587. The platoons are usually in one of the prescribed close-order for- mations (par. 512). (i) In foragers each platoon is in foragers, the interval be- tween platoons being the same as between adjacent troopers in foragers. The platoons are abreast of each other or echeloned as in par. 587. [k) The extension of the troop in depth is similar to that explained for the squad and platoon. Ordeb. 585. A troop divided into platoons is in order when its com- ponent platoons are united in any one of the formations pre- scribed for the troop and each is In order as explained in par. 515. 586. A troop that is not divided into platoons is in order when it fulfills the conditions for order in the squad (par. 370) ; but it can then execute only the movements prescribed for the squad. Echeloning of Platoons. 587. Whenever the troop advances in line, line of platoons, or foragers, the platoons next on the right and left of the TO FORM THE TROOP. 223 directing platoons are echeloned (without interval) upon the base platoon, habitually at a distance of 3 yards; this will place the leaders of the two platoons adjacent to the base platoon on a line with the rank of the latter. A platoon not immediately adjacent to the base platoon is similarly eche- loned upon the nearest platoon on the side of the base. The platoons are not echeloned, as above, in double rank, nor in case the troop be marched backward, nor when the troop is halted. In extended order, the captain may, by instructions to the platoon commanders, increase the distance at which the platoons are echeloned. When the troop, marching in line, is halted, the base platoon halts at once (pars. 462. 465) ; each of the other platoons halts when the rank of the platoon in question arrives abreast of the rank of the base platoon. When the troop advances from the halt in line, line of platoons, or foragers, the base platoon moves out at once ; each of the other platoons moves out so that the platoon in ques- tion will be properly echeloned as required above. When- ever the troop in line, line of platoons, or foragers is marched to the rear, the platoons other than the directing platoon take a correspondingly slower gait (par. 335) until they are echeloned as prescribed above. The principle laid down in this paragraph is similarly ap- plied in the execution of all movements terminating in any one of the three formations named above. To FOKM THE TeOOP, MOUNTED. 588. The troop is habitually formed by_^ the first sergeant under the supervision and direction of the* captain. 589. The troop habitually forms in line of double column; it may be formed in column of fours or in line by similar methods. The center platoon (par. 457) is the base platoon of the formation. 590. When no prior division into platoons and sections has been made, the troop is formed by a modification of the method prescribed for forming the squad (pars. 350-353). This latter method may also be used when the troop, though previously divided into such units, is formed for a duty at 224 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. which the maintenance of such division is unnecessary (pars. 501, 504). 591. All organizations must be practiced in forming rapidly and quietly, not only in those formations that are best suited to ordinary garrison routine, but also in such as may have to be employed under the varying conditions of field service, in- cluding night operations. 592. The captain habitually gives the commands for mount- ing the troop. The platoons are mounted separately by their leaders only when so directed in advance by the captain (par. 523). The captain may give general or specific instruc- tions as to the type of inspection to be made by platoon com- manders at the formation (par. 507). In the absence of other instructions the platoon commanders do not delay the forma- tion by any special inspection ; they always note, however, during the formation, the condition of the troopers and the appearance of the Tatter's mounts, equipment, and clothing, and take the necessary steps to remedy defects. 593. To form the troop in line of double columns (the habit- ual formation) the first sergeant indicates to the senior non- commissioned officer of the base platoon the position in which that platoon is to form and the direction in which the troop is to face, takes position at a convenient point, and commands ; FORM TROOP. The base platoon is formed in double column on the desig- nated ground as prescribed in par. 520. The platoons' other than the base form in the same manner as the base platoon, so taking position as to appear, from right to left, in numerical order (par. 498). The platoons form simultaneously when practicable, otherv>ise successively. To indicate to his section chiefs their first positions (par. 520) each noncommissioned officer forming a platoon other than the base takes position abreast of, and facing in the same direction as, the noncommissioned officer forming the base platoon, habitually with the interval necessary to permit the troop, Avhen formed', to execute line. This interval may be decreased by prior indication of the first sergeant when re- stricted space or other conditions make such action desirable. It should not be less in any case than 12 yards. The first sergeant, while the platoons are forming, rides where he can best supervise the formation, noting any neces- TO FORM THE TROOP. 225 sary adjustments between platoons that may be required (par. 497). He also notes whether the noncommissioned officer forming each platoon is the senior noncommissioned officer who should be present for duty with that platoon. Each noncommissioned officer forming a platoon, as soon as his platoon is formed, takes position facing to the fronit, 3 yards in front of the guide of his platoon (par. 533). As soon as the platoons are formed and the noncommis- sioned officers forming them have taken position as above indicated the first sergeant takes position about 8 yards in front of and facing the center of the troop and commands: REPORT. The senior noncommissioned officer with each platoon reports (par. 506). The first sergeant then faces the captain, who takes position to receive the report about 12 yards in front of and facing the center of the troop. The first sergeant reports and takes his post (par. 603). Each non- commissioned officer forming a platoon, if not the platoon leader, takes his position as file closer as soon as the first sergeant starts to his post. 594. If the first sergeant is to call the roll "(par. 505) he omits the command REPORT, calls the roll, and reports to the captain (pars. 506, 507, 592). 595. When necessary the troop may be formed in accordance with similar principles in column of fours or in line. The platoons then form as indicated in par. 524. The commands are: FORM TROOP IN COLUMN OF FOURS or FORM TROOP IN LINE. 596. When the troop is formed in accordance wuth the com- mands and methods prescribed for the squad, if the duty be one requiring a division of the troop into platoons and sec- tions (pars. 501, 502), the first sergeant, having called the roll, may fall out the noncommissioned officers and command CALL OFF to assist in locating the desired points of division between the platoons. The troopers count aloud consecutive numbers from right to left. The first sergeant divides the troop into platoons and assigns the noncommissioned officers to platoons, if such assignment has not already been made (par. 504). The roll having been called, the division into platoons made, and the noncommissioned officers assigned, the first sergeant commands: FORM YOUR PLATOONS. 38218 °— IS 15 226 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The seDior noucommissioued officer assigned to each platoon completes the formation of his platoon by assigning and placing his noncommissioned officers as may be required to complete the formation of the platoon. He then (unless the platoon is in column of fours) commands, 1. Sections, 2. COUNT FOURS, and takes position facing to the front as \yhen i-eporting to the first sergeant (par, 593). When all the noncommissioned (»fficei*s formmg platoons have faced to the front the first sergeant reports the troop (par. 506). 597. The troop may also form after the troopers have mounted (pars. 352, 526). To FoEM THE Troop, Dismounted. 598. A dismounted formation of the troop is conducted on tlie same principles as the corresponding mounted formation. When the troop is formed as in pars. 593 and 595, but the verification is made by the first sergeant instead of in each platoon (par. 594), the first sergeant, if the troop be armed with the rifle, commands, .just before calling the roll : 1. In- spection, 2. ARMS; 3. Right shoulder, 4. ARMS (par. 91). The first sergeant gives the same commands just before calling the roll if the troop, being armed with the rifle, is formed in accordance with the methods prescribed in par. 596. The formation in both cases is completed in the usual manner. Positions of Officers, Noncommissioned Officers, and Others Out of Ranks. (Plate III.) 599. (a) The habitual position of the captain in all close- order formations is 6 yards in front of the leader of the base platoon. In extended order he may take position as in close order or go wherever necessary (par. 448). (b) Except where otherwise indicated, the positions of platoon leaders and file closers are the same as shown in par. 528. 600. In certain column formations of the squadron (par. 676) modifications occur in the positions of the captain and first sergeant as stated below. POSTS IN THE TROOP. 227 601. In par. 603 positions prescribed for certain platoon leaders and others out of ranks are stated as " on the flank of the column." In such cases each is separated from the trooper of the adjacent element of the colitmn by the usual interval between troopers. The particular flank upon which platoon leaders are posted in the cases in question is regulated by par. 602; all take position on the same flank. File closers and other enlisted men out of ranks who march on the flank of the column are on the flank opposite to that prescribed for the chiefs of platoons. 602. When the formation taken by the troop involves a change of formation in the platoons from line to either double column, column of fours, column of twos, or column of troop- ers, platoon leaders, for whom a position on a flank is pre- scribed in par. 603, take position on the right flank of the column unless the latter be formed through the execution, by the platoons, of fours right; in this excepted case they take position in the left flank of the column. The subsequent movements of platoon leaders are indicated in pars. 605, 606. 603. Platoon leaders: In double column, and in column of fours, twos, or troopers, the leader of each platoon in rear of the base platoon is posted on the flank of the column (par. 601) abreast of the leading element of the corresponding platoon. First sergeant: In line, line of double columns, and line of platoon columns, 3 yards in rear of the file closer of the base platoon; in column of platoons, 3 yards in rear of the file closer of the rear platoon ; in double column, and in column of fours, twos, or troopers, 3 yards in rear of the rear platoon, in the trace of the guide of the platoon; in extended order he accompanies the captain unless otherwise ordered. Guidon: When the guidon is carried uncased the noncom- missioned oflicer carrying it accompanies the captain, unless otherwise directed, riding 1 yard to the rear and 1 yard to the right of the captain's horse. If the guidon be cased, the noncommissioned officer carrying it rides as an extra file closer near the head of the column unless assigned duties requiring a different position. Platoon file closers: In column of platoons the file closer of a platoon having less than 16 trooperg in the ranks takes 22'8 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. ptosition on the left of the rank. If the column be marched to the rear by a movement of fours he turns in the same direc- tion as the fours and continues in the same flank as before. In double column, and in column of fours, twos, or troopers, the file closer of each platoon is posted on the flank of the column abreast of the rear element of the corresponding platoon (pars. 601, 602). Buglers: "When the troop is alone one bugler accompanies the captain, riding 1 yard to the rear and 1 yard to the left of the captain's horse. The other bugler habitually rides as an extra file closer near the head of the column, but may be placed in ranks. The buglers of a troop-in-squadron both ride as file closers, or in the ranks, when the buglers of the squad- ron are not assembled elsewhere. Extra file closers, if not attached to any platoon, take posts in the general manner indicated in par. 528. The first ser- geant designates, if necessary, the four near which each such file closer shall ride. When the platoon file closer takes posi- tion on the flank of the platoon any extra file closer takes a similar position on the. left of the platoon file closer. 604. Being in double column, or in column of fours, twos, or troopers, at the command ROUTE ORDER all chiefs of platoon and file closers and others riding on the flank of the column as above prescribed take position in the column as follows, unless otherwise directed by the captain : The guidon and one bugler at the head of the column ; the leader of each platoon, except the rear platoon, in front of his respective platoon ; the leader of the rear platoon and the first sergeant in rear of the column ; each platoon file closer, except the file closer of the rear platoon, in rear of his re- spective platoon ; the file closer of the rear platoon in front of that platoon ; all other men riding out of ranks at the rear of their respective platoons. The additional personnel thus placed between any two platoons rides abreast so as to mini- mize the corresponding increase in the length of the column. In each element so formed the senior habitually rides on the right of a junior. Distances throughout the column are 4 feet unless greater distances between platoons be specially authorized. TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT. a«9 MO^^MENTS, BY FOUKS, TwOS, AND TkOOPERS. 605. Movements by fours, twos, and troopers are executed in the troop by commands and methods corresponding to those prescribed for the platoon (pars. 470, 537). The following rules govern the movements of the captain, chiefs of platoons, and others out of ranks : (a) In wheeling about by fours from double column or column of fours, all out of ranks turn about individually in the same direction as the fours wheel and hasten to their new posts. Platoon leaders and file closers posted on a flank of the column do not change to the opposite flank of the column. A similar rule applies to the corresponding move- ment executed in colunm of twos or troopers. (&) In wheeling about by fours from line all out of ranks habitually pass around the flanks. The captain and chiefs of platoons may pass between the fours wdien necessary. (c) When the column is wheeled by fours into line tow^ard the side of the file closers, each chief of platoon usually passes between his leading four and the rear four of the preceding platoon; or, if necessary, may pass around the flanks. All others pass around the flanks. 606. Being in double colunm or in column of fours, tw^os, or troopers, to cause the platoon leaders of rear platoons to change flanks, the captain commands : 1. Leaders on the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH. All platoon leaders, file closers, and others out of ranks, and posted on a flank of the column, turn individually away from the column, pass around the rear of the column, and take corresponding positions on the opposite flank. The platoon leaders pass between the file closers and the column. 607. Vv'hen the troop, marching in line, executes fours right (left) the leaders of platoons in rear of the new base cause their platoons promptly to cover* in column. Conversely, in advancing in line after executing fours right (left) from column of fours, platoons other than the new base promptly conform to the principles of par. 587. To Mount and Dismount. 608. The troop mounts and dismounts by the commands and methods prescribed for the squad and platoon. If the troop 230 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. formation does not afford sufficient space for a platoon leader to take position as indicated in par. 529, he takes position facing his platoon and on a flank of the leading rank or ele- ment. Rests, at Ease, and Route Oeder. 609. Rest, at ease, and route order are executed as in the squad (par. 359), with the following further provisions: Being at route order, if the command, 1. Troop, 2. ATTEN- TION, be given, all resume the attention, but retain their places in route order unless the captain commands: POSTS. At the latter command all take their regular posts as pre- scribed for the corresponding column, and the platoons close to the usual distance. Being at route order in any column formation named above, if any other be commanded it is taken by the usual methods, but with positions and distances corresponding to route order, unless attention and posts be commanded as above. In emergencies any movement may be executed from route order by the same commands and methods as from attention. Except as stated above, positions are the same in formations at route order and at attention. To Dismiss the Troop. 610. The captain directs the first sergeant: DISMISS THE TROOP. The officers fall out. The first sergeant commands: DIS- MISS YOTJR PLATOONS. The senior noncommissioned officei- of each platoon gives the necessary commands (par. 530) as soon as his platoon has the necessary space. If no division of platoons has been made the first sergeant dismisses the troop as prescribed for the squad (par. 360). Alignments. 611. The commands and principles explained for the squad apply (pars. 362-364). The leader of the center platoon is the basis of the alignment. The leader of each of the other platoons aligns himself upon the leader of the base platoon and the guide of each platoon takes positions 3 yards directly in LEADING AND CHANGES OF DIRECTION. 231 rear of liis respective leader. The first sergeant and platoon file closers assist in securing a correct alignment, giving the necessary cautions to prevent the troopers from closing in to such an extent as to cause gaps in the line. Platoon leaders and file closers look to the front as soon as they have aligned themselves. Prompt dressing must be insisted upon and the command FRONT not delayed unduly on account of minor inaccuracies. The captain may verify the alignment of the platoon leaders from a position at the flank of the line of platoon leaders, facing along the front of that line, or he may command FRONT vvithout leaving his regular position. At the command dress, when the troop is in column of platoons, each platoon leader gives the command front from his position. He does not go to the flank to verify the align- ment of the platoon unless directed by the captain to do so. Leading the Teoop. 612. The troop is led by the captain in accordance with the principles of leading as heretofore explained (pars. 323-325, 448-460). The leader of the base platoon habitually follows the cap- tain at 6 yards distance. The other platoon leaders regulate on the leader of the base platoon, observing the echelon as required (par. 587). In each platoon the guide follows" his platoon leader while each trooper regulates on the guide of his 2Jlafoo7i. Whenever the captain ceases temporarily to lead the troop, and designates no leader to take his place, the chief of the base platoon acts as directing leader of the troop. Changes of Dikection. 613. The troop executes changes of direction in accord- ance with the principles of leading (pars. 329, 471). In line each chief of platoon habitually so regulates his movements as to keep abreast of the rank of the platoon next toward the base, the rank of his own platoon being parallel to the rank of the base platoon. Should a platoon oa a flank be unable 232 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. thus to keep its relative position without unduly extending the gallop, its leader may increase the depth of the echelon upon the adjacent platoon; but cohesion in the platoon must be maintained. The troop executes the turn and half turn by the commands indicated for the squad. The captain Is not, however, re- stricted to any special radius. Abrupt changes of direction on a large front are difficult to execute smoothly. In line of columns the change of direction is made by the same commands and on the same principle as when in line, except that the platoons are not habitually echeloned on the base. The troop, in any column formation, changes direction by the commands and methods indicated in par. 396. In column of platoons each platoon successively changes direction in ac- cordance with the provision of par. 386, the platoon leader tim- ing his command of execution as there indicated (par. 471). The Oblique. 614. Being in any formation except double column or for- agers: 1. Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH. Each platoon exe- cutes right half turn if in line or column half right if in any column formation. The platoon on the flank toward which the oblique is made is the base during the oblique in any line formation. The original direction is resumed by a corre- sponding movement at the commands : 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. The troop may be moved a few yards to a flank by the commands: 1. Troopers right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH (par. 885). OBSTACLES IN THE LINE OF MARCH. 615. Each platoon leader takes the necessary steps in con- nection with the passage' of obstacles (par. 577). The captain, when necessary, indicates to the platoon leader at the head of a column the existence of an obstacle (par. 443). Each platoon leader is responsible that the caution is passed on to the platoon next in rear. COMMANDS AND SIGNALS IN TROOP. 233 COMMANDS AND CORRESPONDING ARM SIGNALS. {See also, in connection with pars. 468-470, similar lists in pars. 381 and 540. The list does not include variations of the com- mands due to designating a special base, interval, etc.) 616. Commands. Pars. Arm Signals. 1. Platoons, right (left) turn; 618, 624 Platoons— change direc- 2. MARCH. tion.t 1, Platoons, double column; 021 Platoons— double column.f 2. MARCH, 1. Line of platoon columns, 2. MARCH. 622 Line of platoon columns.* 1. Column of platoons, 2. MARCH 623 Column — platoons. t 1. Double column, 2. MARCH 625 Double column.* 1. Line of platoons, 2. MARCH 632 Platoons — extend. t 1. Platoons, at (so many) yards dis- 634 None. tance; 2. MARCH. * Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the signal of execution in each case is made as prescribed in par. 990. t In signals marked thus, the preparatory signal consists of more than one ele- ment; the signal of execution follows the last element of the preparatory signal. Movements Executed cy the Troop, Close Order. LINE or single RANK. 617. TO THE DIRECTION OF MAUCH: When executed from any formation except line, double rank (par. Qll-a), the com- mands are: 1. Line, 2. MARCH (par. 478). In each of the movements referred to in (a), (&), (c), and (cZ) the movements of the base platoon conform to par. 323. Should th*e captain halt the base platoon, all the other pla- toons halt abreast of it (par. .587). Should the base platoon continue the march, the leader of each of the other platoons 234 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. takes the gait of the base platoon when his own platoon is echeloned as prescribed in par. 587. In the march in line the leader of each platoon other than the base is habitually abreast of the rank of the adjacent platoon on the side toward the base. (a) Single rank is formed from double rank at the com- mand : 1. Single rank, 2. MARCH. The formation is a suc- cessive one (par. 4S1). Each platoon other than the base gains the interval (par. 481-&) necessary to form single rank. The base platoon forms single rank (par. 554) as soon as it has the necessary space (par. 481-g). Each of the other platoons executes single rank so as to complete the movement before arriving at its Dosition in the new formation (par. 481-g). ( h ) From line of double columns and line of platoon columns the platoons form simultaneously. If the base platoon con- tinues the march, the platoons other than the base decrease the pace until each gets its proper position in echelon (par. 587). (PI. IV.) (c) From column of platoons: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). Each platoon other than the base is led by its leader to its position in the new formation (par. 481-&). (PI. VI.) Gaits are regulated as in par, 337-6. (d) From double column, and from column of fours, twos, or troopers: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). Each platoon other than tlie base is led toward its new posi- tion as in (c), forming line so as to complete that movement before its position in the new troop formation is reached (par. 481-5'). During the actual formation of line by platoons in rear of the base the rear elements make a second increase of gait, unless already moving at the gallop (pars. 837-&, 481-/0. 618. TO THE FLANK. (a) From column of platoons: 1. Platoons right (left) turn, 2. MARCH. Executed simultaneously by the platoons (pars. 462, 471). To halt the troop the captain commands: 1. Troop' 2. HALT, as the platoons complete the turn (par. .587). Each platoon leader in the absence of the command halt from the captain TROOP MOVEMENTS, CLOSE ORDER, 235 commands: Forward (par. 386), so as to add MARCH as his platoon completes a chan.2:e of direction of 90° (pars. 325. 326). (&) From column of fours : 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH. Line may be formed from column of twos or troopers as exi^lained in par. 400. DOUBLE BANK. 619. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH: Being in single rank: 1. Double rank, 2. MARCH. Each platoon other than the base forms double rank (par. 551), closes toward the base, and takes Its position (par. 4Sl-g) in double rank. The troop forms double rank, to the direc- tion of march, from no formation except single rank. 620. TO THE FLANK: Being in double column: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH. The principle indicated in par. 452 applies to movements for a short distance to the flank. (PI. YII.) LINE OF DOUBLE COLUMNS. 621. Except as used for the original formation of the troop for a duty (par. 593) or for a subsequent assembly of the troop (par. 635), line of double columns is formed in close order, only from the simultaneous execution by platoons of double column (par. 415). The platoons in line of platoons (extended order) may take double column when conditions render that formation useful (par. 632). The captain may command: 1. Platoons, double column, 2. MARCH; or may cause the base platoon to form column, the other platoons habitually conforming (par. 632) ; or a platoon leader may cause his platoon to execute double column whenever, in extended order, conditions render the formation desirable. LINE OF PLATOON COLUMNS. 622. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH (par. 478) : 1. Line of platoon columns, 2. MARCH, (a) From line and line of double columns: The platoons execute column simultaneously, regulating, on the base. 236 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. (&) From column of platoons: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). All the platoons execute column (par. 481-^) ; those in rear of the base are then led to their positions (par. 481-&, e). (c) From double column: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The base platoon executes column (par. 481-^'). Each of the rear platoons, as soon as it gains the necessary space from the platoon in front, forms column (par. 481-^7) and moves to its position (par. 481-&, e). (d) From column of fours: As in (c), except that each platoon in rear of the base moves at once to its position. (e) From column of twos or troopers, as in (d), except that each platoon forms column of fours before taking its place in the new formation (par. 331). TO THE FLANK: (a) From column of platoons: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH. (b) From column of fours: 1. Platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH. COLL^MN OF PLATOONS. 623. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH (par. 478) : 1. Col- umn of platoons, 2. MARCH. (a) From line: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). Each platoon other than the base is led to its place in the column (par. 481-&, d). (PI. IV.) (b) From line of double columns and line of platoon col- umns: The movement is a successive one (par. 481). The platoons other than the base successively move out (par. 481-&), form line (par. 481-^'), and take their places in the column (par. 481-d). (c) From double column: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The base platoon forms line at once (par. 481-g). The other platoons take a correspondingly slower gait, and successively execute line, each completing the latter movement (par. 4Sl-g) in time to take the gait of the platoon in front when at platoon distance from the latter, (d) From column of fours: The platoons form line simulta- neously, the leader of each rear platoon maintaining the gait of the base. (e) From column of twoj or troopers: The platoons other than the base successively execute line while moving at the TROOP MOVEMENTS, CLOSE ORDER. 237 increased gait, each completing the movement in time to take the gait of the platoon in front when at platoon distance from the latter (par. 331, 481-<7). 624. TO THE FLANK. (a) From line: 1. Platoons right (left) turn, 2. MARCH. The platoon on the flank toward which the movement is exe- cuted is the base during the movement as well as in the new formation (par. 326). The commands of the platoon leaders are given as in pars. 471. 618. (1)) From line of platoon columns: 1. Form right (left), 2. MARCH. DOUBLE COLUMN. 625. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH (par. 478) : 1. Double column, ?.. MARCH. (a) From line: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The base forms double column (par. 481-^). The pla- toons other than the base successively form double column (par. 481-g) and take their places in the new formation (pars. 481-&, d). (&) From line of platoon columns: The formation is a suc- cessive one. The base forms double column (par. 481-^). The platoons other than the base move toward their places (par. 481-&, (Z), each forming double column before taking its posi- tion in the new formation (par. 481-^). (c) From line of double columns: The movement is a suc- cessive one (par. 481). The platoons other than the base successively move to their places in the new formation (par. 481-&, d). (d) From column of platoons: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The platoons form double column at once (par. 481-r/). Each platoon in rear of the base then closes to 4 feet distance. (e) From column of fours, twos, or troopers: The base ex- ecutes double column (par. 4Sl-g). The formation is a suc- ■cessive one (pars. 331. 481). The platoons other than the base successively execute double column at the increased gait, each on completing the change of formation (par. 481-r/) taking position in the column at a distance of 4 feet from the platoon in front. (Pis. V and YII.) 238 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 626. TO THE FLANK: Being in double rank: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH (par. 452). COLUMN OF FOURS. 627. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH (par. 47S) : 1. Col- umn, 2. MARCH. (a) From line: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The base forms column (par. 481-^). Each platoon other than the base successively executes column and takes its place in the new formation (par. 337-c). (PI. VII.) ( b ) From line of double columns : The base executes column (par. 481-5'). The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The platoons other than the base successively execute column (par. 481-^), moving out so as to take their proper places in the new formation (par. 481-?), d). (PI. V.) (c) From line of platoon columns: The formation is a suc- cessive one (par, 481). The base advances. The platoons other than the base successively move to their proper places in the column (par. 481-5, d). (d) From column of platoons: The platoons execute column simultaneously and should have their proper distances in the column. (e) From double column: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The base executes column at once; each of the other platoons executes column when it has the necessary space (par. 481-^). (/) From column of twos or troopers: The formation* is a successive one (pars. 331, 481). The base executes column (par. 4:81-g). Each platoon other than the base takes a cor- respondingly faster gait (par. 335), successively executes col- umn at the increased gait and takes the gait of the base when at 4 feet distance from the preceding platoon. 628. TO THE FLANK: From line: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH. COLUMN OF TWOS OR TROOPERS. 629. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH (par. 478) : 1. Column of twos (troopers), 2. MARCH. TROOP MOVEMENTS, EXTENDED ORDER. 239 (a) From line, line of double columns, line of platoon col- umns, column of platoons, double column, and column of fours: The formation is a successive one (pars. 331, 481). The base executes column of twos (troopers). The platoons other than the base successively execute column of twos (troopers), each (par. 545-&) moving out so as to take (or retain) its proper place in the column (par. 481-&, d) at 4 feet distance. (&) Column of troopers from column of twos is formed on the same principle. Movements Executed by the Troop — Extended Okdee. 630. The principles applicable to the squad and platoon apply to the troop. The interval between platoons in line of platoons is, except where a special interval is ordered, based upon 4 yards per man (including the space occupied by the trooper). 631. Line of platoons or foragers, to any direction other than the direction of march is executed in accordance with the principles of par. 481-c. line or PLATOONS. 632. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH (par. 478) ; 1. Line of platoons, or 1. Line of platoons, at so many yards; 2. MARCH (par. 460). (a) From line, line of double columns, line of platoon col- umns, column of platoons, double column, column of fours, twos, or troopers: The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The base advances (par. 481-?>). Each platoon other than the base is led by its leader to its new position (par. 481-e). The platoons habitually conform to tlie formation taken by the base platoon, but each platoon leader is allowed whatever latitude is necessary in adapting the formation of his platoon to the ground and conditions. (h) From foragers: 1. Platoons, assemble, 2. MARCH. Ex- ecuted simultaneously by the platoons. FORAGERS. 633. TO THE DIRECTION OF MARCH: .1. Foragers, or 1. Foragers, at so many yards; 2. MARCH. 240 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. (a) From any close order formation (including double rank) : The formation is a successive one (par. 481). The base platoon deploys ay stated in par. 481-^. Each of the other platoons is led by its leader (par. 481-&, e) and deployed so as to take its place (par. 4Sl-g). (&) From line of platoons: The platoons deploy simultane- ously. 634. The troop may be extended in depth. The captain commands: 1. Platoons, at (so many) yards distance; or, 1. On such platoon, at (so many) yards distance; 2. MARCH. The movement is executed on the principles indicated in par. 413. The captain indicates to his base platoon the objective and gait. In the absence of special indication from the captain the platoon leaders regulate the formation taken by his platoon during the movement. The Assembly. 635. The assembly may be commanded when the troop is in any extended order formation, in a close order formation but not in order (e. g., following the rally), or dispersed in dis- order. The commands are always : 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH, and the general method of execution is always the same. The troop habitually assen\bles in line of double columns; but double column, column of fours, or line may be formed in con- nection with the assembly upon special indication from the captain. 636. In every case the platoons, if not already assembled, are assembled by their respective leaders (pars. 559-560). The captain leads in the desired direction, and at the desired gait, the platoon that is to be the base of the assembly. The other platoons are led toward the base platoon in the most con- venient formation and at a correspondingly faster gait. Each, in the absence of other indication from the captain, approaches the base platoon in double column so as to take its respective place in line of double columns. The captain may follow the commands for the assembly by the caution : DOUBLE COLUMN (COLUMN or LINE). Such caution is given before the platoon nearest the base takes its position in line of double columns. The base platoon advances in the formation indicated by the captain's caution; the other platoons complete any necessary i\ TROOP MOVEMENTS, EXTENDED ORDER. 24J| change of formation before taking their places in the assem- bled troop. In the assembly the troops habitually preserve the relative order existing at the moment the movement is ordered ; and, if an assembly in a column formation be ordered from any previous line formation, the platoons habitually enter the col- umn in accordance with the usual rule (par. 4Sl-d). When for any reason the foregoing rule is not readily applicable, pla- toons in the absence of special instructions take position as they arrive, extending the formation from the base in such manner that the latter shall remain the center platoon in line or the leading platoon in column. 637. The assembly from the rally or whenever not in order is conducted on the principles of the formation of the troop (par. 593). The platoon leader nearest the captain takes position at once 6 yards in rear of the latter. The other platoon leaders take positions abreast ol the rank of the base platoon if the latter continues to advance (par. 587). Each platoon assembles as in par. 5G0. Section chiefs take their positions promptly. The assembly from a condition of disorder is an important movement and should be practiced frequently at all gaits. The Rally. 638. Being in any formation, or not formed or in disorder : RALLY. Each platoon leader rallies his platoon (unless already as- sembled or rallied) and moves it toward the captain, as rap- idly as is consistent with maintaining cohesion in the rank. If the platoon be not already in line, the latter formation is taken while the platoon is approaching the captain's position. The first platoon to arrive takes position in line in rear of the captain ; the others extend the line so that the base platoon shall remain the center unit. Unless the troop is to charge at once, the assembly (par. 637) should be executed at the earliest possible moment if the rally result in a loss of order. If a prompt assembly of the troop is for any reason not prac- ticable, partial order may quickly be secured by the command : 1. Platoons, 2. COUNT FOURS. If it is necessary to reduce the front of the troop the captain cautions :- COLUMN OF PLA- 38218 °— 18 16 U2 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. TOONS (COLUMN, COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOP- ERS). The platoon leaders cause their platoons to conform in the most practicable manner. The Mounted Attack. the teoop acting alone. 639. When the troop acting alone charges it is ordinarily divided into two parts, viz, the attacking line and the reserve, but a platoon is never kept in rear except when the captain so directs. If the attacking line, or reserve, consists of only one platoon, it is led by its chief ; if it consists of two or more platoons, it is led by the senior chief of platoon or by the captain. When a chief of platoon takes post as leader of two or more platoons, his place as platoon leader is taken by the corre- sponding file closer. Whenever the rally or assembly is or- dered, the captain may cause the guidon to be displayed at the rallying or assembly point indicated. 640. In instruction exercises the enemy must always be out- lined or represented by troopers, who may carry flags, undei command of an officer or noncommissioned officer. In the beginning of this instruction these m^n will occupy fixed posi- tions ; later they will be instructed to ride so as to represent the movements of an aggressive enemy. The captain will ex- plain to the commander the object of the exercise and tell him what to do. 641. The platoons of the attacking line may attack in one line or successively, as from column of platoons with extended distances. The captain, in addition to designating a reserve, may direct one or more platoons to execute any special mis- sion. In the absence of special instructions from the captain the leader of each platoon, or combination of platoons, that is acting separately uses his discretion, endeavoring so to em- ploy his command as best to assist in carrying out the general plan indicated by the captain's orders. 642. The reserve, in the absence of special instructions, fol- lows the attacking line at from 100 to 150 yards in readiness to support the attacking line, meet a counter attack, or press the pursuit, as occasion may require. THE MOUNTED ATTACK, TROOP. 243 A platoon designated for a flank attack io so conducted by its leader as to fall opportunely upon the enem;y's flank. If a flank platoon be so designated, it attacks from that flank unless otherwise directed. To guard against a flank attack or an enveloping attack the captain may detach a platoon to move to the threatened flank so as to take an enveloping attack in flank or meet a flank attack. If a flank platoon be so designated, it acts on the corresponding flank unless otherwise directed. When no platoon is specially designated for flank guard the correspond- ing duties fall upon the reserve. 643. The captain's commands should include an indication of the objective, unless the latter is obvious, designate the elements of the attack, and state any special mission that is assigned to any element. The captain's orders also usually include an indication of the weapon to be used by the several elements of the attack and may presci'ibe the formations to be employed. All details not prescribed by the captain are left to. the discretion of the commanders of the several ele- ments into w:hich the attack is divided. Where the same weapon is to be used by all it is ordinarily drawn at the captain's orders before the instructions for the attack are given. Otherwise, each commander gives the proper orders for drawing saber or raising pistol. 644. The troop being, for example, in line, marching at a gallop with sabers drawn, the captain may command: Objec- tive, Cavalry in front; Second and Third platoons, to the charge; First platoon, flank attack; Fourth platoon; reserve. Each element of the attack proceeds at once to carry out its orders. The leader of the attacking line (whether the cap- tain or a lieutenant) directs the leader of the base platoon to close on him before charge is ordered (par. 563). In other respects, the charge is conducted as explained for the platoon (pars. 562-564). The troop being, for example, in column of platoons, march- ing at a gallop, no weapon drawn, the captain may command (the objective being obvious) : First and Second platoons, pistol attack; Third platoon, reserve; Fourth platoon, left flank guard. The leader of the attacking line commands : 1. As foragers, 2. MARCH, and attacks with the pistol according to the principles explained for the platoon (pars. 566-568) as 244 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. soon as the second platoon completes its deployment on the left of the first platoon. The commanders of the third and fourth platoons move to their positions, drawing saber or raising pistol in their discretion. Should the captain command, for example : First and Second platoons, pistol attack in two lines; Third platoon, charge enemy's right flank; Fourth platoon, reserve, the third platoon may charge with the saber. Should the captain cause pistols to be raised before order- ing the attack all use the pistol. The above are only examples to indicate the character of the captain's commands. The actual orders must meet the situation presented. 645. At the first indication for the charge the ground scouts move out from the flanks of the attacking line (par. 569) unless otherwise specially directed. The captain usually sends out any necessary combat patrols ; but each leader of a sepa- rate group is responsible that any further steps necessary for the immediate protection of his own flanks are taken.. THE TROOP IN THE SQUADRON. 646. The troop in squadron, in mounted attack, has no re- serve, but may have a support in the discretion of the major. If on the flank of the squadron, its own flank defense must be provided by the captain in the absence of instructions. Passing from Mounted Action to Dismounted Action. 647. The movements are executed by commands and methods corresponding to those already explained for the squad and platoon, with the following modifications and additions thereto : The horses of the captain and of one bugler who accom- panies the captain are held by the other bugler or by a man specially designated in advance for that duty. The horses of the first sergeant and other men out of ranks, and not otherwise specially provided for, are secured in the manner indicated in the corresponding provisions for the squad and platoon. DISMOUNTED COMBAT, TROOP. 245 648. The guidon, in the absence of instructions to the con- trary, takes g-eneral charge of the led horses and performs the duties prescribed for the trooper in charge of the horse holders and horses (par. 431). Should one of the platoon file closers be senior to the guidon, the first sergeant cautions such file closer and the guidon in advance that the senior will have general charge of the led horses of the troop while such senior remains with the horses. In the absence of other special in- structions, the file closer of each platoon reports the additional troopers of his i)latoon to the troop commander after Nos. 2 dismount. The guidon remains in general charge of the other horse holders and the horses, a designated trooper having, under the guidon, immediate charge of the horse holders and horses of each platoon. 649. The captain gives any desired special instructions to the guidon and sees that proper measures for security are taken. On dismounting, the first sergeant remains near the horses long enough to see that the designated noncommis- sioned officer is in charge and is making proper provision as regards the horses ; he then joins the captain. Any sergeants who may be extra file closers without special assignment of duties join the captain ; other extra file closers not specially assigned join the platoons with which they were riding. The captain, on dismounting, .takes position at the point where he desires the base platoon to form or otherwise indicates that position to the leader of the base platoon. The platoon that was the base when the troop dismounted remains the base of the dismounted formation in the absence of other indication. Its leader takes position at once in rear of the captain, or as indicated by the latter, and the dismounted platoon forms in double column or as directed. The other platoons form so as to extend the formation in line of double columns, or as the captain orders, in accordance with the principles governing the assembly of the troop. The captain may direct the pla- toon leaders to proceed at once to designated positions without forming the troop as a unit. In all cases the measures taken must he such as to prevent unnecessary exposure of men or horses to hostile vieiv or fire. 246 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Dismounted Combat (The Troop), general considerations. 650. When the troop, acting alone, dismounts to engage in deliberate fire action the captain makes provisions for the led horses (par. 649) and at once sends out scouts (usually two experienced men detailed and trained as such) to the front to reconnoiter. The captain reconnoiters usually in rear of, but in touch with the scouts, and accompanied by platoon com- manders and the first sergeant ; he explains to them the pur- pose of the attack, gives them all the information he has about the enemy and about our own troops in the vicinity, points out to them the objective of each platoon if they are to advance, or indicates the parts of the line to be held by each if to take the defensive. 651. The advance of a troop after dismounting, in anticipa- tion of fire action either in attack or defense is made in close order, preferably in column of fours or twos, until the proba- bility or the actual encountering of hostile fire makes it advis- able to deploy. After such deployment the advance (now desig- nated the approach) may be continued in line of skirmishers or other suitable formation before opening fire. The approach dismounted may often be facilitated, better advantage taken of cover, and losses minimized by using formations such as line of platoons each in column of twos or troopers, or a suc- cession of thin lines at varying distances, one directly behind the other or echeloned. The choice of a formation would depend upon conditions, such as the effectiveness of the en- emy's fire, cover afforded by folds of the ground, or by natural obstacles. If the deployment is found to be premature, it will generally be better to assemble the troop and resume the advance in close order. The formations mentioned as facilitating the advance, viz, line of platoons in column of twos or troopers, or a succession of thin lines find application most frequently in the approach when the ground is so difficult or the cover so limited as to make it desirable to take advantage of the few favorable routes on which to piove forward. 652. The approach in a succession of thin lines is, if pos- sible, made by sections under the immediate direction of DISMOUNTED COMBAT, TROOP. 247 platoon commanders with wide intervals between skirmishers. By so advancing continuous control of the line is assured. If that method is not practicable, then the successive lines are made up of one or more men from each four of a platoon on the skirmish line, the command being : 1. Numbers 1 (or such number or numbers), first (or such) platoon, forward; 2. MARCH. The captain having pointed out in advance the selected posi- tion in front of the lines which are to be occupied, the desig- nated numbers move to the front. The line thus formed pre- serves the original intervals as nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced to the indicated position, a second line is sent forward by similar commands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has advanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position the first line is halted. Successive lines upon arriving halt on line with the first, and the men take their proper places in the skirmish line. Ordinarily each line is made up of one man or more from each four of a platoon, and the men of a four are sent for- ward in order from right to left. The first line is led by the platoon leader of that platoon, the second by its file closer, and so on. Under favorable conditions the successive lines may be made up from all of the platoons which are deployed as skirmishers. The movement is conducted in quick time unless conditions make double time necessary. After the entire troop has reached the line a further ad- vance in the same manner may be found advisable. The movement iti a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide stretch swept or likely to be swept by artillery fire or heavy long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing by thin lines results in serious, though temporary, loss of control over the successive platoons of the troop. Its advantages lie in the fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less likely to draw fire. 653. These are merely suggested methods of advancing pre- liminary to opening the fire attack; other formations better adapted to particular occasions or terrain may be devised. The best formation is that which advances the line the far- 248 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. the^ without drawing the enemy's fire, or, if he does open fire, then with the least loss of men, time, and control. THE FIKE ATTACK. 654. The principles involved in the fire attack are discussed under Dismounted Fire Action, the Squadron (par. 716), and necessary modifications as to details made under Dismounted Action, the Regiment (par. 760). When the enemy's fire makes it impracticable for the troop to move forward in one of the above-mentioned formations, it may advance by rushes. Being in skirmish line: 1. By platoon (section) from tlie right (left), 2. RUSH. The platoon leader on the indicated flank arranges the de- tails for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary he designates the leader for the indicated unit. When about to rush he causes the men of the indicated unit to suspend firing and to hold themselves flat on the ground but in readi- ness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at the signal of the platoon leader if the latter is not the leader of the rush) commands. Follow me, and, running at top speed, leads the fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been previously designated. The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader without further command from the captain, and so on, succes- sively, until the entire troop is on the line established by the first rush. The men must be trained to lie perfectly still until the com- mand (since any movement might warn the enemy of the rush to follow), then at command to spring instantly and together to their feet, run at top speed, and drop together at command. 655. In an advance by rushes, leaders of platoons in firing positions are responsible for the delivery of an effective fire to cover the advance of each rushing fraction. Troops are cau- tioned so to fire as not to endanger the flanks of advanced por- tions of the firing line. The husbanding of ammunition for the DISMOUNTED COMBAT, TROOP. 249 final stages of the fire attack must be constantly impressed on the men. The rush of a troop as a whole is conducted by the captain on the same principle as described for the platoon. The cap- tain leads the rush, platoon leaders lead their respective pla- toons, and file closers follow the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance. When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes impracticable, any method of advance that carries the attack closer to the enemy, such as crawling, should be employed. The charge corresponds to that described in the squadron. 656. Supports and reserves: The troop dismounted, acting alone, should in the fire attack always have a reserve. It may be small — a single platoon or less — but the reserve should not be omitted, although the suiyport may be and usually is dis- pensed with. When no support is provided, the reserve per- forms the double function of support and reserve; that is, it prot'ects the flanks and, under orders of the captain, strength- ens the firing line, if necessary. In the advance and during the fire attack comhat patrols on one or both flanks are especially important. Each leader of a flank platoon details a man to watch for signals of the patrol or patrols on his own flank. When ordered to reinforce the firing line, the support, if there be one, is kept assembled as long as practicable. In the advance it adopts suitable formations following the principles laid down in par. 651. If, after deploying, a favorable oppor- tunity arises to hold it for some time in a close-order forma- tion, it should be reassembled. It is again deployed when necessary. The movements of the support as a whole and the dispatch of reinforcements from it to the firing line are con- trolled by the captain. In order to be felt, the support of a single troop, being necessarily small, should ordinarily be sent to the firing line as a whole and not be fed in a few men at a time, which would produce little effect. A reinforcement sent to the firing line alw^ays carries extra bandoliers. It joins, deployed as skirmishers, passes the extra belts of ammunition to skirmishers already on the line, and, if necessary, gets from them the range and target loca- tion. The leader of the reinforcement places it in an interval in the line if a suitable one exists and commands it thereafter 250 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. as a unit. If no such interval exists, the reinforcement is advanced with increased intervals between skirmishers, each man occupies the nearest interval in the firing line, and each then obeys the nearest chief of section or platoon leader. A reinforcement joins the firing line as quickly as possible without exhausting the men. The original platoon and section divisions of the troop in the firing line should be maintained, if possible, and should only be broken up if the mingling of reinforcements renders it unavoidable. Upon joining the firing line, officers and noncommissioned officers accompanying a reinforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have been disabled, or they distribute themselves so as best to exercise their normal functions. Conditions vary and no exact rules can be prescribed. It is essential that all assist in mastering the increased difficulties of control. FIEE. 657. Ordinarily rifles are loaded and extra ammunition in bandoliers is distributed before the troop deploys for combat. In close order the troop executes the firings at the command of the captain, who posts himself in rear of the center. Firings in close order are exceptional. 658. Signals during fire action: The voice is generally in- adequate for giving commands during firing, and must be re- placed by signals of such character that proper fire direction and control are assured (par. 989). To attract attention sig- nals must usually be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of the firing line about to rush should avoid using the long blast signal as an indication to suspend firing. Officers and men behind the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the line, but each must depend on the other's watchfulness, in addition to his own, and make use of pre- scribed signals (par. 997). All should place themselves so as to see their immediate superiors and subordinates. The bugler with the captain assists by observing the enemy, the target, and the fire effect, and by watching for and trans- mitting commands. The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in marks- manship are treated in the Small-Arms Firing Manual. DISMOUNTED COMBAT, TROOP. 251 659. Volley fire has limited application. It has a moral effect both on the troops employing it and on those subjected to it. It may be employed to restore control. In defense it may be used in the early stages of the action if the enemy presents a large compact target. It may be used by troops especially posted on the flank or in a dominant position in rear of an attacking force for the purpose of aiding the advance by so-called fire of position. When the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can be seen from the firing line, ranging volleys may be used to correct the sight setting. In combat, volley firing, if used, is executed habitually by platoon. 660. Fire at will is the class of fire normally employed in attack or defense. 661. Clip fire has limited application. It is principally used (a) in the early stages of combat to steady the men by habituating them to brief pauses in firing; (&) to produce a short burst of fire. FIRE DIRECTION. 662. When the troop is large enough to be divided into platoons, it is impracticable for the captain to command it in combat. His efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct serious errors or omissions. The captain directs the fire of his troop or of designated platoons. He designates the target and, when practicable, allots a part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action he determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates the class of fire to be employed and the time to open fire. Thereafter he observes the fire effect, cor- rects material errors in sight setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as may be received. FIRE CONTROL. 663. In combat the platoon is the /?re unit. From 20 to 35 rifles are as many as one leader can control effectively. 282 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or directions of the captain, having tirst taken such precautions to insure correct sight setting and clear description of the target or aiming point as the situation permits or requires (par. 141) ; thereafter he gives such additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact compliance with the .captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when necessary. When the target can not be seen with the naked eye, he desig- nates an aiming point (by one of the methods described in par. 141 if necessary) and orders fire upon it, first announcing the proper sight setting to correct the error of aim. In general, platoon leaders observe the target and the effect of the fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands ; they observe and regulate the rate of fire. The file closers watch the firing line and check every breach of fire discipline. Chiefs of section transmit commands when necessary, observe the conduct of their sections and abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire discipline, and participate in the firing unless otherwise directed by the platoon commanders. The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control. To avoid or delay such loss of control should be the constant aim of all. Fire control implies the ability of the commander to ' stop the firing, change the sight setting and target, and resume a well-directed fire. riEE DISCIPLINE. 664. Fire discipline implies, besides an unquestioning habit of obedience to commands, a control of the rifle by the soldier, (the result of training), which will enable him in action to make hits instead of misses. It embraces taking advantage of the ground ; proper understanding of orders as to target designation; care in setting the sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the orders of the leaders, and careful observation of the enemy ; an increase of fire when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy disap- pears ; economy of ammunition. Orderly and regular methods on the part of leaders aid fire discipline. Self possession and a confident tone in giving commands and instructions are in- dispensable. DISMOUNTED COMBAT, TROOP. 253 In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position, and thus reduce tlie ' effectiveness of his fire, liave the approxi- mate value of hits ; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire superiority. Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the proper target. 665. To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire having constantly in view the available ammunition supply, should be as rapid as is consistent with accurate aiming ; that the rate will depend upon the visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually rendering cautions or com- mands unnecessary. 666. In attack, ammunition must be used with extreme cau- tion in order that the highest rate of fire may be employed at the halt preceding the assault and in pursuing fire. 667. In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly with a vigorous burst of fire. In defense, the available ammunition supply is not ordinarily so limited as in the attack. 668. For communication .between the firing line and the re- serve or commander in rear certain signals are prescribed (par. 997): In transmission their concealment from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of signal flags the headdress or other substitute may be used. EANGES. 669. For convenience of reference, ranges are classified as follows : to 600 yards, close range. 600 to 1.200 yards, effective range. 1.200 to 2X>00 yards, long range. Over 2,000 yards, distant range. The distance to the target must be determined as accu- rately as possible and the sights set accordingly. Aside from 254 CAVALRY/DRILL REGULATIONS. training and morale this is the most important single factor in securing effective fire at the longer ranges. Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most accurate and only practicable method of determining the range, in absence of a suitable mechanical range finder, will generally be to take the mean of several estimates made independently. Estimation of ranges. — Five or six oflficers and men, se- lected from the most accurate estimators in the troop and designated as range estimator's, should be specially trained in estimating distances. Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts. AVhen a range is announced, the men at once set their sights to correspond, and whenever practicable an examination of the pieces is made in order to verify the sight setting. (C. C. D. R. No. 1.) KECONNAISSANCE BEFORE COMBAT. 670. Combat, mounted or dismounted, should always be pre- ceded by a reconnaissance suited to give the leader the best practicable idea of the terrain and of the conditions, and to enable him to utilize both to the fullest advantage. The form and extent of such reconnaissance will necessarily vary from the hurried glance, for which alone there may be time before making dispositions to meet a sudden emergency, to the deliberate survey and study that may be practicable in exceptionally favorable cases. The leader's personal recon- naissance will ordinarily be supplemented by the use of scouts or patrols or both. The reconnaissance must in no case be overlooked and must always be made in as complete and care- ful a manner as the circumstances of the case permit. It will frequently be advisable for a leader to push rapidly ahead of his command for this purpose when combat is imminent, taking with him such subordinate leaders as he sees fit and leaving the command to follow (par. 456). TROOP FORMATIONS. 255 PLATE III.— THE TROOP. (Par. 584.) DOUBLE COLi/MA w IZI IZl IZI IZ! IZIUz, (2 IZ IZ [Z > j5 j5 000000000000 ,a..^2. E^SSZZZIZ COLUMN OF \PL PLATOONS \PL. \/*'SGT. IZ IZ IZ \PL IZ IZ S.- J ft i^'scr C. CAPT^/N PL PLATOON L£APE/t PC P/L£ CiOS£/f /''SOr - Gu, GO/ DON Bu BOCLf/f NOAfCMLS. yDS. \PL IZ IZ IZ IZ /rl Bu\ I Gut \PL \PL K l x-kVV^l^ LZ2 \PL NN'nKKNNNKJNNn I'S' \rc Ac ^ sJ] \Gt// \PL. V.c 3 pc\ \PL. SS^^0ZZZ' L/NE ^ANC/N(^ \ ^ \ AA/\ pcV PLATE IV.— THE TROOP. (Pars. 617 (&),623 (a).,) "W "" -^^^ CAPTAJN, L£:AD//V6. iiiiiiiiiiiiiiniisiiiu WNOfiMAL FORMATION OF TROOP TAKEN AT 'COMMAND: "FORM troop: CAPTAIN THEN COMMANDS-.ILINE Z.MARCH, FOLLOWED BY 1. COLUMN OF PLATOONS Z.MARCH / >./ y \ ' - >; V I iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiu^ I iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniimii^ ; ; ! iM iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiifev!;:;j±:::i:ur:::::::' \\i rX //V;; /ill / /\\; ;i L / \ jiii iiii//' Aiiii iiii/ r : iiii iiirv COll/MA/ OFPLATVOfVS rORMEP COLUMN OF PLATOONS BUNG FORMED ,,-'-' A „.\ A \ (ilHIIiiillilillllillii^ nil IIII nil nil'' nil \\\\/ iiii \\\\ nii \\\\ troop nil mi ini iin iin nil iin nn formed I I I I 256 PLATE v.— THE TROOP. (Pars. 625 (e),627 (6).) COMMAND: 1.C0LUMN 2. MARCH TfiOOP/NLINEOF .' DOUBLE COLU/^m, S 0'""* SIZI3 SIZl... I 38218 °— 18- ^. / ^4>/i w I 13 12 13 2 S IS 01 IZl IZl s' IS la s' ^A^ %& -17 V Kf0- S0£ .S 0... T"/?^^/* //y ^^Z^y«//K IZl COMMAND •• r-71 IDOUBLS: COLUM/^ ^ 2. MARCH \Z\ IS 01 IZl IZl "*H^lZ SZl IS IZli IZl IZI IS I 257 PLATE VI.— THE TROOP. 1 I (Par. 617 (c).) \ |NiNlSSJil2:i;:rL^ a^lMf/l^ OFPLATOOm J.UJV£ ZMA/fC/f I I I / 258 I { I PLATE VII.— THE TROOP. (Pars. 620, 625 (e),627 (a).) ill! COll/MA/ MAffCM/m.- J.ffOi/BLECOLl/M/V ZM/lffC/f COLUMN FOffM/JVG 1 / > LINE HALTED: / 1 COL UM/V. 2.MAffC// f 1 ' A ' r\J^KKI/M/1/KKM\l/l/1/I/KKKI\MXl/M 259 PART v.— THE SQUADRON AND HIGHER UNITS. THE SQUADRON. Special Provisions. 671. The major is the commander and tactical leader of the squadron. He is responsible for its theoretical and practical training. He supervises the training of the troops with a view to securing thoroughness and uniformity in their instruction. In the instruction of the squadron as a whole his efforts will be directed chiefly to the development of tactical effi- ciency, devoting only such time to the mechanism of the drill and to ceremonies as may be necessary to insure precision, smartness, and proper control. 672. The squadron consists of not more than four, nor less than two, troops. In this school the squadron consists of four troops, but the drill is equally applicable to a squadron of two or three troops. The object of the school of the squadron is to train the troops to execute together what they have learned separately and to teach the squadron its movements, whether acting alone or in regiment. 673. Except at ceremonies (par. 787), troops are arranged from front to rear in column or from right to left in line, in the order of their letter designations. Their arrangement may be varied, however, to afford each troop opportunities for maneuvering both as a flank and as an interior troop. After the squadron has been formed, in whatever way it faces, troops are numbered from right to left in line and from front to rear in column or echelon, first troop, second troop, etc. Troops have a fixed place in squadron only when it is first assembled, and the squadron maneuvers without regard to the order of troops in line or column. POSTS IN THE SQUADRON. 261 To FOKM THE SQUADKON. 674. The troops having been formed, mounted, and marched to the place of assembly, the major commands : FORM SQUAD- RON. The squadron is formed in rear of the major in mass. The troops are led in succession to their places in mass; the captain of the base troop halts 12 yards directly in rear of the major. For ceremonies or for special purposes the squadron may be formed in line or in platoon mass (pars. 797-799). The squadron may be formed in platoon mass, column of fours or column of platoons by adding IN PLATOON MASS, IN COLUMN, or IN COLUMN OF PLATOONS to the command FORM SQUADRON. If not already in the required troop for- mation, the troops make the necessary change before taking their places in squadron. If a line formation is ordered, the squadron, unless otherwise directed, forms on the base troop. The major may direct the squadron to form on a flank troop. If a column formation is ordered, the squadron forms on the troop that will lead in column. 675. To dismiss the squadron the major commands: DIS- MISS YOUR TROOPS. Posts of Officers, etc. 676. Except in route order (par. 706) the captain of the base troop follows the major at 12 yards. The adjutant is 2 yards on the left of the major and abreast of him. The ser- geant major and bugler follow the adjutant and major, re- spectively, at 1 horse length. The squadron orderlies, if pres- ent, are abreast of the sergeant major and 2 yards to his left. In column formations the captains of the troops other than the leading troop take post 3 yards from the flank of the col- umn on the same side as and abreast of the chiefs of their leading platoons. In column of platoons they are on the right flank of the column unless the latter has been formed by the execution of platoons right turn, in which case they take post on the left flank (par. 451). If the column be marched to the rear by a movement of fours, the captains on the flank of the column, turn about, 262 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. and take post as above prescribed, but do not change post to the opposite flank. Wlien tl)e squadron is in column of fours, twos, or troopers, or in double column, the tirst sergeants take post on the flank of the column, on the same side as the platoon file closers and abreast of the next to the last element of the rear platoons of their troops. (PL VIII.) 677. The major regulates the direction and gait by signal^, messengers, or by the voice. Trumpet signals are only used when the squadron is alone, and then only to the extent neces- sary to instruct the squadron in this method of command. Although the major gives his command to all the troops, their execution in each troop is determined by the command of its captain. The captains give the necessary commands to cause their troops to conform to the movement directed and to insure its execution at the proper moment. When the commands are given by the voice the captains repeat such of the commands as are to be immediately ex- ecuted by their troops, such as forward, fours right, halt, etc. They do not repeat the major's commands which are not essen- tial to the execution of the movement by their troops. 678. In all formations and movements of the squadron the captains conform to the principles, whenever applicable, laid down for platoon leaders in the School of the Troop. The squadron in any close-order formation (except in column of twos or troopers) may gain ground to a flank, or to the rear, bj a movement by fours. The captains must constantly hear in mind the vital im- portance of order and cohesion. Regularity and uniformity of the gaits are indispensable. Squadron Formations. (Plate VIII.) LINE FORMATIONS. 679. Close order: {a) Line: The troops are in line with their base platoons abreast of each other. The interval between troops is 8 yards. (&) Line of troop columns, (c) Line of platoon columns. id) Mass. SQUADRON FORMATIONS. 263 In line of troop columns and mass, the troops are in column of fours. In line of platoon columns, the platoons are in column of fours. In each case the columns are parallel, with their heads abreast of each other. In line of troop columns the interval between troops is troop front and 4 yards. In line of platoon columns the interval between troops is platoon front and 4 yards. In mass the interval between troops is 8 yards. (e) Platoon mass: The troops are in column of platoons, with their leading platoons abreast of each other. The inter- val between troops is 8 yards. (/) Double rank: The troops are in double rank line, with their base platoons abreast of each other. The interval be- tween troops is 8 yards. COLUMN FORMATIONS. (g) Column of fours. (/i) Column of platoons. (i) Double column. In these formations the troops are in column of fours, col-- umn of platoons, and double column, respectively. The troops are arranged one behind the other and, in marching, the rear troops follow in the trace of the leading troop. In column of fours and double column the distance between troops is 9 yards. In column of platoons the distance between troops is platoon front and 5 yards. (./) Column of troops: The troops are in line, and are arranged one b^iind the other. Column of troops is taken for the purpose of inspection (par. 883) or for camping, and will result when a line of troop columns is marched to a flank by a movement of fours. Its use is exceptional for march or maneuver. The distance between troops is troop front and 5 yards. ORDER IN ECHELON. (k). Echelon: The leading element is a flank troop of the squadron. The troops are so arranged that each is less ad- vanced than the troop next toward the leading flank and is unmasked by the troops which proceed it. In whatever for- 264 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. mation the troops may be, such intervals and distances are maintained as will permit the troops to form line to the front or to a flank and retain echelon formation without overlapping or undue extension. While neither a line nor a column, echelon has certain characteristics of both. Extended order: The squadron takes extended order for the purposes of maneuver only. Extended-order formations by formal command are confined to units not larger than the troop. Route order (par. 706). Commands and Signals. 680. Commands. Pabs. Arm Signals. (o) 1. Line, 2. MARCH (6) 1. Line of troop columns, 2. MARCH. (c) 1. Line of platoon columns, 2. MARCH (d) 1. Mass, 2. MARCH (e) 1. Platoon mass, 2. MARCH (/) 1. Double rank, 2. MARCH ig) 1. Column, 2. MARCH (A) 1. Column of platoons, 2. MARCH... (i) 1. Double colximn, 2. MARCH (k) 1. On first (fourth) troop, echelon, 2. MARCH. 1. Right (left) front into echelon, 2. j" MARCH. 683 685 686 688 690 692 696 700 703 704 Line.* Line, followed by column.f Line of platoon columns. Mass.* Platoon mass.* No signal. Col\unn.='= Column, foUo-^/ed by pla- toon.f Double colunm.t No signal. No signal. * Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the signal of execution in each case is made as prescribed in par. 990. t In signals marked thus the preparatory signal consists of more than one ele- ment; the signal of execution follows the last element of the preparatory signal. 681. The squadron maneuvers in line of troop columns, line of platoon columns, mass, platoon mass, column of fours, column of platoons, double column and echelon. SQUADRON EVOLUTIONS, CLOSE ORDER. 265 It marches in column of fours, twos, or troopers, and, under favorable conditions, in double column. It takes extendied order and dismounts to fight on foot. Close Order. 682. Except when used as an attack formation, the march in line is an exceptional movement. A-s a rule the squadron in close order will advance in column, double column, or a line of columns. The squadron in line is led on the same principles as apply- to the troop in line, and changes of direction are accomplished by corresponding commands and methods. Errors in direction should he corrected gradually. To make slight changes of direction, the major leads in the new direction, and may caution: Incline to the right (par. The base troop follows the major, making the necessary change in direction. The other troops take a parallel direc- tion and resume their places in line by increasing or decreas- ing the gait as may be necessary. If it is desired to execute a complete change of front at right angles to its former direction as a general rule the squadron forms column to a flank and then forms line on the head of the column. 683. To form line to the direction of march: 1. Line; or 1. On (such) troop, line; 2. MARCH. From line of troop columns, or line of platoon columns: A simultaneous movement ; the troops form line to the direction of march at the command of execution (par. 617-&, d). From mass, or platoon mass (PI. IX) : A successive forma- tion ; the base troop forms line when it has sufficient space, the other troops as they approach their places in line (pars. 480, 481-/, g, 617-c, d). From column of fours, column of platoons, or double column: A successive formation ; the base troop forms line at the com- mand of execution ; the other troops as they approach their places in line (pars. 481-e, /, 617-c, d). 266 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. To form line to a flank: From column of fours: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH. From column of platoons: 1. Platoons, right (left) turn; 2. MARCH (par. 618). LINE OF TEOOP COLUMNS. 684. Line of troop columns and line of platoon columns are formations for maneuver and may be used for an approach preceding a deployment. They are dispositions which facili- tate handling the squadron and a rapid formation in line. The troops or platoons may vary their intervals to conform to the terrain or to avoid fire-swept areas. They should regain their intervals when a deployment is imminent. 685. To form line of troop columns to the direction of march: 1. Line of troop columns; or, 1. On (such) troop, line of troop columns; 2. MARCH. From line or line of platoon columns: A simultaneous move- ment ; the troops form column of fours to the direction of march at the command of execution (par. 627-a, c). From double column: A successive formation ; the base troop forms column of fours at the command of execution, the other troops form column of fours successively (pars. 481-e,. 627-e). From any other formation: A successive formation; at the command of execution the troops, unless already in that for- mation, form column of fours at the command of execution (pars. 480, 481-d, e, 627-df). To form line of troop columns to a flank: From column of fours: 1. Troops, column right (left); 2. MARCH (par. 475). LINE OF PLATOOIT COLUMNS. 686. To form line of platoon columns to the direction of march : 1. Line of platoon columns; or, 1. On (such) troop, line of platoon columns, 2. MARCH. From line or line of troop columns (PI. X) : A simultaneous movement; the troops form line of platoon columns to the SQUADRON EVOLUTIONS, CLOSE ORDER. 267 direction of march at the command of execution (par. 622-a, d). From mass: A successive formation; the base troop forms line of platoon columns to the direction of march when it has sufficient space, the other troops when they approach their places in line of platoon columns (pars. 480, 622-d). From column of fours : A successive formation ; the base .troop forms line of platoon columns to the direction of march at the command of execution, the other troops as they approach their places in line of platoon columns (pars. 481-e, Q22-d). From platoon mass: The troops form column of fours at the command of execution, and the movement is completed as from mass. From column of platoons: The troops form column of fours at the conmiand of execution, and the movement is completed as from column of fours. From double column : A successive formation ; the base troop forms column of fours at the command of execution ; the other troops form column of fours successively ; the movement is completed as from column of fours. To form line of platoon columns to a flank: From column of fours: 1. Platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH (par. 475). From column of platoons: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH (par. 479). MASS. 687. Mass is a formation for concentration in a position of readiness. Beyond the zone of hostile fire it may ])e used as a maneuver formation or as a march formation under cover of an advance guard. On account of its great milnerabilitp mass sJiovld not he used in the approacli. As soon as troops in 7nass enter the dangerous zone they should open out. 688. To form mass: 1. Mass; or, 1. On (such) troop, mass; 2. MARCH. From double column : A successive formation ; the base troop forms column of fours at the command of execution, the other troops form column of fours successively (pars. 481-e, 627-e). 268 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. From any other formation : A successive formation ; at the command of execution the troops, unless already in that forma- tion, form column of fours to the direction of march (pars. 480, 481-e, 627-a, c, d). (PI. XI.) PLATOON MASS. 689. Platoon mass is a formation for maneuver and for mounted attack when more than one line is required to add weight to the charge. It may also be used as a ceremonial formation. 690. To form platoon mass: 1. Platoon mass; or, 1. On (such) troop, platoon mass, 2. MARCS. Prom column of platoons: A successive formation (par. 481-e). From line : A successive formation ; at the command of exe- cution the troops form column of platoons to the direction of march (pars. 480, 62a-a). From line of troop columns, column of fours, or double col- umn: A successive formation; the base troop forms column of platoons at the command of execution, the other troops as they approach their places in platoon mass (pars. 480, 623-c, d). From mass : A successive formation ; the base troop forms column of platoons when it has a sufficient space, the other troops as they approach their places in platoon mass (pars, 480, 623-(?). From line of platoon columns (PI. X) : A successive forma- tion ; at the command of execution the troops form column of fours to the direction of march ; the movement is completed as from line of troop columns. TO CHANGE DIRECTION. 691. The squadron in line of troop columns, line of platoon columns, mass or platoon mass, is marched to the front, halted, executes movements by fours, obliques, and changes direction by the commands and means prescribed for the squadron in line, except as indicated below. When in line of troop columns, line of platoon columns or mass, in executing the oblique the change of direction is made bj heads of columns. SaUADRON EVOLUTIONS, CLOSE ORDER. 869 DOUBLE RANK. 692. The squadron in line or double columm forms double rank by the same commands and by similar means as in The Troop. In forming double ranli from line the troops execute double rank simultaneously at the command of execution and then close interval upon the base troop. When the squadron marches in double-rank line, the troops are echeloned in a manner similar to that prescribed for pla- toons in troop (par. 587). The interval between troops will be preserved. 693. The squadron in double rank line forms single rank by the same commands and by similar means as in The Troop (par. 620). The troops other than the base troop are led diagonally to their places in line and form single rank on approaching the same, 694. The squadron in double rank is subject to the same limitations as to movements and changes of formation as Tke Troop in double rank (par. 619). COLUMN OF iOUTlS. 695. Column of fours is a formation for march and ma- neuver. 696. To form column of fours to the direction of march: 1. Column; or, 1. On (such) troop, column; 2. MARCH. From column of platoons: A simultaneous movement; the troops form column of fours at the command of execution (par. 627-d). From double column: A successive formation; at the com- mand of execution the base troop forms column of fours, the other troops form column of fours successively (par. 627-e). From any other formation : A successive formation ; at the command of execution the troops, unless already in that for- mation, form column of fours to the direction of march (pars. 481-d, 627-a, c, /). (PI. XI.) To form column of fours to a flank: From line: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH (par. 479). From line of troop columns: 1. Troops, column right (left), 2. MARCH. From line of platoon columns: 1. Platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH (par. 475). 27G CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. COLUMN OF PLATOONS. 697. Column of platoons is a formation for maneuver. In open country or for ceremonial purposes it may be used as a march formation. To avoid checks in the march distances between platoons may be reduced, and a platoon may uncover or overlap the preceding platoon temporarily. 698. To form column of platoons to the direction of inarch. 1. Column of platoons; or, 1. On (such) troop column of platoons, 2. MARCH. From column of fours: A simultaneous movement; the troops form column of platoons at the command of execution (par. 62.3-fO. From platoon mass: A successive formation (par. 4Sl-d). From line (PI. IX) : A successive formation; at the com- mand of execution the troops form column of platoons to the direction of march (pars. 481-d, 6i*3-«). From line of troop columns : A successive formation ; the base troop forms column of platoons at the command of ex- ecution, the other troops as they approach their places in column of platoons (pars. 481-d, 623-fO. From line of platoon columns : A successive formation ; at the command of execution the troops form column of fours to the direction of march, and the movement is completed as from line of troop columns. From mass : A successive formation ; the troops form column of platoons successively, each when it has sufficient space (pars. 4Sl-(/, 623-fZ). From double column : A successive formation ; the base troop forms column of platoons at the command of execution, the other troops form column of platoons successively (par. 623-c). To form column of platoons to a flank: From line: 1. Platoons right (left) turn, 2. MARCH (par. 624-a). From line of platoon columns: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH (par. 479). DOUBLE COLUMN. 699. Double column is a formation for march and maneuver. It may be used as a march formation when conditions permit SQUADRON EVOLUTIONS, CLOSE ORDER. 271 the squadron to advance on a broader front than that ordi- narily practicable for route column. It facilitates a rapid deployment to the fiont by reason of the reduction in the depth of the column. 700. To form double column to the direction of march. 1. Double column; or, 1. On (such) troop, double column, 2. MARCH. From line, line of platoon columns, or platoon mass: A suc- cessive formation; the troops form double column at the command of execution (pars. 481-f/, 62.3-«, h, d). From line of troop columns: A successive formation; the base troop forms double column at the command of execution, the other troops as they approach their positions in double column (pars. 481-f/, 625-e). From mass : A successive formation ; the troops form double column successively, each when it has sufficient space (pars. 4Sl-r?, 625-e). From column of platoons: A successive formation; the troops form double column at the command of execution (pars. 480, 625-rf). From column of fours (PI. XI) : A successive formation; the base troop forms double column at the command of execution, the other troops form double column successively (pars. 480. 625-e). To form double column to a flank from double rank: 1. Fours right (left), 2. MARCH. ECHELON. 701. Echelon formation permits of advancing a flank to over- lap the enemy, at the same time remaining ready to face him at any instant or avoid envelopment by refusing a flank. Echelon is a formation for maneuver only. In forming echelon the troops will retain the formation they have when the movement is ordered. If conditions necessitate a change in troop formation, the major will give the appro- priate command. Changes in troop formation may be effected during the formation of echelon. In whatever formation the troops may be such intervals and distance will be maintained as to per- 272 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. mit the troops to form fine to the front or to a flaHk and retain echelon formation without overlapping or undue extension. In echelon the most advanced troop is the base troop. Echelon is always formed on a flank troop in line or the lead- ing troop in column. 702. Echelon is formed from line, line of troop columns, or line of platoon columns on the base troop at the gait of the march, or at the gait ordered. The other troops take or main- tain a slower gait or halt until they can take their places in echelon. Echelon is formed from any other formation on the base troop at the gait of the march or gait ordered. The gait of the other troops is so regulated by their captains that they will take their places in echelon promptly and with as few changes of gait as practicable. 703. The squadron being in any line formation, to form echelon: 1. On first (fourth) troop, echelon, 2. MARCH. If the squadron is in line, line of troop columns or line of platoon columns, echelon is formed as prescribed in par. 702. If the squadron is in mass or platoon mass, the base troop maintains gait and direction and the other troops move by the most direct route to their places in echelon. (PL XII.) 704. The squadron being in any column formation : 1. Right (left) front into echelon, 2. MARCH. The leading troop advances. The other troops move diag- onally to the right (left) front and take their places in echelon. (PI. XIII.) 705. The squadron in echelon is not readily maneuvered by oral commands or visual signals. Tlie captain of the base troop follows the major's movements and causes his troop to execute any changes of formation that the major may indi- cate. The other troops conform to the movements and forma- tions of the base troop, preserving their relative positions with respect to the latter. Should the squadron in echelon be marched to the flank or rear, the major takes position in front of the new base troop, unless the march to the original front is to be resumed promptly. To re-form the squadron in line or other formation, the major commands or signalie: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH. SftUADRON EVOLUTIONS, CLOSE ORDER. 273 The troops are led toward the major, who indicates as they approach the formation that he desires the squadron to take. Route Marches. 706. In route marches the major and adjutant ride at the head of the column, followed respectively at 4 feet by a bugler and sergeant major. The squadron orderlies follow the ser- geant major and trumpeter. At the command ROUTE ORDER the troops take route formation (par. 604). The leading troop follows the major's party at 12 yards. The prescribed distance between troops v>^ill be retained unless a greater dis- tance is authorized. THE ASSEMBLY. 707. The squadron is assembled when the troops of the squadron are united in any authorized formation of the squad- ron and each troop is assembled (pars. 635-637). The assem- bly is executed in mass unless the major indicates some other formation, in which case the indication is given as the troops approach the major's position and suthciently in advance for each captain to lead his troop to its proper position. The order taken by the troops in assembling will be the same as that taken at the original formation of the squadron unless the major directs otherwise. The commands of the major are: 1: Assemble, 2. MARCH. Each troop, if not already assembled, is assembled by its cap- tain before taking its place in the squadron. THE RALLY. 708. The command RALLY, given by the major, is repeated by all officers, noncommissioned officers, and buglers. The squadron rallies in line, unless the major indicates some other formation. Each troop is rallied by its captain (par. 638) and led at an extended gallop toward the major. Any troop that is not in a formation to be rapidly led, as just indicated, will bo: rallied immediately by its captain and then led toward the major. The first troop to arrive in rear of the major is desig- 38218 ° — 18- 18 274 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. nated as the base troop, its captain following the major. The other troops place themselves to the left and right of the base troop if the rally be in line. Should the major indicate a for- mation other than line, the troops successively take positions so as to extend the formation. It is very important that each trooper rally with his own troop in so far as practicable; but this must not operate to unduly delay the execution of the movement. A trooper who is unable for any reason to locate and join his own organiza- tion attaches himself temporarily to the nearest troop. Extended Oeder. 709. Extended order may be used in mounted combat where the pistol or saber is employed, and it has a specially impor- tant application in connection with dismounted fire action. It also forms a convenient method of making a rapid advance over fire-swept areas. The extension may, as in the troop, be taken in line with increased intervals or in depth by successive subdivisions. . A formation of special value for the squadron, due to de- creased vulnerability to artillery fire, is line of columns, or an echelon of columns with wide intervals, moving at a rapid gait. To cross ground without cover exposed to infantry or artillery fire, lines of foragers may be thrown forward at a rapid gait, the troops halting and re-forming when cover is reached. Regular drills hy command, in extended order, habitually terminate with the instruction of the troop. Two or more troops may be extended upon the same principles as apply to a single troop, but the major usually effects the desired dis-. position of the squadron by means of tactical orders, instead of through formal commands of the character employed in drill. The major's orders habitually indicate the objective, the gait, and the formation, and they may also state the interval or distance which is to separate the troops. The base troop is led accordingly. The other troops conform in general to the base troop, but the captains may modify their formation according to circumstances. In extended-order formation the major's position is that from which he can best control and regulate the movements of the squadron. If he THE MOUNTED ATTACK, SQUADRON. 275 does not lead the squadron, the captain of the base troop directs the march in accordance with the major's direction. In the exceptional case where the extension by command of two or more troops into a line of platoons or a line of foragers may be desired, the commands prescribed for the troop may be employed. The base troop is designated before the com- mands for the deployments are given and conforms to the movements or indication of the major or other officer com- manding the particular troops designated to deploy. Each of the other troops designated to deploy is led by its captain so as to deploy and extend the line according to the principles prescribed in the troop. The squadron in extended order is assembled and rallied as indicated in pars. 707 and 708. Any troops (for example, those of the reserve) not deployed move toward the major and execute the assembly with the other troops, unless the major directs otherwise. Should the rally be commanded, any troops not deployed are, in the absence of other instructions, led rapidly toward the major and ordinarily form the nucleus of the new formation. Mounted Attack. 710. In the mounted attack, the squadron follow^s, in general, the methods prescribed for the troop. 711. The close-order attack may be made in one or more lines, in platoon mass, or in echelon. The formations em- ployed will depend upon the tactical situation. Under certain conditions it may be necessary to charge in column of platoons. THE SQUADRON ACTING ALONE. 712. When acting alone, the squadron is formed in two or three parts — an attacking line and reserve, or an attacking line, support, and reserve. The attacking line should consist of at least half the squadron. The senior officer with each line is the leader of that line and takes post as such. The major designates the troops that compose each line, indicates the objective, and, if there is an opportunity, states the special mission of each line. He provides for the neces- sary flank defense and gives instructions for any flank attack 276 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. he may have in view. His orders will generally take the form suggested in par. 644. In the absence of special instructions, the support, or the reserve if there be no support, follows the attacking line at from 80 to 100 yards. If there be a support, the reserve fol- lows the attacking line at from 150 to 200 yards. Distances will vary with the character of the terrain and the condition of the horses. The support and reserve may be disposed on the same or on opposite flanks of the attacking line. The major may accompany any fraction of the squadron. Whichever he selects he takes post on the left of the leader of the line ; the adjutant and others accompanying the major take post, in line, on his left. The rally, or assembly, following a charge, is executed as prescribed in pars. 707 and 708. 713. Owing to the extension of front required for the pistol attack it will generally be impracticable to make the same by units larger than the troop. When the terrain permits the deployment, as foragers, of more than one troop in a single line the diflficulties of control by a single leader are such that better results can be expected if the control of each troop is left to its captain. The simplest form of pistol attack is by successive lines of foragers, each line composed of one troop, led by its captain. In such case the major indicates the objective and may prescribe the distances at which the successive lines follow the leading troop. When the attack is made in successive lines each line after attacking will rally to a flank as quiclily as possible to avoid masking the fire of the lines which follow. Where an opportunity is offered for a converging attack the major may indicate a special mission for each troop of the attacking line. The troops then take the necessary inter- vals before deploying as foragers. In every case the major holds out a reserve, or a support and a reserve, which retain close-order formations as long as practicable. 714. The squadron may combine pistol attack with close- order attack. The enemy's front may be attacked in close order, and his flank by a line of foragers using the pistol. The pistol is a most efficient weapon for individual combat, DISMOTTNTED COMBAT, SaUADRON. 277 and the pistol attack may be employed to good advantage by the support or reserve, or both, in the melee which may follow a charge, or in the pursuit. THE SQUADRON IN EEGTMENT. 715. In the mounted attack, when the squadron is in regi- ment, the major, in the discretion of the colonel, may hold out a support. He makes the necessary arrangements for the defense of his exposed flank. DISMOUNTED FIRE ACTION. 716. Certain elementary principles are enunciated under Dismounted combat in The Troop (pars. 650-669). The principles and methods here discussed pertain more especially to the squadron, either acting alone or as part of a larger unit. 717. The squadron dismounted, whether acting alone or in regiment, is the tactical unit best suited to carry on the fire fight; this holds in both attack and defense. In dismounted combat, by reason of smaller units and deductions for horse holders, the squadron at war strength would ordinarily occupy about half the front allotted to an infantry battalion at war strength, but the organization of the two units being the same the duties of officers and noncommissioned ofiicers, as herein explained, correspond. 718. To the major, the captains, and the lieutenants of a squadron (subject to limitation imposed by higher authority) are committed the initiative, direction, and control in fire action. To efficiently carry out the duties pertaining to their grades practical experience in combat exercises is a prime requisite ; knowledge of a technical nature is also necessary. 719. A guiding principle in dismounted action is that cavalry should employ its mobility to compensate for its lack of num- bers. Its power to break off the action in one part of the field and resume it in another, to pass at a favorable moment from fire action to mounted attack, or vice versa, to break off an action and withdraw mounted, as in rear guard or delaying actions, should never be lost sight of. 278 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Rapidity of movement in dismounting, in assuming battle formations on foot, in moving liorses to shelter, and in opening and maintaining accurately aimed fire are characteristics of well-trained cavalry. 720. The fire fight of dismounted cavalry acting alone, as distinguished from that in which they participate with other arms, frequently presents points of difference that demand consideration. In the former case the combat is likely to occur when separated by long distances from supporting troops and their own field trains so that it is imperative that a tactical decision should be reached quickly, even though some chances are taken ; this being the case, the reconnais- sance must be prompt and aggressive and the attack must be characterized by a surprise, if possible, or, in any event, by the most energetic measures and a full development of fire at the beginning of the action. The principles of the infantry fire attack are modified accordingly. While infantry bases the details of combat upon a succes- sion of progressive efforts made by troops echeloned in depth, dismounted cavalry is frequently compelled to rush the attack or to stop the advancing enemy at a distance by employing at once upon an extended front all the men and rifles available. The relative weakness in numbers of the cavalry and responsi- bility for the led horses are not favorable to a combat of long duration. On the contrary the facility afforded by its horses for carrying additional ammunition, its spirit of enterprise, its characteristics of action and of mobility fit it admirably for enveloping movements rapidly executed and for maneuver- ing on the defensive to avoid the blows of an adversary. Skill and rapidity in the execution of the approach, prompt- ness in decision, and celerity in opening the action furnish an element of surprise which in actions of this nature is essential to success. 721. Occasions will arise, however, when dismounted cavalry, either acting alone or in conjunction with other arms, will have to drive home a determined attack. In such cases the principles and methods governing the employment of fire ac- tion by infantry must control. Some of the more generally accepted of these principles, modified only to the extent neces- sary to conform to dismounted cavalry and their led horses, DISMOUNTED COMBAT, SQUADRON. 279 here follow. They are in a measure supplementary to those given under The Troop. 722. Deployment: The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack or defense. After dismounting, the approach, taking advantage of cover, should be continued as long as possible in some open formation, such as line of columns, before deployment into line of skirmishers, which latter necessitates a fatiguing and dis- organizing advance and should not be assumed until fire may reasonably be anticipated. The depth of deployment and the density and extent of the firing line are regulated by the major, subject to such restrictions as may have been prescribed by his senior. During and after deployment into extended order, move- ments of units larger than a troop are not controlled by drill commands, but by orders; troops designated for the firing line are marched or led independently to the place of deploy- ment, are deployed and advanced, conforming in general to the base troop. 723. Designation of objective and of sectors: In defense, with squadron dismounted, the major designates the portions of the line to be held bj' each troop and the sector to be observed by each. In attack, he designates the base or directing troop, the direction of the enemy or objective, and the order and extent of front of troops in the attacking line. 724. Distribution of fire: Greater difficulty is always en- countered in securing a proper distribution of fire . than in maintaining a concentrated fire. If the enemy's whole line is kept under fire, it neutralizes, to an extent, his fire, which otherwise could be concentrated on exposed parts of our lines with increased effectiveness. In many instances portions of the assigned target will be in- distinct and in some cases invisible. The tendency of men is to fire only on that part which can be seen. This tendency must be overcome and men taught that when given a sector of a target every part of it must be kept under fire whether it can be seen or not (par. 663). As a rule, whatever the size of a sector assigned to a troop, the troop connnander should cover it all by fire by assigning parts to his platoon command- ers corresponding to their positions in line, and they in turn 280 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. should require their sections to similarly cover the parts allotted to their platoons. 725. Fire: Fire direction and fire control are functions of troop and platoon commanders, respectively. The major makes the primary apportionment of the target in defense by assigning sectors of fire and in attack by assignment of the objectives. If impracticable for the major to assign sectors of fire or objectives, each captain takes that part of the general objective which lies in his own front. The major, whether the squadron is acting alone or as part of a larger unit, should indicate the point or the time at v,^hich the fire fight is to open. He may do this in his order for deployment (par. 729), or he may follow the firing line close enough to do so at the proper time. If impracticable to do either, the senior officer with the firing line in each squadron decides upon the time or place for opening fire. 726. Firing line; supports; reserves: When the squadron is acting alone, the major designates the size of the troop sup- ports and makes suitable disposition of the machine-gun unit if attached to his squadron. He. also designates which troops are to constitute the firing line and which are to form the squadron reserve. By a judicious use of this reserve he can exert an influence over his firing line not otherw^ise possible and can control within reasonable limits an action once begun. It may, according to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies and placed behind one or both flanks of the firing line. It should be of sufficient strength to maintain the original fire power of the firing line (after the troop supports have been absorbed) and also to perform the functions of a reserve, whatever the issue of the action. The functions of a reserve are : In attack, to protect the flanks, to secure the full advan- tage of a victory, or to cover defeat ; in defense, to extend the firing line, to effect a counter attack, or to cover a withdrawal. The reserve should be held in readiness, awaiting the proper moment for its deployment. Fire action will seldom come to a successful issue without its employment in some form. The local reserve of a squadron, acting as part of a larger force which has its own reserve, becomes actually a " support " (par. 761) and is used by the major in replacing depleted troop supports and in strengthening and protecting the firing line in the charge. DISMOUNTED COMBAT, SftTJADRON. 281 The distance from the firing line to the supports shonkl be as short as the necessity for protection from heavy losses will permit. No distance, even approximate, can be laid down as a guide. After the supports have joined the firing line, whether the squadron is acting alone or as part of a larger force, the func- tions of its reserve include those of a support, and the reserve is moved closer to the firing line. 727. Flanks: When the squadron is operating alone the major provides for the reconnaissance and protection of his flanks; if part of a larger force, the major makes similar provisions when on an exposed flank without waiting for orders from higher authority, but in neither case does it re- lieve commanders of flank troops from taking necessary pre- cautions for protecting their own flanks. In other words, patrols are always sent out by flank troops for the purposes of reconnaissance and combat unless the captain is instructed to the contrary. 728. led horses: The troops designated for the dismounted attack are led mounted as close to the position each is to occupy on the firing line as a consideration of all the circum- stances, including the safety of the led horses, will permit. Aftev dismounting, the led horses should be held as near to their respective troops as concealment from the fire and view of the enemy will justify ; this is especially necessary in rear guard and delaying actions. The horses should be so faced and be in such formation as to permit their movement without delay toward the firing line ; they should, however, . be con- stantly under the effective protection of the reserve for the reason that efforts of the enemy to stampede them may other- wise be expected. 729. Orders: Initial combat orders issued to units smaller than a brigade are usually oral. In tlie case of a squadron, either in attack or defense, the major assembles his captains, if practicable, and directs the disposition of the troops by means of tactical orders. He controls subsequent movements of the squadron by signals, by orders, or, occasionally, by commands prescribed in drill regulations. In a deployment of the squadron for combat, either in attack or defense, the major's order should give subordinates sufficient information of the enemy, of the position of sup- 282 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. porting and neighboring troops, and of the object sought, to enable them to conform intelligently to the general plan. It should specify the troops which are to constitute the firing line, the order and extent of front of troops in that line, and (if the squadron is acting alone) the size of the troop sup- ports and the size and location of the squadron reserve. If the squadron is part of a larger unit the major's order, con- forming to instructions given him by higher authority, would, ordinarily, specify the troops for the firing line and those to constitute the squadron support. In attack, the major's order should, in addition, designate the objective or the direction of the attack and one of the flank troops as the base or directing troop. In defense, the order should apportion the target by assign- ing the sector to be observed by each troop. When the squadron is acting alone the major's order should provide, in addition, for the reconnaissance and pro- tection of his flanks ; when part of a larger force he makes similar provision, when necessary, without w^aiting for orders from higher authority. As a general rule, in combat, actual or pending, the com- mander of any flank unit as large as a troop is responsible for the flank protection of the firing line, and if orders fail to reach him he must, of his own initiative, provide such protection by means such as reconnoitering or combat patrols. Extra ammunition is always ordered issued by the major when he dismounts the squadron in anticipation of fire action, and he takes advantage of supports going forward to send extra bandoliers to the front. 730. Reconnaissance, preceding a fire attack, is made by the major, accompanied by his captains, who move wherever necessary in rear of the scouts. During this reconnaissance the major gives his officers such information of the enemy as he possesses, also the positions of the supporting and adjacent troops and the object sought, so that each may be able to conform intelligently to the general plan. 731. Scouts and patrols: The rules governing the use of scouts and patrols in dismounted action are in no sense in- variable. The initiative and responsibility for making suit- able provision for their use rests with certain commanders. DISMOUNTED COMBAT, SQUADRON. 283 The -usual method followed is for each troop to have its two scouts reconnoiter to the front before the beginning of the action and for them to be absorbed by the line during its advance. They communicate by signals. Patrols for combat and for observation, when used, remain on the flanks, advance with the firing line, and keep in touch by signaling. They do not join in the main attack. 732. The fire attack: The squadron, whether acting alone or as part of a larger unit, is the attack imit. If his squadron be one of several in the firing line, the major, in executing his part of the attack, pushes his squadron for- ward as vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it. The great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands, in turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership, better troops, and more favorable terrain enable one squadron to advance more rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a squadron will insure the further advance of the others. The leading squadron should not, however, become isolated ; isola- tion may lead to its destruction. The deployment having been made, the firing line advances without firing. The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as soon as possible, without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammunition and the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire superiority in order to advance to within the shorter ranges, and the impossibility of securing such fire superiority at ineffective ranges, make it imperative that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be con- tinued without demoralizing losses. The attack wiiich halts to open fire at long range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach its destination. Every effort should be made, by using cover or inconspicuous formations (par. 652), or by advancing the firing line as a whole, to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before opening fire. Occasionally the fire of adjacent squadrons, or of troops employing fire of position, or of supporting artillery, will per- mit the further advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it will generally be necessary to advance by rushes of fractions of the line (par. 654). The fraction making the rush should be as large as the hos- tile fire and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority 284 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. will permit. Depending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary from a troop to a few men. The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire superiority. The smaller the fraction that rushes the greater the number of rifles that continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other hand, the smaller the fraction that rushes, the slower will be the progress of the attack. Enough rifles must continue in action to insure the success of each rush. Frequently the successive advances of the firing line must be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased size ; that is, advances by rushes may first be made by troop, later by platoon, and finally by sections or files ; but no subsequent opportunity to increase the rate of advance, such as better cover or a decrease of the hostile fire, should be overlooked. Whenever shelter for the entire firing line is practically the same, the rush is begun by a flank fraction of the line. In the absence of express directions from the major, the captain of a flank troop determines when an advance by rushes shall be attempted. A troop which inaugurates an advance by rushes, crawling, etc., becomes the base or directing troop ; others conform to it and move forward in succession. Whenever shelter exists for part of the line, the advance should ordi- narily begin there, and the units thus advanced assist in keep- ing down the enemy's fire so as to protect the advances of the others which follow. The fractions need not be uniform in size. Each captain indicates how his troop shall rush, having due regard to the ground and the state of the fire fight. A fraction about to rush is sent when the rest of the line is firing vigorously, otherwise the chief advantage of this method of advancing is lost. The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, de- pending upon the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile fire. When the entire firing line of the squadron has advanced to the new line, fresh opportunities are sought to advance as before. Two identical situations will never confront the squadron; hence at drill it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before the preceding one has been concluded or to employ a fixed or prearranged method of advancing by rushes. DISMOUNTED COMBAT, SQUADRON. 285 The major posts himself so as best to direct the reinforcing of the firing line from the squadron support (or reserve when the squadron is acting alone). When all or nearly all of the reinforcements have been absorbed by the firing line, he joins and takes full charge of the latter. Reinforcing the firing line by driblets of a few men has no appreciable effect. The firing line requires either no reinforce- ment or a strong one. Generally one or two platoons at a time will be sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the firing line. To facilitate control and to provide intervals in which rein- forcements may be placed, the troops in the firing line should be kept closed in on their centers as they become depleted by casualties during the advance. When this is impracticable, reinforcements must mingle with and thicken the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule rather than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such conditions the combat exercise of the squad- ron should include both methods of reinforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary intervals for reinforcing by either of these methods, the firing line should be thinned by causing men to drop out and simulate losses during the various advances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion of the firing line for this purpose wall be from one-fifth to one-half of its strength. 733. Subject to orders from higher authority, the major de- termines the point from which the assault is to be made. The firing line having arrived at that point and being in readiness, the major causes the charge to be sounded. The signal is repeated by the buglers of all parts of the line. The platoon and troop commanders repeat the command charge, spring in front of their units and lead them to the assault. The further conduct of the assaulting troops w^ill depend upon circumstances. They may halt and engage in pursuing fire ; they may advance a short distance to obtain a better field of fire or to drive the enemy from the vicinity ; they may rally ; or they may assemble and reorganize. If the enemy vacates his position, every effort should be made to open fire at once on the retreating mass, reorganization of the attacking troops being of secondary importance to the infliction of fur- ther losses upon the enemy and the increase of his confusion. 286 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The horses may be brought up and a portion of the attacking line may be quickly mounted to conduct a more rapid pursuit and to intercept the enemy's retreat. 734. The defense: In defense, as in attack, the squadron is the tactical unit best suited to independent assignment. De- fensive positions are usually divided into sections and a regi- ment assigned to each. The colonel assigns to squadrons portions of the section allotted to the regiment. The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover trenches and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns troops to construct them and details the troops to occupy them. The major reinforces the firing line in accordance with the principles applicable to the attack and explained in connection therewith, maintaining no more rifles in the firing line than are necessary to prevent the enemy's advance. The supply of ammunition in the defense being usually ample, fire is opened as soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's formation, stop his advance, or inflict material loss; but this rule must be modified to suit the ammunition supply. If ordered or compelled to withdraw under hostile rifle fire, the reserve will be posted so as to cover the retirement of the firing line. -. When the squadron is operating alone, the reserve must be strong and — all troop supports being in action — it must be fed sparingly into the firing line, especially if a counter attack is planned. Opportunities for counter attack should be sought at all times. COMBAT EXERCISES. 735. In combat exercises the major will assume a situation and terminate the assault accordingly. SQUADRON FORMATIONS. PLATE VIII.— THE SQUADRON. C Pars. 676, G79.) 287 i:]::Ei:i:r:i:i::i::i:] LINE or PLATOON COLUMNS. DOUBLE COLUMN. LINE. OF TROOP COLUMNS. MASS. -POSTS IN SOUADRON DirrEiRlNG FROM TRQOP.- ■CAPTAiN OF BASH TROOP FOLLOWS MAJOR AT DISTANCE OF // YDS IN ALL EVOLUTIONS. -OTHER CAPfS IN ALL COLUMN FORMATIONS, ARE ON ONE FLANK- ON LINE -EACH WITH CHIEF OF HIS LEADING ■PLATOON AND 3 YDS- FROM THE COLUMN. -FIRST SERGEANTS - IN COLUMN AND IN DOUBLE COLUMN - IN FRONT OF FILE CLOSERS. -ADJUTANT ON LEFT OF MAJOR. -BUGLER IN REAR OF MAJOR >3ZRCEANT MAJOR IN REAR OF ADJUTANT. PLATOON MASS. LINE (ADVANCING) PLATE IX.— THE SQUADRON. (Pars. 683,698.) rT; COLUMN OF PLATOONS FROM ANY CLOSE ORDER i FORMATION. AS LINE. i ji CSMWm-L COLUMN OF PLATOONS, 2.MARCH. ' 0/ ; ^ \/'l \/ UNEiHALTEp ^^\: / ; J- LINE ADVANCING > C I I 1 I 5 ! -? : / i J -! i .? : / V <^ >/ . 'c-S±-.yi LINE FROM ANY CLOSE ORDER "> FORMATION AS PLATOON MASS COMMAND: 2. LINE, 2. MARCH. i — t- ±=d PLATE X.— THE SQITADRON. (Pars. 686,690.) BEING IN LINE OF PLATOON COLUMNS ' COMMAND: ; 1. PLATOON MASS. 2. MARCH, // 71. ,<>"' .,<'''/ i i I • I \ » I. I I =4="! !~T~! ; '■'• J / '■ \ /.I '/^ :3/ i;:H::Li;ii;:::i::ii:i:izi ADVANCING 2/3 213 HALTED 3 2/3 LI 1 • ^ H^/i u \\ i I; u IJ L' \\ // BE/NG IN ANY CLOSE ORDER FORMATION AS' LINE OF TROOP. \C0Llj}^N3, v. Vf \\Z'M\hk\\.^:.l..LINEOF PLATOON.COLUMNS. 2.MARCH1 " 38218 °— 18 19 289 PLATE XI.— THE SaUADRON. (Pars. 688, 696, 700.) ^ V\ BEING IN COLUMN OR ANY OTHEJi A\ CLOSE ORDER FORMATION. \ COMMAND: i. DOUBLE. COLUMN. \\ 2. MARCH. BEING IN MASS OR OTHER CLOSE ORDER FORMATION. COMMAND: 1. COLUMN, i. MARCH. SQUADRON BEING IN ANY CLOSE ORDER FORMA TION. AS i LINE OFJROOP COLUMNS. ^ Uk^O^ ZQ\A\J[kmi:l. ON FOURTH (F/RST) TROOP, ^ MASS, 2. MARCH. UD i.C 1.^ \ A 290 PLATE XH.— THE SaUADRON. (Par. 703.) CCHUON. EXECUTED ON FOURTH TROOP, FROM MASS. BEING IN ANY CLOSE ORDER LINE FORMATION, AS. MASS. THE. MAJOR COMMANDS: 1. ON FOURTH (FIRST) TROOP, ECHELON 2. MARCH 201 PLATE XIII.— THE SQUADRON. (Par. 704.: CCHELON DCECUTID TO THE. LEFT FRONT FROM DOUBLE COLUMN THE SQUADRON-BEING IN ANY COLUMN FORMATION AS DOUBLE COLUMN •THL MAJOR COMMANDS: 2 LEFT (RIGHT) FRONT INTO ECHELON 2. MARCH 292 THE REGIMENT. Special Provisions. 736. The colonel as commander of the regiment is response ble for the preparedness of his regiment for war service (pars. 1-33). For the purposes of drill and maneuver, the regiment con- sists of three squadrons and a machine-gun troop. The move- rients prescribed apply equally to a less number of squadrons. In whatever formation the regiment may be, or in w^hatever direction it may be facing, the squadrons retain their perma- nent administrative designations of first squadron, second squadron, etc. ; for convenience at drill, however, they are always designated when in line as right, center, or left squad- ron, and whenever in column, as leading, center, or rear squadron, these designations applying to their actual posi- tions at the time in line or in column. To FoKM THE Regiment. 737. Except for ceremonies, the regiment is habitually formed in line of masses. It may be formed in line of platoon masses, in column of fours, or in column of masses by first notifying squadron commanders as to the formation desired. At adjutant's call, sounded by the sergeant bugler, each squadron is formed by its major as in the squadron. The squadrons being formed and in the vicinity of and in rear of the line on which the regiment is to form, the colonel com- mands : Form regiment (or has his bugler sound adjutant's call, followed by regimental call), and with his staff takes post facing in the, direction the line is to face. The squadrons are led to their positions in succession from the rear, the leader of the base squadron halting it when he is 24 yards in rear of the colonel. As soon as the last squadron is in line, the machine-gun troop takes its post. 293 294 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The regiment is similarly formed in line of platoon masses, in column of fours, or in column of masses. To form the regiment for a ceremony, see par. 810. To Rest or Dismiss the Regiment. 738. The regiment is rested and called to attention as in the squadron, substituting squadrons for troops wherever used in the commands. To dismiss the regiment the colonel com- mands : DISMISS YOUR SQUADRONS. Each major conducts his squadron to its parade ground, where it is dismissed as prescribed. Base Squadron. (See par. 459.) Posts of Officers, Etc. 739. Tlie colonel. — Except in route column and in ceremo- nies, the major of the base squadron follows the colonel at a distance of 24 yards, when the latter is acting as leader of the regiment. When not leading, the colonel goes wherever his presence is necessary (par. 448). 740. The lieutenant colonel. — In all line formations the post of the lieutenant colonel is 30 yarUs in front of the right flank of the regiment. In column his post is abreast of the major of the leading squadron and 6 yards from either flank. During field exercises and marches the duties of the lieu- tenant colonel are to assist the colonel as the latter may direct, and, unless charged with regulating the pace and direction of the march (par. 454), he is not restricted to any particular post. 741. Majors. — In line formations posts are the same as in The Squadron. In column formations the post of the major of the leading squadron is as in The Squadron; the post of each of the others is abreast of his leading captain and 6 yards from the column on the same side as .the captains who march on the flank of the column. (PI. VIII.) For posts at ceremonies and inspections, see pars. 798, 801, 812, 830, 883. During route marches and field exercises majors go wher- ever they can best command their squadrons. POSTS IN THE REGIMENT. 295 742. Staff and no'ticom missioned staff. — At all regimental ex- ercises except ceremonies (par. 775), the adjutant rides on the colonel's left; other staff officers (if present) in line in order of rank from right to left, the senior 3 yards in rear of the colonel ; the sergeant bugler 3 yards in rear of the staff officer on the right of the line, the sergeant major, other members of the noncommissioned staff (if present), and or- derlies on his left. 743. Band. — In line and in line of columns the left of the front rank of the band is 12 yards to the right of, and in line with, the rank of the right squadron or leading subdivision. In column it is 12 yards in front of the officers of the leading subdivision. 744. Guard to the standard. — In line and in line of columns the guard is posted by itself, midway between the second and third troops of the center squadron, on line with the leading unit. If there be but two squadrons it is similarly posted be- tween them. In column, it maintains a corresponding position in the center of the column. In route marches the guard to the standard is at the head of the column, in rear of the orderlies. 745. Headquarters troop, supply troop. — As organizations these troops have no assigned posts in regimental formations. In marches and in campaign the headquarters troop (except the members assigned to squadrons) marches and camps with the colonel ; the supply troop marches and camps with the regimental train. * 746. MacTiine-gun troop. — The position of the machine-gun troop is usually designated by the colonel. In the absence of such designation its position in all line formations except ceremonies (par. 783) is 30 yards in rear of the center. In all column formations, except inspections (par. 883), it is 30 yards in rear of the rear v.nit of the column. In cam- paign the machine-gun troop will be employed as the colonel may direct. Geneeal Peovisions as to Regimental Drills and Exercises. {See also pars. 322-339 and 446-467.) 747. A squadron, while awaiting the completion of a move* ment by other squadrons, may be permitted by its major to stand at case. 296 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 748. When leading in person and not certain tliat his com- mands will be heard or his signals observed, the colonel util- izes messengers. 749. When the leadership of the regiment is temporarily turned over to a junior, the staff and noncommissioned staff accompany the junior (par, 456). 750. If the colonel's orders are transmitted by messenger (whether an officer or an enlisted man) the messenger uses the formula, Colonel's (Regimental commander's) orders, Sir, and then repeats the message in the exact words in which given, or delivers the message if a written one. 751. The colonel signals or has sounded attention prepar- atory to giving an oral command or a signal. When the regiment is in more than one line, if the movement is to be executed by one of the lines only, first {or such) luie is speci- fied in the preparatory command ; the commander of the desig- nated line alone repeats and executes the command. Regimental Formations. (Plates XIV, XV, XVI.) LINE FORMATIONS. 752. Close order: (1) Line (exceptional for regiment, intervals between squadrons, 16 yards). (2) Line of plafaon columns (each squadron in line of platoon columns, all on line, squadron interval, platoon front plus 12 yards). (3) Line of troop columns (each squadron in line of troop columns, all on line, squadron interval, troop front plus 12 yards). (4) Line of platoon masses (the squadrons, each in platoon mass, are abreast with intervals of 16 yards). (5) Line of masses (the squadrons, each in mass, are abreast with intervals of 16 yards). COLUMN FORMATIONS. (1) Column of fours (each squadron in column of fours, with distances between squadrons of IT yards). REGIMENTAL FORMATIONS. 29^ (2) Double column (each squadron in double column, squad- ron distance, 17 yards). (3) Column of platoons (each squadron in column of pla- toons, squadron distance, platoon front plus 13 yards). (4) Column of masses (each squadron in mass, squadron distance, 40 yards). (5) Column of troops (each squadron in column of troops, squadron distance, troop front plus 13 yards ; exceptional for- mation for evolutions; used for squadron and regimental in- spections and for camps) (par. 476). Echelon: As in squadron, a maneuver formation (normally the squadrons maintain the formations they had when the evolution was ordered). Two (or more) lines: Maneuver formations. Extended order: Maneuver formations through squadron commanders. 753. The command for the regiment to pass to the direction of march from any one of the foregoing close-order formations to any other such formation consists of the name of the forma- tion desired followed by the command of execution. Tlius, to form column of fours from any other close-order formation, as line of platoon columns, the command is: 1. Column, 2. MARCH (par. 478). The commands for taking formations to a flank correspond to those in The Squadron. Signals are the same as in The Squadron for formations of like names. For Line of Masses and Line of Platoon Masses the corresponding signals in The Squadron are preceded by the signal for line; for column of masses, by that for column. Certain formations and evolutions are indicated in Plates XIV and XV, also an elementary regimental maneuver against an outlined enemy in Plate XVI. The formation for the charge is suggestive only and for greater clearness shows but one (the base) troop of the charging squadron, which latter actually consists of four troops (less one platoon) led by the major, the second and third platoons of each troop regulating on their own base platoons. Route Marches. 754. The regiment takes route formation at the command, ROUTE, ORDER. 298 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. In route marches, the colonel rides at the head of the column with the adjutant on his left. They are followed by the lieutenant colonel, the senior surgeon (if there be more than one surgeon), and such other staff officers, except supply officers and junior surgeons, that may be attached to regi- mental headquarters. They are followed by such of the head- quarters troop as do not properly ride with the squadron or tlie train in the following order : The regimental noncommis- sioned staff, the orderlies, the color guard, and the band. Regimental headquarters usually marches in column of twos. The supply officers, the supply troop, and those members of the headquarters troop whose duties properly lie therewith, ride with the train. The surgeon, if there be but one ; or, if there be more than one, the junior surgeons, ride with the sanitary train. The major of the leading squadron follows regimental head- quarters at 20 yards and the squadrons increase their distance to 20 yards (par. 706). The Charge. 755. The mounted charge may be executed by the regiment in accordance with methods prescribed for the squadron, the colonel and staff taking posts on left of the major and staff of the base squadron. The Assembly. 756. At the command, 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH, the squadron commanders form their squadrons (par. 707) and lead them toward the colonel. The regiment, without further commands, is formed as in par. 737. Should the command be, 1. Squad- rons assemble, 2. MARCH, the squadrons are formed and held in place awaiting instructions from the colonel. The Rally. 757. The command, RALLY, by the colonel is repeated as in The Squadron. Squadron commanders rally their squadrons (par. 708) and lead them toward the colonel, who gives such further instructions as circumstances require. DISMOUNTED ACTION— THE REGIMENT. 299 Extended Order. 758. Formations in extended order are taken as in the squad- ron ; they are not taken directly by the regiment. 759. After the mechanism of the drill has been learned, every exercise, in so far as practicable, should be in the nature of a maneuver against an outlined or represented enemy. Such exercises should always be conducted under an assumed situation, which should have been carefully worked out be- forehand, and each should be followed by a discussion of the principles involved (pars. 12-22). Fixed or prearranged methods of attack or defense are prohibited. The value in action of the regiment as a tactical unit de- pends not only upon the actual efficiency of its component units but upon the facility with which the commander can handle such units in combination. Dismounted Action. 760. When it is impracticable, owing to the tactical situa- ation, to the nature of the terrain, or to other causes to accom- plish by mounted action a mission assigned to the regiment, it resorts to dismounted combat. Under tactical situations so considered may be : (a) Occasions when the proximity of the opposing forces has practically reduced operations to those of a siege, and the enemy's numbers and dispositions prevent turning his flanks. (b) Instances in which Important defensive positions at a distance from our main body have been seized and must be held pending the. arrival of our infantry. (c) Forcing a defensive position held by the enemy in order to clear the way for further advance. (d) In pursuit, to take up positions on the enemy's line of retreat. (e) In retreat, to take up corresponding positions in order to delay his advance. Under nature of the terrain there may be : (a) Country that is densely wooded, exceedingly rough, or very marshy. Under other causes may be classed conditions such as : (a) That the horses have become so worn down by service conditions as to render mounted action inadvisable. 300 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. (&) That the time may have been too short to train the regiment for effective mounted action. 761. The colonel (subject to orders from higher autliority if the regiment be not acting alone) in his orders gives his squad- ron commanders information as to the situation and the pro- posed plan of action, he designates the troops (ordinarily a squadron) for the regimental reserve, and may designate the number of troops of each of the other squadrons for the fir- ing line. The remaining troops of such squadrons constitute the squadron supports under their respective majors and are used by them in reinforcing their firing lines after the troop supports have been absorbed (par. 726). The regiment is deployed by the colonel's orders. The fire attack in each squadron is conducted by its major, captains, and lieutenants as in The Squadron. The colonel, in attack, designates the base squadron and the general direction of the enemy ; in defense, the portions of the line to be held by each squadron and, in general, the sector to be observed by each ; in both attack and defense, the employment of the machine guns should be prescribed and the position of the reserve indicated. The Regiment in the Brigade. general considerations. 762. The regiment as part of a larger Cavalry unit conforms to the principles heretofore laid down, except in so far as modifications are necessary in order to act harmoniously as a fraction of the whole. A brigade reserve is always held out by the brigade com- mander, thus miflimizing the necessity for a regimental re- serve (which is always required when the regiment is acting alone). The regimental reserve should, however, be retained for use as a local reserve by the colonel and as a support to his own attacking line in case of need. THE BRIGADE. 763. The typical Cavalry brigade is a tactical unit and con- sists of a headquarters and three regiments of Cavalry, com- manded by a brigadier general. BRIGADE AND DIVISION. 301 Brigade Formations. 764. The brigade is formed in line of masses, in line of platoon masses, or in column of masses; intervals and dis- tances may be varied to suit the occasion. Regiments in a brigade are posted in line and in column as the brigade commander may direct. For convenience (such) regiment is said to be the leading, center, or rear regiment if in column, or the right, center, or left regiment if in line. In route marches the brigade moves by regiment and, if possible, on parallel roads. Field Exercises. 765. The brigade does not engage in prescribed drills, but is maneuvered by regiments in field exercises which are con- ducted by tactical orders formulated to suit the assumed situation. 766. The general's orders are transmitted by agents of com- miinicatioii; as a rule each regiment detaches for this purpose an officer and a bugler for duty at brigade headquarters. 767. The brigade is maneuvered by tactical orders sent to regimental commanders. THE DIVISION. 768. The typical Cavalry division is both an administrative and a tactical unit, and consists of a headquarters, three Cavalry brigades, one regiment of Field Artillery (horse), one battalion of mounted engineers, one field signal battalion (mounted), one aero squadron, one ammunition train, one supply train, one engineer train, and one sanitary train, and is commanded by a major general. 769. Batteries of horse artillery that accompany brigades when detached are, when the division is united, formed with their regiment. 770. Brigades in the division have designations correspond- ing to those of regiments in brigade and the same principles as in the brigade apply to both field and combat exercises. 771. Positions of the Artillery and of special units are pre- scribed by the division commander. PLATE XIV.— THE REGIMENT. (Pars. 752, 753.) IIH, mi. iHi ^m ■v^^. mi ■III colone:l\commands: "-----' I mCHT FffONT INTO ECHELON. 2.MAffCH. li li is I , 1 COLUMN or MASSES COLONEL \EADING; NO COMNfANDS. ffEG/Marr/N une 302 '/Aw /''A'i> ////' Kitv / '/ !!*S^ v^ //' '/' 1 " 1 ' ^v''\'>> / / *, ^.* \\ //f' ;:?; v''3's .4?' ,/i|\ 'v* '' >' \ / 1 I \ 1 ■< <■'<■' ■'■'■'' ,\ COLONEL COMMANDS: ^X\ 1. COLUMN or MJiSSES, \ V\ 2. MANCH. LEFTSCfDh CENTENS&DN. N/GffT SQ'DH PLATE XV.— THE REGIMENT. (Pars. 752, 753. j COLUMN OF PLATOONS \ii II I I n If I 1 1 1 II I III 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 1 Ml T ^Lmi.LZ^\h\hkmbJ.COWMNmHT.ZMMCfi LINE OF PLATOON COLU^Ns/k / •/ i \ 'I A V"X COLON ELL COMMANDS: i i i 1 1 J I ! ! ! i ! J i 1 1 i i I i ! i ! I ! ! I 1 1! ! 1 ! i ! I 2.MARCH i:;ii:i!mj vliyiivTiilj \!'ii;\;;\:i colon eil commands: V V j' I V y y i' i\ i pt-'f^^OFPLATOONCOU/MHS l/N£OF77fOOPCawms\ I 1 I I I I I I I I I 2.AMPC// \S\\\\ \! J I J J \\\\ \ 1 j / //// colonel COMMANDS: ''•'i^'l.\iii ;..'.'' ILINEOFTPOOP COLUMNS UNE0FMAS5ES llll HII !|l| 2./tfAPC/f /Jji /ill \V'\ COLONtL COMMANDS: ♦ ;~r~T ' ' J i • I : i : • 3 i: : ; ! '; colonel commands: i. line of \ \\''\'.'' \ PLATOON MASSES Z.MARM REGIMENT IN COLUMN ! Y/' 303 PLATE XVI.— THE REGIMENT. (Pars. 752, 753.) COLUMN OF PLA TOONS III III III III III III III III III III III COLONEL %\mk\k-.-2.FdUfiS'filGHT,Z.MARaf ; ; ; ■ ; \FORMiNs : ; ; ;:;;;:;; ;| UNEOF PLATOON COLUMNS \ ; ; REGIMENT ACTING ALONE III til III 3tiaUN£ ; Mil M.G.TROOP : ; ; : : : !l III III III III III III i COLONEL GIVES FOLLOWING ORDERS: ■ TO MAJOaCENTER SgUN: RCGT. TO FORM IN THREE LINES: MOVE CENTER SO'DN. FORWARD AS FIRST UNE, AT A TROT! TO MAJOR. RIGHT SQ'D'N: REGT TO FORM IN THREE LINES: FORM RIGHT a>h';\' SQ'D'N. INLINE OF TROOP COLUMNS AND FOL' id ' LOtV CENTER SQ'D'N AT 800 YDS. DISTANCE^ lii TO MAJOR. LEFT SWN: REGT TO FORM IN THREE LINES; FORM LEFT SQVN IN MASS AND FOLLOW RIGHT SC'DTN AT •-;- aOOrOSDISTANCEl M.G.TROOPmLLREfSRTTOim > \' -TO 0.0 M.G. TROOP: REGT TO FORM IN THREE LINES; REPORT TO GiO. \ - ^ LEFTSQriTN. / \ \\ / i \ i'\ ISrUN£\\\ \\\ 11} Mi 1 1 1 ^ w ^y • /- // , //- -- COLONEIL: (NEAR FLANK OF 1ST. LINE] SENDS FOLLOWING: TO CO. I SI UNE: FORM PLATOON MASS AND CHARGE ENEMY TO LEFT FRONT. 2ND LINE miL SUPPORT YOU/ TO 00 2ND. LINE: F/RST LINE ABOUT TO CHARGE. SUPPORT IT! TO CO. 3RD. LINE: ACT AS REGIMENTAL RESERVE: MOVE TO SHELTER OF WOODS ON YOUR LEFT FRONT! WTE: CO. 1ST LINE DETACHES A PLATOON AS RIGHT FLANK GUARD. CO. ZND.UNE.UPON RECEIVING ORDaR, DECIDES TO rOUOW FIRST Ul^ IN ECHELON OF COUJMNS.WITH ONE TROOP AS RIGHT FLANK GUARD. CO SRD. LINE. UPON REACHING WOODS, RECONNOITRES TO FRONT AND FINDING FIRE ACTION POSSIBLE PLACES THE MACHINE GUNS AND TWO TROOPS DISMOUNTED ON THE LINE. 304 PART VL— CEREMONIES, INSPECTIONS, AND MUSTER. 772. The prescribed ceremonies are reviews, parades, escorts of honor, funeral escorts, escorts to the standard, and guard mounting. Genekal Rules for Reviews. (When applicable to other ceremonies, reference is made.) 773. Reviews are ceremonies tendered to high civil or mili- tary officials, or to foreign dignitaries ; they may also be ordered by commanders for the purpose of making a general inspection of the arms, clothing, equipment, and personnel of an organization, as well as a test of horsemanship, condition and endurance of mounts, precision of evolutions, etc. 774. The reviewing ground is usually rectangular in shape and of a size suited to the command; the troops are formed on the middle portion of one of the long sides facing the field, the reviewing officer's post being at the middle point of the opposite side and facing the troops. 775. Adjutant, staff, and noncommissioned staff: As soon as the unit has formed on the line and been reported (pars. 797, 810), its commander, staff, and noncommissioned staff turn about and take corresponding positions facing to the front, except that the adjutant's post is not with the commanding officer (par. 742), but on the right of the staff. 776. Band, field music: The band of an organization plays while the reviewing officer is passing in front and in rear of the organization. In the march past, it changes direction at the markers without command and immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns out of the column, takes post in front of and facing the reviewing officer and continues to play until its regiment has passed. In a review of more than one 88218 °— 18 20 - 305 306 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. regiment when the band of the following regiment arrives within 100 yards of the reviewing officer the band of the pre- ceding regiment ceases playing and joins its regiment. The band of the following regiment then begins to play. Whenever the regimental standard salutes in formations for review, the National Anthem will be played by the band or To the Stand- ard, the GeneraVs March and flourishes will be sounded by the buglers, according to the rank of the personage saluted ; also in passing in review with the band halted in front of the reviewing officer, the band continues to play while the flour- ishes and march are sounded by the buglers with the band (pars. 908, 922). When the command is to pass at an increased gait, the baud remains in front of the reviewing officer and continues to play until the column has completed* its first change of direction after passing the reviewing officer. As soon as the increased gait is taken up by the column, the band plays in appropriate time. Upon completion of the review, the band returns to the position it occupied before marching in review or is dismissed as may be directed. If, after the first march past, a formation with a front so wide as to interfere with the band is ordered, the latter takes position 12 yards to the right of and on line with the review- ing officer. When mounted, the band is usually formed in column of fours ; dismounted, it is formed in two or more ranks with sufficient intervals between the musicians and distances be- tween the ranks to permit the free use of instruments. The buglers, when united, form with and in rear of the band, their intervals and distances corresponding to those of the band. When the band is not present, the posts, movements, and duties of the united buglers are similar to those prescribed for the band. The posts of the band, dismounted, correspond to those when mounted. The post of the first sergeant (drum major) of the band is 3 yards in front of the center of the band ; he gives the signals for its movements ; when signals are not used, the band is marched as explained for The Squad, substituting in the command the word " band " for " squad." Signals for movement of the band correspond to the saber signals as far as practicable. GENERAL RTTLES FOR REVIEWS. 30? 777. Brigades and larger bodies: In review of brigades and larger or mixed commands, the commander of each regiment or corresponding unit will maintain the gait and pace after passing the reviewing officer and, unless otherwise ordered, will leave the column and return to camp or stables by the most practicable route, so conducting its march after leaving the column as not to interfere with the march of the units in rear. 778. Commanding officer and staff: When the commanding officer of the unit being reviewed faces the line to give com- mands, the staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies do not change position. During each march past the commanding officer of troops and his staff, after passing the reviewing officer, turn out of the column, the commanding officer takes post at the right of the reviewing officer and the members of his staff take post on the right of the reviewing officer's staff; sabers are not returned. When the rear element of his command has passed, the commanding officer of troops, without changing his position, salutes the reviewing officer ; he and the mem- bers of his staff then rejoin the command. If the person reviewing the command be not mounted the commanding officer and his staff on turning out of the column, after passing the reviewing officer, dismount, preparatory to taking post. In such case the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining his command, is made with the hand before mounting. 779. Formations: To secure uniformity and precision of movement platoons should be equalized throughout, as nearly as practicable, avoiding, however, transfers from one troop to another. In forming for review the troops may be placed in any authorized line formation. The squadi'on is usually formed in line; it may be in platoon mass; the regiment is -usually in line of platoon masses or line of masses ; the brigade in line of masses. If the ground is restricted formations and move- ments must be adapted to the space and intervals and dis- tances reduced. 780. Gaits: Mounted troops pass in review the first time around at a walk and thereafter at sucb gaits as the review- 308 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. ing officer may direct. For gaits, if formations are changed (par. 337). 781. Guidon: At all ceremonies the post of the guidon is on the right of the rank if the troop is in line, or on the right of the leading platoon if it is in column of platoons. 782. Headquarters troop : The organization, as such, does not attend ceremonies, inspections, and muster with the regiment ; unless excused, all enlisted men, however, attend, forming on line with and to the left of the regimental noncommissioned staff. For formation of the headquarters troop by itself for inspection and muster see par. 886. 783. Machine-gun troop: When the machine-gun troop is present at review or other ceremonies it maintains its habitual formation. Its post, in line, is 16 yards to the left of the rank ; in column, 16 yards in rear of the last element. 784. March in review: The first march past is always made at a walk and (except in brigades and larger units) in column of platoons. The reviewing officer may direct subsequent pass- ings in review at any gait or in any authorized formation. If he orders the formation changed the evolution is made immedi- ately after the second change of direction beyond the review- ing stand. In commands comprising more than one arm the width of front in the march past is made, as nearly as is prac- ticable, the same for all arms. Troops march in review with the reviewing officer on the right or the left of the column ; in the latter case the commander and his staff, on turning out of the column, take post as prescribed, but to the left of the reviewing officer. The march past will be so regulated that the different arms when passing the reviewing officer will be separated by a distance of about 100 yards. 785. Markers: The adjutant posts mounted men, or other- wise marks the points where the column is to change direc- tion in such manner that the right flank of the column in passing will be about 10 yards from the reviewing officer. 786. Precedence of troops, squadrons, regiments, and bri- gades: On occasions of ceremony, except funerals and re- views of large forces, troops will be arranged from right to left in line and from head to rear in column in the following order : First, Infantry ; second. Field Artillery ; third, Cavalry. Artillery, Engineer, and Signal Corps troops, equipped as In- fantry, are posted as Infantry ; dismounted Cavalry and Ma- GENERAL RTTLES FOR REVIEWS. 309 rines attached to the Army are on the left of the Infantry in the order named ; companies or detachments of tlie Hospital Corps and mounted detachments of Engineers are assigned to phices according to the nature of tlie ceremony ; mounted com- panies and detachments of the Signal Corps are posted as Cavalry. When Cavalry and Field Artillery are reviewed to- gether without other troops, the Artillery is posted on the left. Troops in column in funeral escorts will be arranged from head to rear in the following order : First, Cavalry ; second. Field Artillery ; third, Infantry. In the same arm Regulars, militia in the service of the United States, and Volunteers are posted in line from right to left or in column from head to rear, in the order named. In reviews of large bodies of troops the different arms and classes are posted at the discretion of the commanding general, due regard being paid to their posi- tion in camp. On all other occasions troops of all classes are posted at the discretion of the general or senior commander. (Par. 6, A. R.) 787. When forming for ceremonies, the troops in the squad- rons, the squadrons in the regiment, and the regiments in the brigade are posted from right to left in line and from front to rear in column in the order of rank of their respective com- manders presert in the formation, the senior on the right in. line or at the head in column. 783. In commands larger than a brigade, the order in col- umn or in line is as prescribed by the general commanding. When an organization is to be review^eil by an inspector junior in rank to the commanding officer, the commanding officer re- ceives the review and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes post on his left. 789. Reviewing officer and his staff: The post of the review- ing officer, usually opposite the center of the line, is marked by a flag. 790. Officers of the same or higher grade and distinguished personages invited to accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on his left ; their staffs and orderlies place them- selves, respectively, on the left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer ; all others who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of his staff, their orderlies in rear. The flag of a general officer is on the right of his 310 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. orderly. A staff ofRcer is designated to escort distinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper positions. 791. The troops being in readiness, tlie reviewing officer, as an indication to the commanding officer to proceed with the review, rides alone a few steps toward him and receives the salute; then, accompanied or not by his staff, he either joins the commanding officer and rides around the troops or instead thereof directs the commanding officer to march the troops in review, he (the reviewing officer) returning to his post at the flag. When passing around the troops (which may be dispensed with, if desired), the reviewing officer and those accompany- ing him salute the standard when passing in front of it, the standard not saluting. The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute the standard as it passes; the reviewing officer returns the salute of tlie commanding officer of troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer salute only the standard. 792. When riding around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct his staff, flag, and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing officer, or that only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him. In either case the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing officer. If the reviewing officer is accompanied by his entire staff, the staff officers of the commander place themselves on the right of the staff of the reviewing officer. 793. Salutes by standards and guidons: The standards, na- tional and regimental, are with the squadron designated by the colonel, usually the center, the color guard being posted on line with the rank and midway between the second and third troops ; in line of columns the guard is similarly placed on line with the leading subdivisions. In column formations it occupies a corresponding position near the center of the column, equally distant from the flanks. When but two squadrons are present, the color guard is posted between the squadrons. 794. Each guidon and, when the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to the honor, each regimental standard salutes at the command, Present saber, and again in the first march past. The troops may pass several times at different gaits, in which case the salutes are rendered the first time only. In SQUADRON FORMATIONS FOR CEREMONIES. 311 the first march past, at the walk, all officers and all com- manders of platoons, the noncommissioned staff, and the guidons salute; those salutin.c; turn the head and eyes toward the reviewing officer (par. 922). 795. Supply troop: The supply troop attends with the field train all reviews, inspections, and musters at which the train is present. At other such ceremonies officers and men, unless excused, attend individually, the officers as members of the colonel's staff and the men in a group on line with and to the left of the headquarters troop detachment (par. 888). 796. The national standard renders no salutes. To Form the Squadron for Ceremonies. 797. In line : Each troop, having been formed, mounted, and Inspected by its captain, proceeds to the place designated for the formation, and is halted in line in rear of the ground on which the squadron line is to be formed. The buglers and band, if there be one, take position in rear and a little to the right of the point at which the right of the line is to rest after the squadron has been formed. The adjutant, accompanied by the sergeant major, the latter on his left, precedes the troops to the place of the formation. When the troops, band, and field music are all on the ground, the adjutant signals the field music to sound ADJUTANT'S CALL. The adjutant and sergeant major then post them- selves, facing each other, the adjutant a few yards outside of the point where the right, and the sergeant major a few yards outside of the point where the left, of the squadron is to rest. The squadron is formed on its right troop (par 787), which approaches from the rear, and is led toward the line estab- lished by the adjutant and sergeant major. The troop is halted a little short of the line and the captain followed by the guidon turns about and faces it. The platoon leaders then signal disregard and place themselves on the line. The adju- tant aligns the platoon leaders on the sergeant major, and when their positions have been verified, the captain com- mands DRESS and FRONT (par. 611). The guidon then takes post on the right of the rank after which the captain turns about and takes post accurately in front of the leader of his base platoon. The other troops are led successively, in their 312 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. proper order from right to left, to their places in line, and are aligned as prescribed for the base troop. 798. During the formation of the line the band plays. As the right troop is approaching its place in line, the band and. buglers advance and take post 12 yards from the right of the squadron, with its front rank in line with the squadron front. When the last troop has arrived on the line and the color guard if present has taken its post (par. 793), the band ceases playing. The major takes post in front of the center of the line and facing the squadron at a convenient distance, generally about half its front. When the adjutant has aligned the platoon leaders of the last troop, he turns to the front, and passing in front of the line of captains, moves at the trot or gallop to a point midway between the center of the line and the major, faces toward the line, and halts. The sergeant major joins the major at the trot or gallop. When the alignment is complete the adjutant turns to the front, salutes the major, and reports: Sir, the squadron is formed. The major returns the salute and directs the adjutant: Take your post, Si7\ The adjutant moves at the trot or gallop and takes post on the left of the major, passing by his right and rear. 799. In platoon mass: The squadron is formed in platoon mass on the same principles as in line. As the base troop ap- proaches the line, distances in column of platoons will be carefully corrected. The leaders of the rear platoons of the troops other than the base halt their platoons abreast of the corresponding platoon of the base troop. The adjutant aligns the leaders of the leading platoons only, but before leaving the right of the squadron he verifies the general alignment of the rear platobns and directs any changes necessary to secure a good appearance. The post of each guidon at the command FRONT is on the right of the leading platoon of the troop. 800. In forming the squadron for ceremonies, the troops will complete any necessary change in troop formation at least 30 yards in rear of the line on which the squadron is formed. CEREMONIES— SaUABRON REVIEW. 313 Squadron Review. 801. In line: The squadron having been formed and reported to its commander (par. 797), he and his staff take their posts (par. 775). The reviewing officer moves a few steps toward the major and halts, the major then turns to the right about and, facing the squadron, commands: 1. Draw, 2. SABER; 1. Present, 2. SABER, and again turns to the right about and salutes the reviewing officer (par. 794). 802. The reviewing officer returns the salute, the major turns about as before, commands: 1. Carry, 2. SABER, and again turns about, facing to the front. The reviewing officer, if he does not desire to ride around the line, returns at once to his post and the march past follows ; otherwise he ap- proaches the major, who then joins the reviewing officer, salutes him, and riding on his right both proceed to the right of the band and ride around the squadron, passing in front of the troop officers to the left of the line and in rear of the file closers and band in returning to right. 803. When the major joins the reviewing officer preparatory to riding around the squadron each captain proceeds to the right of his troop and takes post facing to the front 6 yards in front of the guidon. 804. As the reviewing officer approaches the right of each troop, its captain joins him, salutes with the saber, and, riding on his left, accompanies him as far as the left of his troop. When the reviewing officer in returning passes in rear of a troop its captain rides on his left as far as the right of the troop, whence he returns to his post in front of the leader of his base platoon. 805. On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, halts, and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed moves direct to his post in front of the squadron, faces it, and commands: 1. Platoons right turn, 2. liIARCH; 3. Squadron, 4. HALT. 806. The band, at the command march, moves (without playing) to the front sufficiently to be directly in front of the leading platoon when the latter has changed direction to the right ; it then executes column right, and is halted when 12 yards in front of the leader of the first platoon (par. 776). 314 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 807. The major then commands : 1. Pass in review, 2. For- ward, 3. MARCH, and, followed by his staff, sergeant major, bugler, and orderlies, takes post in column 24 yards in front of the band and leads the column. When at 6 yards from the reviewing officer, the major and his staff salute together, turn- ing the head and eyes toward the reviewing officer ; the staff return to the carry with the major when they have passed 6 yards beyond the reviewing officer. The major then signals disregard and, followed by his staff, sergeant major, bugler, and orderlies, leaves the column and joins the reviewing officer (,par. 778). When the squadron arrives near its original position in column the major gives appropriate commands for taking up the gait directed and the squadron again passes in review as before (par. 784). The review terminates when the column has passed the reviewing officer for the last time; the band then ceases to play and, unless otherwise directed by the major, is dismissed ; the major and his staff rejoin the squadron. The squadron then executes such movements as the reviewing officer may direct or is marched to its parade ground and dismissed. 808. In platoon mass: With the following exceptions, the rules for the review in line apply : (a) The major's command (par. 807) is: 1. Pass in review, 2. Column of platoons, 3. MARCH. The base troop moves to the front and is led at once to the right by its captain ; the other troops follow successively ; the column moves out with- out halting, maintaining its distance from the band. (h) The band (par. 806), at the command MARCH, moves (playing) to the front, executes column right, and is not halted. 809. The march in review: In case the reviewing officer, after the first march past in column of platoons, directs that the squadron be marched in review in platoon mass at a desig- nated gait, the major forms the squadron in platoon mass on the long side of the reviewing field opposite the reviewing officer. Similarly other required formations or gaits are taken up. To Form the Regiment for Ceremonies. 810. In line of platoon masses: With the following excep- tions and additions, the formation corresponds to that of the squadron : REGIMENTAL FORMATIONS FOR CEREMONIES. 315 (a) At adjutant's call each squadron, formed in platoon mass (par. 799), is held in rear of the line on which the regi- ment is to form. (h) At adjutant's call, followed by regimental call, the regimental adjutant and regimental sergeant major take posts facing each other at a distance apart slightly gi-eater than the front of the regiment and establish the line on which the regi- ment is to form. (c) As the senior major (par. 787) leads his squadron toward the right of the line, its squadron adjutant and squad- ron sergeant major ride ahead and take posts on the line, facing the regimental adjutant at a distance apart equal to the front of the squadron, the adjutant on the right. Their positions are verified by the regimental adjutant. (d) The squadron, in proper alignment, is halted with the chiefs of its leading platoons on the line established by its adjutant and sergeant major. The other squadrons in suc- cession are similarly placed on the line, and the machine-gun troop takes its post (par. 783). When the last squadron is halted, the regimental sergeant major moves at a gallop to his post (par. 742). (e) No commands for dressing are given. After verifying the general alignment of the rear platoons, the regimental adjutant moves rapidly to a point midway between the center of the regiment and the colonel, faces the regiment, and com- mands, POSTS, at which the squadron adjutants and sergeants major take their posts (par. 676). He then faces to the front, salutes, and reports as in the squadron and takes his post (par. 775). 811. In line: The regiment is formed in accordance with the same principles. Regimental Review. 812. In line of platoon masses: The regiment is formed and reported to its commander (par. 810), after which the com- mander and stalf take their posts (par. 775). With the following exceptions, the review corresponds to that of the squadron. (a) In case the reviewing officer indicates his intention of riding around the regiment with the colonel, each major moves 31G CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. to the right of his squadron and, as the reviewing officer ap- proaches, joins him, salutes with the saber, and, riding on his left, accompanies him, passing in front of the line of captains as far as the left of his squadron. When the reviewing officer, in returning, passes in rear of a squadron, its major rides on his left as far as the right of the squadron, whence he returns to his post. Captains remain at their posts. ( h ) To march the regiment in review in column of platoons (first march past), the colonel commands: 1. Pass in review, 2. On right squadron, column of platoons, 3. MARCH. The major of the right squadron commands: 1. Column of platoons, 2. MARCH. The center and left squadrons follow in succession, each by command of its major, and conform to the movements of the right squadron. (c) The post of the band in column of platoons is 12 yards in front of the major of the leading squadron, who, with his staff, occupies his normal position. ((Z) As soon as the march in review begins the colonel, fol- lowed by his staff, takes post 24 yards in front of the band find leads the column. 813. Formation in line of masses: The commands of the colonel and majors are as in par. 812-&. 814. Formation in line : The commands of the colonel are the same as of the major in squadron review, substituting squad- rons for squadron. 815. The march in review: In case the reviewing officer, after the first march past in column of platoons, directs that the regiment be marched in review in any other formation, each squadron takes the required formation as in squadron review. Brigade Review. 816. The brigade is formed in line of platoon masses, or in line of masses, with intervals of 48 yards between regiments. The reviewing officer being at his post, each colonel calls his regiment to attention, causes it to mount and to draw saber. The command Pass in review is not given, the brigade is not reported to its commander, does not execute present saber, and the ride around the line is usually dispensed with. If, , however, the reviewing officer should ride around the brigade, he passes in front of the line of majors, the colonel of each CEREMONIES— SQUADRON PARADE. 317 regiment joining and riding with him wliile in front and in rear of his regiment. At the sounding of attention and forward march by the brigade commander's bugler, tlie brigade is brol^en into column by regiment in succession and the march in review is con- ducted as previously explained, except that in brigades and larger units the first march in review may be in column of masses or column of platoon masses. Unless otherwise directed, the review of each regiment terminates when it has passed the reviewing officer. Garrison Review. 817. A review of larger bodies or of a body of troops com- posed of different arms is conducted on the principles laid down for a brigade, the senior officer present with each arm commanding the troops of that arm. For passing in review, mounted troops will not be put in march until the foot troops have gained sufficient distance to prevent a check in the column. Parades. 818. Formal parades are ceremorries ordered by the com- mander for the purpose of publishing complimentary orders, of presenting medals, and of emphasizing the importance of smartness in appearance of men and horses and of smoothness and life in evolutions. The squadron is always formed in line, the regiment in line or line of platoon masses. Armament — saber only. SQUADRON PARADE. 819. In line : At adjutant's call the squadron is formed as in par. 797, with the following modifications: The position of the platoon leaders having been verified, the sergeant major takes post 4 yards to the left of the rank, other noncommissioned staff, 2 yards to his left ; the adjutant 2 yards to the right of the rank on the line of captains and facing to the left; the adjutant and noncommissioned staff draw saoer. 318 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The major takes post a convenient distance in front of the center of the line facing the squadron; staff officers other than the adjutant take posts as in par. 742. All buglers form with the band. 820. As soon as the formation is complete, the adjutant di- rects the captain of the first troop to draw saber. The cap- tains, commencing at the right, successively draw saber, turn about and command: 1. Troop A (or B, etc.), 2. Draw, 3. SABER, and resume their front. When the last troop has drawn saber, the adjutant faces to the front and commands: SOUND OFF. The band, playing a march, passes in front of the captains to the left of the line and back to its post on the right; it then ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band, after sounding off, ceases playing, the retreat is blown by the buglers; the major then draws saber, commands: 1. Present, 2. SABER, and the band plays the National Anthem, or, if the band is not present, the buglers sound to the stand- ard. During the playing all officers retain the position of present and complete present saber at the last note of the anthem. 821. When the music has ceased the major commands: 1. Carry, 2. SABER; the adjutant then moves up to the line of captains, turns to the Ifeft and commands : 1. Squadron, 2. Attention, 3. Prepare for parade, 4. MARCH. At the command MARCH the rank stands fast, commis- sioned officers commanding platoons ride forward and halt on the line of captains ; noncommissioned officers commanding platoons take post on the line of the rank, 1 yard to the right of the guidon, or 1 yard to the left of the troop, according as their platoons are on the right or left of the center of the troop; a noncommissioned officer commanding a troop takes post on the line of the rank, to the right of the chiefs of platoon who are on the right of the troop. The adjutant verifies the alignment of the officers, who cast their eyes to the front as soon as their alignment is verified. The adjutant then commands : FRONT, moves at the trot or gallop by the shortest line to a point midway between the major and the center of the squadron, faces the squadron, halts, and commands: 1. Present, 2. SABER. He then turns left about, salutes the major, and reports: Sir, the parade is formed. CEREMONIES— SaUADIlON PARADE. 319 822. The major returns the salute and directs the adjutant : Take your post, Sir. The adjutant moves at the trot or gallop, and passing by the major's right takes post facing the squad- ron. 3 yards to the left of the major and 1 yard less advanced*, or, if other staff officers are present, he takes post on their right. 823. The adjutant having taken his post, the major com- mands: 1. Carry, 2. SABER, and adds such exercises in the manual of the saber, or other saber exercise, as he may desire, concluding with the squadron at return saber. He then directs the adjutant. Receive the reports, Sir, and returns saber; staff officers other than the adjutant draw and return saber with the major. The adjutant, passing by the major's left, advances at the trot or gallop toward the center of the line, halts midway between it and the major, and com- mands : 1. First sergeants, 2. Front and center, 3. Trot (or Gallop), 4. MARCH. At the first command the first sergeants draw saber. At the command MARCH they leave their posts, and, passing between the rank and the line of officers, assemble opposite the center, facing to the front. The adjutant then commands : REPORT. The first sergeants, commencing on the right, successively salute and report : Band and bugle?'s present or accounted for; or (so many) musicians or buglers absent; Troop A, etc., present or accounted for; or (so many) sergeants or corporals or privates absent. The reports having been made, the adjutant commands: 1. First sergeants, 2. Posts, 3. Trot (or Gallop), 4. MARCH. At the command MARCH the first sergeants successively turn to the right or left, and passing in rear of the line of officers, resume their posts; all except the drum major then return saber. Each troop first sergeant in leaving and in re- turning to his post passes around the right flank of his troop. 824. The adjutant then turns about, salutes, and reports: Sir, all are present or accounted fw; or (so many) officers or enlisted men are absent. The major returns the salute and directs: Publish the orders, Sir. The adjutant turns about and commands: ATTENTION TO ORDERS. After publishing the orders, he commands: 1. Offi- cers, 2. Center, 3. MARCH. 320 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. At the command CENTER all officers except the adjutant return saber. At the command MARCH officers turn and close toward the X'enter and successively turn to the front and halt 15 yards from the line; the adjutant returns saber, turns about, and takes his post to the rear of the major as before. 825. The officers having formed, the senior troop ofiicer commands : 1. Officers, forward, 2. MARCH. The officers advance, the band playing; the captain of the base troop is the guide, and marches on the major ; at 6 yards from the major the senior troop officer commands : 1. Officers 2. HALT. The music ceases; the officers halt and salute, keeping the hand at the visor till the salute is returned; all drop the hand at the same time with the major. The major then gives such instructions as he may deem necessary ; this concludes the ceremony unless the major directs otherwise (par. 827). 826. As the officers disperse the music is resumed, the ser geant major and other noncommissioned staff fall out, each first sergeant draws saber, rides in front of his troop, com- mands, POSTS, at which the guidon and noncommissioned officers in command of platoons resume their posts. The first sergeants then march their troops to the stables or picket lines and dismiss them, the band playing until the troops leave the parade ground. 827. The commanding officer may direct that the sergeant major march the squadron in column of platoons around the parade ground with sabers drawn, changing direction and saluting as in passing in review. In this case the officers align themselves in order of rank on the left of the staff. After the squadron has passed the major the sergeant major commands: Dismiss your troops, and falls out; the first ser- geants march their troops to the stable or picket lines. 828. Previous to executing saber exercise, the major causes the troopers to take distances to the front (par. 87). In this the troop officers, noncommissioned staff officers, guard of the standard, band, and noncommissioned officers command- ing troops or platoons advance with and preserve their posi- tions relative to the rank of Nos. 1; the guidons stand fast until Nos. 4 advance, then move up and halt in line with them. The file closers preserve their relative distances in rear of CEREMONIES— REGIMENTAL PARADE. 321 Nos. 4. At tlie conclusion of saber exercise the major orders sabers returned and distances closed. 829. The machine-gun troop, headquarters troop, and supply- troop do not ordinarily attend parade. If for the publication of orders or for other reasons they do attend, the machine-gun troop takes post as in par. 783 and conforms; the personnel of the headquarters troop and the supply troop take posts as in pars. 782 and 795. REGIMENTAL PARADE. 830. In line of platoon masses: Regimental parade corre- sponds to that of the squadron, with the following additions and exceptions : (a) The regiment is formed as in par. 810, except that the command POSTS is given by the regimental adjutant from his original position on the right of the regiment, at which command squadron adjutants take post with their majors (par. 676) and sergeants major take post as in squadron parade ; the regimental sergeant major takes post 3 yards to the left of the sergeant major of the left squadron and the regimental adjutant 6 yards to the right of the lieutenant colonel. (&) The colonel takes post at a convenient distance in front of the center of the regiment, facing it. (c) The colonel's commissioned staff (except the adjutant) take posts (par. 742). (d) The lieutenant colonel's post is as in The Regiment (par. 740). (e) Each major, as soon as the command POSTS has been given by the regimental adjutant, draws saber, commands, 1. Prepare for parade, 2. MARCH; verifies the alignment, if necessary, regulating on the base squadron, commands, FRONT, and, moving at the trot or gallop, takes post 12 yards in front of and facing the captain of his center troop. The majors then, in turn, beginning on the right, command : 1. Draw, 2. SABER, and face to the front. (/) When the left squadron has drawn saber the adjutant, from his post 6 yards to the right of the post of the lieutenant colonel, commands, SOUND OFF, and faces to the front. 38218 °— 18 21 322 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. (g) The band, playing, passes in front of the adjutant and field officers to the left of the regiment and back to its post on the right, when it ceases playing. If the line is very long the band, on indication from the adjutant, may sound off from its post on the right of the regiment. The colonel gives the .commands for presenting saber before the playing of the National Anthem or to the standard, and afterward the com- mands for carrying saber. (h) The adjutant then moves rapidly by the shortest line to a point midway between the colonel and the center of the regiment, faces the regiment, and commands : 1. Squadrons, 2. Attention, 3. Present, 4. SABER, faces the colonel, salutes, and reports : Sir, the parade is formed. (i) When the colonel directs the adjutant, Receive the re- ports, Sir, the adjutant faces the line and commands : 1. Ad- jutants, 2. Front and center, 3. Trot (or Gallop), 4. MARCH. At the command MARCH the squadron adjutants, passing in front of the troop officers, close to the center, and halt, facing to the front, midway between the line of field and troop officers. The adjutant then commands, REPORT; the squad- ron adjutants, commencing on the right, successively salute and report: (Such) squadron present or accounted for; or, (SucJi) squadron (so many) officers and enlisted men are absent. The adjutant then commands : 1. Adjutants, 2. Posts, 3. Trot (or Gallop), 4. MARCH. The squadron adjutants, mov- ing by the shortest lines, return to their posts. (/c) At the command: 1. Officers, 2. Center, 3. MARCH, the lieutenant colonel, the majors, and their adjutants turn in- dividually left about and form on the line of troop officers; the lieutenant colonel and the major of the right squadron with his adjutant on his left, on the right of the line; the majors of the center and left squadrons, each with his adjutant on his left, are on the left of the line. (Z) The lieutenant colonel or, if not present, the senior major commands: 1. Officers, 2. Forward, 3. MARCH. The officers advance, the band playing; the captain of the center troop is the guide and marches on the colonel ; at 6 yards from the colonel the senior commands : 1. Officers, 2. HALT. The lieutenant colonel and adjutant join the colonel, other officers rejoin their squadrons ; the squadrons are marched by their majors to their parade grounds and dismissed ; or, other- CEREMONIES— ESCORTS. 323 wise, if the colonel so directs, the regiment may be marched in review by the lieutenant colonel. In line : The formation corresponds to line of platoon masses. Escorts. escorts of honoe. 831. Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiv- ing and escorting personages of high rank, civil or military, when they arrive and depart. The troops for this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior dis- cipline. The escort forms in line opposite the place where the per- sonage is to present himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it will march. On the appearance of the personage he is received with the honors due his rank. The escort is formed into column of platoons or fours and takes up the march without halting, the personage and his staff or retinue taking positions in rear of the column. When he leaves the escort line is formed and the same honors are paid as before. An ofticer is appointed to attend the personage and bear such communication as he may have to make to the com- mander of the escort. When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the point where the personage is to be received, as, for instance, where a courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of troopers, with intervals, facing inward, may be posted from that point to the escort ; the troopers successively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the escort. FUNERAL ESCORT. 832. " The funeral escort of the Secretary of War or General of the Army will consist of a regiment of Infantry, a squadron of Cavalry, and a battalion of Field Artillery ; of the Assistant Secretary of War or the lieutenant general, a regiment of Infantry, a squadron of Cavalry, and a battery of Field Artillery ; of a major general, a regiment of Infantry, a troop of Cavalry, and a battery of Field Artillery; of a brigadier 324 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. general, a regiment of Infantry, a troop of Cavalry, and a platoon of Field Artillery ; of a colonel, a regiment ; a lieu- tenant colonel or major, a battalion or squadron; a captain, one company; a subaltern, a platoon." * * * (A. R. 426.) 833. " The funeral escort of a noncommissioned staff officer will consist of 16 men commanded by a sergeant; of a ser- geant, of 14 men commanded by a sergeant ; of a corporal, of 12 men commanded by a corporal ; of a private, of 8 men com- manded by a corporal." * * * (A. R. 428.) 834. " Six pallbearers will be selected as far as practicable from the grade of the deceased." (A. R. 429.) 835. If a commissioned officer, the casket is borne by eight noncommissioned officers; if a noncommissioned officer or private, by eight privates. 836. The escort is formed opposite the chapel or the quar- ters of the deceased ; the band on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march. 837. Upon the appearance of the casket the commander com- mands : 1. Present, 2. SABER, and the band sounds a dirge. 838. The casket having been placed on the caisson or in the hearse, the escort is next formed into column of platoons or fours. The procession is formed in the following order : 1. Band. 7. Other officers and enlisted 2. Escort. men. 3. Clergy. 8. Distinguished persons. 4. Casket and pallbearers. 9. Delegations. 5. Mourners, 10. Societies. 6. Members of the former com- 11. Civilians. mand of the deceased. Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and 7), with side arms, are in the order of rank, seniors in front. 839. The escort marches slowly, the band playing a dirge. The column having arrived opposite the grave, line is formed facing it. The casket is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave ; sabers are presented, the band sounds a dirge, and the casket having been placed over the grave, sabers are brought to the carry. During the funeral service, officers and men bow the head. 840. When the casket is lowered into the grave and the funeral service concluded, the commander causes the escort to CEREMONIES— FUNERAL ESCORT. 325 return saber and dismounts it. He then forms the escort at a convenient place opposite the grave and fires tliree rounds of blanlv cartridges over the grave, the muzzles of the rifles being elevated. When the escort is greater than a squadron, one squadron only is designated to dismount and fire the volleys. A bugler at the head of the grave then sounds taps, which concludes the ceremony. 841. The escort is then formed into column, marched to the point where it was assembled, and dismissed. 842. The band does not play until it has left the inclosure. Wlien the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march at ease until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought to attention. 843. When arms are presented at the funeral of a person entitled to special honors (pars. 907, 908), the band plays the prescribed national air or the buglers sound to the standard, march, or flourishes, according to the rank of the deceased, after which the band plays an appropriate air. 844. At the funeral of a mounted officer or man his horse, in mourning caparison, follows the hearse. 845. Should the entrance to the cemetery prevent the cais- son from accompanying the escort to the grave, the column is halted at the entrance long enough to take the casket from the caisson, when it is again put in march. The Cavalry and Artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, turn out, form line facing the column, and salute the remains as they pass. If necessary, the Cavalry may be dismounted and marched into the cemetery on foot. When the remains are escorted from the quarters of the deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are presented upon receiving them and as they are borne into the church. The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, gives the clergyman and pallbearers all needed directions. 846. Funeral ceremonies, dismounted, are conducted accord- ing to the sam.e principles. After the coffin has been placed over the grave, the command is brought to parade rest, and heads are bowed during the service. 326 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. ESCORT TO THE STANDAED. 847. Colors and standards: The silken national and regi- mental colors or standards shall be carried in battle, cam- paign, and on all occasions of ceremony at regimental head- quarters in which two or more companies (troops) of the regi- ment participate. * * * When not in use as prescribed in this paragraph, colors and standards will be kept in their waterproof cases. (A. R. 232.) 848. When new national or regimental standards are fur- nished to a regiment they are received with the ceremony Escort to the standard. 849. If the ceremony is for both standards, both color, ser- geants go with the escort; if for the national standard only, the regimental standard remains with the regiment; if for the regimental standard only, the national standard is not brought out to the ceremony. The directions following are for escorting the national standard only ; with modifications above noted, they apply to the other cases. 850. The regiment being formed in line of platoon masses or in line at carry saber, the colonel details a troop other than the standard troop to receive and escort the national standard to its place in line. During the ceremony the regimental stand- ard remains with the guard of the standard at its post with the regiment. 851. The band upon intimation from the adjutant moves straight to the front until clear of the line of field officers, changes direction to the right and is halted ; the designated troop is moved to the front and formed in column of platoons in rear of the band, the standard bearer between the platoons. The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office or quarters, is formed in line facing the entrance and halted, the band on the right, the standard bearer in the line of file closers. The first lieutenant, standard bearer, and a sergeant, designated by the troop commander, dismount in front of the colonel's quarters, their horses being held by a bugler; the standard bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a sergeant of the escort, then goes to receive the standard. When the standard bearer comes out, followed by the lieu- tenant and sergeant, they halt before the entrance and mount, CEREMONIES— ESCORT TO THE STANDARD. 327 the lieutenant on the right, the sergeant on the left; the bugler returns to his post ; the captain then commands : 1. Present, 2. SABER; the escort presents saber; the buglers sounding to the standard. 852. The sabers are brought to the carry ; the lieutenant and sergeant retm*n to their posts ; the troop is broken into column of platoons to the right and halted ; the standard bearer places himself midway between the first and second platoons. The escort marches back to the regiment, the band playing ; the march is so conducted that when the escort arrives at 50 yards in front of the right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to its front, when the standard arrives opposite its place in line the escort is formed in line to the left and halted; the standard bearer, passing between the platoons, advances and halts 12 yards in front of the colonel. 853. The standard bearer having halted, the colonel faces the line, commands : 1. Present, 2. SABER, faces to the front, and salutes; the buglers sound to the standard, and the regi- mental standard and guidons execute the prescribed salute. The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to a carry, and the standard bearer takes his place in the guard of the standard. The escort presents and carries saber with the regiment, at the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it in column and, preceded by the band, marches it to its place in line, passing around the left flank of the regiment. The band plays until the escort passes the left of. the line, •when it ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear of the regiment. 854. The standard is escorted by the guard of the standard from the parade ground of the standard troop to the colonel's quarters or office. 855. Escort to the standard is executed by a squadron ac- cording to the same principles, the formation being in line or in platoon mass. Guard Mounting. 85G. Guard mounting will be formal or informal, as the commanding officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed 328 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. in the drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs ; if none is prescribed, then as for Infantry. Iq case the guard is composed wholly of mounted organizations, guard mounting may be held mounted. (Manual of Interior Guard Duty.) FORMAL GUAED MOUNTING MOUNTED. 857. Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only in posts or camps where a band is present. At the assembly the men of each troop designated for guard form at stand to horse on their troop parade grounds, the noncommissioned officers falling in as file closers; the supernumeraries do not fall in ; each first sergeant verifies his detail and inspects the dress and general appearance, replaces any man unfit to go on guard, turns the detail over to the senior noncommissioned officer and retires. The senior noncommissioned officer then mounts, draws saber and causes the detail to mount. The band, accompanied by the buglers, takes its place on the parade ground so that the left of its front rank shall be 12 yards to the right of the rank when the guard is formed. 858. At adjutant's call the adjutant takes post so as to be 12 yards in front of and facing the center of the guard when formed ; the sergeant major takes post facing to the left 12 yards to the left of the front rank of the band ; the band plays in appropriate time, the details are marched to the parade ground by their senior noncommissioned officers; the detail that arrives first is marched to the line so that upon halting the head of the horse of the man on the right shall be on line with and near to the sergeant major's horse, the noncommis- sioned officer having halted his detail places himself facing the sergeant major at a distance from him a little greater than the front of his detail, and commands : DRESS. The detail dresses on its right trooper; the noncommissioned officers of the detail in the line of file closers rein back so as to be six yards in rear of the rank; the noncommissioned officer in command of the detail then commands, Front, salutes and reports. The detail is correct, or (so many) ser- geants, corporals, or privates are ahsent ; the sergeant major returns the salute; the noncommissioned officer in charge of the detail then passes by the right of the guard and takes post CEREMONIES— FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING. 329 on the line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the right trooper of his detail. Should there be more than one detail it is formed in like manner on the left of the one preceding; the privates, nonconmiissioned officers, and commander of each detail dress on those of the preceding details in the same rank or line. Should the detail from a troop not include a noncommis- sioned officer, one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander of the detail. In this case such noncommissioned officer after reporting to the sergeant major passes around the right flank between the guard and the band and retires. The troops detailed alternate in taking the right of the line. 859. When the last detail has formed the sergeant major draws saber, verifies the details, causes the guard to count fours, and, if there be more than five fours, divides the guard into two or more platoons ; he designates the center guide or guides and then commands, DRESS (par. 362), verifies the alignment of rank and the line of noncommissioned officers, and then returns to the right of the rank, turns to the left, commands, FRONT, passes to a point midway between the adjutant and center of the guard, halts facing the adjutant, salutes, and reports: Sir, the details are correct; or. Sir, (so many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent; the adju- ta-nt returns the salute, directs the sergeant major : Take your 2)ost, and then drawls saber; the sergeant major turns to the left about and takes post 3 yards to the left of and on a line wath the rank. When the sergeant major has completed Iiis report the officer of the guard takes post facing to the front 8 yards in front of the center of the guard and draws saber. The adjutant then directs, Inspect your guard, Sir, at which the commander of the guard turns about, commands : 1. Draw, 2. SABER; 3. Prepare for inspection, 4. MARCH, moves toward and inspects the guard, as in troop inspection. During the inspection the band plays. The adjutant returns saber, observes the general condition of the guard, and falls out any man who is unfit for guard duty or does not present a creditable appearance. Substitutes will report to the commander of the guard at the guard house. The adjutant when so directed selects orderlies and color sentinels as prescribed in the Manual of Interior Guard Duty and notifies the commander of the guard of his selection. He 330 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. may require a trooper to move out of the rank and to dis- mount for a more minute inspection. He also notifies the two senior noncommissioned officers to act as platoon leaders if there has been a division into platoons. If there be a junior officer of the guard, he takes post at the same time as the senior, facing to the front 3 yards in front of the guide of the first platoon, and the senior of the two noncommissioned offi- cers acts and takes post as chief of the second platoon. The junior officer of the guard may be directed by the commander of the guard to assist in inspecting the guard. 860. If there be no officer of the guard the adjutant inspects the guard and during the inspection notifies the senior non- commissioned officer to command the guard and the next two senior noncommissioned officers to serve as platoon leaders. A noncommissioned officer commanding the guard takes the post of the officer of the guard, the next senior noncommis- sioned offixcer the post of the junior officer of the guard. The inspection ended, the adjutant places himself about 30 yards in front of and facing the center of the guard and draws saber. The new officer of the day takes post in front of and facing the guard about 30 yards from the adjutant. The old officer of the day takes post 3 yards to the right of and 1 yard less advanced than the new officer of the day. The commander of the guard takes post 8 yards in front of the right trooper, facing to the front, and draws saber. The adjutant then commands : 1. Draw, 2. SABER, 3. SOUND OFF. The band, playing, passes in front of the commander of the guard to the left of the line and back to its post on the right, when it ceases playing. The adjutant then commands POSTS, at which platoon leaders take their posts 3 yards in front of the guides of their platoons, facing to the front, and the commander of the guard takes post 6 yards in front of the leader of the center (right) platoon, facing to the front, and the file closers resume their places 3 yards in rear of the rank. If there be no junior officer of the guard, the commander of the guard takes post 3 yards in front of the center guide. The commander of the guard and the chiefs of platoon and file closers having taken their posts, the adjutant commands : CEREMONIES— FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING. 331 1. Present, 2. SABER, faces toward the officer of the day, salutes, and then reports. Sir, the guard is formed. The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported, salutes with the hand and directs the adjutant, March the guard in revieio, Sir. 861. The adjutant turns about, brings the guard to a carry, and commands: 1. Platoons right turn, 2. MARCH; 3. Guard, 4. HALT. The platoons execute the movement as in the troop, the band takes post in front of the column (par. 806). The adjutant places himself abreast of the first platoon and 6 yards from Its left flank ; the sergeant major abreast of the second platoon and 6 yards from its left flank. The adjutant then commands : 1. Pass in review, 2. FORWARD, 3. MARCH. The guard marches at the walk past the officer of the day, according to the principles of squadron review, the adjutant, commander of the guard, chiefs of platoon, sergeant major, and drum major saluting. The new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander of the guard and the adjutant only, making one salute with the hand. 862. The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the left out of the column, places itself opposite to and facing him, and continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The buglers detach themselves from the band Mhen the latter turns out of the column and remain in front of the guard, commencing to play when the band ceases. In the absence of the band the buglers do not turn out of the column, but continue to play in front of the guard. 863. The guard having passed 12 yards beyond the officer of the day, the adjutant halts; the sergeant major halts along- side of the adjutant and 1 yard to his left; they then return saber, salute, and retire. The commander of the guard then, without halting, breaks the guard into column of fours and marches it to its post. 864. The officers of the day turn toward each other and salute, the old officer of the day turning over the orders to the new officer of the day. While the band is sounding off and while the guard is pass- ing in review the officers of the day remain at attention. 865. If the guard be not divided into platoons the adjutant commands : 1. Guard right turn, 2. MARCH; 3. Guard, 4. HALT, and it passes in review as explained; the commander of the 332 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. guard is 3 yards in front of its center guide, the adjutant is 6 yards from the ranl^ and abreast of the commander, the sergeant major covers the adjutant and marches abreast of the rank. relieving the old guard (formal guard mounting, mounted). 866. As the new guard approaches the guardhouse the old guard is formed in line at the carry saber, its buglers 3 yards to its right; when the buglers at the head of the new guard arrive opposite the left of the old guard its commander com- mands: 1. Present, 2. SABER; both commanders salute and, when the new guard has passed the commander of the old guard, the latter commands : 1. Carry, 2. SABER. The buglers and guard continue marching without changing direction until the rear of the column has passed 9 yards beyond the buglers of the old guard, when the commander of the new guard com- mands : 1. Fours right, 2. MARCH. 867. The buglers and guard are marched 3 yards in rear of the line of the old guard, when the commander of the new guard commands : 1. Fours right about, 2. MARCH ; 3. Guard, 4. HALT; 5. DRESS; he then, facing to the front, aligns his guard so as to be on a line with the old guard and commands, Front; the buglers of the new guard are 3 yards to the right of the rank. 868. The new guard being dressed, the commander of each guard, in front of and facing its center, commands: 1. Pre- sent, 2. SABER, resumes his front, salutes, resumes the carry, faces his guard, and commands : 1. Carry, 2. SABER. Each guard is then presented by its commander to its officer of the day ; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if an officer acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is presented to him by its commander. 869. If another person entitled to a salute approaches, each commander of the guard brings his own guard to attention if not already at attention. The senior commander of the two guards then commands: 1. Old and new guards, 2. Present, 3. SABER. The junior will salute at the command " Present, Saber," given by the senior. After the salute has been ac- CEREMONIES— FORMAL GUARD MOTJNTHSlG. 333 knowledged the senior brings both guards to the " Carry, Saber." 870. After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the day each guard returns saber by command of its own officer of the guard ; the commander of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies to fall out and report. 871. The commander of the new guard then falls out mem- bers of the guard for detached posts placing them under charge of the proper noncommissioned officer, divides the guard into three reliefs, first, second, and tliird, from right to left, and directs a list of the guard to be made by reliefs. The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once relieved by mem- bers of the new guard, the two guards standing at ease or dis- mounted while these changes are being made. The com- mander of the old transmits to the commander of the new guard all his orders, instructions, and information concerning the guard and its duties. 872. The commander of the new guard then has his own guard fall out, takes possession of the guardhouse and verifies the articles in charge of the guard. 873. If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard the portion of the old guard at the guard- house may be marched off and dismissed. In such case the remaining detachments of the old guard will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when they reach the guard- house. He will direct the senior noncommissioned officer present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the prescribed manner. 874. In bad weather, at night, or after long marches the music may be omitted or the buglers may take the place of the band and sound off standing on the right of the guard and the march in review be omitted. In cases in which an organization, entire or in part, is detailed for guard, it is marched to the parade ground as a single detail (par. 858). 875. For detailed instructions for guards and sentinels see Manual of Interior Guard Duty. 334 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIOlfS. FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING, DISMOUNTED. 876. Guard mounting, dismounted, and relieving the old guard are conducted on the same principles as when mounted, with the following modifications : («) The men designated for guard fall in, dismounted, on their troop parade grounds ; noncommissioned officers not commanding detail, 2 paces in rear of rank. (J)) The detail that is to be on the right is marched to the line so that upon halting the breast of the man on the right shall be near to and opposite the left arm of the sergeant major. At the command DRESS, the detail dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and its commander, the man on the right placing his breast against the left arm of the sergeant major. (c) When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major takes a side step to the right, draws saber if armed with one, verifies the detail, takes post 2 paces to the right and 2 paces to the front of the guard, facing to the left and causes the guard to count fours. (d) When the sergeant major has reported, the officer of the guard takes post 3 paces in front of the center of the guard, draivs saher and orders saber, the guard being at order arms. The inspection which corresponds to that of par. 882 being ended, and the officers of the day, the adjutant, and the commander of the guard having taken their posts, the com- mander of the guard draws saber with the adjutant and comes to the order. The adjutant then commands: 1. Parade, 2. Rest, 3. SOUND Orr, and comes to the order and parade rest. (e) After the band has sounded off, the adjutant, com- mander of the guard and platoon leaders come to attention, and the adjutant commands : 1. Present, 2. ARMS, faces toward the officer of the day and reports : Sir, the guard is formed. The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported, returns the salute with the hand and directs the adjutant: March the guard in review, Sir. The adjutant carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an order and commands: 1. At trail, platoons (or guard) right turn, 2. MARCH; 3. Guard, 4. HALT. ISOOx INSPECTION, MOUNTED. 835 The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, according to the principles as \yhen mounted. While the band is sounding off and while the guard is marching in review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with arms folded. They take this position when the adjutant comes to parade rest, resume the attention with him, again take the parade rest at the first note of the march in review, and resume attention as the head of the column ap- proaches. (/) If the guard be not divided into platoons, the adjutant commands : 1. At trail, guard right turn, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT, and it passes in review as explained; the commander of the guard is 3 paces in front of its center guide. INSPECTIONS. TROOP INSPECTION, MOUNTED. 877. The troop being in line at a halt, the captain draws saber and commands: 1. Prepare for inspection, 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT. lil KKKKiXiyM.-rxKKKMx1^yKKKKIx17T7T71 i II I Fig. 52, par. 877. At the command MARCH the troop is aligned (par. 611) and posts taken as follows : The guidon on the right of the rank ; buglers 2 yards to the right of the guidon ; file closers 2 yards to the left of the troop; platoon leaders (as soon as the positions of their center guides are assured) 8 yards in front of their respective guides. After commanding FRONT the captain takes post facing to the left 8 yards in front of the guidon and commands: 1. Draw, 2. SABER. If pistols are not to be inspected the captain then so an- nounces (par. 259). The captain habitually requires the chiefs of platoon to inspect their own platoons in accordance with his instruc- 336 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. tions; if not required to inspect their platoons they turn about and remain at ease, facing their platoons. Wlien a platoon is inspected by its chief the men raise their weapons for inspec- tion at his approach instead of at the captain's. As the inspector approaches the buglers they raise their bugles for inspection (par. 886). The inspection of the rank is conducted as in Inspection of Arms and Equipments, mounted (pars. 256-268). 878. When the troop is to be dismounted, the platoon lead- ers return saber, dismount with the troop and inspect their platoons ; or otherwise, if instructed not to inspect, they face toward the troop and after dismounting remain at ease, re- suming their front on the completion of the inspection of arms. When the captain dismounts his horse is held by his bugler ; the horses of the chiefs of platoon, if they are to inspect their platoons, are held by a bugler or by a designated trooper. The guidon dismounts with the troop, acting as an even number in dismounting and in mounting. While inspecting the troop or accompanying the inspector the captain does not return his saber Avhile mounted; in either case, if he dismounts, he returns saber before dismounting. Upon completion of the inspection the troop is mounted and rank formed. 879. To resume posts in line after inspection the captain; commands, POSTS, at which the platoon leaders, the first^ sergeant, the file closers, the guidon, and the buglers resume their posts. The troop is dismissed as in The Troop. 880. Should the inspector be other than the captain, the captain prepares the troop for inspection, causes sabers to be drawn, commands REST, faces to the front, and awaits the arrival of the inspector. Upon the approach of the inspector the captain calls the troop to attention and salutes him ; the inspector returns the salute and, if he «o desires, instructs the captain as to the kind of inspection he wishes. If necessary to give any instructions the captain turns about, gives them, and then faces to the front. When inspected he accompanies the inspector. Unless the inspector gives instructions requir- ing it the troop will not be dismounted. Upon intimation from the inspector the troop is dismissed. SQUADRON INSPECTION, MOUNTED. 337 881. At inspection of quarters, the men, without accoiiter- ments, stand uncovered in front of their respective bunks; in camp they stand covered, without accouterments, in front of their tents; accouterments and horse equipment are laid out for inspection as required ; the senior noncommissioned officer upon the approach of the Inspector commands : ATTENTION. TKOOP INFECTION, DISMOUNTED. 882. The troop, armed with rifle and pistol only, is formed dismounted. The inspection corresponds to that mounted, with the exceptions noted in par. 268 and the following: (a) The posts of officers are 3 yards in front of the rank. (b) Platoon leaders after drawing saber come to the order. At the command : 1. Prepare for inspection, 2. MARCH, they resume the carry. If not required to inspect their platoons they face about and stand at ease at the order. Upon the completion of the inspection they come to attention and resume the order facing to the front. SQUADRON INSPECTION, MOUNTED. 883. If there be both inspection and review, the inspection may either precede or follow the review. With the following additions and exceptions squadron in- spection corresponds to troop inspection : (a) The squadron being in column of troops, the major commands: 1. Prepare for inspection, 2. MARCH, and, if not the inspector, takes his post 12 yards in front of the captain of his leading troop and awaits the arrival of the inspector. (b) Each troop prepares for inspection, its captain, when his troop is dressed, giving the commands, FRONT, and 1. Draw, 2. SABER, (c) The machine-gun troop, if present, takes post 16 yards in rear of the last troop and prepares for inspection (par. 885). id] The band, if there be one, passes by the right flank of the squadron, takes post facing to the front, 15 yards in rear ot the machine-gun troop and opens ranks; the buglers join their troops. 38218 °— 18 22 338 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. (e) The guard of the standard, marched by the standard bearer, takes post in front of the center of the first troop and on line with the sergeant major and bugler. (/) The adjutant, sergeant major, and orderlies take post with the major as in par. 676. {g) Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not take post in front of the column, but accompany him. {li) The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter, inspects the staff officers, the sergeant major, and orderlies. {%) The major then commands, REST, returns saber, and with his adjutant, sergeant major, and orderlies, accompanies the inspector. If the major is the inspector, he inspects his staff, sergeant major, and orderlies, who return saber and accompany him ; he then commands, REST, and returns saber. {k) The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, usually inspects the guard of the standard, and the arms, accouterments, dress, horses, and equipment of each troop in succession and inspects the band, or otherwise he inspects such arms, accouterments, or equipments as be desires. (?) The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the guard of the standard and the band. The guard of the standard is brought to a rest as soon as inspected, or it and the sergeant major may be dismissed upon intimation from the inspector. (m) As the inspeut on without stirrups or stirrup straps ; the girth, quite loose at first, is tightened gradually during, the work. When the horse is accustomed to the contact of the saddle and girth the stirrups are added and allowed to hang down on each side at the walk and trot. He is thus prepared for the mounting lesson, which becomes easy ; saddling and mounting a young horse for the first time on the same day generally arouses his resistance. 939. Mounting lesson: The instructor selects, according to circumstances, the most opportune moment for giving the mounting lesson, always taking advantage of the calmness due to fatigue at the end of the period of instruction. 356 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. This lesson may also be given during the work on the longe, but always after the horse has been quieted by exercise. The instructor personally directs the first lesson, which is given to each horse individually. The greatest gentleness and pa- tience are here necessary. Accompanied by an assistant carrying a small measure of oats, if need be, he places himself squarely in front of the horse and pats him, taking hold of him only in case of neces- sity ; the rider approaches the horse's head, pats him on the forehead, over the eyes, on the neck, and haunches. He strikes the saddle, lowers and raises the stirrups, then takes the reins, leaving them very long. He mounts without hurry, but without hesitation. If, during the lesson, the horse moves out of place or backs away, he goes back to the head, draws the horse forward with the snaffle reins and quietly begins again. The rider in putting his foot in the stirrup is careful to point his toe down and not to touch the horse's side ; this might disturb him. He should not stop after raising himself in the stirrup ; that would break the equilibrium and run counter to the end sought. He should use his right hand in taking the right stirrup ; in feeling for it with the toe he may frighten the horse. In general he should avoid putting the horse in march as soon as he is in the saddle, so that the idea of the forward movement will not be associated in the horse's brain with receiving the rider's weight. It is best the first few times to end the day's work with the mounting lesson and send the horse to the stable as a reward. If a horse is found very difficult, the instructor immediately puts him back on the longe. The mounting lesson should be given on both the right and left sides. This instruction of the colt should be thorough. Absolute docility must be obtained, even in the midst of noise and movement. However, it is well not to require too much at the very beginning. 940. Training to bear the saber: The longe may be utilized to accustom the colt to the saber. As with all new require- ments one should wait until the close of work to give the lesson. TRAINING REMOUNTS— SECOND PERIOD. 357 Only the scabbard is put on at first. When the horse bears it without fear the blade is added, and he is then exercised at the various gaits. This work, it is understood, is inter- spersed with halts, caresses, and frequent rests. This, how^ever, is only a step toward the series of exercises during work on the road which accustom the horse to the saber. Second Peeiod, or Preliminary Conditioning and Training. Mounted work. First lessons in obedience to the aids. Preliminary conditioning. Hygiene. Preparing the young horse to take his place in the ranks of the troop. 941. Mounted work: This is carried on both out of doors and in the riding hall. As soon as the young horse accepts his rider his conditioning should be begun and continued without interruption. It should, whenever possible, take place out of doors. Although the young horse acquires his full strength most rapidly in the fresh air and on straight lines, the first lessons should be given in the riding hall to enable the instructor to exercise closer watch, to study better the men and horses, and to avoid possible accidents. The mingling of old horses with the remounts has a very good influence at the beginning. The riding hall is used also when the weather requires it. Advantage should be taken of the opportunity to give the remounts the first lessons of the aids. In general, the instructor should plan to work from one- half to three-quarters of an hour in a riding hall or other in- closure daily; followed by work outside of from one to two hours. The basis of all training is freedom in the forward move- ment. From the first the horse must be taught to respond to the legs. This is best obtained out of doors. If horses are worked too much in a riding hall they lose impulsion and get behind the bit. 358 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 942. First lessons in obedience to the aids: This preliminary education is quite necessary to permit the horse to be handled out of doors. It consists in teaching him — (a) To move forward at the call of the legs: Passing from the halt to the walk; from the walk to the trot ; from the halt to the trot ; from the trot to the gallop ; and extending the walk and the trot. (b) To slow up and stop at the tension on the reins : Passing from the walk to the halt ; from the trot to the walk ; from the trot to the halt ; from the gallop to the trot. (c) To turn at the action of the leading rein or bearing rein and both legs: Abouts ; broken lines ; serpentines ; figures of eight ; circling individually ; half turns ; and half turns in reverse. (d) To back; limited to a few steps and executed dis- mounted. 943. Preliminary conditioning: By long, slow walks out of doors, short periods at the trot, and still sliorter and very quiet periods at the gallop, the young horses may easily be brought in a short time to gallop 1 mile in 5 minutes, and to march, by a reasonable alternation of the gaits, 10 miles in 2 hours. 944. Hygiene: The instructor can not give too much atten- tion to the grooming, the care of the feet, the feeding and bedding; the ventilation of the stables, and the appetites of the horses, furnishing mashes, gruels, green grass, and car- rots (when available). With this in view, in addition to daily visits to the young horses in the stables, the instructors will once a week have the riders lead out their respective mounts, the latter equipped with snaffle bridles and without saddles, and will minutely inspect the condition of the teeth, eyes, nostrils, feet, legs, coats, and state of health of the horses as exhibited by 'their appearance generally. He will question the riders and arouse their interest in the points that may require attention. 945. Preparing the young horse to take his place in the ranks of the troop: From the beginning of mounted work at least one day each week should be devoted to accustoming the colt: To arms and the handling of arms ; to the packed saddle ; to the trooper's entire equipment ; to firing ; and, during work TRAINING REMOUNTS— THIRD PERIOD. 359 out of doors, to marching in column and in line, to deploy- ment, movements by the flank and to the rear ; to leaving the ranks ; to leaving the other horses, working apart from them, and returning to them quietly. Thikd Peeiod, or Fuether Conditioning and Training. Work out of doors. More marked obedience to the aids. Jumping. The use of arms. Conditioning. Duty in the ranks of the troop. 946. Work out of doors: Increase the work out of doors according to the state and temperament of the horses : Long periods at the walk are excellent for quieting the horse ; walk- ing and trotting up long, gentle slopes, for developing muscle and wind; and long, quiet gallops, for accustoming them to the speed of that gait without pulling and for building up their powers of endurance. 947. More marked obedience to the aids: More marked obedi- ence to the aids should now be demanded in all the movements, such as abouts, broken lines, serpentines, figures of eight, indi- vidual circles, half turns, half turns in reverse, etc. ; increasing and decreasing the speed of the gaits without fighting the hand or resisting jthe legs ; changing the gaits with the horses straight, light on the bit, and handy ; balanced as regards the distribution of weight on the forehand and the haunches ; w^alking out freely, trotting steadily, and galloping at the different speeds of that gait without excitement. The remounts should now be ridden frequently with the reins in one hand. 948. Jumping: The longe and the chute should be used in the young horse's first lessons in jumping. The obstacles should in the beginning be low and be gradually increased to about 3 feet in height as the horse gains in strength and cleverness. When he has become thoroughly obedient and willing he should be led in the open over varied obstacles, such as ditches, little brooks, up and down steep slopes, etc. Horses should be taught to lead freely under all conditions. They should then have much practice., mounted, in passing obstacles out of doors, such as logs, small ditches, and other 360 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. specially constructed fences, hedges, etc., but always of such dimensions as to present no real difficulty or danger of injury to their legs and so arranged as to seem to have been en- countered en route. It is by frequent jumping and not in the height of the jumps that the horses become skillful and bold. 949. The use of arms: The horses should now be accustomed to the use of the pistol while passing targets and to running at heads with the saber; at the walk, slow trot, and the canter. They should remain quiet in the presence of moving bodies of troops ; be accustomed to the passing among them of dis- mounted men and to music and flags; and, if opportunity permits, they should be taught to swim. In addition, they should be taught to carry double. 950. Conditioning: At the end of this phase of their training they should be able to gallop 2 miles in eight minutes without fatigue, and to march with full field equipment by reason- able alternation of gaits 15 miles in three hours. Conditioning involves the development of muscle and wind, and endurance, hardiness, and agility on varied ground. The instructor can not be too solicitous about the young horse's legs and feet. A horse, in good condition, presents a general aspect of health, wide-awake eye, brilliant coat, supple skin, muscles standing out ; his flank is well let down, and his easy, calm gaits show strength. If the colts are barefoot, their feet should frequently be leveled and shaped with the rasp. 951. Duty in the ranks of the troop: In time of peace the remounts may now, habitually at the expiration of about three months, be returned for duty with the troops to which they are assigned. They participate in the drills, marches, and maneuvers of the troop until such time (not later than the date of the beginning of the next period of garrison train- ing) when their education is to be continued and carried to completion, as indicated in the succeeding period. In case, however, of preparation for war or other emer- gency they may now render good service; but commanders must in war, even more than in peace, seek every opportunity to improve the conditioning and training of their horses. TRAINING REMOUNTS— FOURTH PERIOD. 361 Fourth Period, or Final Conditioning and Training. Repetition with the bit of the work on the snaffle. Role and position of the head and neck in movement. To obtain engagement of the hindquarters. To obtain mobility of the haunches. To obtain suppleness of the spinal column. To obtain mobility of the shoulders and lightness of the fore- hand. To obtain suppleness of the jaw and the poll. Conditioning. Jumping. Backing. Changes of direction. Suppleness and obedience. The gallop departs (limit of training for the troop horse). 952. Repetition with the bit of the work on the snaffle : This repetition and review should not be hastened. It should be characterized in the beginning by long quiet rides out of doors — at first at the walk and later at the trot and the gallop with the reins long but taut, and the legs gently urging the horse forward. This, in addition to his natural inclina- tion to move forward freely out of doors, will induce the horse to take a steady pressure on the bit without pulling, and diminish the risk, always existing during the first lessons, of getting the horse behind the bit. All the preceding work on the snaffle should be repeated with the curb, keeping in mind the greater power of the bit as compared to the snaffle. The instructor himself should adjust the bits to each horse with the most solicitous care, and should not hesitate after- wards to return to the snaffle in individual cases, due to the delicacy of the horse's mouth or, as often happens, to the poor seat and heavy hand of the rider. 953. Role and position of the head and neck in movement: At the beginning of training the young horse should be allowed to stretch out his head and neck to the front, but required by the rider's legs to go well into the bit and to keep the reins stretched. As training progresses, in proportion as the colt gains bal- ance and handiness and engagement of the hindquarters will 362 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. the neck be raised and curved slightly upward and the head approach the vertical. The horse uses the head and neck as a balancer, and the rider should always grant him as much liberty as possible by means of a firm seat, light hands and long, taut reins. 954. To obtain engagement of the hindquarters: The horse should be induced to engage his hindquarters and with them to support his weight, in stopping and in making rapid changes of direction. This is brought about by much practice in increasing and decreasing the pace ; passing from the walk to the trot, the trot to the gallop, and vice versa ; broken lines, serpentines, circles, half turns, and false gallops; with the haunches following sometimes the track of the forehand, sometimes a track a little inside that of the forehand, except in the case of the false gallop. The false gallop causes the horse to lower the croup and engage the hindquarters, but the haunches must follow the forehand and not be pressed inward. There should be much practice in the false gallop, for the reason that troop horses at drill and maneuvers and other work out of doors do not change the lead at each change of direction and should therefore turn true or false with equal facility. This is begun by broken lines and perfected by ser- pentines and circles and figures of eight at the gallop. 955. To obtain mobility of the haunches: The horse should displace the haunches to the right or left at the pressure of the leg a little behind the girth. The best movements for obtaining this are, half turns in reverse, executed slightly on the forehand, the haunches swinging outward a little, individual circles in the same manner, both gradually reduced in dimensions, leading even- tually to the about on the forehand. When mobility of the haunches is well established it should not be practiced afterwards as a gymnastic exercise. 956. To obtain suppleness of the spinal column: By this is meant the lateral or vertical bending of the spinal column. It is obtained laterally by galloping on a large circle, the radius of which is reduced as training progresses; vertically by increasing and decreasing the pace; changing the gaits, especially from the walk to the halt, from the trot to the walk, and to the halt ; from the gallop to the trot, to the walk, TRAINING REMOUNTS— FOURTH PERIOD. 363 and to the halt; by half halts, false gallops, and backing; all with a gradually increasing degree of collection. 957. To obtain mobility of the shoulders and lightness of the forehand: Riders are very apt to bring about excessive mo- bility of the haunches and to neglect those exercises tending to lighten the forehand and to render the horse easy to manage out of doors. The result is a horse that constantly uses his haunches laterally as a defense and is consequently difficult to hold straight at any gait. Therefore, mobility of the haunches should be reduced to strict necessity, which is obedience to the leg; engagement of the haunches sought constantly in increasing measure, w^hile lightness of the forehand and mobility of the shoulders should be the object of most particular concern, because it is the quality that renders the horse supple and mobile in the gallop, easy to guide, and clever on varied gi'ound and over obstacles. For this the best exercises are abouts, broken lines, and serpentines, causing the forehand to swing around the haunches as a movable pivot ; the circle and figure of eight with haunches inside; half turns with the radii gradually reduced until the about on the haunches is reached. Broken lines, increasing and decreasing the pace, and chang- ing the gaits, constantly practiced, bring most valuable results in the training of the trooper's horse. After collected work for a few minutes the horse should be extended, allowed to relax, and then brought to the walk and petted, to reward him for his obedience. 958. To obtain suppleness of the jaw and the poll: If the gymnastic exercises have been so conducted as to bring about engagement of the hindquarters and lightness in the fore- hand, the jaw and the poll will probably have become supple as a natural consequence; and the acquirement of balance — that is, a proper distribution of the weight on the forehand and the haunches — will have brought in its train a correct position of the head and neck. If, however, notwithstanding a relative suppleness in the rest of the body, the horse has maintained an abnormal stiff- ness of the jaw and rigidity at the poll, resort must be had to resistances of the fingers combined with energetic action of the legs, or to holding three reins in one. hand and vibrating the fourth, or to division of supports by holding the snaffle 364 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. reins in one hand and the curb in the other and alternating the feel of the bit and the snaffle. A close inspection should be made to determine: Whether the contractions are due to ill-fitting bits and curb chains ; diseases or injury in the mouth or defective teeth ; to an injury or defect in the loin or hocks which the horse seeks to protect; or, as is often the case, to the heavy or inex- perienced hand of the rider. To remove the cause is to apply the remedy.* 959. Conditioning: If the horse has arrived at this stage of his training without injury, with appetite and digestion un- impaired, and with good wind and muscle, the rider will only need to increase progressively the requirements as to gaits, time, and distance, with suitable periods of relaxation or complete rest, until the horse is eventually able to gallop 3 miles in 11 minutes without undue fatigue, and to execute easily, with full field equipment, a march of 25 miles in 4 hours. 960. Jumping: If the instruction in passing obstacles out of doors has been well conducted, the horses will at the end of this period jump boldly, but without rushing, obstacles 3 feet in height or 8 feet in width of any kind or character ordi- narily encountered in cross-country riding. This is a standard easily reached by all troop horses. A greater effort upon the part of all the horses ought not to be demanded except upon occasions of necessity, 961. Backing: Ordinarily, if the preceding work has been well carried out, the horse will be supple, strong, and light and will offer but little resistance to backing. The rider will use the right leg or left to break up contractions by mobilizing the haunches, or oppose alternately each of the shoulders to the corresponding haunch. If the horse still refuses, he should be driven forward with the legs and gathered and the attempt renewed. The horse should back straight, quietly, with regular strides, and be ready to move forward promptly at the call of the legs. After backing a few steps the young horse should be moved forward before halting and then petted. Do not back the horse as a regular exercise. In obstinate cases do a little work dismounted. Stand facing the horse's head, snaffle rein in each hand. Start to lead the TRAINING REMOTJNTS— FOURTH PERIOD. 365 horse forward and, just as he moves, press him to the rear with the bit. Relax slightly and press him again as each forefoot is to be moved. If the horse fails to move a foot, stepping on it will cause him to do so. 962. Changes of direction: The young horse should now make the changes of direction with gradually increasing rapid- ity and exactness until the wide turns, short turns, and turns in place are executed in a manner simulating actual condi- tions of combat. ^ 963. Suppleness and obedience: Suppleness of the rider is a necessity for a good seat and light hands. Light hands are a necessity for relaxed muscles of the jaw, poll, and neck of the horse. These are necessary for lightness and willing obedi- ence. Quiet halts can be reduced gradually to half halts and finally to forward and backward movements, reciprocally fol- lowing each other for a few steps only in each direction. This will develop great lightness and balance. The forward and backward or half halt and forward movements should merge into each other so smoothly that there is no perceptible abrupt- ness. Suppleness, free play of the shoulders, and engagement of the haunches can be developed by work on circles, serpen- tines, and figures of eight. Steadiness will be developed by long, well-cadenced trots. Quietness will come with even gaits and long, swinging gal- lops. 964. The gallop departs: (See par. 238.) If the preceding exercises and gjnnnastics have brought about obedience to the aids and at the same time rendered the horse strong, supple, and well balanced, the gallop departs with the lead desired may now be obtained, endeavoring, as always, to keep the horse practically straight and avoiding exaggerated displace- ment of the haunches or bending of the neck, both of which later become defenses and eventually veritable vices. The gallop departs mark the limit of training necessary for the troop horse. It establishes a standard which, if pressed to perfection up to this point, renders the trooper able to man- age his horse in all the situations in which he may momen- tarily find himself; at drill, maneuvers, on the march, and in combat. It is a standard, moreover, which all troop horses may easily attain if the instruction is carried along intelli- gently and methodically. CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. POESTTS OF THE HORSE. Head. 16, Back sinew. 30, The root of the dock or 17, Fetlock or pastern tail. 1, Muzzle. joint. 2, Nostril. 18, Coronet. Hind quarter. 3, Forehead. 19, Hoof or foot. 4, Jaw. 20, Heel. 31, The hip joint, round, 5, Poll. or whirlbone. Body or middle piece. 32, The stifle joint. Neck. 33, 33, Lower thigh or 21, Withers. gaskin. 6,6, Crest. 22, Back. 34, The quarters. 7, Throttle or windpipe. 23, 23, Ribs (forming to- 35, The hock. gether the barrel 36, The point of the hock. Fore quarter. or chest). 37, The curb place. 24, 24, The circumference 38, The cannon bone. 8,8, Shoulder blade. of the chest at 39, The back sinew. 9, Point of shoulder. this point, called 40, Pastern or fetlock 10, Bosom or breast. the girth. joint. 11,11, True arm. 25, The loins. 41, Coronet. 12, Elbow. 26, The croup. 42, Hoof or foot. 13, Forearm (arm). 27, The hip. 43, Heel. 14, Knee. 28, The flank. 44, Spavin place. 15, Cannon bone. 29, Sheath. CARE OF HORSES. 965. GENERAL PROVISIONS: A most important duty of the Cavalry officer is keeping liis horses in such training and health as will enable them to do their work to the best advantage. The proper performance of this duty requires careful instruction of the men in the treatment, stabling, management, watering, feeding, grooming^ and exercising of the horses, and such continuous supervision and inspection by officers as will insure that instructions are understood and are being carried out. Cavalry officers should make themselves thoroughly ac- quainted with the natural history and physiology of the horse, and with the effects of different methods of treatment, changes of diet, etc., upon his system and powers of en- durance. They should know the symptoms and methods of treatment of disease common to horses, the measures required in emer- gencies, the effects of the medicines supplied to the troop. They should also be practically familiar with the principles of horseshoeing. Sore backs are as a rule the result of carelessness or neg- lect; the immediate cause may be faulty adjustment of the saddle or equipment or bad riding. At each halt officers and noncommissioned officers • should inspect the adjustment of saddles and equipment of their men and should at no time tolerate lounging in the saddle. The men at each halt should be required to inspect and, if neces- sary, clean out their horses' feet. Horses when received in the regiment are assigned to troops according to color, under direction of the commanding officer. They are branded on the hoof of one fore foot with the letter of the troop and the number of the regiment on the same line, as D 7. Captains make permanent assignments of horses; after a horse is so assigned his rider will not exchange him nor allow him to be used by any other person without permission. 367 368 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 966. RULES FOR THE CARE OF HORSES: All troopers must be taught and must thoroughly understand the following rules for the care of horses : Horses require gentle treatment. Docile but bold horses are apt to retaliate upon those who abuse them, while per- sistent kindness often reclaims vicious animals. Before entering a horse's stall and when coming up behind him, speak to him gently, then approach quietly. Never kick a horse, strike him about the head, or otherwise abuse him. Never punish a horse except at the time he commits an oft'ense, and then dhly in a proper manner — never in anger. Give the horse an opportunity to drink before leaving the picket line or stable and before putting the bit in his mouth. In cold weather warm the bit before putting it in the horse's mouth. Never take a rapid gait until the horse has been warmed by gentle exercise. When a horse is brought to the stable or picket line in a heated condition, never allow him to stand uncovered ; put a blanket on him and rub his legs or walk him until he is cool. If he is wet, put him under shelter, not in a draft, and rub him with a wisp until dry. Never feed grain or fresh grass to a horse when heated. Hay will not hurt a horse however heated he may be. Never water a horse when heated unless the exercise or march is to be immediately resumed. Sponging out the mouth and nostrils is refreshing to the heated horse and will not hurt him. Never throw water on any part of a horse when heated. Never allow a horse's back to be cooled suddenly. To cool the back gradually, remove the pack and equipment from the saddle, loosen the girth, remove the blanket and replace it with the dry side, next the horse, replace the saddle, girthing it loosely. Never put the horse up for night until he is thoroughly clean, especially around his legs, pasterns, and feet. Individual men returning from mounted duty or pass will report their return to the noncommissioned officer in charge of stables, who will inspect each horse and see that he is properly cared for. STABLE MANAGEMENT. 369 967. STABLES AND STABLE MANAGEMENT: Foul air and dampness are the causes of many diseases of tlie liorse, lience the importance and economy of spacious, clean, dry, and well- ventilated stables. The picket line should be established in the immediate vicinity of the stable. The floor of the picket line should be raised and trenches to carry off the rain should be provided so that the ground upon which the horses stand may be kept dry. Paddocks, with shade and water, should be pro\wded near the stables ; if there is no shade, shelter from the sun should be extemporized. The picket line and paddock should be sprinkled to keep down the dust ; crude oil may be used to advantage. Bedding racks should be provided near each stable. The horses are assigned stalls and places on the picket line by platoons. The name and hoof number of each horse with the name of the rider is placed over the stall. The stable sergeant takes immediate charge of the stables, picket line, and paddock, forage, and stable property in general. The stable sergeant is responsible that the stables and their surroundings are kept at all times thoroughly policed ajid free from smells ; he is usually assisted by one or more stable orderlies. Sufficient men are detailed as stable police to perform the general police and, except at night, to collect promptly all manure either in the stables, on the picket line, or in the paddocks. The stable police also assist in the feeding, water- ing, and bedding of the horses. Manure and foul litter must not be allowed to accumulate in or near the stable, but must be carried to the manure heap daily. In the morning stalls are cleaned and the stables policed under direction of the stable sergeant. The bedding is taken up, carefully shaken out, and sorted. All parts of the bedding which can be used again are taken to the bedding racks and spread thereon for a thorough drying; fjarts which can not be used again are sent to the manure heap. Special attention is necessary in this matter, as the allowance of straw is insufficient under most favorable 38218 °— 18 24 370 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. conditions. In tlie evening the dried bedding, mixed with such fresli straw or bedding as may be necessary, is laid down. The bed must be soft and even, with the thickest part toward the manger. If practicable, all woodwork within reach of the horses should be protected with sheet metal or painted with a thin coat of gas tar ; other woodwork and brick should be painted a light shade and then kept clean and free from dust. Feed boxes must be kept clean ; they should be washed with diluted vinegar from time to time, always after feeding bran mash or other soft food. During the day, except in very cold or stormy weather, the horses, when not being used or fed, should stand at the picket line or in the paddocks. In hot climates, however, if there is not sufficient shade on the picket line or in the paddocks, it is better to keep the horses in the stables during the heat of the day. Smoking in the stables is prohibited. One or more covered lights should be provided in the stables at night. 968. STABLE DUTY: Captains are responsible for the proper performance of stable duty. In addition to the grooming, they will require such other duty as may be necessary to keep the stables, horses, and equipment in proper condition. Mounted work must be followed immediately by " stables " ; the horses are then thoroughly gi-oomed, the saddlery cleaned and put away in perfect order. All troop officers will be present at this time, the platoon leaders superintending the work of their platoons. The horses should also be brushed off before going out to drill or exercise in the morning. 969. GROOMING: Grooming is essential to the general health and condition of the domesticated horse. Horses improperly groomed, with ragged manes, unkempt pasterns, and feet im- properly looked after are an indication of an inefficient organi- zation. Clean horses, properly equipped and smartly turned out, add to the esprit of an organization and give a fair indi- cation of its discipline and efficiency. The grooming is done by platoon, under the supervision of the platoon commander. The i^latoon file closer and the other noncommissioned officers of the platoon assist in such super- GROOMING. 371 vision after grooming their own mounts. Wtien a trooper has finished liis work and it lias been inspected lie may be allowed to attend to other duties or be dismissed. According to circumstances, the platoon or the troop may be marched to or from the stables or the men may be allowed to go and return individually. On returning from drill or exercise, and usually in the field, the horses are unbridled and girths loosened. Any necessary precautions are then taken with horses that appear to be too warm to be watered at once. The other horses are watered and fed hay when the latter is available. Grain must not be fed or placed in the boxes until it is certain that the horses are thoroughly cool. The men are then given an opportunity to relieve themselves, put on their stable clothes, care for their equipments, ana prepare for the work of grooming, thus beginning their stable work comfortably and without unneces- sary hurry. The captain or the officer in charge supervises generally the grooming and care of saddlery of the platoons, holding the platoon commander responsible and calling his attention to any deficiencies or neglects. The horses of the officers and of the first sergeant are groomed by designated troopers. All other noncommissioned officers and men groom their own mounts. The first sergeant assigns men for grooming any extra horses and those whose riders are absent. The currycomb should never be used on the legs from the knees and hocks downward, nor about the head, and when cccasionally required to loosen dried mud or matted hair on the fleshy parts of the body it must be applied gently. To groom the horse proceed as follows : Take the currycomb in the right hand, fingers over back of comb, and the brush in the left hand ; first use currycomb on near side of horse, beginning at neclv, then chest, shoulders, near foreleg down to knee, then back, flank, belly, loins, and rump, then near hind leg down to hock. Change currycomb to left hand, brush in right, and proceed in a similar manner on the off side of horse. Strike currycomb against heel frequently^ to free it from dirt. Take brush in left hand, currycomb in right, and brush entire near side of horse in same order as when currvcomb 372 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. was used except that in brushing legs brush down to the hoof. Take brush in right hand, currycomb in left, and proceed in a similar manner on the off side. After every few strokes clean the brush from dust M'ith the currycomb. In using the brush the man should stand well away from the horse, should keep his arm stiff, and should throw the weight of the body against the brush. Having done with the brush, rub or dust off the horse with the grooming cloth, wipe about the face, eyes, and nostrils, arrange the mane and tail, and clean the dock. Finally go over the legs once more and clean out the hoofs. In cleaning the mane and tail begin brushing at the end of the hair and gradually work up to the roots, separating the locks with the fingers so as to get out all scurf and dirt. Tails require frequent washing with warm water and sof p. The skin under the flank and between the hind quarters must be soft, clean, and free from dust. The wisp is used when the horse comes in wet and also for stimulating the coat. It is made by twisting or plaiting straw into a rope. The ends are then bent together, cut off square, and rubbed on a board until they form a soft, even straw brush. The wisp should be worked forward and backward well into the coat, so that full advantage may be obtained from the fric- tion. After finishing with the wisp the coat should be laid flat. Hand rubbing is beneficial. AVhen a horse has had very hard, exhausting work, his legs should be hand rubbed and afterwards bandaged, taking care that the bandages are not tight. An exhausted horse should also be given stimulants and warm gruel. The value of grooming Is dependent upon the force with which the brush is used and the thoroughness of the other work. Officers and noncommissioned officers should, by continuous personal supervision, see that the grooming is properly done. No horse should be considered in order until he Is thor- oughly clean; his mane and tail brushed out and laid flat; his eyes and nostrils wiped or washed, and hoofs put in order. WATERING. 373 The pasterns and that part of the mane where the crown- piece of the bridle rests should be neatly trimmed, and the mane and tail plucked. At each " stables " the horses' feet and shoeing are carefully- examined. Horses requiring shoeing are reported to the stable sergeant. Each horse should be inspected by an officer before the man who has groomed him is permitted to leave. The sheath will be kept clean by washing when necessary with warm water and castile soap. Every trooper should be a good horse manager and groom. 970. WATERING: Except when they are heated, it is desir- able that horses should have free access to water at all times. As this is usually impossible, it becomes necessary to water at stated times. Horses should, if possible, be watered before feeding, or not until two hours after feeding. As horses rarely drink in the early morning, the first watering must follow the feeding, but after the proper interval, if practicable. A horse requires from 5 to 15 gallons of water daily, de- pending upon the temperature and upon the work he is doing. Except in very cold weather, horses should be watered at least three times daily — in the morning, before the noon feeding, and before the evening feeding. In warm weather, water drawn from a cold well or spring should be allowed to stand long enough for the chill to pass off before the horse is allowed to drink. On the march the oftener the animals are watered the better, especially as it is not usually known when another watering place will be reached. By watering from buckets many watering places not otherwise available may be utilized. If a mounted command has to march a long distance with- out water, so that it will be necessary to encamp en route, the animals are fed, but denied water until just before start- ing, when they are permitted to drink freely. The command marches in the afternoon and does not encamp until it has accomplished at least half of the distance ; it moves early the next morning to reach water. Horses must be watered quietly and without confusion ; the manner in which this duty is performed is a good test of the discipline of a mounted command. 374 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The horses are led or ridden at a walk to and from the watering place. No crowding will be allowed, nor will any horse be hurried or have his head jerked up from the water. The horses are watered under the immediate direction of the senior officer or noncommissioned officer present at stables or at other time of watering ; an officer should always be present when the horses of other commands are liable to be met at the watering places. 971. FEEDING: Horses should be fed three times a day — at reveille, in the middle of the day, and at niglit. This rule must be rigidly enforced on the march, the noon grain feed being carried on the horse. A desirable distribution of the grain ration is, for a horse which is getting 12 pounds per day, 3 pounds in the morning, 3 or 4 pounds at noon, and the rest at night. Hay, as a rule, is not fed in the morning; about one-third of the ration should be fed at noon, except on the march, and the remainder at night. The use of bran once or twice a week is important for stabled horses. In spring or early summer they should be grazed. A lump of rock salt should be kept in each manger. Before feeding hay it should be thoroughly shaken out with a fork so as to get rid of dust and seed ; it is also advisable to moisten the hay before giving it to the horse. The grain, if possible, should be run over wire screens or allowed to fall through the air so as to remove dust. In the morning the horses are usually fed at or before reveille. The noon feed of hay is usually placed in the mangers while the organization is at drill, but the grain is not fed until the horses are thoroughly cool. The evening feed is placed in the mangers after the stable has been thoroughly policed for the night. It is advisable that the horses eat at least a portion of the allowance of hay before the grain is fed to them. All horses do not require the same amount of forage; the amcnuit given each horse must be based, therefore, upon his individual requirements, which should be closely watched by the stable sergeant. When a horse leaves some of his grain, his ration should be reduced that amount. The amount to be fed each horse each meal should be chalked up on a small blackboard placed so as to be easily seen by the men dis- tributing the grain. A convenient arrangement is a board FEEDING AND EXERCISING. 375 about 12 inches high by 4 inches wide divided by two hori- zontal lines into three 4-inch squares. In the uppermost square should be marked in pounds the morning feed of grain, in the center square the noon feed, and in the bottom square the night feed. When a horse is sick or injured his grain ration should be reduced to between 6 and 9 pounds per day, depending upon the horse. When forage can not be obtained grazing should be required at every spare moment, especially early in the morr^ing when dew is on the grass. All forage received by an organization should be checked for weight and to see that it is up to contract specifications. All officers should be familiar with the characteristics of good forage and the manner in which it is commercially graded for contract specifications. To obtain this knowledge officers sliould be encouraged to visit large commercial stables. The daily allowance of oats, barley, or corn is 12 pounds for each horse ; that of hay, 14 pounds. The allowance of straw for bedding is 100 pounds per month for each animal. Good oats weigh about 40 pounds to the bushel; barley, about 48 pounds ; corn, about 56 pounds. Pressed hay weighs about 11 pounds per cubic foot. The standard bushel in the United States contains 2,150.4 cubic inches. A cubic yard contains 21.69 bushels. A box 16 by 16.8 by 8 inches holds 1 bushel ; a box 12 by 11.2 by 8 inches holds half a bushel ; a box 8 by 8 by 8.4 inches holds 1 peck ; a box 8 by 8 by 4.2 inches holds one-half peek, or 4 quarts. 972. EXERCISING: To keep a horse in good condition he should have two hours' exercise daily. This exercise should be under the saddle, or, if that is impracticable, it should be given by leading beside another horse. In leading care must be taken to lead as much on the left as on the more convenient right side. Tliis can be auto- matically reg-ulated by having the leading done on the right side on the odd-numbered days of the month and on the left on the even-numbered days. In special cases exercise may be given on the longe, but this must be done under proper supervision or 4njury may result. Turning a horse loose in a paddock does not give him proper exercise, and if the paddock is a large one where he can get 376 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. up speed, it results in giving him a taste for freedom which inspires a high-spirited animal to try to get rid of his rider when he feels like having a run. The horse should associate the control of a rider with the pleasure of all exercise so that he may accept it naturally as a fixed habit. It is objectionable for one man to lead more than one extra horse for exercise, as the gaits must then be more restricted and on ordinary roads the footing for some of the horses will b(: poor. If a large space is available for paddock purposes, it should be divided into several inclosures, giving space for a part of the animals to move about quietly in each, but not enough to encourage them to gallop. 973. SICK HORSES: Horses on sick report are under the im- mediate charge of the stable sergeant. When a veterinarian is present he should prescribe the treatment to be given to sick horses, and he should inspect all sick horses at least once daily. The veterinarian should also visit each organization at least once a day at one of the stated " stables " ; he should be freely consulted as to minor ailments and as to the means of keeping the horses in fit condition. In the absence of a veterinarian the sick horses are treated by the stable sergeant under the direction of the captain. Serious disease is best avoided by immediate and constant attention to minor ailments, galls, etc. If a horse sustains an injury, neglects his food, refuses water, or gives any evidence of sickness, his condition should be reported at once to the stable sergeant. It is the duty of any man observing such condition to make the necessary report. 974. SHOEING: Horses will be shod according to the prin- ciples outlined in the authorized manual. All officers must understand the prniciples of proper shoe- ing and be able to supervise the work of the horseshoers. A trooper should know how to put on a shoe in an emer- gency. The following extracts from the manual (The Army Horseshoer, 1912) are therefore here incorporated. " The foot should be prepared so that it will approximate as nearly as possible to a state of nature, and only such trimming SHOEING. 377 is allowed as is absolutely necessary for the purpose of fitting and securing the shoe. " The knife must never be used on the bars or on the frog. The bars strengthen the hoof and assist in its expansion. Cut- ting, therefore, weakens them and prevents them from per- forming their function. " The practice of using the knife to trim the bars or to cut a notch at the junction of the frog and bar at the heel (called opening the heels in civilian shops) always tends to produce', contracted feet. '' Never use a knife on the hoof of a horse that has been run- ning barefoot nor on flat feet. '■ Ragged parts of the frog may be cut away by careful use of the nippers. " With a flat foot it is frequently necessary to remove a part of the outer edge of the wall in order that the nails may be driven in the white foot tlie prepdredfor, tr?e 2/}oe 5o/e - - Toe / the fro^ - -Frog _ 3uftress Bu/d offra^ line where they be- long. This is only case where it is p e r m i 1 1 e d to rasp the outside wall. The outer coating of the wall and the layers of dead horn on the sole and frog serve to retain the mois- ture in the hoof. " The hot shoe must never be applied to the horse's foot under any circumstances. " When shoes are left on the feet for too great a length of time corns and other ailments result. Ordinarily a shoe should be removed once a month. The lightest shoe that will last for this time is the best shoe. It should carefully follow the form of the foot, or if the foot is broken the shoe follows the original shape of the foot. Its length is regulated by the bulb of the frog. '• The ground surface of the shoe should be level and smooth, except for use in snow, when the shoe with the ground surface concaved prevents balling. That portion of the upper surface 378 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. which presses against the bearing surface of the foot must be level, smooth, and accurately shaped to support it, and when the upper shoe surface is wider than the bearing surface the inner edge roust be concaved to avoid excessive sole pressure. This is one of the most important requisities of correct horse- shoeing. Concussion of the sole against the inner edge of the upper shoe surface invariably produces soreness. " One side of the shank of a horse nail is flat. The other side is concave and also has a bevel near the point. This bevel as it enters into the horn forces the point of the nail in the direction of the other side (flat side). Therefore in driving a nail always hold it with the flat side toward outside edge of the shoe. " Nails should come out at a height of not more than 1 inch from the bottom of the hoof. " In garrison, at the discretion of the colonel or of the com- manding officer, the horses may be left unshod, but shoes will be kept fitted for each horse ready to be put on. "Inspection of shoeing: The following examination should be made while the horse is standing on a level floor with the foot on the ground: *'(«) Are the axes correct when viewed from the front and from the side? *'(&) Does the shoe follow the outer line of the wall to the last nail hole and from there extend outward, allowing about one-eighth of an inch at the heel for expansion? Has the rule against rasping the hoof to fit the shoe been violated? "(c) Is tile toe clip in the center properly made and properly seated ? "((Z) Are the nails driven at the proper height and proper distance apart? Have any old stubs been left in the wall? "(e) Are the clinches well turned and set in, of the proper size, and have they been smoothed off but not rasped suffi- ciently to weaken them? " The foot should then be raised and the examination con- tinued. "(/) Is the shoe of the proper size and weight ; the last nail hole back of the bend of the quartei-? "(i/) Has enougli horn been removed; has too much been removed ; is the foot level ? CARE OF SADDLERY. 379 ''(h) Does the shoe rest evenly on the wall, covering the buttress and showing no air space at any point? "(i) Is the shoe properly concaved so as to avoid pressure on the sole? "(i) Has the knife been used on the bars, sole, or frog? "(/r) Are the nails well seated and of the proper size? "(?) Are the heels of the shoe correct in width ancl thick- ness, and are they properly rounded without sharp edges or points? Is their length even with the bulb of the frog? " In garrison a shoeing list should be kept on the stable bulletin board showing the name and hoof number of each horse, the date of last shoeing, and the class of shoes then used. The corresponding entries should be made daily, and at each " stables " the horses appearing on the list as shod since the last prior " stables " should be carefully inspected by the responsible officer. In general, horses should be shod every four or five weeks. CARE OF SADDLERY. 975. The saddlery and equipment must always be cleaned after use. This duty, like the care of the horse, is to be re- garded as part of the mounted duty itself ; thus a drill is not over until horse, saddlery, arms, and equipments have been put again in condition. According to need, the leather is simply wiped off with a damp sponge or fully tak-en apart and well soaped and cleaned. In no case must it be soaked in water. If the soap used does not contain a sufficient amount of free oil the leather must be oiled to keep it pliable. A mixture of one-half neat's-foot oil and one-half mutton tallow, well rubbed in, keeps leather in good condition. Special care is taken to keep the underside of the skirts of the saddle and the parts which do not come in contact with the clothing well oiled. The seat and outside of the skirts will rarely require oil. Metal parts are kept clean and free from rust; they may require oiling if not regularly used. The saddle blanket must be kept clean and soft and free from wrinkles. After use it must be dried and then well shaken (unfolded). It must never be folded wet and left 380 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. thus with the saddle. Provision will be made in the saddle room or stables for hanging it up to dry. When necessary the blanket should be thoroughly cleansed by repeated immersions in tepid soapsuds and hung over a pole or line to dry without wringing or pressing it. FITTING THE SADDLE. 976. The following principles are of general application in saddle fitting: (a) The withers must not be pinched or pressed upon. ( & ) The central line of the back must have no pressure put upon it. (c) The shoulder blades must have full and unhampered movement. (d) The loins must not carry weight. (e) The weight must be put upon the ribs through the medium of the muscles covering them. (/) The weight must be evenly distributed over a surface which extends from the play of the shoulders to the last true rib. The above principles must be applied whatever the type of saddle that may be used. >L\RCHES. CA>IPS- I i-'t € *il40 i>ars. S^ &Tu, &71- ) 977. The ": -^---^-' - - -'- - -' - rnarcfi i5 oce of tb^ teszs oc tl-- - jm-ent not only of tie ^ym- maii'der, t_; .i „,^ ;^_. __-:r oScers as welL Cemam gen^TuI prin^ples and some exact rules are MM damn to fit the case of a normal marcli. bnt taeticaJ cooadteratMwae as well as the conditic-n of rc»iid5 and weather, ttie necessatry forage. water and shelter, sanitation, sn-i orher mcua i s tamegs render a march of any ctDnsiderable 'r ' ' -T-wniefl tro^^s one reqnirin? the ni«Tst nnreinirtln;r ; ^ id dietsffis «i the part of the c-^jnnnander and his s^i : -s. A soeeess- fol Cavalry marvh whether in piea.ce or - ' . - ne that places the men and horses at the time and pi- . r Zt-I^ M the best possible ct-'C'iition for the servlr-e re^iiiireti Faanre «f mounted tro^r-ps to snoressfnUy carry out a mission t? doe as a mle to exhaustion or injaries to the horses radier tliaii to the men- The training: of officers of all srades must Ije sorti iSb^t solicirade for the condition of h-r-rses on the nareh.i? sectjod nature : constant effort should he made, b cme^w sgtet e tke wc»rfc. to stimulate the pri?per in taiTiBg^ and in ke^in? his m'>nnt in fit ondition: if sn«:-h strasnlTB? Is m- effective then the remedy, if the trooper is at fault, lies in other directions. Fnd«r favorable ci?nditions field ser«^<-^ offers the hest opp«?rtimity for c-OD»iiriooiin? the horses an»l har'ieniniT the men. 97S. Prepararicni : Kes7- for the timely orfJeriii? of ne-^essary rrepcirarions : -j to lea vine: a perroanent eamp or starion rests wi:l _:::-.i'^- A'"~7rc*able nee*±? of the command for th«? - t i ■ rred shooM be anti/ipare'i. instm'Jtions v -_ . - - ,-^— ^^ — .- =-^ complete form., and no ' - march order proper &»r : -^ : : : _i 382 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. conforms to the requirements of Field Service Regulations. An order or memorandum of service calls will be issued and distributed in ample time the night before beginning a march stating tlie hour for reveille, stables, and breakfast and such other duties as can reason.ibly be anticipated. Except on account of imperative military reasons, Cavalry should not leave camp for an hour or more after daylight. If grazing is depended upon, this is especially necessary, since horses as a rule graze more freely in the early morning when rested. Ample time should be allowed after reveille for groom- ing and feeding and thereafter for the men to breakfast. All stable duties should be done quietly and without hurry or confusion under the immediate supervision of troop and squadron commanders. In each troop a man is detailed to walk th6 picket line while grain is being fed, to look out for the horses generally and to take off the feed or the nose bag of a horse as soon as he has finished feeding. The signals for striking tents (the general), for policing, saddling, and beginning the march should be ordered per- sonally by the commanding officer and only when the duties pertaining to the previous signal are completed. 979. The march, its length and rate: The average daily march of a Cavalry column of the size of a squadron, or larger, is about 25 miles when horses are in condition ; when starting on long-distance marches the rate per day for the first few days should be less than 20 miles and gradually increased. These rules may necessarily be modified, even when horses are not in fit condition, by reason of emergencies, character of roads or weather, proximity of water, grazing, etc., but, with these exceptions the question of the length of the daily march is one of good judgment and experience on the part of the commander. The gait and pace of the daily march are in- fluenced by both the time the horse is to carry the load and the distance to be covered. The quicker a march can be com- pleted without forcing, the less the fatigue to both horse and man. Where the footing is good, the road level, and other considerations do not hamper, the column, after the first or a subsequent halt, may advance first by leading dismounted, then mount and walk, then trot, a short gallop (exceptional), then tlie trot, followed by the walk to the next halt. No gait Is to be maintained continuously long enough to v;eary either LENGTH AND RATE OF MARCHES. 383 horse or man, neither must it be changed too frequently in long colunms ; but whatever pace or gait is taken it should conform to the standards (par. 279). The officer setting the pace should occasionally drop back to observe its effect on the column, and veterinarians, if present, should be habitually- utilized for this purpose. The walk, if the footing is good, should be at the rate of 4 miles per hour, exclusive of halts ; the trot at 8 miles per hour, so as to facilitate posting; the gallop, a very exceptional gait even for small commands, should be not faster than the maneuvering gallop (par. 236), and its practicability will de- pend upon the training and condition of the horses, since on long marches, unless accustomed to this gait w^ith packed saddles, the horses will soon break down. Very rarely, however, will the conditions allow the regular arrangement of gaits indicated above. Kolling country, with ascents and descents, stretches of hard or stony road or of mud, dust, or sand, crossings of streams, etc., will ordinarily impose corresponding changes of gait or pace on each of the small elements of the column as it reaches them. To provide for this the troops in route column, when so directed, take greater distances than prescribed in order to allow for closing up at checks. The commander must give this matter unremitting atten- tion, since normal route-order distances in column frequently entail discomfort to the men and sometimes injuries to the horses which might have been avoided. Unless under exceptional circumstances, the commander of a marching column will authorize each troop commander to so regulate the gait and pace of his troop as to conform to that next in front, the gait and pace of the leading troop being regulated by the commander himself. This results in each troop changing to the trot, walk, leading dismounted, etc., at the same place at which the leading troop did, and although regulation distances are frequently exceeded the tendency on all stretches of good road is to close on the leading troop of the column. With care this method of marching should result in enabling each troop in the column to move with almost the same regularity and freedom from checks as though it were in the lead. 384 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. The fast rate of march that can be expected of small detach- ments and of single riders can not be demanded of a long Cavalry column, and as the command increases in size the rate of march will decrease. The regulation gaits being, at the walk, 4 miles, the trot, 8 miles, Cavalry should be able to make, including halts, 5 miles per hour or better. This rate can be maintained for daily marches of 25 miles under ordi- nary conditions for a week at a time, after which a day of rest should be allowed before continuing the march. 980. Formations: The habitual formation for marches is route order in column of fours (par. 754). When the roads are unsuitable or the command is small, column of twos or troopers is permissible. To economize road space in large commands double column or parallel columns should be used if practicable. Squadrons in regiment and troops in squad- rons alternate in leading, the rule being that the one in front one day automatically follows in rear the next day. 981. Halts: The first half hour of a march should be made at a walk and the first halt of 10 or 15 minutes toward the end of the first hour after starting; it should, if possible, be preceded by a short trot in order to make apparent any faulty adjustment of equipment. This halt gives an oppor- tunity for the horses to stale and for the troopers to attend to the calls of nature, to tighten girths, and to adjust saddles, equipment, and clothing. Other halts of 5 to 10 minutes should be made at hourly intervals, and, if the march is to be prolonged into the after- noon a longer halt should be made at noon, when girths are loosened, bridles removed, horses fed, and the men eat their lunches. An invariable rule on the march and in camp is to have all troopers dismount promptly on halting; in other words, never to permit a man to sit a moment in the saddle while his horse is standing still, and under no circumstances to lounge in the saddle. 982. Watering: On the march horses should be watered whenever opportunity occurs, conforming as far as practicable to the rule of watering before feeding and of removing the bit when by so doing the horse can drink more freely, as when the stream or watering place is shallow. Public water- insr troughs should ordinarily be avoided on account of danger PEEDING AND CAMPING ON MARCHES. 385 from infection. The use of buckets or of portable, collapsible canvas watering troughs (articles of issue) will often make watering places otherwise insufficient thoroughly satisfactory. On the march and in camp watering is always done under supervision of an officer. 983. Feeding: In time of peace when a regular supply of grain and long forage can be counted on, effort should be made to follow, as far as practicable, the routine to which horses have been accustomed in garrison. In time of war regularity of supply of forage, and especially of the long forage, can not be expected, and officers must neglect no opportunity of antici- pating the needs of their animals w^hen passing grain fields, pastures, or stacks of hay and other fodder. A supply for the night can often be gathered and carried along on the w^agons or it may be tied up compactly with the lariat and carried on the horse. The trooper with habitual solicitude for his mount will, if permitted, be prompt to remove the bits to let his horse graze (facing the wind in hot weather) at every delay or check and he will miss no chance to pick up an extra feed of grain. 984. Camps (see also Care of Troops, F. S. R.) : The ground being suitable, a troop encamps in line, with first sergeant's cook and officers' tents on one flank, the men's sink on the other, and with picket line 15 yards in front of and parallel to the men's tents, the open ends of the tents toward the picket line. A squadron or regiment encamps in column of troops as above, but with picket lines on the flank of the column on the side opposite the cook nnd officers' tents, each in prolongation of its own company street. Intervals and distances should approximate those of the normal semiper- manent camps (F. S. R.), if space is available. For a shelter tent camp in column of troops w^ith picket lines stretched betw^een the rows of tents the guidons which mark first ser- geants' tents should not be less than 15 yards apart. The squadron or regiment may encamp in line similarly to the troop if the ground is more favorable for such form of camp, but ordinarily they encamp in column of troops with picket lines between the rows of tents. 985. On nearing the end of a day's -mar/jh, the regimental commander will send his adjutant and supply officer ahead to 38218 " — IS 25 386 CAVALKY DRILL REGULATIONS. locate the camp and provide for the arrival of the column: On approaching the camping place, squadron adjutants and the guidon of each troop will be summoned by the colonel's bugler sounding adjutant's call followed by guidons (or other- wise according to circumstances). At these calls each squad- ron adjutant followed by the guidons of his squadron will move rapidly to the front and will join the regimental ad- jutant, who indicates to each the ground which his squadron is to occupy. If the available ground is sufficient to encamp the entire regiment as prescribed in the Field Service Regula- tions, the regimental adjutant causes the guidons to be aligned and planted at the prescribed intervals, thereby mark- ing the first sergeant's tent on the flank of each troop, other- wise each squadron adjutant has the guidons of his squadron so placed on the ground allotted to his squadron as to conform, as nearly as conditions will permit, to the normal camp, hav- ing in view the comfort of horses and men and convenience to supplies. The object in marking off the camp as prescribed, by establishing the guidons before the arrival of the column, is to relieve the horse of his rider and pack as soon as possble. To further minimize delay, commanding ofliicers, unless under exceptional circumstances, will, immediately on reaching the ground, direct majors to dismiss their squadrons and have their troop commanders proceed directly to their guidons, dismount at once, and pitch camp. The foregoing principles will also, in so far as applicable, be enforced by commanders of all units smaller than the regiment. The regimental supply officer has the drivers of the baggage section of the regimental train go direct to their proper troops and unhitch. Ordinarily, for convenience in a one-night camp or bivouac the wagons of the baggage section are left between the cook tents and the troop oflScers' tents, the supply section being parked outside by itself. After arrival at the camping place a guard is at once placed over the source of supply of drinking water. . Before pitching tents the rifles are stacked, sabers, rolls, saddle bags and lariats removed from the saddles, girths loosened (the saddles being left on until backs are cooled) and the horses, either linked by section, in circle (par. 428) FORCED AND NIGHT MARCHES. 387 or coupled head and tail (par. 427) and a man detailed to watch them until tents are pitched. After pitching tents, stacks are broken, rifles placed in the tents, horses unsaddled, unbridled, and tied on the line or herded, saddles placed in a row in front of the tents and saddle blankets spread on them to dry, fuel secured, sinks dug, and other necessary preparations made for the night. The use of saddle blankets as bedding by the men will be permitted only under very exceptional conditions, and special care must be exercised to keep them free from dirt and burs. During evening stables, troop commanders accompanied, if practicable, by a veterinarian, inspect the backs and feet of their horses, and in the morning they permit no trooper, who is not spe- cially authorized, to saddle his horse before the call boots and saddles, or to mount before the command for so doing. 986. Herding: In a hostile country camps should be se- lected if possible where grazing is good and beyond rifle range of cover for an enemy ; orders are issued as to places of assembly and in each troop men are detailed beforehand to go among the horses and quiet them in case of a night alarm. In the event of a stampede, men should mount the fastest animals within reach, ride ahead of the herd, and lead it back to camp. Sometimes the sounding of stablQ and water call will prevent or check a stampede. In case it is necessary to graze the horses in an enemy's country they are sent out to herd under charge of an officer as soon as possible after making camp, they being taken during daylight as far away as is safe so as to keep the grass nearer camp for the night. 987. Forced and night marches: To conduct a rapid march of a command of any magnitude successfully, horses must be in condition (pars. 950, 959) and men must ha^e been trained (par. 175) ; if either is lacking, the daily marches at first must be short. A night march, being slow and fatiguing to horses and men, is seldom undertaken unless as a forced march to seize a position or to surprise an enemy by attacking him at dawn. In a forced march frequently the gait, if the footing is favor- able, and always the number of hours in the saddle are in- creased. Under favorable conditions a rate of 50 miles in 24 hours for three or four days can be maintained. During such 388 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. a march, in addition to the usual hourly halts, a halt of 2 hours is made toward the end of the first half of each day's march, during which bits are removed, horses unsaddled, watered, fed, and their legs hand rubbed ; the rate should be about 5 miles an hour exclusive of halts. Under very favorable conditions a single march of 100 miles can be made in from 24 to 30 hours. During a march of this character, in addition to the usual hourly halts, halts of 2 hours are made toward the end of the first and second thirds of the march, during which bits are removed, the horses un- saddled, watered, fed, and their legs hand rubbed ; the rate of march should be from 5 to 6 miles an hour exclusive of halts. SIGNALS. ARM, WHISTLE, BUGLE, SEMAPHORE. 988. What constitutes an order is set forth in DEFINI- TIONS. Instructions, oral or written, wliicli are not expressed in prescribed forms are usually termed orders. Oral orders for particular movements or formations, expressed in a pre- cise and definitely prescribed wording, are termed commands. Any indications, intelligibly conveyed by the commander's sig- nals, movements, etc., have the full force of the corresponding commands. 989. In field service, the commander's indication for the execution of any movement will, in general, be conveyed by the method, or combination of methods, best suited to the par- ticular occasion and object in view. In instruction, all pre- scribed methods must be employed with sufficient frequency to insure familiarity with their use by those concerned. No one method of conveying the will of the commander is to be used to the exclusion of any other prescribed method. In addition to the signals that are prescribed as such, the direction and gait taken by the leader and his e.xample in gen- eral serve to convey his orders. Similarly the base, by the ex- ample of its march, formation, and gait, indicates by visible signs the will of the commander. Officers and men fix their attention at the first word of command, the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first motion of the signal. ' Leaders of subordinate units wait until the commander co;mpletes his preparatory signal before giving their commands or signal to execute the movement. Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed upon to facilitate the solution of such special difficul- ties as the particular situation is likely to (Jevelop. but it must be remembered that simplicity and certainty are indispens- able qualities of a signal. 389 390 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. AEM SIGNALS. 990. To avoid noise and confusion, signals with the arm or hand, the headdress, or the saber, when drawn, may be used except when darkness, fog, dust, or other causes render such signals invisible or inappropriate. The preparatory signals with the saber are made from the carry, with hand or head- dress from the position of the hand at the side. The return to the carry, or bringing the hand by a quick, sharp movement to the side from the preparatory signal, is the command of execution. Every signal should be made with vigor and pre- cision and every position taken by the hand and arm during the signal be distinct and clear cut. In all cases when the contrary is not indicated the termination of the preparatory signal is marked by extending the arm vertically, making a very brief pause in that position before signaling the command of execution. Combination signals (those made up of two or more ele- ments) should be avoided unless the component elements are easily recognized ; such signals should never be used for any movement for which a single signal is prescribed (e. g., line of platoon columns). When combination signals are used they are always made in the order in which the commands are worded — e. g., platoons right turn would be signaled as pla- toons followed by change of direction; column of platoons by column followed by platoons; line of troop columns by line followed by troops followed by column. The signals appearing below are preparatory signals, except when otherwise stated. Assemble: Same as attention, except that the circles are made larger and with the forearm. Attention: Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and describe slowly small circles with the hand, then drop the hand to the side. This signal may precede any command (par. 991). Not a preparatory signal. By the right (left) flank: Extend the arm horizontally, di- rectly to the right (left). Change of direction: Extend the arm fully in the direction of the marching flank and then make a slow sweeping move- ment toward the new direction ; move the horse in that direc- tion. This signal may be used for any change of direction ARM SIGNALS. 391 whether in line or column formation ; for example, for right (left) turn, right (left) half turn; column right (left), col- umn half right (left) (par. 386). Column: Describe circles on the right in a vertical plane with the arm fully extended. When not followed by a modify- ing element (as platoons, twos, or troopers, etc.) column of fours is to be understood. Column right (left) ; Column half right (left) : See Change of direction). Decrease the gait: Raise the right elbow to a position above and to the right of the right shoulder; extend the forearm upward and to the left, right hand above the head. Except when the leader's example indicates otherwise, a decrease of gait of one degree is to be understood. Dismount: Extend the arm diagonally upward to the right, palm downward^ and wave several times toward the ground. Not a preparatory signal unless required to dismount in unison, in which case the signal will be preceded by that for attention. Disregard: Place the hand against the back at the height of the waist, back of the hand toward the body ; not a prepara- tory signal. Double column: Extend the arm fully and describe a circle in a vertical plane from front to rear and, without pausing, from rear to front. Extend: Sweep the arm, fully extended, slowly and horizon- tally across the body, swaying and turning the body with the sweep of the arm. Fight on foot: Strike three or four blows with the clenched fist in the direction in which the action is desired. In striking, the point of the elbow should be higher than the shoulder ; not a preparatory signal. Foragers: Extend the arm horizontally to the front and move it rapidly from left to right and from right to left in a horizontal plane. For\vard: Extend the arm vertically, and, keeping it ex- tended, lower it to a horizontal position pointing in the direc- tion to be taken. Fours left about: Same as to the rear. - Fours right (left) : Same as by the right (left) flank. 392 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Halt: Extend the arm vertically. A leader habitually halts as he makes the signal of execution. Increase the gait: Alternately raise and lower the hand rapidly between the position as in halt and a position near the shoulder. Except when the leader's example indicates other- wise, an increase of gait of one degree is to be understood. Line: Raise the arm vertically, and, with the arm fully ex- tended, wave well down to the right and left several times swaying and turning the body with the sweep of the arm. Line of platoon columns: Raise the arm as in signaling platoons, carry the elbow several times from right to left across the body. Mass: Extend the arm horizontally to the right and bring the hand repeatedly to the point of the shoulder. Mount: Extend the arm horizontally to the right, palm up- ward, and wave upward several times. Not a preparatory signal unless required to mount in unison in which case the signal will be preceded by attention. Oblique : Extend the arm fully in the direction of the oblique and move the horse in that direction. Platoons: Raise the right elbow to the height of the shoul- der, forearm vertical, hand closed. Platoon mass: Extend the arm horizontally to the right, bring the hand to the shoulder, touching same with the tips of the fingers, and retain the hand in this position for a few seconds. Rally: Describe horizontal circles rapidly about the head, Mdth the arm as nearly extended as possible. Not a prepara- tory signal. Right (left) turn; Right (left) half turn: See Change of direction. Skirmishers: Raise both arms laterally until horizontal. To the rear: Turn and point to the rear, arm horizontal. Troops: Place the hand against the back of the neck, back of the jiand to the rear. Troopers: Raise the arm vertically, extend first finger, other fingers closed. Twos: Raise the arm vertically, extend and separate first and second fingers, other fingers closed. Twos (Troopers) left about: Given when in column of twos or troopers. Same as to the rear. WHISTLE AND BUGLE SIGNALS. 393 WHISTLE SIGNALS. 991. Attention to orders: A short blast of the whistle. This signal is used at drill, on the march, or in combat when neces- sary to fix the attention of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving commands, orders, or signals. When the firing line is firing each section chief suspends firing and fixes his attention at a short blast of his platoon leader's whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are repeated and enforced by the section chief. If a section chief's attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his section, he resumes firing at once. Suspend firing: A long blast of the whistle. All other whistle signals are prohibited. Three types of whistles of different and distinctive tone are furnished as follows : (a) For the squadron group, consisting of the major, squad- ron adjutant, and squadron sergeant major. (&) For the troop commander group, consisting of the cap- tain and two buglers. (c) For the platoon leader group consisting of lieutenants and sergeants. BUGLE SIGNALS. 992. The authorized bugle signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except when such unit is independ- ent, or detached from its regiment. In field service bugle signals must not be employed where likely to convey information of value to the enemy. In dismounted action the bugle signals charge and rally and the signals used to assemble units (par. 996) are employed on the battle field only when intended for the entire firing line ; hence they can be used only by the commander of a unit (for example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section of the battle field. The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on the battle field. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice firing. 394 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. Commence firing: Officers charged with fire direction and control open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the signal is equivalent to fire at will. Cease firing: All parts of the line execute cease firing at once. ALARM CALLS. 993. Fire call: The signal for the men to fall, in without arms to extinguish fire. To arms: The signal for the men to fall in under arms, dis- mounted, on their troop parade grounds as quickly as possible. To horse: The signal for the men to go under arms to their horses, to saddle, mount, and assemble in a designated forma- tion at a designated place as quickly as possible; in extended order formations on foot this signal is used to remount the troops. SEEVICE CALLS. 994. Adjutant's call: The signal for the troops to form squadron, also for the guard details to form on the camp or garrison parade ground for guard mounting; it follows the assembly by such interval as may be prescribed by the com- manding officer. Assembly: The signal for the troops or details to fall in. "' Assembly, adjutant's call, retreat, to the standard, the flour- ishes, and the marches are sounded by all the buglers united. The other service calls, as a rule, are sounded by the bugler of the guard or orderly trumpeter ; he may also sound the assem- bly when the trumpeters are not united. Boots and saddles is the warning that the formation is to be mounted. Where the required formation has also a warning call, as guard mounting or drill, such call precedes boots and saddles; otherwise first call precedes it. Call to quarters is the signal for the men to repair to their qunrters. Church, mess, and fatigue, classed as service calls, may also be used as warning calls. First call is the first signal for formation for roll call on foot. First call, guard mounting, full dress, overcoats, drill, stable, water, and boots and saddles precede the assembly by such in- terval as may be prescribed by the commanding officer. BUGLE CALLS. 395 Full dress or overcoats signal immediately follows first call, guard mounting, or boots and saddles when full dress or the overcoat is to be worn. Guard mounting is the first call for guard mounting. Reveille precedes the assembly for roll call ; retreat follows the assembly, the interval being only that required for forma- tion and roll call, except when there is parade. Taps is the signal for extinguishing lights ; it is usually pre- ceded by call to quarters, with such interval as the command- ing officer may direct. Tattoo is sounded betw^een retreat and call to quarters; 15 minutes thereafter lights in the squad rooms are extinguished. The general is the signal for striliing tents and loading wagons preparatory to marching. To the standard is sounded when the standard salutes. The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, if inarches are played before reveille, it is fired at the commence- ment of the first march. The evening gun is fired at the last note of retreat. Buglers assemble at first call and at guard mounting. UKILL AND FIELD CALLS. 995. The drill and field calls include both the preparatory commands and the command of execution; the last note is the command of execution. When the command is given by bugle the chiefs of sub- divisions give the proper commands orally or by signal; The memorizing of drill signals will be facilitated by observ- ing that all movements to the right are on the ascending chord ; that the corresponding movements to the left are corresponding signals on the descending chord ; that changes of gait are all upon the same note; that captain's (or troop commander's) call is the first two bars of officer's call with the attention added ; and that form rank and posts are the same. In sounding the calls for simultaneous movements the call platoons, troops, or squadrons precedes the preliminary call for the movement. Drill calls are sounded in the same order as the commands are prescribed in the text. Gangway is sounded to clear the way or to warn other troops that a passage is desired. 396 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. List of Bugle Calls. 996. The music for the various calls has corresponding num- bers. ALAEM CALLS. 1. Fire. I 3. To horse. 2. To arms. I SEEVICE CALLS. 4. Adjutant's call. 18. Officers' call. 5. Assembly. 19. Overcoats. 6. Boots and saddles. 20. Recall. 7. Call to quarters. 21. Retreat. 8. Captains' call. 22. Reveille. 9. Church. 23. School. 10. Drill. 24. Sick. 11. Fatigue. 25. Stables. 12. First call. 26. Taps. 13. First sergeant's call. 27. Tattoo. 14. Full dress. 28. The general. 15. Guard mounting. 29. To the standard 16. Issue. 30. Water. 17. Mess. DRILL AND FIELD CALLS. 31. Attention. 32. Cease firing. 33. Charge. 34. Column, march. Column once repeated signifies double column. 35. Column left, march. 36. Column right, march. 37. Commence firing. 3S. Foragers or skirmishers, march. 39. Form rank or posts. 40. Forward, march. 41. Fours left, also by the left flank, march. 42. Fours right, also by the right flank, march. 43. Gallop march. 44. Gangway. 45. Guidons out. 45a. Halt. 46. Left oblique, march. 47. Left turn, march. 48. Line, march. 49. lAne of platoons, march. 50. Platoons. 51. Prepare to dismount, dis- mount. 52. Prepare to mount, mount. 53. Rally. 54-78. Regimental calls. 79. Right oblique, march. 80. Right turn, march. 81. Route order. BUGLE CALLS. 397 DBiLL AND FIELD CALLS — Continued. 82. Squadrons. 83. Squadrons: (a) First squadron. ( & ) Second squadron, (c) Third squadron. 84. To fight on foot. 85. To the rear, or fours left about, march. 86. Troops. 87. Trot, march. 88. Walk, march. MISCELLANEOUS BUGLE CALLS. 89. Flourishes for review. 90o Funeral march. 91. General's march. 92. President's march. 93-102. Quicksteps. THE TWO-ARM SEMAPHORE CODE, WITH HAND FLAGS. General Provisions. 'Attention," followed by call letter as necessary. Both stations then O,' Interval ", repeated three O," "Interval," "A," "Interval 997. To call or answer : of station called. Repeat make " Interval." Repeat last message : times. Repeat after (word) : (word). End of word : " Interval." End of sentence : " Interval," twice repeated. End of message : " Interval," three times repeated. To break in : "Attention." Acknowledgment : " R." Affirmative: "P." Annulling : " N." Attention : See figure in semaphore code. Error: 'A." Interrogatory : " O." Interval : See figure in semaphore code. Negative : " K." " Numerals " (see figures) : Precedes every number sent and indicates numerals until " Interval " is made, after which let- ters recur without further indication. When numerals follow Ifttters, no intervening " Interval " is necessary. 398 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. " Negative," "Affirmative," or " Interrogatory," followed by " Interval,' gives corresponding meaning to the message fol- lowing it. Receiver acknowledges the call "Attention " by signaling " R." Similarly, he acknowledges " Repeat last message." "Repeat after (word)." The "End of message" is so acknowledged when the message is understood. While waiting for "Acknowledgment " or in case of delay, remain at " Interval." Words not in code are spelled out. SPECIAL SIGNALS. Letter signals having special meanings for use in communi- cating between the firing line and the reserve or commander in rear. As far as possible their transmission should be con- cealed from the enemy's view. Letters of alphabet. If signaled from the rear to the firing line. If signaled from the firing line to the rear. AM.. CCC CF... DT... F FL... G.... HHH K.... LT... M.... O.... P.... R.... RN.. RT... sss.. SUF. T.... Ammunition going forward Charge (mandatory at all times) . Cease firing Double time, rush or hurry Commence firing Artillery fire is causing us losses. Move forward , Halt Negative Left Bring up the horses What is the (RN, etc.)? Inter- rogatory. (Ardois and sema- phore only.) What is the (RN, etc.)? Inter- rogatory. (All methods but Ardois and semaphore.) Affirmative Acknowledgment Range RijTht Support going forward Suspend firing Target Ammunition required. Am about to charge if no instruc- tions to contrary. Cease firing. Double time, rush or hurry. - Artillery fire is causing us losses. Preparing to move forward. Halt. Negative. Left. Horses going forward. What is the (RN, etc.)? Inter- rogatory. (Ardois and sema- phore only.) What is the (RN, etc.)? Inter- rogatory. (All methods but Ardois and semaphore.) Affirmative. Acknowledgment. Range. Right. Support needed. Suspend firing. Target. TWO ARM SEMAPHORE CODE. 4" AfftrmortKt Mesotive or Undersiooi Intcrvol Interrtgotory Mumerols Repeat r J^ fi 399 400 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. HINTS FOR MEMORIZING CODE. A to D ; Left arm at " Interval," right arm progresses upward. E to G : Right arm at " Interval," left arm progresses downward. A to G: Complete series, one arm at "Interval." K to N: Right arm inclined 45° downward, left arm pro- gresses downward. P to S : Right arm horizontal, left arm progresses downward. H I and O : Left arm crosses body. W X and Z: Right arm crosses body. Opposite letters A and G, B and F, C and E, H and Z, I and X, J and P, K and V, O and W, M and S, Q and Y : The numerals are the first 10 letters in order. Appendix A, BUGLE CALLS. ALARMS. 1. FIRE. QfrtcXr. /-s feMfaJ3tefc^£ jUlLagt i ■*-?- D^ 1 E Bepeat at VDxtL ^^ ^ I 2. TO ARMS. m^m. E ^ Repeal at witt. 3. TO HORSE. ^^^^^^ 3S218 '—18 26 401 i02 Qu^ti CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIOITS. SERVICE CALLS. 4. ADJUTANT'S CALL. ■f^^^^^ 5. ASSEMBLY. Moderate. Quick. 6. BOOTS AND SADDLES. 7. CALL TO QUARTERS. Slow. APPENDIX A. 403 8. CAPTAIN'S CALL. 9. CHURCH. ^S ^ Ft^ ^if^^^^^^ ;i=;it s^ it=a: -^~ft- t=^ m 10. DRILL. QuttAr. Quick. 11. FATIGUE. 8 fe£ ^ VP?=P»: -^ % § ^ , ^ ^ mimJ — i*^ F — j- i H ' 1 — ^?^+-?= =?=T= :t y --^ ^ ^5^-3 404 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 13. FIRST CALL. Quick, ^ m ^-^-^-#-#- i^^^s inw^^j^ 13. FIRST SERGEANT'S CALL. QuicL 8 ^^ 8 ^^ QuieX;, 14. FULL DRESS. 15. GUARD MOUNTING. Quick. -^^ i|^^^^ i Allegro. 5L=r APPENDIX A. 16. ISSUE. 409 Et :1=^ t !=«: /TS. i^j-"-^ mrrr=^ 17. MESS. Qui^ ^ -# ^ ?r=^qgz#r^zq: i — I- t3 I t^t ^ Bz^f^^ 18. OFFICER'S CALL. QuicJe. Lifc ^ fi — ! j j ^ ! i— - - r^ i — ■ "■ ■ I j - -- 1" « ^, I t ' 19. OVERCOATS. #1Tt-^-lcJ f=P3^ 406 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 20. RECALL. 21. RETREAT. Modifraie, pf^ i r i cda^pj ^ ^ S^Sfl^^flB^f^^ i ^ ^^ 'M J3U ^^^ ^s^i^^^ APPENDIX A. RETREAT — Continued. 407 ^^S^^ 1^^ ^^^g^^^l^^ Quich 22. REVEILLE. ^tPw i c^fd^-j ^ ^ ^ End . D.a mmm-m^^ ^ 108 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 23. SCHOOL. ^ fe=t£^ -*-^i*: iiitit: 3=;^ ^# r v- iT^ 24. SICK. Qtttct. 25. STABLE. Slovf* Bi^i^s m ^ APPENDIX A. 26. TAPS. 409 ^m 1=^ f g^^L-ll^ f r\ T=f^ I -^ 27. TATTOO. QMicfc. s^^3i:^^ -r g_i i-H7^4^ EEfEE; N-^-T-^-j^-H.-- gp^^^ ^?^^ S ^^ ^gl j ^t r^. ^~. E^EfEtEE? :::ije:— ■:$ Zj L«-^ -^ »_j- q=^ fe^Et^^ -^a — ^=^^^^1%=^^ aio CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS TATTOO — Continued. * -0 ' -f-H .^«H«- E^HE ti ^ . " > -«w » & t=t: -# — ^ ^ t^^^CT^ ^ — •-=-#-#- :i=P ^=^T-f1^^ gj < wrf n APPENDIX A. 411 TATTOO — Continued. i 5=j± *-T- ^->. ^a ^.-a-s ^a^ *ss s CE j •-!-* u Cj ' ^^^^^^^H^f^g^^j^r P5t ?s; i i^^^^^^ ^ is=^ ^ 3CZ3E ^ ^ — ^i /CN =i8=?PE 2=P=p: -hsih ^ I t=t: ^-^ 112 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. TATTOO — Continued. 3==f^ ^5— s: ^^^ P^ -J—?- 1^^ :x=5=:q^ 28. THE GENERAL. 4 — I — b.^ I I I ■ I I I — tata^-H — I 1 — ^ ^—f-^-ft-f-f-g-^ -^_^-^-/r:|g-^ — ^-H- =^ rr~^~^^ ^— * ^^:£B^?E^^^ ?^=^=^-^ APPENDIX A. 29. TO THE STANDARD. 418 QuieJi iime. #-i-^ -^-ML f f^ ^ :-^px; -#-^#- ■r ^ :i^ IpiTC t=#i#: H«-^ ■t— 3- :^=^ ts £b(f. i -^— ==> .0 ..-^. # f f . . ^ D.C. sjTrgj 30. WATERc f> ^ ^ , ^ , ^fefe* y ^^^ ra M -f — ^ DRILL AND FIELD CALLS. 31. ATTENTION. EEE 114 CAVALRY BRILL REGULATIONS. 32. CEASE FIRING. Quick. 33. CHARGE. Qukh. Pi^^^^s^^ 34. Column, MARCH. w J.=.90 S ^ ^ 35. Column left, mow. j|3^ MARCH. s 36. Column right, MARCH. !Slow. ^^^m i Qutek, 37. COMMENCE TIRING. 1=^ :5=tc ^ APPEITDIX A. 415 ^S 38. Foragers or Skirmishers, MARCH. K-— ^ ^§ f 39. FORM RANK OB POSTS. ^3 gS 40. Forward, MARCH. _ tSlow. ^ ^ -^ ^^ 41. Fours left; also by the left flank; MARCH. Moderate. m ^^1 42. Fours right; also by the right flank; MARCH. Moderate. ^^ 43. Gallop, MARCH. ^ Z^.-^.- \ 'Q^ 416 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 44. GANGWAY. J=138 a ^^ ^ m 45. GUIDONS OUT. 45a. HALT. i^lU lU jl 14 \ ^U' I ^ 46. Left oblique, MARCH. Slow. ^ ^^ 47. Left turn, MARCH. 3 48. Line, MARCH. J = 100 Quick. APPENDIX A. 49. Line of platoons, MARCH. ML 417 £6^=^^ ^^m 50. PLATOONS. Quick. tte^EfeM 51. Prepare to dismount, DISMOUNT. _^_tf__=5v ■A— ^m. 51=;^^ 52. Prepare to mount, MOUNT. /TS E^:^a3^s^-E Si^ES^ ii 53. RALLY. Slow. WfTf^^ mm m /T\ ^^^^-=^tT^ 38218 °— 18 27 418 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 54. FIRST CAVALRY. i J^Mi 1 ip ^ * ^^ 55. SECOND CAVALRY. 56. THIRD CAVALRY. irrrirrrlr-f l ffl I r I 57. FOURTH CAVALRY. LthL^u^ivln^.^^ 58. FIFTH CAVALRY. ^Ji rn'n i.^jL ^^ APPENDIX A. 59. SIXTH CAVALRY. 419 Kn.120 /jgj T 3i i«^^lini^ * i -2^ lijiiriTi 3 60. SEVENTH CAVALRY. ^rJIfQ l r' ■Mr[> l r.v I 61. EIGHTH CAVALRY. i ^^m 2 S -»TT ^ ^ 62. NINTH CAVALRY. I i 63. TENTH CAVALRY. J = 128 ^M 420 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 64. ELEVENTH CAVALRY. i J. = 120 a J^l r^ r r^m r^J L^tLfir'i't 65. TWELFTH CAVALRY. ^r;/ l V.jl:.il. i '.T,rif r 66. THIRTEENTH CAVALRY. fe^TJjU^JlTJIaliltj'^ I 67. EOURTEENTH CAVALRY. Lively 68. FIFTEENTH CAVALRY. J =136 t j:il r P ^S v# I APPENDIX A. 69. SIXTEENTH CAVALRY. 421 i w m 70. SEVENTEENTH CAVALRY. 5 I S 71. EIGHTEENTH CAVALRY. I 72. NINETEENTH CAVALRY. i m 73. TWENTIETH CAVALRY. 422 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 74. TWENTY-FIRST CAVALRY. iij^^ 75. TWENTY-SECOND CAVALRY. ¥ 76. TWENTY-THIRD CAVALRY. I 77. TWENTY-FOURTH CAVALRY. ^ i 78. TWENTY-FIFTH CAVALRY. APPENDIX A. 79. Right oblique, MARCH. Slow. g— r^-f: :fe^ 80. Right turn, MARCH. Moderate. 3 4 a -J-0- ltZ^=M: -ft-M-M- i ^ 81. ROUTE ORDER. 9 ^ i- Mr 1 4 P^ 82. SQUADRONS. Moderate. a: 83. SQUADRON CALLS. f^ne.) § r r f ^ r r [=?^^^ ^ 1^0 r * . f -f- -^ =F ip=y ^ U^ f - If -+ ^ *.>j (Three.) . ^ F^^i^'^ 1* 1* ^ ^ t&'^LL d=^ ^ •^ -4-^-^4^= ^ 424 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 84. TO FIGHT ON FOOT. 85. To the rear, MARCH, or Fours left about, MARCH. g=t ULj"!^ rir. 86. TROOPS Quick. fei^ ^^ Quick, ■t — 87. Trot, MARCH. *^ '[:f~*-rf-r =^ i 88. Walk, MARCH. bm=t m MISCELLANEOUS BUGLE CALLS. 89. THE FLOURISH. /7\ APPENDIX A. 90. FUNEBAL MARCH. 425 Very slow. 426 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. 91. GENERAL'S MARCH. QUicJ: time. 92. PRESIDENT'S MARCH. Quick time. m- ^ y . ^ -^ :•*— ^4- t=#: i:^^^^,^ feE ^ r f-^ ^ B ?z: :r s 1 ^ APPENDIX A. 427 QUICKSTEPS. 93. QUICKSTEP NO, 1. Quick' --2-^ ^ ^ \ P T^--W=^^ ^^i^^^s^^ ^ — End. m m^^ss - -^-!H^ w^rw- ^m #-ML ^ f f f f . . ^m t=i #.i.^ i End. ?^ s s # — «- ^ ' Lj l| -*-^bp ^ P=!KiC 428 $ CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. QUICKSTEP NO. 1 — Continued. ■#-- ^ ^s^^ m End. fe ^^ ^g^ -^ #— ^ -^-r- i 94. QUICKSTEP NO. 2. ^ 95. QUICKSTEP NO. 3. t=w: W=s: m -m-^ #iip=zxz? jl[4„]^_l4-g ^ f-f^'..i-Uf TfTJt^HZJKZZ^ APPENDIX A. QUICKSTEP NO. 3 — Continued. 429 i^ -W—h ^t^zf=-2 ^ — n- 96. QUICKSTEP NO. 4. ^-^ ig ^ ms ^ ^ -Yi/^i/-A/-!-'/ ^ 1 I 2 ^ I 1 I ' ■= - ^^^^^^^s^S #^f-u-l *- ^ ^Ei:^ =E ?e:§: ^^ •^^ 2 >f ^f 97. QUICKSTEP NO. 5. 430 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. QUICKSTEP NO. 5 — Continued. ^xaximam ^ m tf ^1^^^ 98. QUICKSTEP NO. 6. ^^^feE^fi^^ r+-T— * -^-zsr-fS=S ^^^^-^ i lass mu^j-u -f-?^ f^. ]— H-V--' tS±Ei3:t; m I— i 1^2- f-^^-f-^F^ ^S 23 -?-?- ■t-»^^»- 99. QUICKSTEP NO. 7. 'f-j^ Hl=f ^ ^ APPENDIX A. QUICKSTEP NO. 7 — Continued. 431 ^ ^B^m^s&f^iEm^p^ 100. QUICKSTEP NO. 8. r Trumpet. fe^-^ ^^^^ I C Crook. ■^^ m 3=f^ ^=.. ^ I y 7 ^ ^^ir-^ ^ ■^ •=q=? 3^ ■*-#- f P r- ^ -,tzr=t=zt^ ^-^ -^^--5-^f: ^ 5i=tH*= ^^Ff^ -ttr>> 1 ?r-^Tt LP - 1 VqI - 1 ir I' "V "\ pi^^pJT- 432 CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. QUICKSTEP NO. 8 — Continued. Second time. End. ^M SF^=JE m E?±Eifc±*it:ttJ fc==t=sfe -^ . l^.r i-#^ *-^ i-M- i /)a Oapo. ■^B_i__i gfegE N=^^=M=^ ^^^ $ .^Lf^gJU -«— ?- tz± 101. QUICKSTEP NO. 9. FTecmpet. C Ckook. I t^-«- -# ^ » ^ i:nd ^^i APPENDIX A. 438 QUICKSTEP NO. 9— Continued. #„J i^^^ ^ i t^^-=^ ±=m: ^ f-r-rf±-r f ■^—^-^ ^#^1 f'1^^ ^ ft— ft ^ ^ i)rt C5i;w. ^m ?s: gfl— --4 :{S21S "—IS 2J H^ CAVALRY DRitt iiB(JTJLATI01TS. 102. QUICKSTEP NO. 10. QuicJc. FTbttmpet. P C Cbook. ,rV f - ^ r — — f S^-^7- ADDITIONAL COPIES OF THIS PUULTCATION MAY BK PROCURED FROM THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE "WASHINGTON, D. C. AT £0 CENTS PER COPY V Webster Family Library of Veterinary IVieclicine Cummings School of Veterinary Medicine at Tufts University 200 Westboro Road North Grafton, MA 01536 ■«^«fc>